JP7144072B2 - playground - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) and an enclosed game machine.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, obstacles that change the direction in which game balls fall, and prize-winning openings, start-up openings, variable winning openings, etc. that allow game balls to win are provided in the game area of the game board. Common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1, etc.).

In addition, some of these game machines are provided with decorations.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-200302

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in decorations.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic decoration.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object is
a light-emitting substrate on which light-emitting elements are mounted;
a decoration having a three-dimensional shape;
A game machine comprising
The decorative body has a transparent part (hereinafter referred to as "first part") that transmits light from the light emitting element,
The decorative body has a second portion different from the first portion,
The second portion is a portion surrounding the first portion,
The decorative body is affixed to a member arranged on the rear side of the first portion without blocking light from the light emitting element ,
The member is arranged on the rear side of the second portion,
The member is an optical member,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic decoration.

1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp substrate arranged on the game board. It is the figure which represented. It is a figure explaining the structure of a variable winning device. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) An example of a decoration pattern is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display pattern of a normal figure. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a normal figure propriety determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a special figure 1/2 propriety determination table, (c) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the distribution table for special figure determination, (d) is a figure explaining the specification of idle time (b time reduction state). It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller main processing, (b) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing It is a flowchart and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller main processing, (b) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing It is a flowchart and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a character ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the object for special figures 1, and the prefetch result storage part for special figures 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big win end performance, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the setting suggestion performance selection table at the time of the first big win end performance, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting suggestive ball selection table before play time, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting suggestive ball selection table after play time. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a losing variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a big hit variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation regarding a decorative-design variable display centering on the decorative-design display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 19 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 18. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation in a big-hit game centering on a decorative design display device in steps. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of display of information on idle time when power is turned on; 21. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production|presentation shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation concerning the decorative-symbol fluctuation display after the completion of the normal big-hit game centering on the decorative-symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation concerning the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display in the revival mode centering on a decorative-design display apparatus in steps. 21. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production|presentation shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation concerning the decorative-design fluctuation|variation display in a sudden time-saving state centering on a decorative-design display apparatus in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation concerning a decorative-designs fluctuation display in the case of shifting to play time suddenly during a time saving state centering on a decorative-designs display apparatus in steps. It is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of winning suddenly in a short time in the pattern variation display of the number of times of fitting that shifts to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows a mode that an example of setting suggestion production|presentation is performed in the jackpot game end production|presentation centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure which shows a mode that an example of setting suggestion production|presentation centering on a decorative pattern display apparatus is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation including the information which shifts to play time centering on a decorative pattern display step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation including the information which shifts to play time centering on a decorative pattern display step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the look-ahead advance notice production performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation including the information which shifts to play time centering on a decorative pattern display step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the look-ahead advance notice production performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the effect|effect of the mini-game performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the notice production performed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied; FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player's side); FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a gaming machine according to a modification of the present invention, (a) showing a casino machine 2000, (b) showing a mobile phone 3000 equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, (d) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention; (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for implementing the present invention. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is the figure which represented. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. Examples of display patterns of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a special pattern 2, and (c) shows a decorative pattern. An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a normal design. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging the suitability of a normal figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging special figures 1 and 2, and (c) is a special figure determination FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of an application distribution table; It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller main processing, (b) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing It is a flowchart and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-controller main processing, (b) is the second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing 4 is a flow chart, where (c) is a flow chart of a second sub-controller timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flow chart of a second sub-controller image control process; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a character ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation centering on the decorative design display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. FIG. It is a figure which shows the decoration with which the 2nd production|presentation movable body 8 is provided. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the ready-to-win title are related. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect; It is a figure which shows step by step an example of the production|presentation which the display mode of a pending|holding icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped production|presentation lamp 206 are related, and super reach is performed. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation which the display mode of a pending|holding icon and the display mode of the decoration with which the 2nd production|effect movable body 8 is related is related. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 operates. (a) is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a light emission color determination table of a light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing a lord's kimono color determination table. . 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player's side); FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. An example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special pattern 2, and (c) is a decoration. An example of a design is shown, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a normal design stop display design. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt 3 is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-controller image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a character ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (a) is a table summarizing the types of big wins and game states after the big win game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which the time saving game state ended a little before the time saving game state ended and shifted to the non time saving game state. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73; FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 74 ; FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75; It is a figure which shows in steps an example in which there is no pullback period. (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not met, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected when a predetermined condition is met. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of songs to be selected after a predetermined condition is met even once; FIG. 74 is a diagram showing stepwise an example different from the example shown in FIG. 73, continuing from FIG. 73(h); It is a diagram showing in stages an example in which the first pending icon h21 of the pending icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the last special figure symbol variation display capable of maintaining the time saving gaming state is completed is in a golden display mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which operates the operation key unit 190 during the big-hit game started without predetermined conditions being satisfied. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player's side); FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 86 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 85 viewed from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front, (b) is an enlarged view of the main control lamp board 207, and (c) is a cover plate 231 of the special 1 starting chucker 23. It is a figure which shows a mode that looked into the back side of this from diagonally lower right. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a state in which a lower right transparent plate 2591, an upper right transparent plate 2592, and a left transparent plate 2691 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 87; It is a perspective view when the rotor unit 28 is seen from the back side of the game board. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a rotor unit 28 shown in FIG. 89; It is a figure which shows the state of the electric distribution unit 26, and the state of the rotating body unit 28. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball as a result of hitting to the left. It is a figure which shows the example of the game description displayed on the decorative design display device 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the game explanation displayed on the decorative design display device 208. FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIG. 92; FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIG. 92; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the third spherical direction changing portion 263 and the first spherical direction changing portion 261; It is a figure which shows the example by which the distribution front area|region 125 was changed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the upstream portion of the third ball path 2603 in the electric sorting unit 26 is changed; (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view when the third ball path 2603 is cross sectioned in the vertical direction, and (b) is the third ball path 2603 when the inlet 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is horizontally cross sectioned. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional shape of. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged side view of the third ball path 2603 taken vertically. It is a figure which shows the process until a game ball enters the general prize-winning mouth 227 provided in the middle of the 3rd ball course 2603, and the state that it was not able to enter. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the third ball path 2603, and is a cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603 taken vertically, the left side of the paper surface is the front side, and the right side of the paper surface is the rear side. It is a diagram showing another example in which a game ball entrance opening toward the rear side (back side) is provided in the middle of the ball path. After moving the game ball in the lateral direction in the middle of the ball path, it is a diagram showing an example in which the game ball enters the game ball entrance opening toward the rear side (back side).

(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream ball delaying portion 2653 and the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 taken along a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and (b) is a game in the second upstream ball delaying portion 2653. It is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the ball, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, (d) is a diagram showing the game passing through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a trajectory of a sphere; FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 as seen obliquely from above; FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a modification of the ball delay section; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266; It shows a state in which various members overlapping the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 are removed from the game board 200. It is a diagram. 111 is a diagram showing a state in which the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 and the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a single first stereoscopic film effect body 271; It is a perspective view when the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 is seen slightly from the right side. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stereoscopic part 2712 of a first stereoscopic film effect body 271 is fixed to a mounting portion 2723 of a second stereoscopic film effect body 272; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of a third stereoscopic film effect body 273; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an LED board attached to a frame plate; FIG. 14 shows each lens mounting base mounted on each LED board 2772-2774. FIG. 11 shows each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762-2764. FIG. 4 is a schematic configuration diagram of an attacker unit 25'; FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining countermeasures against rebounding of game balls that have fallen down the drop path FR. A ball passage unit BU formed with an out-hole back ball passage 2451, a general prize-winning back ball passage 2261, and a confluence back ball passage JR shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the formed ball passage formation member BP. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing each of the ball passage unit BU, the ball passage forming member BP, the light emitting substrate LEB, and the light guide plate LGP; It is a figure which shows a part of left side area|region of the game area|regions 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the flow of game balls as a result of hitting left in the example shown in FIG. 123. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion between a downstream end Rt1e of a first ball route Rt1 and an out port 240; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation movable body unit which becomes an example. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. (a) is an external perspective view of a handle unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit. 8 is a diagram showing a dial 86; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the ball joint structure of the dial 86 and the transmission gear 842, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the transmission gear 842 and the volume gear 843 as seen from the front side. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a connection structure between a dial 86 and a handle base 82; FIG. (a) is a view (front view) of the glass frame unit as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is a view (rear view) of the glass frame unit as seen from the rear side. (a) is a view (front view) of the front side transparent plate member FG as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is a view of the rear side transparent plate member BG as viewed from the front side transparent plate of (a). It is a view (front view) seen from the front side (player's side) like the member FG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game board was seen over the glass frame unit GU. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the rear transparent plate member BG around the unwrapped left end portion BGL; It is a schematic diagram of the front frame door 106 and the ball storage tray door 108 as seen from the back side. It is the side view which showed typically the ball guide passage PAS and the ball extraction passage BRC. (a) is a schematic diagram of the door 108 with a ball storage tray showing the door for maintenance, and (b) is a single finger operation to remove the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitting portion 1083. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a flow; It is a schematic diagram which shows a mode that window part MD1 opened 90 degrees or more. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied; FIG.

1 to 40, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 40 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 40, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

<Overall composition>
First, using FIG. 1, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. This figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a launcher. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the side of the player).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided at a game machine installation office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk (amusement parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of being opened and closed with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Also provided is a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate has an upper plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball ejection button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in a lower tray 128 by operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a game board for discharging game balls guided to a launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball shooting handle 134 to be shot to a game area 124, a performance button 136 for changing the performance mode of various performance devices by the player's operation, and a chance button lamp built in the performance button 136 and causing the performance button 136 to emit light. 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game parlor, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, A ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit is provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of launching means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 . Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted from FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as seen from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 and is used to temporarily store game balls, is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the game balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). A game ball that has passed through this payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches an upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the condition for giving is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, there is a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 5) that controls the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs the control processing related to the performance, the first sub-controller 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to performance, a payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. (see FIG. 5), a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 5) for controlling the launch of game balls. ), a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 5) that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192 , a setting change button 194 and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 . In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set in a setting change mode. can move to In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 12A, the character ratio/setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit 7-segment LED on the right side. , the character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display device 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162 . Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is called the right when viewed from the front. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side is sometimes referred to as the upper side, and the lower side is sometimes referred to as the lower side. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be called the front or front, and the far side may be called the back or rear.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on its front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201 . The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201 . When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, it is possible to carry out error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop to disable the continuation of the game, etc.). The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . Below the game area 124, a main control lamp board 254 is provided, and as shown in FIG. A display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reservation lamp 216, a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, a second special symbol reservation lamp 220, a high accuracy lamp RK, and an electric sapo lamp. RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round indicator lamp RR are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal design may be referred to as "general figure" and the special design may be referred to as "special figure".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and a performance display region 208d. The and right design display areas 208c display different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The normal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and is configured by two LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by two LEDs in this embodiment.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games that are reserved (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation game is held to a predetermined number (eg, four) making it possible to The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). making it possible.

Further, the high-probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state. The electric sapot middle lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shortened and that the electric sapot state is such that the blade member 232a of the electric tulip described later is likely to be open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, and an electric support state, and is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state in which he/she can benefit from right-handed hitting. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

Around the decorative pattern display device 208, predetermined ball entrances, for example, general prize winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal figure start opening 228, a first special figure start opening 230, and a jackpot generation gate 252 are arranged. Also, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124 .

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226 a and 226 b are provided at appropriate locations in the game area 124 . Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is called a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged in the variable winning device 2340 is called a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a, 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning openings 226a, 226b have won, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) is detected. are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these constructions, prize balls are paid out to the player based on winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning holes are provided, a different ball detection sensor may be used to detect the entering ball, or each of the plurality of general winning holes may be entered. The ball passages for guiding the hit game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning holes are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entering game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. Balls entered into the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is configured with a device for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, called a gate or through chucker, and is located on the right side of the game board 200 in this embodiment. One is placed in the Unlike the balls that have entered the normal prize openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the normal figure start opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) In addition to paying out the winning balls, the entering game balls may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 .

The first special figure starting port 230 is arranged in the central lower part of the game board 200 in this embodiment. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are placed on the upper tray 126 as prize balls. Along with discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entered into the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. And, in this embodiment, the specification to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such specifications may be called a "special 2 priority variation machine" etc.) And It is This first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region whose size does not change.

The second special figure starting port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), and is arranged only one below the first special figure starting port 230, and has a blade member 232a that can be freely opened and closed to the left and right. When 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the normal pattern variation game is won and the normal pattern display device 210 stops displaying the winning pattern, the blade member 232a is displayed at predetermined time intervals and predetermined times. Open and close. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. Along with that, the special figure fluctuation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. A ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal pattern starting port 228 (by a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the normal pattern starting port 228 when hitting to the left. . Therefore, as a general rule, there is no winning in the normal figure variation game during left-handed hitting, and therefore, as a general rule, the blade member 232a is not opened or closed. On the other hand, when hitting to the right, it is possible to expect the game ball to enter the normal figure starting port 228, so that the normal figure fluctuation game may be won and the blade member 232a may open and close. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting right.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable winning device 2340. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 4, the decoration member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340. As shown in FIG.

The variable winning device 2340 is, for example, made of a flat plate, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a with a predetermined gap. there is

The attachment base 2340a has a rectangular opening in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by a drive circuit 334 . In this embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning hole 234a, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. A ball that enters the first variable winning hole 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

A second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, a top surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e standing rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decorative member 2340b has a wall surface that forms a first rolling area SP1 and a second rolling area SP2 in which the game ball can roll, and the open portion behind it is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The first rolling region SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-like shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be movable back and forth in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slanted slightly downward toward the front and slanted from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in this embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state (closed state) advanced forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling area SP1 is closed, and the first rolling area of the game ball is closed. When the entry into the rolling area SP1 is blocked and it is in a backward retreated state (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened, and the game ball moves to the first rolling area SP1. entry is allowed. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i protrude rearward at approximately equal intervals on the rear surface of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by making it collide with the game ball rolling on 2351a, and the staying time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is lengthened. In this embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be changed to the second variable at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short period of time (for example, 0.06 seconds). In some cases, the ball can enter the winning hole 235a. Further, in this embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is located on the rear surface of the decorative member 2340b, the player cannot visually recognize the shutter member 2351a.

At a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged, and enters the first rolling area SP1. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322 . In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning to the second variable winning port 235a, and the number based on the winning (for example, 15) ) to pay out prize balls. In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable prize opening 235a is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable prize opening 234a, various game characteristics are provided. sometimes it is possible. The number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234a and the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game balls enter the second variable winning hole 235a may be the same.

A game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h passes through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The ejected ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322 . In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the game ball has passed through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of game balls passing through the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passing through the discharge ball detection switch SW3 allow the game ball to enter or exit the second variable winning port 235a. By monitoring outs, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Unfair acts include, for example, the act of using a ball with string or a game ball larger in size than the regulation (so-called deca ball).

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with the intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The shot mallet is passed through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124.例文帳に追加Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc. Second variable winning opening 235 a) or starting opening (first special starting opening 230, second special starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or normal drawing start Out port 240 is reached only through port 228 . In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed in the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of a game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104 . Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received in this discharged ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

In addition, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged in the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each rendering device 4, a rendering device 5, which will be described later, is arranged. In this embodiment, they are supported by body 104 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a are in a closed state, and game balls cannot enter. It is sufficient if it is difficult for game balls to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted. , a payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. there is

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the main control section 300 as a whole. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit contains two counters). is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302. FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a predetermined pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general figure display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, Normal figure holding lamp 216, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high probability medium lamp RK, electric sapo medium lamp RD, right hitting lamp RM, round display lamp RR etc.) for display control A drive circuit 330, a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, and a door of the first variable prize winning port 234a as a special electric accessory A driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including driving means for driving the member 2341a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 .

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1. memorize to Also, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing Latch and store the latched value in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to Special Figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply. is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main control section main processing, which will be described later, is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with 1 sub control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. good too.

Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main controller 300 . The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Also, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402 . The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp driving circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452 . Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 .

In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a driving circuit 422 for driving and controlling the production devices 2 to 5, etc., and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (video display processor) that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. 516 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, image display data, and the like. In this embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of retaining the storage state even when power is cut off. As a result, for example, information for displaying a display relating to the history of big hits can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. A RAM in which stored information volatilizes when power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and provides prize balls or ball rental based on control signals output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of has been completed. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606 . In addition, the payout control unit 600 provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Rental ball information or the like indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600 . The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. These sensors detect when 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300 .

The shooting control unit 630 outputs a control signal that instructs the permission or stop of shooting, which is output by the payout control unit 600, and the operation of the ball shooting handle 134 by the player, which is output by a shooting intensity output circuit provided in the ball shooting handle 134. A firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and a ball feeding device 634 that feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled based on the control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. I will explain the types of Toku-zu and Universal-zu.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start opening 232. The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on the condition that the second start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been thrown. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks some lamps of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) "Special figure 1 Variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks some lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) of the eight lamps. 2 variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop pattern mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time decided before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 , the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "special figure 1 or 2 variable display" to the stop display of the special figure 1 or 2 stop design mode may be referred to as special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in succession.

FIG. 6(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. In FIG. 6(a), six kinds of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure F" are shown. In FIG. 6(a), the outline parts in the drawing indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure D”) are prepared as special figure stop symbol modes. The "special figure A" is a normal big win pattern for 5 rounds (R), and when the "special figure A" is stop-displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the big win is won. After the game is over, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a time saving state"). In addition, "special figure B" is a 5R probability variable big winning pattern, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big winning game state in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and the big winning game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure C" is a 10R probability variable big hit pattern, and when "special figure C" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big win game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big win game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure D" is a 2R probability variable big winning pattern, and when "special figure D" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big winning game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big winning game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "latent certainty state"). The opening time of the second variable winning hole 235a in the case of a "special figure D" jackpot is as short as 0.2 seconds per 1R, and the jackpot is a jackpot in which no balls can be expected. In this embodiment, four types of jackpot patterns are prepared, but it goes without saying that one type, two types, three types, or five or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared. . Also, a small winning pattern may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, determination of whether or not there is a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether to make a normal big win or a probability variable big win is made by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special variable game is high (variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state with a high probability of winning this jackpot is called a special high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is a special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where it shifts to a time saving state (electrical support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state, such as by shortening the time from the end of the jackpot in the special variable game to the start of the next jackpot. refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is called the normal high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "normal high probability change"), and the state that is not in the time saving state is called the normal low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric sapo state" is the state related to the general map, and the "time saving state" is the state related to the special map or the state related to the general map and the special map. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric sapo state and is in a normal state with high probability. In the general pattern high probability state, it becomes easier to win the general pattern variation game than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it will always be lost) in the general pattern low probability state (non-electrical sapo state), whereas the general pattern high probability state (electrical sapo state ) rises to 100/100 (ie, always wins). In addition, in the electric sapo state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric sapo state (normal figure variable short). For example, in the non-electrical support state, the variation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Also, in the electric sapo state, compared to the non-electric sapo state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew open period). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electrical support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric sapo state, the blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the non-electric sapo state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-electric sapo state per winning to the normal figure start port 228, opens twice in the electric sapo state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, close again for 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. In addition, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-electric support state is maintained. Also, in this embodiment, in the electric sapo state (time saving state), all of the normal map fixed change, normal map variable short, electric chew open period extension, and electric chew open number increase are performed, but at least of these If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage becomes high, and an electric support state (time saving state) may be established. Alternatively, if the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases, and either one of the extension of the electric chew open period or the increase in the number of electric chew openings is performed, the electric sapo state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrical support state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which game balls are easy to enter. This special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state for a long period of time in the electric sapo state than in the non-electric sapo state. In this embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stop-displayed, the power support state (a time saving state) is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game performed after that, and 101 In the second time, it will shift to a non-electric sapo state (low-probability normal state). On the other hand, when a jackpot without electric support (for example, "special figure D") is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished. Further, when "special figure B" or "special figure C" is stop-displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the "special figure D" is stop-displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is finished.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a sudden time-saving symbol that shifts to an electric sapo state without transitioning to a big hit. "Special figure E" is suddenly a time saving pattern. In this embodiment, when the "special figure E" is displayed and shifts to the electric support state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "c time saving state"), the electric support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 30 times. It is maintained, and at the 31st time, it shifts to a non-electric support state (low probability state of normal pattern). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure E" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the state is shifted to the c time saving state regardless of the game state before the symbol is stopped. When "Figure E" is stopped and displayed, the game state before the symbol stop may be continued without shifting to the c time saving state. In addition, a plurality of types of sudden time-saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of times of pattern fluctuation display in which the electric sapo state is maintained may be different depending on the pattern. The number of times (for example, 1200 times) may be greater than the number of times of symbol variation display (950 times) in which the play time is maintained.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure F" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. In this FIG. 6(b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures among them are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure e"). Figure c”). The ``special figure a'' is a 5R normal big win pattern, and when the ``special figure a'' is stop-displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the big win game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure a" is stop-displayed, after the jackpot game performed thereafter, the power support state (shorter time a) is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 100 times, and the 101st time , it shifts to a non-electric sapo state (low-probability normal state). In addition, the number of times of symbol variation display in the electric sapo state that transitions to the special figure 1 and the number of symbol variation displays in the electric sapo state that transitions to the special figure 2 may be different, for example, special It is set so that the number of times of pattern fluctuation display in the electric sapo state is greater when the special figure 2 hits and shifts to the electric sapo state than when the big hit in Figure 1 and shifts to the electric sapo state. can be set to less. In addition, the "special figure b" is a 5R probability variable big winning pattern, and when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big winning game state in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and the big winning game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, the "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit pattern, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big win game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big win game is performed. After the end, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

Further, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol ("special symbol d") is prepared as a small winning symbol in addition to the big winning symbol. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is opened 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. That is, when a small hit is made with the "special figure d", a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second variable winning hole 235a, and a large number of balls can be obtained. The open time and the number of times the shutter member 2351a is opened can be appropriately set. Also, the number of small winning symbols may be two or more. In addition, in the small winning game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable winning hole 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is obtained, a small The winning game ends, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state before the start of the small win game is restored.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous variation machine, when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and shifts to a small winning game, the situation where the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable display can occur. . In this case, when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit, the variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small winning game related to the small win ends, the variable display of the special figure 1 is resumed. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable display, and when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 1 is variablely displayed. A certain situation can occur in the middle, but in this case, if one of the special symbols becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the wrong result is displayed. It will happen.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 kinds of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". That the ball entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 or the special figure 2 starting opening 232, that is, the first starting opening sensor detected that the ball entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, or the special figure 2 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting port 232, each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208 is displayed. "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → "Decoration" "Variation display of patterns" may be performed. That is, the decorative design display device 208 variably displays the decorative design separately from the first special design display device 212 and the second special design display device 214 . Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the non-electric sapo state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state or special figure high probability general figure low probability state) in which special figure 1 is mainly displayed, variation of special figure 1 The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the display, and the special figure 2 is mainly displayed in a variable display. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the variable display of FIG. On the other hand, in the non-electric support state, even if the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, and the symbol variable display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214 described later. , In the electric sapo state, even if the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, and the symbol variable display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the first special figure display device 212.

When notifying the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 10R probability variable jackpot with the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbols with the same even number are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot with the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and a combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns with the same odd number other than "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 5”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 confirms the 10R probability variation jackpot, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c include "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7- "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the sudden time-saving pattern of "special figure E" is notified, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" are stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Also, in the case of notifying any of the 2R probability variable big hit pattern of "special figure D", the small hit pattern of "special figure d", and the losing pattern of "special figure F" or "special figure e", the pattern display area In 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols other than the combinations of decorative symbols described above (for example, loose stitches) are stop-displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative design variable display" to the stop display of the decorative design stop design mode will be referred to as the decorative design variable display ("decorative design variable display"). There is also.) The variable display of decorative patterns is controlled by the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 6(d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal pattern: "normal pattern A", which is a winning pattern, and "normal pattern B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the normal map display device 210 alternately lights the two LEDs arranged vertically. Variation display” (normal figure variation game) is performed. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the winning pattern "normal pattern A" and the losing pattern "normal pattern B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6(d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variable display of the normal pattern" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern may be referred to as the variable display of the normal pattern.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random number, a special figure electric sapo decision random number, a special figure design random number, and the like. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the reserved number of special figures, the special figure winning random number, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area that stores the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the start information for special figures divided into areas of the maximum number (in this example, 4 special figures 1 and 2 special figures) that can hold the start of the success/failure determination (lottery) A storage unit is provided, and a random number storage area for normal maps is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in order of winning (reservation order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 detects the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it monitors whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), step Proceed to S107. Even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process (to be described later) in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The output port to the first sub-controller 400) outputs a clear signal, the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps in order to execute the initialization process.

If it is determined not to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), is the reason for this the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that there has been an operation). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is turned ON (step S115). If it is determined that there is (step S115; Yes), setting change processing is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor in the role product ratio/setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments of the setting monitor are incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor indicate "6". When it is set, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected. is determined. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194 . In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the character ratio/setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Also, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting 1 to 6 are set, but settings other than six levels may be used, and settings may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is held and the held setting value is displayed. good too.

If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No) or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is turned ON ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is executed to initialize the basic circuit 302 (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read. All areas) are added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 to calculate the checksum, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes initialization processing to initialize the pachinko machine 100 . In this initialization processing, interrupt inhibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Note that in this embodiment, even if the initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Further, here, the normal return command and the setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This return-to-normal command is a command indicating that the initialization processing (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . Further, in this embodiment, when executing the initialization process, part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power failure without being initialized. The number of start times (TS) and flags related to the execution of idle time (b time saving state) described later may be specifications that are not cleared even if the settings are changed (including resetting of the same settings). Also, even if the ram is not cleared, only predetermined data such as the number of starts between big wins (TS) and a flag related to the idle time (b time saving state) may be cleared. In this case, the predetermined data may be arbitrarily cleared, or may be forcibly cleared.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the general pattern winning random number counter and the special pattern random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S121 except while the timer interrupt processing that starts at predetermined intervals is being performed.

On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (permanent setting) to the stack pointer. Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment). A partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320 . Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) before the last time is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308 and stored in the two-previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. memorize to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control section timer interrupt processing, which repeats activation at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is this time detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that a prize has been won when a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores winning judgment pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal the previous time, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is converted into predetermined prize winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal from the time before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal this time). information indicating that it is), to the general winning openings 226a, 226b, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure start opening 230 and the second special figure start opening 232 , or passing through the normal pattern starting port 228 or the jackpot generating gate 252. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been won in these winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and these starting openings 230, 232, 228, 252. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first special figure start opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure start opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first It is determined that there is a prize to the special figure start port 230, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning to the first special figure start port 230 is performed, but the detection of the past three times If the information on the presence or absence of the signal does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 . Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal the time before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there has been a winning until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches with the pattern information, then it is determined whether or not it matches with the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then used by the main control unit 300, the normal figure winning random value and Update the random number counter for generating each special random number. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. As a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the memory area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for general pattern winning that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308. If the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for normal figure winning, and In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers has made the next round. Keep In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for normal figure winning random number generation has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one round The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal pattern display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device 214. Various types of timers, such as a special display pattern update timer for timing the time of fluctuation / stop display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b or starting openings 230, 232 are won, the RAM 308 stores the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original number-of-balls storage area.

Also, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired. A plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 .

In step S219 executed subsequent to step S217, payout request number transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. , power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and encryption in bits 0-3 It shows the number of payout requests after the processing.

In step S221, a general pattern state update process is performed. This general pattern state update process performs one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general pattern state. For example, in the middle of the normal pattern fluctuation display (the value of the normal pattern display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), in the normal pattern state update process, the two LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210 are alternately lit and extinguished. Drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation game).

In addition, in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the general pattern fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the general pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the pattern The lighting/extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a losing symbol. It controls the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general pattern state update process. Here, along with performing the lighting/extinguishing drive control described above, a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal map stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 6(d)) and the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6(d)). display. Furthermore, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the normal chart stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal pattern variation game.

Also, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is hit, as described later, the normal pattern per flag is turned on. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting normal figure operation in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds) In addition, information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 500 m seconds), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing drive of 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM308.

In addition, in the normal chart state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the timer for blade closing time management changes from 1 to 0), the normal chart non-operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, as will be described later, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on. When this general pattern loss flag is on, even in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the general pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal chart non-operation is set. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, normal figure related lottery processing is performed. In this general figure related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not in operation), and of the reserved general figure fluctuation game If the number is 1 or more, a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area determines whether the result of the general pattern variation game is winning or not. A winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON when winning is determined. If the prize is not won, the winning flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is displayed from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variable display of a figure, and this variable display time is stored in a normal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a normal figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is stored in the normal pattern reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time the hit determination is made, from the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this normal pattern pending number storage area. Also, the random number used for the hit judgment is erased.

Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and determines in advance the stop pattern and the fluctuation time before the propriety determination process, and the preliminary determination The result (special figure lookahead result) is stored in the lookahead result storage unit in RAM308. In addition, the details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

Then, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure status update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, according to the state of special figure 2, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the predetermined out of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variation display (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of times of saving time stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time.

In addition, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a losing flag, a special pattern probability change flag, and a normal pattern probability change flag are prepared. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 2 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, special figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also ON, and the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, the special pattern c shown in FIG. If special figure b, 5R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability change flag is off, normal figure probability change flag is on special figure a, small hit flag is on special figure d, loss When the flag is on, the special figure e and the LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 are controlled to turn on and off so that each mode is performed, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make a setting that indicates that By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 includes 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure c), 5R probability variation jackpot design (special figure b), 5R normal jackpot design (special figure a), small hit design (special figure Fig. d) or one of the lost patterns (special pattern e) is confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, the special 2 priority variable machine is explained as an example, but it may be applied to a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed simultaneously, and the pachinko machine 100 in this case , There is a case where the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, but if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed, the special figure 1 Regardless of the result of the lottery, at the timing of the big hit pattern display of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 and the lost pattern is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, even if the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 The lottery result of the special figure 1 may be discarded at the timing of displaying the small winning symbol, and the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 2 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of working hours storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the shortening of working hours flag is turned on, the shortening of working hours flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the jackpot game (during the special game state).

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is, after additionally storing in the RAM308 as information to be included in the command data described later, the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big win, a big win standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big win generation gate 252 . In this embodiment, the big hit does not occur until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 after the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit pattern, and the expiration date is not provided, but for example, the special figure 2 If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 within a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) after is stopped and displayed as the big win symbol, the big win may be extinguished. Alternatively, the jackpot generation gate 252 may not be provided, and a jackpot may be generated when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed in the special figure 2. - 特許庁

When the game ball passes through the big-hit generation gate 252, the big-hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special-figure 2 state update process, the special-figure 2 operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 In order to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player of starting is displayed, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning port 234a or the second variable winning port 235a) The door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a (the second variable winning port A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing drive of the shutter member 2351a) of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is performed. Information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the timer for use. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the door member 2341a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a) of the first variable winning port 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a) is closed. A holding signal is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 5 rounds in this exemplary embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative pattern display device 208 will end the big hit, the effect waiting time is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. In this embodiment, if the special figure probability variation flag is set to on and the normal figure probability variation flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on, If the figure probability change flag is off and the normal figure probability change flag is set to on, the number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving provided in the RAM 308 turn on the flag.

The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player by shortening the time from the end of the big win in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big win. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern probability change). In the general pattern high probability state, the probability of hitting in the general pattern variation game is higher than in the general pattern low probability state. In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a tends to open more than in the general pattern low probability state. The state in which any of these normal map fixed variable, normal map variable short, and electric chu opening is set is called the electric sapo (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Also, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This is, during the jackpot game, when the normal pattern high probability state is reached, the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a large number of game balls enter the starting port 232 in FIG. It is for solving. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning to the special figure 2 start port 232 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so during the big hit game You can also leave the time saving flag on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 2 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0), Set special figure 2 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update processing) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, according to the state of special figure 1, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the predetermined out of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the special figure 1 variable display (special figure 1 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of times of saving time stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time.

In addition, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags such as 10R jackpot flag, 5R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, c time reduction transition flag, loss flag, special pattern probability change flag, and normal pattern probability change flag are prepared. there is These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 1 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has passed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, special figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also on, the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure C, 5R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on special figure B, 5R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability change flag is off, normal pattern probability change flag is also on special pattern A, 2R big hit flag is on, special pattern probability change flag is also on, normal pattern probability change flag is off In the case of special figure D, c time saving transition flag is on, special figure E when normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure F when loss flag is on, so that each aspect , Performs lighting and extinguishing drive control of the LED that constitutes the special figure 1 display device 212, and performs setting that indicates that the special figure 1 is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 is a 5R normal jackpot design (special figure A), a 5R probability variation jackpot design (special figure B), a 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure C), a 2R probability variation jackpot design ( Any one of special figure D), sudden time saving figure (special figure E), and loss figure (special figure F) is fixedly displayed. In the present embodiment, when the time saving pattern (special figure E) is suddenly displayed, the time saving flag is turned on, and a predetermined number of times (30 times) is set to the time saving number of times to shift to the time saving state (c time saving state). do.

In the above description, the special figure 2 fluctuation game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is preferentially digested over the reservation of the special figure 1 Toku-zu 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but the Toku-zu 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage is started with priority over the Toku-zu 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage, and the reservation of Toku-zu 1 is It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is digested with priority over holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage and the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won. It may be a start-up winning order variation that starts in order. In the start-up winning order change, the upper limit of the pending number is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so compared to the priority change where the upper limit of the pending number is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 You may be able to increase the hold limit by

In the above description, the lottery process and variable game related to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update By performing the process and the special figure related lottery process independently for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it may be configured to simultaneously vary a plurality of special figures (simultaneous variation machine). In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of the respective special symbols are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Moreover, it may be a simultaneous variation machine in which the special figure 1 variation game and the special figure 2 variation game are performed at the same time. In a pachinko machine that is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 1, but the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 1 variation display time has elapsed. In that case, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 is discarded at the timing of the big hit pattern display of the special figure 1, and the lost pattern is stopped and displayed. Also, if the losing pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has passed, regardless of the lottery result of special figure 2, at the timing of the special figure 1 losing pattern display, special figure 2 The lottery result may be discarded and the lost symbols may be stopped and displayed. Also, if the special figure 2 variable display is performed during the special figure 1 variable display, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is discarded in the manner described above at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed The symbol may be stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (eg 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 1 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variation game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of working hours storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the shortening of working hours flag is turned on, the shortening of working hours flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the jackpot game (during the special game state).

In addition, in this embodiment, although it will be described in detail later, the special figure fluctuation display (sometimes referred to as a special prize start (TS)) from the end of the big hit to the special low probability state to the big hit. The number of times is counted, and when the number of times reaches a predetermined number (750 times), the time saving flag is turned on, and the predetermined number of times (950 times) is set to the time saving number of times and the time saving state (b time saving state or "play time" There are cases where it is called.).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 1. The processing ends after additionally storing the special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

Also, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big win, a big win standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big win generation gate 252 . In this embodiment, the big hit does not occur until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 after the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big win pattern, and the expiration date is not provided, but for example, the special figure 1 If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 within a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) after is stopped and displayed as the big win symbol, the big win may be extinguished. Alternatively, the jackpot generation gate 252 may not be provided, and a jackpot may be generated when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed in the special figure 1. - 特許庁

When the game ball passes through the big-hit generation gate 252, the big-hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the value of the special figure 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning port 234a (second variable winning port 235a)) of the first variable winning port 234a (second variable winning port 235a) A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a), and a door opening signal provided in the RAM 308 is output. Information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the timer for time management. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) Door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is held closed by a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing drive of door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of first variable winning port 234a and second variable winning port 235a. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the memory area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative pattern display device 208 will end the big hit, the effect waiting time is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. In this embodiment, if the special figure probability variation flag is set to on and the normal figure probability variation flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on, If the figure probability change flag is off and the normal figure probability change flag is set to on, the number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving provided in the RAM 308 If the flag is turned on and the special pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON and the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 1 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Also, if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is suddenly time saving, the c time saving transition flag is turned on. When this c time saving transition flag is on, the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (time when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer becomes 0 from 1) special figure 1 state update processing In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 1 non-operating is set. At this time, the number of times of working hours (for example, 30 times) is set in the number of times of working hours storage provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here first, the special figure-related lottery process (special figure 2-related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1-related lottery process ) is performed (step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the special figure 2 variation game is not performed, the special figure 2 state is inactive, neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the jackpot game, and is suspended. Executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of special figure 2 fluctuation games is 1 or more . Special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform any variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, special figure 1 and special figure 2 The special figure 1 random value is stored under the condition that the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not reserved and the number of the reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game is 1 or more without being in any jackpot game. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the area.

The decorative symbol display device 208 informs the result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, to the special figure 2 start port 232 The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230, and in the normal game state, to the special figure 1 start port 230 The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232.例文帳に追加

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 starting information (special 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 ROM 306 Using the success/failure determination table stored in , it is determined (hit/failure determination) whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is made. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the decided propriety determination result of the special figure 2 The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display are determined. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the success/failure determination, the acquired special figure fluctuation time determination random number, etc., was stored in the ROM 306 Determine the variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 using various tables.

The main control unit 300, after retrieving the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and special 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reservation number of the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure state update process and the special figure related lottery process are configured so that the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be configured to vary a plurality of special figures at the same time by performing each independently.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning mouth winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure start command, special figure end command, big prize Mouth open command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command, etc. Information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined corresponding to the command type) information).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Also, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flags, lost flags, information indicating the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation start command is set, the stop design information that can specify the stop design is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flags, the value of the losing flag, etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, it includes the number of big hit rounds. . If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence or absence of winning to the special figure 1 start opening 230, the presence or absence of winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232, the winning to the first variable winning opening 234a Including presence/absence, presence/absence of winning to the second variable winning port 235a, and the like. In the case of the lookahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of special figures 1 and 2, the number of lookaheads stored in the number of lookahead storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the lookahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information.

In addition, in the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flag, value of the off flag, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data, which is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the reserved special figure Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described big winning opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data, notice information (advance notice information, false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of predetermined errors, such as the presence or absence of the front frame door open error or the lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is added to the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212 through the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 , Display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various state display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of I / O310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310. FIG.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt ending process is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. return to On the other hand, in step S243, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. after that, it enters the HALT state.

Next, the general figure related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for judging whether a normal figure is right or wrong, and FIG. FIG. 9(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table, and FIG. 9(d) is a diagram explaining the specifications of the idle time (b time saving state).

The general pattern suitability determination table shown in FIG. 9( a ) is a general pattern suitability determination table used at the time of general pattern suitability determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), when this success/failure determination table is used, there is no hit value in the normal pattern low probability state, that is, the probability of winning is 0%, and the normal pattern In the high-probability state, the range of possible random numbers is 0-99, and the winning value is 0-99. That is, the probability of winning is 100/100 (ie, 100%). In addition, in the normal pattern low probability state (when short time operation is not activated), it may be possible to hit with a certain probability (for example, 1%), or in the normal pattern high probability state (when short time operation), a certain (eg, 1%).

The table for special figure 1/2 suitability determination shown in FIG. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 218/65536 (about 1/300) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2185/65536 (approximately 1/30) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 226/65536 (about 1/290) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2260/65536 (approximately /29) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 234/65536 (about 1/280) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2341/65536 (approximately /28) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 243/65536 (about 1/270) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2427/65536 (approximately /27) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 252/65536 (about 1/260) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2521/65536 (approximately /26) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 262/65536 (about 1/250) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 2621/65536 (approximately/25) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

In addition, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is a special high probability state or a special low probability state, a small hit is selected as a result of the success or failure determination of the special 1 big hit lottery. A small hit is selected with a probability of 1966/65536 (approx. In addition, a small hit may occur in the special figure 1. Also, the probability of a small hit may be changed for each setting.

Also, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is a special high probability state or a special low probability state, 164 / 65536 Shorter working hours (c shorter working hours) are suddenly selected with a probability (about 1/400). On the other hand, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is a special high probability state or a special low probability state, suddenly time saving is selected as a result of the judgment of the special 2 jackpot lottery. will not be In addition, you may make it suddenly shortening of working hours generate|occur|produce in the special figure 2. Moreover, you may make it change the probability of sudden time saving for every setting.

Thus, in this embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is set to be higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit differs depending on the setting. The higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big hit, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a big hit.

FIG. 9(c) shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and determines a stop symbol based on the determination result of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to a special figure stop design mode (see FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b)) is defined for each success/failure determination result.

First, if the result of special figure 1 propriety determination is a big hit, one of "special figure A" to "special figure D" is selected. As described above, "special figure A" is the 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure B" is the 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Special figure C" is a 10R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and "Special figure D" is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot opened for a short time by the second variable winning opening 235a. Regardless of the setting of each selection rate, "Special Figure A" has a probability of 40/100, "Special Figure B" has a probability of 50/100, and "Special Figure C" has a probability of 5/100. , "Special figure D" has a probability of 5/100.

Next, if the result of special figure 2 success/failure determination is a big hit, one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is the 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure b" is the 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Each selection rate is 40/100 for "special figure a", 10/100 for "special figure b", and 50/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the big hit with the special figure 2 is easier to shift to a big hit game with more balls than the big hit with the special figure 1, and the big hit with the special figure 2 is more advantageous. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to heighten expectations for a big win during play time or during a sudden reduction in working hours. In addition, in this embodiment, it can be said that there are more jackpots that shift to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state when the special figure 2 hits the jackpot than when the special figure 1 hits the jackpot.

FIG.9(d) demonstrates the specification of idle time (b time reduction). The game time shifts to the special low probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the symbol variation display is continuously performed to lose 750 times without a jackpot, the time-saving game state shifts without a jackpot. is. In the present embodiment, for example, when the idle time transition condition is established during the execution of the c time saving state described above, the idle time transitions to the idle time regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations in the c time saving state. After all the remaining variations have been executed, the free time may be entered. In addition, in this embodiment, once the play time is started and ended, the game does not shift to the play time again until a big win is achieved again. In this case, when the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed in the special figure 1 after the end of the play time, the c time saving state is started.

Next, processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and in accordance with the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform processing to change to

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 .

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the performance data read out in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read out in step S309 includes a command to the effect devices 2 to 5, this command is output to the driving circuit 422. FIG.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 10B is a flowchart of first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by CPU 404 of first sub-controller 400 . This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal from the main controller 300 . In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

FIG. 10(c) is a flow chart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main process, and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, transmission of the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission processing (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing, and other processing for updating the random value for effect etc.

Next, processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the performance data corresponding to this command (the performance data by the decorative pattern display device 208) is read out from the ROM (not shown), etc., and the performance data is updated. is required, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 11B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-controller 400 . In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-controller 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 11(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM explained in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-controller main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers 1 and 2 of the VRAM 518 . As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 . Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 generates information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, specific configurations of the character item ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the character ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. is.

As described above, the character ratio/setting display 196 includes a character ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The character ratio monitor displays the continuous character ratio (RY) and the character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

Here, the continuous role ratio refers to the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the role when the role is operated continuously (i.e., the first It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning with the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a opened. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning hole 234a and the second variable winning hole 235a to the number of out balls may be used. In addition, the role ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the role (that is, the first special figure start port 232, the first variable winning port 234a, and the second variable winning port 235a is the number of game balls obtained by opening and winning). In addition, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special opening starting opening 232, and the general winning openings 226a and 226b for the number of out balls. It may be a percentage of the number of spheres.

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous role product ratio, when it is determined that the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role product ratio is displayed blinking, and then to output a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 . In addition, it may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156 . As a result, the model application test for the game machine may be smoothly performed.

Also, as a result of calculating the role ratio, if it is determined that the ratio is over 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the role ratio is displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ). Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the role product ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In the present embodiment, when the continuous role product ratio or the role product ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED blinks. good too.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the DIP switch board 198 is provided with eight DIP switches. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each DIP switch can be read to change the appearance probability of the effect. Appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc. can be set.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the propriety determination process, and the pre-determination result (special 14(a) to 14(c)) in the RAM 308. FIG.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 prefetching results stored in the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetching result and the special figure 1 prefetching result stored in the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. The prefetching result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetching results in this example. In the special figure 1 lookahead result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 lookahead result with the highest ranking (first) is deleted each time the special figure 1 lookahead number decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 1 lookahead result is processed so that the order of the data in is moved up by one. In addition, every time the special figure 1 prefetching number increases by one, the new special figure 1 prefetching result data is written in the next order of the special figure 1 prefetching result data of the lowest (last) rank.

Also, in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 2 lookahead results stored in the special figure 2 lookahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 lookahead result and the special figure 2 lookahead result stored in the special figure 2 lookahead result storage unit A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing as a number is provided. The prefetching result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetching results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result with the highest ranking is erased every time the special figure 2 prefetch number decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 2 prefetch result data ranking is processed to be carried up by one. In addition, every time the special figure 2 prefetching number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetching result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetching result data with the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S501). Determination of whether or not the starting information of special figure 2 is increasing, for example, the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area It is stored It is done by comparing with the special figure 2 look-ahead number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is the special figure 2 prefetch number If it is equal, it is determined that the starting information of special figure 2 has not increased. When it determines with starting information of special figure 2 increasing, it progresses to step S503, and when it determines with starting information of special figure 2 not increasing, it progresses to step S507.

In step S503, the increased special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number value), prior to the success or failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), FIG. 2 Reads ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, for example, the success/failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of success/failure determination, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation game related to the start information, the special figure 2 related lottery A prior determination is made prior to the suitability determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used for the determination of whether the game is successful or not.

In step S505 next to step S503, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by prior determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM308. After that, the process moves to step S507.

In step S507, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of special figure 1 is increasing. Determination of whether or not the start information of special figure 1 is increasing, for example, similar to special figure 2, special figure 1 reservation number stored in special figure 1 reservation number storage area, special figure 1 prefetch number storage It is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S509, and if it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S509, based on various flags in the RAM 308, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined to be non-electrical support, the process proceeds to step S511, and if it is determined that it is not non-electrical support (it is an electrical support (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S515. In addition, although it is determined whether or not in the non-electric support in this example, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for execution of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice notification are satisfied. For example, the conditions for executing the special figure 1 look-ahead forewarning notification include conditions such as the presence of a big-hit hold and the fact that the big-hit game is not in progress, in addition to being in the non-electric support.

In step S511, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value), prior to the success or failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), FIG. 1 Prefetches from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the success/failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of success/failure determination, the stop pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the start information is selected, special figure 1 related lottery A preliminary determination is made prior to the suitability determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used for the determination of whether the game is successful or not.

In step S513 following step S511, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM308. After that, it returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing to end the special figure prefetch processing.

In step S515, without prefetching the increased special figure 1 starting information, the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not prefetched is replaced with the stop pattern information, and the special figure 1 prefetch result storage in the RAM 308 stored in the first empty area of the After that, it returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing to end the special figure prefetch processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased starting information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the prefetch result of the increased starting information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the prefetch result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All prefetch results within the unit may be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 13, the increased special figure 2 starting information is always prefetched, and the increased special figure 1 starting information is always prefetched except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look ahead the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-controller 400, which has received the prefetch result from the main controller 300, may decide by lottery whether or not to execute the prefetch notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether it is in a non-electric support or not), etc., when the start information increases, prefetching is always performed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and the first sub-controller 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 14 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 . FIG. 14(a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 lookahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 lookahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas as the number of possible reservations of the special figure 1 variation game (4 in this embodiment) . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random number storage area. Stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 14(a), "special figure E" (lost) is stored as the stop symbol information in the storage area "reservation 1", and "special figure B" is stored as the stop symbol information in the storage area "reservation 2". ' (5R probability variable jackpot) is stored, and 'undetermined' information is stored in the storage areas 'suspension 3' and 'suspension 4' instead of the stop symbol information.

FIG. 14(b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 lookahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 lookahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14(b), the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number as the number of possible reservations of the special figure 2 variation game (in the present embodiment, 4) storage areas. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. Stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), no stop symbol information is stored in the storage areas "Hold 1" to "Hold 4". In addition, in FIG. 14(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is indicated as "none".

FIG. 14(c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric sapo. As shown in FIG. 14(c), instead of the stop symbol information, the "undecided" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1". Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "suspended 2" to "suspended 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described stop symbol information, the result of determination, variable timer number (variable time), a timer group described later, etc. are pre-determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 as information.

Next, various lottery tables used for executing setting suggestions will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. Here, FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big win end effect, and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 4(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the pre-play time/set-suggested ball selection table, and FIG. 16(b) shows an example of the content of the set-suggested ball selection table after the play time. It is a diagram.

The setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect shown in FIG. This is a table for determining whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a setting (see FIG. 29) in the ending effect executed when the game ends. In this table, the probabilities of execution of suggested effects differ depending on the selected setting and the execution status of play time (b time saving state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in setting 1, the setting suggesting effect is not executed before the play time starts and during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is always executed after the play time ends. . Also, in setting 2, the setting suggesting effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/8 during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is always executed after the play time ends. . Also, in setting 3, the setting suggesting effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is always executed after the play time ends. . Also, in setting 4, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/16 before the start of the play time, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is executed after the play time ends. is always executed. Also, in setting 5, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/18 before the start of the play time, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/3 during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is executed after the play time ends. is always executed. Also, in setting 6, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/20 before the start of the play time, the setting suggesting effect is executed with a probability of 1/2 during the play time, and the setting suggesting effect is executed after the play time ends. is always executed.

The setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit ending effect shown in FIG. A character is selected that emerges from the character.

Specifically, characters that appear include "Chappie", "Granny", "Sabohani", "Kopanda", "Bancho", and "Mr. Machiko", and the appearance rate differs depending on the setting. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the character "chappie" suggests an odd number setting, the character "old man" suggests an even number setting, and the character "sabohani" indicates the setting is 2 or more, the character "Kopanda" suggests that the setting is 4 or more, the character "Bancho" suggests that the setting is 5 or more, and "Machiko Sensei" character suggests that setting 6 is rich.

If the appearance rate is set to 1, the character "Chappie" always appears. In setting 2, the character "old man" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 3, the character "Chappie" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 4, the character "old man" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character "kopanda" appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 5, the character "Chappie" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 20/100, the character "Kopanda" appears with a probability of 40/100, and the character " "Bancho" characters appear with a probability of 10/100. In setting 6, the character "old man" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 10/100, the character "Kopanda" appears with a probability of 30/100, and the character " The character "Bancho" appears with a probability of 15/100, and the character "Machiko-sensei" appears with a probability of 15/100.

The setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of the play time shown in FIG. 15(c) indicates whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 25(w')) at the end of the symbol variation display when the play time ends. It is a table used to determine whether This table has different execution probabilities of suggestion effects depending on selected settings.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), the setting suggestion effect is not executed in setting 1 to setting 3, is executed in setting 4 with a probability of 1/6, and is executed in setting 5 with a probability of 1/3, Setting 6 is executed with a probability of 1/2.

16(a) and 16(b), the setting suggestion ball selection table shows that a star-shaped ball appears as a setting suggestion effect in a non-electrical support state (universal pattern low probability state) is a big hit. It is executed every 100G after the end of the game, and is a table for selecting which ball will appear. The after-play-time/set-suggestion-ball selection table shown in FIG. 10(b) is a table that is referred to after the play time ends and before a big win occurs.

Specifically, white balls always appear in setting 1 to setting 3 before the play time shifts. At setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100 and a blue ball appears with a probability of 10/100. At setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 4/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 1/100. At setting 6, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 3/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 3/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 2/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 2/100. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100.

After the play time is over, in setting 1, a white ball appears with a probability of 75/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 2, a white ball appears with a probability of 45/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 50/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 3, a white ball appears with a probability of 40/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 40/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 19/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 30/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 25/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 25/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 1/100. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. At setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 50/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 5/100. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. At setting 6, no white ball appears, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 30/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 30/100, and a rainbow ball appears with a probability of 20/100. A ball will appear.

FIG. 17 is, for example, the special figure related lottery process (step S229, step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is a variation pattern table used when determining a variation pattern using the previous special figure 1 (special figure 2) winning random number and special figure 1 (special figure 2) random number.

FIG. 17(a) is a losing variation pattern table used when the result of big hit determination is losing, and the selection rate differs depending on the game state.

Specifically, in the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), reach no loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, SP reach loss is It is selected with a probability of 1/64. In addition, in this embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used to select the variation pattern even in the latent probability variable state. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, it shifts to the revival mode, which is one of the production modes, in the period from the end of the a time saving state until the symbol variation display is performed 10 times. In revive mode, no-reach losers are selected with a probability of 1/2, and in revive mode, losers are selected with a probability of 1/2. Loss in the revival mode is loss without reach, but is set as a variation pattern for performing an effect to increase the player's expectation for the big win.

Also, at the time of the variable state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time saving is selected with a probability of 14/16, the time saving normal reach is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach is 3/ It is selected with a probability of 32. In addition, in the time saving state a, time saving is selected with a probability of 15/16, time saving normal reach is selected with a probability of 3/64, and time saving SP reach is selected with a probability of 1/64. Also, in the b time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/64. In addition, in the c time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32.

FIG. 17(b) is a variation pattern table at the time of a big hit used when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and the selection rate differs depending on the game state.

Specifically, in the normal game state (special low probability normal low probability state), the normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/16, and the SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 15/16. In addition, in this embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used to select the variation pattern even in the latent probability variable state. Also, in the resurrection mode, the SP reach jackpot is always selected.

In addition, in the variable state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time-saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/4, and the time-shortening SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/4. In addition, in the time saving state a, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. In addition, in the b time saving state, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. In addition, in the c time saving state, the time saving SP reach jackpot is always selected.

It should be noted that the set execution probability, effect selection rate, and variation pattern selection rate are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. Also, the variation pattern table to be used after the end of the big win game may be selected according to the pattern of the big win.

Next, a specific example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described.

18A and 18B are diagrams showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is shown in FIG. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218, the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration. ing.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is displayed still. Although the background is not displayed here, a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the ornamental symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the pattern is changing (or during symbol stoppage) and notifying the number of reservations. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right of the display area, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 is provided. In addition, the notification area during the pattern fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 pattern fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 pattern is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "○", If it is a small hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "△". If it is suddenly time saving, it will be stopped with "☆", and if it is wrong, it will be stopped with "x". Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 18 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decoration symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 . In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations of the special figure 1, in addition to the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations of the special figure 1 display area, is also represented by the number of the reservation icons of the special figure 1, of the special figure 2 The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of the pending|holding icons of the special figure 2. FIG. That is, the pending icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icon on the right side becomes the reserved icon with the older winning prize.

In FIG. 18(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned, white display mode). That is, the default pending icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round pending icon. In addition, in FIG. 18(a), in order to make it easier to understand that the four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the pending icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

On the other hand, in the reserved icon display area of special figure 2, no reserved icon is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. Because it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of times of symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game is displayed in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, and the play time (b time saving state) is displayed in the upper center of the display screen. The number of times of pattern variation display required to shift to is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a suggested ball display area 285 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In this suggested ball display area 285, four star-shaped suggested balls s11 to s14 are displayed. It is In this embodiment, the set suggestion ball is displayed every time the symbol variation display is executed 100 times in the normal game state, and the latest one is displayed on the leftmost side of the set suggestion ball display area 285, and 1 to 3 times before. The display positions of the setting suggesting balls s12 to s14 displayed in . In the present embodiment, there are cases where setting suggestive balls of multiple colors are displayed, and the player may be able to guess the setting by looking at the display history of the setting suggestive balls.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, which is easier to win, is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is the non-electrical support state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, on the contrary, the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the pending icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the pending icon of special figure 2 may be the same, or may be different display modes .

In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of variation start on the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the 4th symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the pending icon → start of variation of the decoration symbol. However, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 18 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. No changes have yet been made to the pending icon or decoration pattern.

In FIG. 18(c), the moving animation of the pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the moving animation here, the pending icon (target pending icon of the current pattern change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280, and the second pending icon The suspended icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of decorative patterns has not started.

In FIG. 18(d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 18(e), the suspended icon, which was the first suspended icon h11 before the start of variation, reaches the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the pending icon that was the second pending icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation reaches the display position of the first pending icon h11 and is displayed as the first pending icon h11, but even at this stage, The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the pattern variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the suspension icon that was the first suspension icon h11 until then may be viewed as the variation icon h0, or the second suspension icon until then The pending icon h12 may be viewed as the first pending icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 18(f), the variable display of decorative patterns is started.

As shown in FIG. 18(g), an operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 where the variable display of the decorative design is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbols is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbols are changing by the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 and the like. . It should be noted that the display position of the decorative design may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation prompting notification image 136P so that the decorative design is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 18(h), the effective period has decreased, and in FIG. 18(i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the production button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 18(j), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays a ready-to-win state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notice image 136P. . In the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display of "This is your chance!" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 18(k), the advance notice image 2071 for entering the ready-to-win state disappears, and the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes visible, and then the ready-to-win state is entered as shown in FIG. 18(l). It should be noted that even if the reach state entering preview image 2071 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but the reach state may always be entered.

As described above, the appearance of the operation-promoting notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that serves as a trigger for an advance notice regarding the symbol variation display that is currently being performed.

In FIG. 18(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative patterns, which has been performed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. , has developed into SP (Special) Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. An animation of the scene is displayed.

Note that the ready-to-reach state entry forewarning image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering a reach state, and may be a notice of development to SP reach state.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 19(p) continuing from FIG. 18(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 19(s). In FIG. 19(s), the hero's lord wins against the villain's master swordsman, and in FIG. 19(t), all but the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are temporarily hidden. Note that a background image different from the previous one may be displayed instead of the non-display. Alternatively, in this scene, there may be a case where a setting suggestion display is displayed. Before long, as shown in (u) of the same figure, the swaying variation of the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden, or may be a different background image than before. In addition, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. It should be noted that the variable display of any mini symbol is continuously performed until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19(v), the characters "Re-lottery!" In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 Expectations are fueled for the final display of the winning combination of decoration patterns "Decoration 7-Decoration 7".

After that, as shown in FIG. 19(w), the combination of the decorative symbols, from the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" to the jackpot combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed. The figure shows a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the At this time, an effect display EF1 in which a star flashes is displayed around the decorative symbols after the stop, indicating that the so-called combination of the stopped jackpot decorative symbols has been ranked up.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(x), the decorative design combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for 10R probability variable jackpot determination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 19(x) is stop-displayed with "○", and the mini-symbol is also stop-displayed with the combination of "777". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 19(x), a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 19(y), a background image celebrating the big win (omitted here) is displayed together with characters of "Big Chance Big Win" as the effect of starting the big win game, and characters of "Right shot!" are displayed. I'm urging you to hit the right. In addition, in the jackpot game start effect shown in FIG. In this case, only when there is a jackpot that satisfies some condition (for example, only when the first jackpot after turning on the power, only when a jackpot of 5 or more consecutive wins occurs) A display including setting suggestions may be displayed only for a big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, a 10R big hit, etc.).

Also, on the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 19(v), for example, as shown in FIGS. There is In other words, there is a case where it is produced that the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable probability big win is confirmed is not stopped and displayed, for example, it is possible to make the player expect the promotion effect in the big win effect. Expectations can sometimes be sustained.

In the present embodiment, there is one type of re-lottery production mode, but there are a plurality of types of modes, and depending on the mode of the re-lottery performance that has been executed, the degree of change in the combination of the decorative symbols for the big win before and after the re-lottery is determined. For example, the re-lottery effect with the action of the role> the re-lottery effect by the pattern fluctuation display by frame advance> the re-lottery effect by high-speed fluctuation> the re-lottery effect by slow fluctuation. The degree of expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols for the big win will change before and after the lottery may be high. Note that the order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in a jackpot game centering on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, in FIG. 20, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(a), after the 5R probability variation big hit in the special figure 1 pattern variation display (on the production, it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a normal jackpot or a probability variation big hit.) , the transition to the first round is shown. When the game shifts to the first round, on the decoration pattern display device 208, Machiko-sensei's character and the characters "Congratulations!" In addition, when it is determined that the combination of decorative patterns at the time of the big hit is a variable hit (for example, when the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" hits the jackpot), As shown in FIG. 20(a'), instead of the characters "Congratulations!", the characters "Congratulations on your big chance!" In the lower left corner of the display screen, the number of hits from the first big win (sometimes referred to as "display of the number of consecutive wins") is displayed, and in the upper left corner, the "decoration", which is the jackpot decoration pattern when the big win is achieved, is displayed. 4” is displayed. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the current round number "1R" is displayed as the number of rounds, and below that, the number of prize balls won in this big win game and the number of wins in this big win game are displayed. "60/750 get!" is displayed to notify the expected number of winning balls. That is, since 4 game balls have entered the first variable winning hole 234a since the start of the big hit this time, it is notified that 60 prize balls have been obtained, and in this big hit, 750 prize balls have been received. It is shown that acquisition can be expected. In the lower right of the display screen, the total number of prize balls won from the first big win is displayed, and this number indicates the number of prize balls won in the big win and the small win at the end of the win (big win, small win). It is added (counted up) each time. Therefore, during the jackpot game related to the first jackpot, the total number of won prize balls is not counted up until the jackpot ends, and remains "0pt". It should be noted that each time a winning ball is won, the number of winning balls may be added to the total number of won winning balls. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added. For example, the number of prize balls won by hitting a specific general prize hole that can win by hitting right may be added. can be

FIG. 20(b) shows how the game of the third round is played. In the present embodiment, the combination of the jackpot patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" results in a big hit, so it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect is performed to notify whether or not the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot. When the promotion effect is started, the characters "Promotion chance!" In addition, the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may be performed and may not be performed, or the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined by the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the big hit (for example, when it is a 10R probability variation big hit), the promotion effect is not performed. An effect may be performed, and in this case, setting suggestions may be included. At the timing shown in FIG. 20(b), it is the third round, and 22 game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234a, and 330 prize balls are obtained. there is

After that, as shown in FIG. 20(c), the result of the promotion effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20(c), the appearance that the promotion effect was successful is shown, and the characters "promotion!" It is reported that the big hit this time is a certainty-variable big hit. On the other hand, when the promotion effect fails, as shown in FIG. In addition, by failing in promotion production, it may be possible to confirm that it is usually a big hit, or to make expectations for other promotion production (for example, reversal production in the ending, etc.). It may be arranged not to clarify whether or not it is a big hit. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(c), it is the third round, and 22 game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234a, and 330 prize balls are obtained. there is

FIG. 20(d) shows a state in which the big win end effect is being performed after the fifth round is over. Note that the example shown in FIG. 20(d) shows a state in which an effect is being performed in which it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot is being won. When the jackpot ending performance starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" Also, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of won prize balls displayed in the lower right of the display screen counts up, showing how the 750 prize balls obtained in this big hit are added. . On the other hand, when it is confirmed that it is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. It is displayed, and it is notified that it shifts to the electric sapo state (special low probability normal high probability state). In addition, the display showing the total number of winning balls will be counted up in the same way as when moving to the variable state even if it moves to the electric sapo state, and the display of the total number of winning balls after counting up will be displayed. , is displayed continuously until the electric support state ends, but in the case of a normal jackpot, the display of the total number of winning balls may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for success in the promotion effect during the jackpot game may be changed depending on the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols when the jackpot is won. Probability variation confirmation)> jackpot with odd-numbered patterns other than "decoration 3" and "decoration 7">jackpot with even-numbered patterns may be arranged in order to make it easier to succeed in the promotion performance.

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an example of display of information regarding play time when the power is turned on, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 21, the decorative design display device 208, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220, and the general design A pending lamp 216 is shown.

FIG. 21(a) shows the state immediately after the power is turned on. After that, when the backup is restored, a pattern demonstration is displayed as an effect indicating the standby state, as shown in FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b), the decorative design combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the general figure are all stopped and displayed in the missing design, and the fourth design in the upper right corner of the decorative design display device 208 ・In the reserved number display area 284, the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2 is indicated as "0", and the "x" indicating the lost pattern is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 . Since the state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a standby state, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. FIG.

In this embodiment, on the standby display screen immediately after the power is turned on, a display of "play time: not yet" and a display of "number of times stuck: 432" (status display at power-on) are displayed in the upper center of the display screen. 432 symbol variations have been displayed since the transition to the special symbol low probability state after the end of the big hit, and it is notified that the play time has not started. This is a display for the staff of the game arcade to confirm. By creating an advantageous state or by resetting the number of times of getting stuck by initialization, it may be possible to ensure fairness and create an advantageous state in the gaming arcade. It should be noted that if the play time has ended before the power is turned off, as shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21(b), at the bottom of the display screen, the message "Information will be deleted by operating the effect button" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. is operated, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(d), the execution status of the play time and the number of times of being stuck (play time information) are erased, and instead, "____ times left until the play time" (underbar The part is displayed with a question mark.) is displayed to inform the player. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, by not clarifying the number of symbol variation displays until the play time starts and the number of symbol variation displays in the special low probability state after the end of the big hit, the game is played first thing in the morning. Advantage/disadvantage may be prevented depending on the person.

In the present embodiment, by displaying the status display at power-on on the decorative pattern display device 208, the execution status of the playing time and the number of times of the pattern fluctuation display after the big hit are recognizably notified, but it is notified by voice. Also, for example, "Play time has been executed. It is recommended to clear the RAM or change settings." "3 more spins until play time." good too. Alternatively, the notification may be made by means of a lamp or 7 segments.

In FIG. 22(e) continuing from FIG. 21(d), the pattern demonstration effect is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 22(f), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started accordingly. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(f), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 by default. One is displayed in the display mode.

All of the suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are displayed in white. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation display is performed until the play time has not yet been clarified.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(g), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1", and the display result of failure is determined. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased.

In FIG. 22(h), the pending icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by moving animation, and the pending icon that was in the display position of the first pending icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and the variable icon h0 becomes. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It should be noted that the number of times the pattern variation display is performed until the play time has not yet been clarified.

After that, in FIG. 22(i), decorative patterns of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c to form the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(i), two game balls enter the first special figure start port 230 and two symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second is displayed.

In FIG. 22(j), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , has developed into SP Reach (Swordsman Reach). Thereafter, effects shown in FIGS. 18(o) to 19(q) are performed.

After that, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(l), the feudal lord's character is defeated, and the decorative designs fluctuate with combinations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 22(m), when the SP ready-to-win effect is switched to the default background image, the number of times the symbol variation display is displayed until the play time becomes clear, and "421 more times until the play time" is displayed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that when the symbol variation display is executed 421 more times, the game shifts to the play time. It should be noted that if the play time has already ended, the display of "____ times left until the play time" is erased so that the player can recognize that the play time has ended.

FIG. 22(e'') shows a state in which the symbol demonstration effect is being performed after the power is turned on, but differs from FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(e''), a right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and it may be possible to recognize that it is in a time-saving state. After that, as shown in FIG. 22(f''), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started accordingly. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(f''), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. One is displayed in the default display mode.

Then, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(g''), the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion, and the shoji screen is opened to make an appearance of Gol. A production is being performed in which a speech bubble is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is play time. Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(h''), the effect display of Goruji ends, and the normal background display returns. In addition, a large message "Please hit right!" is displayed in the center of the display screen to encourage the player to hit right.

In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the status of execution of the play time is not notified, so that the pachinko machine 100 that is likely to shift to the play time is targeted, which is advantageous/disadvantageous to the pachinko machine 100 in the early morning state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of this, and by clarifying the execution status of the play time on the condition that the SP reach is executed, it may be possible to increase the player's willingness to play. In the present embodiment, as a condition for clarifying the execution status of the play time, the execution of the SP reach that results in a loss was exemplified, but it is not limited to this, for example, a big hit, A predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of symbol variation display may be executed, or a specific notice or pre-reading notice may be performed, or the play time execution status may be clarified by lottery. Alternatively, the execution status of the play time may be made clear by performing a mission effect and succeeding in the mission.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power-on status display displayed after the power is turned on is erased by operating the effect button 136, but it may be erased by other means. For example, it may be erased after 5 minutes), or when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated, when the power is turned on again, or when a predetermined switch provided on the back side of the game machine is operated. It may be erased under at least one condition such as when the operation key unit 190 is operated, when the front frame door 106 is closed, or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time is displayed, but the number of symbol variations displayed (TS) after the end of the big hit may be displayed, or the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time. and the symbol variation display frequency (TS) from the end of the big hit may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times the symbols are changed and displayed until the play time is clearly displayed, but it is also possible to adopt a mode in which it is not left unambiguous. It may be implied by changing it, or it may be implied by the appearance frequency of a certain character.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the play time execution status is not displayed and a certain condition such as execution of SP reach is established, the mode is changed, but the change mode is not limited to the above-described one. The play time execution status may be hidden until a certain condition is met, or may be implied by the color of the text or characters until a certain condition is met, and when a certain condition is met, the play time will be delayed. The number of times the pattern is displayed may be specified, or the color of characters, etc. may not change until a certain condition is met, and when a certain condition is met, the color of the letters, characters, etc., may change. It is also possible to implicitly indicate the execution status of the play time by going there.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the status display at the time of power-on and the display mode of the display of the execution status of the idle time are different, but they may be the same display mode. A display screen may be displayed, and the display of the execution status of the play time contained therein may be displayed so that the store clerk at the game parlor can consider whether or not to execute the RAM clear.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect in the electric sapo state (a time saving state) centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 23, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

FIG. 23(a) shows a state in which the jackpot game related to the first jackpot and the normal jackpot is finished and the ending effect is executed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, one symbol variation display of special figure 1 is suspended, and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 is a big hit display. However, in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2, the display of the off is displayed respectively. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 23(a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 20(d'), so the description is omitted.

After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(b) continues the ending effect, showing that the count-up of the total number of prize balls won has ended. Further, at the bottom of the display screen, characters of "If you defeat the panda, you will win big!" are displayed as an explanation of the mission in the time-saving state a. This mission is, for example, a mission in which a panda character appears in the SP reach and it is announced that defeating the panda will result in a big win. Note that the content of the mission is not limited to this, and various types can be adopted.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(c), the combination of the decorative patterns of the big win displayed at the time of the big win "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the electric support state is entered. situation is shown. At this time, the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the upper center of the display screen shows the number of times the remaining pattern fluctuation display in the electric sapo state (a time saving state) is displayed. , and below it, a display of "750 more times until play time" is displayed, which indicates the number of times of pattern variation display (number of times of fit) required until transition to play time (b time saving state). Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the display screen, a lord's character is shown running, suggesting that the power supply is on. In addition, in the electric support state, since the pattern variation display is performed centering on the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed along with the variation icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. . At the timing shown in FIG. 23(c), one symbol variation display of special figure 1 is reserved, but since the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is not displayed, it corresponds to special figure 1 The pending icon is not displayed, and since there is no suspension of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 either.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(d), it is shown that the first pattern variation display is started after shifting to the power supply state (a time saving state). In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, so the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed with priority over the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 Since there is no suspension, the suspension of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. In addition, the display showing the number of times the remaining pattern fluctuations are displayed in the power support state and the display of the number of times the pattern fluctuations are displayed until the play time are updated. . In addition, below the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, a display indicating the number of times of symbol variation display after the end of the big win (display of the number of starts between special prizes) is displayed. "START: 1st time" is displayed because the execution of the first symbol variation display is started after the low probability state is reached. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 23(d), since four or more game balls entered the second special figure start port 232, the four reserved icons are all defaulted to the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. displayed in the form. In this embodiment, the number of times of symbol variation display until transition to play time is not counted in the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, in this production example, it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and if it becomes a big hit with a probability variation pattern, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit. Special Time) state, and when the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the game state is changed to the normal game state, from the time the game is changed to the normal game state to the game time. The number of symbol variation display times may be counted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(e), the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8". In addition, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" accordingly.

Also, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(f), the big hit game ends and the special figure 2 symbol variation display is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 23(f), the movement animation of the pending icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 has started. In the movement animation here, the suspended icon (target suspended icon of the current pattern change) that was at the display position of the first suspended icon h21 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the second to fourth reserved icons h22 to h24 displayed at the reserved icons move toward the display positions of the first to third reserved icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2, respectively. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(f), the display showing the number of remaining pattern fluctuation displays in the electric sapo state and the display of the number of pattern fluctuation displays until the play time are updated, respectively, "Remaining time reduction: 98 times. ' and '748 times left until play time' are displayed. Also, the display of the number of starts between special prizes is updated to display "START: 2nd time".

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 23(g), the situation when the 100 times of pattern variation display is completed after the big hit is completed is shown. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1". In addition, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" accordingly. In addition, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation displays in the power support state and the display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time are respectively displayed as "remaining time reduction: 0 times" and "650 times until play time". In addition, the display of the number of starts between special prizes displayed below the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284 is "START: 100th time". At this time, since the electric support state ends, the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen and the character of the lord displayed in the lower right part of the display screen are also erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 23(h), the total number of prize balls obtained in this series of advantageous states (period from the first big hit to the end of the time saving state a) and the number of big hits (number of consecutive wins) is displayed, showing your performance in a series of favorable conditions. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 23(h), the display of the remaining symbol variation display times in the power supply state is erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(i), the electric support state (a time saving state) ends and the mode shifts to the revival mode of 10 games, and the first pattern variation display (the 101st pattern variation from the end of the big hit) display) has started. In addition, the resurrection mode is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state (normal game state), and since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is mainly executed, the special figure 2 that was displayed in the electric support state The reserved icon display area 282 is switched to the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and displayed. At this time, since there is one reservation of special figure 1, the reservation icon h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of special figure 1. It should be noted that, in the recovery mode, the display mode of the pending icon of the special figure 1 is different, and the display mode is white and triangular. It should be noted that this display mode is not the display mode of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode peculiar to the revival mode, and is the default display mode. Also, in this embodiment, since it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, even in the symbol variation display after the electric support state is completed, the reservation of the special figure 2 is preferentially digested, and shown in FIG. 23 (i) At the timing, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is started, and the display of "special figure 2 is changing" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and that effect is notified. Also, at the lower center of the display screen, the characters "entering the resurrection mode!" ing. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the resurrection mode, the SP reach is not selected when the result is a loss, and the SP reach is selected only when the hit is a big hit. It can be said that it is suggested that a big hit is achieved by executing Furthermore, a display of "resurrection mode" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, so that the user can recognize that it is in the resurrection mode. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 23(i), the electric sapo state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal game state, so left-handed hitting is recommended. Therefore, by displaying "Please hit left!" in the center of the display screen, the player is urged to hit left. The display of the number of times of pattern variation display until play time is displayed as "649 times until play time", and the display of the number of start times between special prizes is displayed as "START: 101st time". After that, as shown in FIG. 23(j), the display of "Please hit left!", the display of "entering recovery mode!", and the display of "big hit with SP reach!"

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(k), a state is shown in which the pattern variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(l), since there are three reserved patterns of the special figure 2, the design variation display of the special figure 2 is started with priority over the special figure 1. It is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 23(l), the moving animation is not performed because the reserved icon of the special figure 2 is hidden. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(l), the display of the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated, and respectively, "648 times until play time" and "START: 102nd time" are displayed. is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(m), the tenth pattern variation display is being executed after shifting to the recovery mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 23(m), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and two symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved. Further, the display of the number of symbol variation displays until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are respectively displayed as "640 times until play time" and "START: 110th time".

After that, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(n) shows a state in which the tenth symbol variation display is completed after shifting to the recovery mode. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1". In addition, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "451" in accordance with this, and the variation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(n), since the resurrection mode has ended with the symbol variation display this time, the display of "resurrection mode" displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is erased, and the setting suggestion ball display area is displayed. 285 are displayed. All of the suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(o) shows a state in which the first pattern variation display is started after the restoration mode is finished. At this time, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 changes to a circular display mode, and the moving animation of the special figure 1 of the pending icons h11 to h12 is started. In the movement animation here, the suspended icon (target suspended icon of the current pattern change) that was in the display position of the first suspended icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the suspended icons at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 move toward the display position of the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1 and become the first suspended icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "639 times until play time" and "START: 111th time", respectively. After that, every time the symbol variation display is started, the number of symbol variation display times until the play time is decremented, and the start between special prizes is incremented.

In addition, in this production example, the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the play time is displayed in the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit, but it is not displayed during the execution of the a time saving state. may Further, the display of the number of starts between special prizes may not be displayed during execution of the time saving state a.

In addition, in this production example, the number of games acquired from the first big hit and the number of consecutive wins are displayed until the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the big win ends. Since it has nothing to do with the series of consecutive chans, it is not displayed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be performed at the end of the time saving state a, and the setting suggestion effect may not be performed at the end of the play time. A set effect may be performed at the time of termination.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect in the recovery mode centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 24, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(a), a state in which the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable pattern is shown in the resurrection mode. In FIG. 24(a), a variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area 280, and one special figure 1 suspension icon h11 is displayed in the special figure 1 suspension icon display area 281, and the default is displayed in a display mode (a triangular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the pending icon is displayed in the default display mode of Toku-zu 1. Further, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "643 times until play time" and "START: 107th time", respectively.

After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(b), two "decorations 4" are displayed to show the ready-to-win state. After that, SP reach is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 18(m) to 19(y) to result in a big hit, but shifts to SP reach and decoration pattern display shown in FIGS. 24(c) to 24(d). In the device 208, an old man character appears in place of the lord's character, and a state of victory over the master swordsman character is shown. The old man's character is a premium character, and is a character whose appearance suggests that the big win is high. In the SP reach during the resurrection mode, the character of the old man may always appear, or the character of the lord may appear.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 25 (p) following FIG. 23 (o), the decorative design display device 208 is shown, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 Reservation lamp 218, special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, and normal figure reservation lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(p), the decorative design combination of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 25(p), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in a stopped state, and in the fourth design/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative design display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of the pending|holding icons of special figure 2. FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icon on the right side becomes the reserved icon with the older winning prize.

In FIG. 25(p), four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these four reserved icons h11 of special figure 1 ~ All of h14 are displayed in the default display mode (circular, non-patterned, white display mode). That is, the default pending icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round pending icon.

In FIG. 25(q), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by movement animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 It becomes the 2nd reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the reservation icon which was in the display position of the 4th reservation icon h14 becomes the 3rd reservation icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750 times, the system shifts to the time-saving game until symbol variation display is performed up to 950 times. Although it shifts to the play time (b time saving state), it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode from the pattern fluctuation display 10 times before the number of times of getting stuck reaches 750 times, and when it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode, a predetermined pre-reading notice. is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, a countdown display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(q), the 750th symbol variation display is started after the end of the jackpot, and accordingly, "0" indicates that the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. is displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the display of the number of times of pattern variation display until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "0 times until play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(r), the decorative design display device 208 stops displaying the decorative design combinations of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3", and the display result of failure is determined. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(r), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win is finished, so that the game shifts to the play time, and the central lower part of the display screen displays "Enter the play time!" A character is displayed to notify that effect, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation number up to the play time is switched to the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. .

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(s), the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the time of transition to play time, since special figure 2 is not reserved, symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since it has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" The player is urged to hit to the right, and the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is promoted. In addition, since it becomes a time saving state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is likely to be started, it switches from the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 that has been displayed to the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (s), four or more game balls have won the second special figure start port 232, and the first special figure 2 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. Suspended icons to fourth suspended icons h21 to h24 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated to "play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751st time", respectively. When the game shifts to the play time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is erased, and the characters "in play time" are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and the character of the number leader is displayed, indicating that the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(t), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed according to the design variable display of the special figure 2. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 25(t), the 1699th symbol variation display is being executed after the big win is completed, that is, the 949th symbol variation display is being performed after the start of the play time. . Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are respectively displayed as "play time remaining: 1 time" and "START: 1699th time". After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(u), the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the failure is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased.

In FIG. 25(v), the reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h22 becomes the first suspended icon h21, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h23 becomes the second suspended icon. The icon h22 becomes the icon h22, and the suspended icon at the display position of the fourth suspended icon h24 becomes the third suspended icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(v), the 950th symbol variation display is being executed after the start of the play time. The display of the number of start times during the period is displayed as "play time last" and "START: 1700th time", respectively.

The decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 25(w) shows the state when the 950th symbol variation display is completed after the start of the play time. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since 950 times of pattern variation display, which is the end condition of the play time, has been executed, the characters "play time end" are displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the "play time last" displayed in the upper center ”, and the characters “play time in progress” and the character number displayed in the lower right part are erased, and the end of the play time is announced, and also displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. Right hitting display is also erased. The display of the number of starts between special prizes is maintained, and "START: 1700th time" is displayed. Here, the display of the number of starts between special prizes may also be deleted. The play time is not started until another big win is achieved, as described above. On the other hand, even after that, if the special figure 1 suddenly stops with the time saving pattern, the electric support state (c time saving state) is started. It should be noted that there is a case where setting suggestions are made in the symbol variation display at the end of the playing time. For example, as shown in FIG. may appear, suggesting a setting of 4 or higher.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(x), the electric support state (b time saving state) is terminated and the normal game state is entered. It is shown. In addition, in the normal game state, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to start, the display is switched from the second reserved icon display area 282 to the first reserved icon display area 281, and in the center of the display screen is displayed, and an effect is performed to urge the player to hit left. Note that, at this time, a setting-suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. The effect to encourage left-handed hitting, for example, disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, but when it is detected that right-handed hitting continues, the effect to encourage left-handed hitting continues. be done.

In the present embodiment, at least the character that appears in the time-saving state a and the character that appears in the time-saving state b are different, that is, the type of the time-saving state can be recognized by looking at the displayed character. be. In other words, it can be said that the production modes are different between the time-saving state a and the time-saving state b. In this case, for example, the content and appearance rate of the background display, the notice to appear, or the pre-read notice may be different, or the content and appearance rate of the mission presentation may be different. Further, the display mode of the pending icon may differ depending on the rendering mode, or the pending icon may be hidden in a certain rendering mode. The display mode of the display indicating the number of times of remaining symbol variation display in the play time may be changed between the a time saving state and the normal game state after the a time saving state is completed, and the display mode is determined according to the setting. may In addition, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation displays in play time may be directly displayed numerically, or may be suggested by, for example, changes in color, shape, size, and the like. Also, a plurality of types of display modes for the display of the total number of pitches won and the number of consecutive wins may be prepared, and the mode to be displayed may be determined by setting to suggest the setting.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect of the decorative design variable display in the sudden time saving state (c time saving state) centering on the decorative design display device. In addition, even in FIG. 26, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(a), a combination of decorative designs of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 26(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is the number of lights of special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1. And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lights of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 26(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned, white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26(a), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 263rd time, and the display of the number of symbol variation displays and the prize until the play time. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "487 times left until play time" and "START: 263rd time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 26(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by movement animation, respectively, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the pending icon which was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 becomes the first pending icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It should be noted that, in the symbol variation display this time, the time saving (c time saving) is suddenly won. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 26(b), two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations is three. In addition, since the number of times of getting stuck increased by 1 time to 263 times, the display of the number of times of pattern fluctuation display until the play time and the number of times of start between special prizes are displayed as "487 times until play time" and "START: 263rd time" respectively. displayed updated. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26(c) to 26(d), it is shown that the advance notice of a group of Kopandas, in which a large number of Kopandas run, is being performed from the top to the bottom of the display screen. ing. The notice of the group of Kopandas is a notice suggesting the possibility of a sudden change in working hours, and is intended to give the player a sense of expectation for the sudden reduction in working hours. Note that the Kopanda group notice may be a notice of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a look-ahead notice.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(e), "decoration 1" is stopped in the left pattern, and then "decoration 3" is stopped in the right pattern, and the characters "petit chance!" are displayed. It is directing that there is a possibility that the working hours may suddenly be shortened. After that, as shown in FIG. 26(f), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly time saving. At this time, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 2(f), the characters "time saving 30 rush!" is displayed, and it is notified that it will shift to the electric support state (c time saving state). In the present embodiment, when shifting to the c time saving state, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 30 times. , the number of times of pattern fluctuation display in which the power supply state is maintained may differ depending on the stopped pattern.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(g), the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the time of transition to the electric sapo state, since there is no reservation of special figure 2, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (c time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" The player is urged to hit to the right, and the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is promoted. At this time, the setting suggesting ball display area 285 displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is erased, and the character of Sabohani is displayed, suggesting that it is in the c time saving state. In addition, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 may be continuously displayed even in the electric support state. In addition, since it becomes a time saving state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is likely to be started, it switches from the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 that has been displayed to the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 26(g), three game balls have won the second special figure starting port 232, and the first reserved icon of special figure 2 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. ~ third pending icons h21~h23 are displayed. In addition, the display indicating the number of remaining pattern fluctuation display times in the power support state and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated to "remaining time reduction: 29 times" and "START: 265th time", respectively. Furthermore, since the game state is a special figure low probability state, the number of fluctuation display times of the special figure that shifts to the play time is also updated, and the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the play time is changed to "485 times until the play time". displayed updated.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(h), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed according to the design variable display of the special figure 2. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 26(h), the 29th symbol variation display is being executed after shifting to the c time saving state. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays in the electric sapo state, the display of the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the play time, and the number of start times between special prizes are respectively "remaining time: 1 time", "457 times until play time", and " START: 293rd time" is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 26(i), the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of failure is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased.

In FIG. 26(j), the reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h22 becomes the first suspended icon h21, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h23 becomes the second suspended icon. The icon h22 becomes the icon h22, and the suspended icon at the display position of the fourth suspended icon h24 becomes the third suspended icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(j), the 30th pattern variation display is being executed after shifting to the c time saving state, and therefore, the display showing the number of remaining pattern variation display times in the power supply state. , The display of the number of times of pattern variation display until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are respectively displayed as "short time last", "456 times until play time", and "START: 294th time".

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 26(k), the state when the 30th pattern variation display is completed after the start of the c time saving state is shown. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since the pattern variation display of 30 times, which is the end condition of the c time saving state, is executed, the characters “time saving end” are displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and “time saving last” displayed in the upper center. and the Sabohani character displayed in the lower right part are erased to notify that the c time-saving state has ended, and the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen is also erased. The display of the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are maintained, and are displayed as "456 times to play time" and "START: 294th time", respectively. In the present embodiment, setting suggestions may be made when the c time saving state ends, or may always be made.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(l), the power supply state (c time saving state) ends and the state shifts to the normal game state, and the pattern variation display of the reserved special figure 2 is started. It is shown. In addition, in the normal game state, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to start, the display is switched from the second reserved icon display area 282 to the first reserved icon display area 281, and in the center of the display screen is displayed, and an effect is performed to urge the player to hit left. Note that, at this time, a setting-suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. The effect to encourage left-handed hitting, for example, disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, but when it is detected that right-handed hitting continues, the effect to encourage left-handed hitting continues. be done.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the production of the decorative design fluctuation display in the case of suddenly transitioning to the play time (b time reduction state) in the time reduction state (c time reduction state) centering on the decorative design display device. be. In addition, even in FIG. 27, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(g) are different from those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same, the explanation is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(h), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed according to the design variable display of the special figure 2. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 27(h), the 13th symbol variation display is being executed after shifting to the c time saving state. Also, the number of symbol variation display after the big hit is over is the 749th. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric sapo state, the display number of symbol fluctuation display times until the play time, and the number of start times between special prizes are respectively "remaining time: 13 times", "one more time until play time", and " START: 749th time" is displayed. In addition, the pattern variation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times is shifted to the play time sign production mode, and the countdown display of the number of symbol variation displays until the play time is performed, and in the center of the display screen , "1" is displayed to indicate the number of remaining symbol variation displays up to the play time. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(i), the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of failure is determined. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased.

In FIG. 27(j), the reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h22 becomes the first suspended icon h21, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h23 becomes the second suspended icon. The icon h22 becomes the icon h22, and the suspended icon at the display position of the fourth suspended icon h24 becomes the third suspended icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(j), since the number of times of symbol variation display after the end of the big win is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as a countdown display in the play time precursor production mode, suggesting that it will shift to play time. The display of the number of times and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are respectively displayed as "remaining time reduction: 12 times", "0 times until play time", and "START: 750th time".

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 27(k), the state when the 750th pattern variation display (18th pattern variation display after the start of the c time saving state) is completed after the end of the big hit is shown. ing. In accordance with this, the decorative patterns displayed in the center of the display screen are also stopped in combination with the decorative patterns out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this, and the display result of failure is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(k), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win has ended, the game shifts to the play time, and the central lower part of the display screen displays "Enter the play time!" ' is displayed to notify that effect, and the display of the number of symbol variation display rotations up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of symbol variation display times remaining in the play time, and "Remaining play time: 950 times" is displayed. be done. In addition, in this production example, the number of times of pattern fluctuation display in which the electric sapo state as c time saving state is shifted to the electric sapo state as idle time (b time saving state) and the electric sapo state is maintained is from 12 times to 950 times. Therefore, the character "Additional!!" is displayed to enhance the performance.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(l), the pending icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and were at the display position of the first pending icon h21. The suspended icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the suspended icon that was at the display position of the second suspended icon h22 becomes the first suspended icon h21, and is moved to the display position of the third suspended icon h23. The pending icon that was there becomes the second pending icon h22, and the pending icon that was at the display position of the fourth pending icon h24 becomes the third pending icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, since the game state has changed from the c time saving state to the play time (b time saving state), the words “play time in progress” and the character of the number leader are displayed at the lower right of the display screen, indicating that the game state has shifted to the play time. is reported. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(l), the display showing the number of remaining symbol variations displayed in the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are updated to "Play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751st time", respectively. ing.

In this production example, when the play time transition condition is established during the execution of the c time saving state, the play time is shifted from the c time saving state to the play time. Since it is not displayed, it can be said that it is a rare case that the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed during the play time in the present embodiment in which the game is played with the right hand during the play time. When the symbol is displayed, the play time ends, and the state shifts to c time saving state. It should be noted that even if the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed during the play time, the play time may be continued and the transition to the c time saving state may be prevented. Similarly, it is a rare case that the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed in the a time saving state that shifts after the end of the big hit, and the a time saving state ends and moves to the c time saving state. Even if the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed in the state, it may not be shifted to the c time saving state. In addition, when the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed during the play time, after the pattern fluctuation display is performed 950 times after the play time starts, the state may be shifted to the c time saving state, or conversely, c. When the conditions for shifting to the play time are established in the time saving state, the game is shifted to the play time after completion of the number of times (30 times in this production example) of symbol variation display that can be executed in the time saving state c. good too. In addition, when the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed in the a time saving state, after the symbol variation display of the number of times (in this production example, 100 times) that can be executed in the a time saving state is completed, the state is shifted to the c time saving state. can be In addition, when the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed during the play time, it may be shifted to or continued to the electric support state with the larger number of remaining time saving times. Also, when the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed in the c time saving state, it is a rare case. The c time-saving state may be continued, and the sudden transition to the c time-saving state based on the displayed time-saving design may be avoided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation displays that can be performed in the c time saving state (30 times) is less than the number of symbol variation displays that can be performed in the c time saving state (100 times), and in the c time saving state It is set so that the number of symbol variation displays that can be performed in the idle time (b time saving state) (950 times) is larger than the number of symbol variation displays that can be performed (30 times), but it is not limited to these. , You can arbitrarily set the number of times of symbol variation display in each electric support state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production in the electric support state (c time saving state) in which the time saving pattern is suddenly displayed and transitions is different from the production in the play time (b time saving state), but the same production good too.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the performance of the decorative pattern variable display in the case of winning suddenly in a short time in the pattern variable display of the number of fitting times which shifts to the play time centered on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 28, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted. The effect shown in FIG. 28(a) is the same as that in FIG. 26(a), except that the number of symbol variation displays after the big win is completed is different, so the description will be omitted.

In FIG. 28(b), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 It becomes the 2nd reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the reservation icon which was in the display position of the 4th reservation icon h14 becomes the 3rd reservation icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 750th time, the play time sign production mode is being executed, and the symbols until the play time. A countdown display of the number of variable display times is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(b), the 750th symbol variation display is started after the end of the jackpot, and accordingly, "0" indicates that the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. is displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "0 times until play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively. In addition, in this production example, time saving is suddenly won in the current symbol variation display. Thereafter, effects shown in FIGS. 28(c) to 28(e) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 28(c) to 28(e) are different from those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same, the explanation is omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(f), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, and it is reported that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly time saving. However, in this production example, the number of symbol variation displays after the end of the big win is the 750th, and at the same time the conditions for shifting to play time are established. In this case, idle time (b time saving state) is given priority over c time saving state, shifts to idle time, and suddenly time saving becomes substantially invalid. Therefore, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(f), the character of Kopanda is displayed, and the characters "Enter play time!" It is announced that it will shift to time. It should be noted that, when the transition to the short working hours and the transition to the idle time are suddenly established at the same time, the transition to the short working hours state may take precedence over the idle time. You may make it transfer to idle time after doing.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(g), the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the time of transition to play time, since special figure 2 is not reserved, symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since it has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" The player is urged to hit to the right, and the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is promoted. In addition, since it becomes a time saving state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is likely to be started, it switches from the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 that has been displayed to the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(g), three game balls have won the second special figure starting port 232, and the first reserved icon of special figure 2 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. ~ third pending icons h21~h23 are displayed. In addition, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated to "play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751st time", respectively. When the game shifts to the play time, the setting suggested ball display area 285 is erased, and the characters "in play time" are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and the character of the number leader is displayed, indicating that the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect being performed in a big win game end effect centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 29, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(a), it is shown that the 5th round of the jackpot game involving the 5R probability variable jackpot is being executed. In this embodiment, since the combination of the jackpot symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" results in a jackpot, the player can recognize that the probability variable jackpot is achieved. During the jackpot game, there may be a case where a promotion effect for informing whether or not the 10R probability variable big win is achieved, and setting suggestions may be included in the promotion effect. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 29(a), it is the fifth round, and 48 game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234a, and 720 prize balls are obtained. there is

FIG. 29(b) shows a state in which 10 game balls have won in the second variable winning hole 235a in the fifth round. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(b), when 10 game balls enter the second variable winning hole 235a and the second variable winning hole 235a closes, the lower right portion of the display screen displays "Jackpot end." ' is displayed to notify that the jackpot will end. Also, at this time, a character may be displayed in the center of the display screen. As for the characters that appear here, the table shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is used to determine whether the characters can appear and the type of characters to be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 29(b), the player's character TDR is displayed together with the line "Oraa!!", indicating to the player that the setting is 5 or higher. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 29(b1) to 29(b5), the character CYP of Chappie is displayed along with the line "Let's go to Afro", suggesting that it is an odd number setting. The character GYJ of the old man is displayed along with the line "!!!", suggesting that it is an even number setting, and the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed along with the characters "!!!", suggesting that the setting is 2 or higher. , and the character KPD of Kopanda is displayed along with the line "It's a chance", suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher, and the character MCK of Mr. Machiko is displayed along with the line "It's great!" 6 is suggested to be rich.

After that, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(c) shows a state in which the 5th round is over and the big win end effect is being performed. Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 29(c) shows a state in which an effect is being performed in which it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot is being won. When the jackpot ending performance starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" In addition, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of won prize balls displayed in the lower right of the display screen counts up, showing how the 750 prize balls obtained in this big hit are added. .

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 30, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 30(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in a stopped state, and in the fourth design/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative design display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30(a) is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the special figure 1 reserved icon A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 30(a), four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these four reserved icons h11 of special figure 1, All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (circular, non-patterned, white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 30(a), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 199th, and the number of symbol variation displays and the special prize are displayed until the play time. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "551 times until play time" and "START: 199th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 30(b), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 It becomes the 2nd reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the reservation icon which was in the display position of the 4th reservation icon h14 becomes the 3rd reservation icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, since the number of times of getting stuck has increased by 1 time to 200 times, the display of the number of times of pattern fluctuation display until play time and the number of times of start between special prizes are displayed as "550 times until play time" and "START: 200th time" respectively. displayed updated. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(c), the decorative design is variably displayed. In addition, the symbol variation display this time is the 200th rotation after the end of the big win, and the condition is established that the setting suggesting ball appears every 100th rotation after the end of the big win. Therefore, the color of the setting suggestion ball that appears is selected using the table shown in FIG. 16(a) or (b). At the timing shown in FIG. 30(c), the game is in the normal game state before transitioning to the play time, so the pre-play time/setting suggested ball selection table shown in FIG. is selected by As shown in FIGS. 30(c) to 30(e), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a star-shaped setting suggestion ball is shown moving from the upper left corner of the display screen toward the lower right. there is The setting suggested balls shown in FIGS. 30(c) to 30(e) are blue setting suggested balls, and before the play time, they appear only at a setting of 4 or higher, suggesting a setting of 4 or higher. It can be said that The setting suggesting ball that has appeared is reflected in the display position of the first setting suggesting ball s11 in the setting suggesting ball display area 285, and the first setting suggesting ball s11 to the third setting suggesting ball s13 that have been displayed are respectively The second suggested ball s12 to the fourth suggested ball s14 are displayed, and the displayed fourth suggested ball s14 is erased. That is, the history of the most recent four setting suggesting balls among the set suggesting balls that have appeared is displayed in the setting suggesting ball display area 285 . In this embodiment, it is in the non-electric support state, and appears every 100 games after the big win is finished. In addition, it may appear even in the electric support state. Also, the conditions for the appearance of suggested balls to be set are not limited to those described above. It may appear when a variation pattern (for example, SP reach) is executed. In addition, points are added each time one of a plurality of types of game execution conditions (for example, the winning of a game ball to the first special figure start port 230, the execution of a ready-to-win effect, the execution of a notice effect, etc.) is satisfied. A setting suggestion ball may appear every time the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 points). In this case, for example, the points to be added may differ depending on the game execution conditions established (for example, 2 points are added when the first special figure start port 230 is won, and 10 points are added when the ready-to-win effect is executed. is added, and 15 points are added when the advance notice effect is executed, etc.). In addition, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of each color of the setting suggestion ball differs before the play time and after the play time, but may be the same. After that, the pattern variation display ends at the timing shown in FIG. It is displaying stop by combination. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "683" in accordance with this.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect including notification of transition to play time centered on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 31, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

31(a1) to (a4) show a variation pattern of no reach loss without variation shortening being executed. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(a1), the decorative design combinations of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 31(a1), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned, white display mode).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 31(a1), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 749th, and the number of symbol variation displays until the play time is displayed and the special prize is displayed. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "1 time left until play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 31(a2), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by movement animation, respectively, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the pending icon which was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 becomes the first pending icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750 times, the system shifts to the time-saving game until symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. Although it shifts to the play time (b time saving state), it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode from the pattern fluctuation display 10 times before the number of times of getting stuck reaches 750 times, and when it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode, a predetermined pre-reading notice. is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, the countdown display of the number of symbol variation displays until the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(a2), the 750th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit, and accordingly, "0" indicates that the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. is displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "0 times until play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(a3), the variable display of the decorative design is continuously performed. Note that the display of "0" in the countdown has been deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a4), when the variation time (for example, 10 seconds) of the variation pattern of no reach loss without variation shortening elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "decoration 4-decoration 5- The combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of failure is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31(a4), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win is completed, so that the play time shifts to the play time. A character is displayed to inform that effect, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation number up to the play time is switched to the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation displays of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. .

31(b1) to (b4) show a variation pattern of no reach loss accompanied by variation shortening being executed. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(b1), the decorative design combinations of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (b1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in a stopped state, and in the fourth design/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative design display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 31 (b1), four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these four reserved icons h11 of special figure 1, All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (circular, non-patterned, white display mode).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 31(b1), the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of being stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 749th time, and the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed and the special prize is displayed. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "1 time left until play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 31(b2), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 It becomes the 2nd reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the reservation icon which was in the display position of the 4th reservation icon h14 becomes the 3rd reservation icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750 times, the system shifts to the time-saving game until symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. Although it shifts to the play time (b time saving state), it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode from the pattern fluctuation display 10 times before the number of times of getting stuck reaches 750 times, and when it shifts to the play time predictive performance mode, a predetermined pre-reading notice. is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, the countdown display of the number of symbol variation displays until the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(b2), the 750th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit, and accordingly, "0" indicates that the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. is displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "0 times until play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (b3), when the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of reach-less deviation with fluctuation reduction has passed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of failure is determined. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31(b3), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win is finished, so that the game shifts to the play time, and the central lower part of the display screen shows "Enter the play time!" A character is displayed to inform that effect, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation number up to the play time is switched to the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation displays of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the transition to the play time is notified at the end of the symbol variation display, the variation time of the 750th symbol variation display, which is the condition for shifting to the play time after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, it can be said that the time from the start of the symbol variation display to the notification of the shift to the play time is different.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect including notification of transition to play time centered on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 31, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

The effect example shown in FIG. 32 shows a state in which the SP reach out variation pattern is executed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 31(a1) and 31(a2), so description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(c), "decoration 4" is stop-displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the ready-to-win state is entered. After that, as shown in FIGS. 32(c) to 32(e), the SP ready-to-win effect is performed. Note that the SP ready-to-win effects shown in FIGS. 32(c) to 32(e) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 18(l) to 19(q), so description thereof will be omitted.

After that, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(f), the feudal lord's character is defeated, and the decorative designs fluctuate with combinations of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4". ing. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. It is notified that the symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Here, for example, in the case of a predetermined setting (for example, setting 4 or more), as shown in FIG. It may be displayed in a slanted display mode to notify that the play time will shift and to suggest a setting. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing notification of transition to play time, an effect of setting suggestion may always be included. In this case, a plurality of types of notification modes may be prepared, and the content of setting suggestion may differ depending on the type of notification mode executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(h), the SP ready-to-win effect is shifted to the default background image, and at the timing shown in FIG. Press to confirm and display. It should be noted that the characters "Enter play time!!" are continuously displayed until the decorative symbols are displayed. In this way, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the mode of notifying the shift to the play time is different. It should be noted that even when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, for example, it may be notified that the play time is shifted to the mode shown in FIG. 31(a4).

32(f2) to (i2) in FIG. 32 is an example of effect following FIG. 32(e), and is an example of effect in the case of the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win. is shown for In this case, since there is no transition to play time, the effects shown in FIGS. An effect similar to the effect shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, depending on the variation pattern of the symbol variation display that will result in the transition to the play time, the notification of the transition to the play time is changed by changing the time after the symbol variation display starts and the display mode. However, the notification mode may be different by other methods, for example, the length of execution of the notification of transition to play time may be different. In addition, in the pattern variation display to be shifted to the play time, the transition to the play time is made before the lost decorative pattern is displayed, that is, before the player can recognize that the lost decorative pattern is displayed. You may make it alert|report of a thing.

Further, in this production example, when the variation pattern of the pattern variation display that will shift to the play time is a variation pattern that will be missed in the SP reach, when the notification of the shift to the play time is displayed. However, for example, when the SP reach that results in a loss is executed, the transition to the play time is not notified, and the transition to the play time is performed at the first symbol fluctuation display that transitions to the play time. You may make it alert|report that. As a result, it is recognized that the game time will suddenly shift to the play time at the next fluctuation when the SP reach is lost, and the effect can be sharpened, and the game can be livened up in some cases.

Also, for example, when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, such as the variation pattern of the pattern variation display that will shift to the play time is lost in the SP reach, the content of the effect is changed, and the pseudo run is lost. You may make it replace the production content with the production of .

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a pre-reading forewarning effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, even in FIG. 33, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(a), the decorative design combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in a stopped state, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 33(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned, white display mode).

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(a), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 294th, and the display of the number of symbol variation displays and the special prize until the play time. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "456 times until play time" and "START: 294th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 33(b), the pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by movement animation, respectively, and the pending icon that was in the display position of the first pending icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the pending icon which was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 becomes the first pending icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(b), one game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations is two. In addition, in this winning, as a result of pre-reading the big-hit random number value, it is a result of a big hit, and a pre-reading result information command is output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and as a result, as a pre-reading notice at the time of winning A character of the teacher is displayed, and a second suspension icon h12 is displayed in a sabohani display mode as a suspension notice. Machiko-sensei's character is erased after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). On the other hand, the second suspended icon h12 in the Sabohani display mode is continuously displayed until the suspended symbol variation display ends. In addition, since the number of times of getting stuck increased by 1 time to 295 times, the display of the number of times of pattern fluctuation display until the play time and the number of times of start between special prizes are displayed as "455 times until play time" and "START: 295th time" respectively. displayed updated.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(c), the symbol variation display is completed twice from the timing shown in FIG. It is The variation icon h0 does not change from what was displayed in the display mode of Sabohani at the time of winning the first special figure start port 230. It should be noted that the display mode may change until the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is started. As a result, it may be possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the big win. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(c), there are three pending special figures 1, and three pending icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area 281. In addition, the number of times of getting stuck is 297 times, and the display of the number of times of symbol fluctuation display until play time and the number of times of start between special prizes are updated with "453 times until play time" and "START: 297th time" respectively. there is

After that, in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(d), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, indicating that the game has entered the ready-to-win state. Thereafter, effects shown in FIGS. 33(d) to 33(h) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 33(d) to 33(h) are performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 18(l) to 19(s), so description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(i), the decorative design combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for 10R probability variable jackpot determination is stopped and displayed. Also, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 33(i) is stop-displayed with "○", and the mini-symbol is also stop-displayed with the combination of "777".

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is shown that at least one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notices may be executed in the normal game state.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect including notification of shift to play time centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, even in FIG. 34, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(a), a combination of decorative designs of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 34(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed in a stopped state, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34(a) is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the special figure 1 reserved icon A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 34(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and among these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12, The first pending icon h11 is in the default display mode, but the second pending icon h12 is suddenly subjected to prefetching of the time saving pattern, and the display mode is displayed with a blue circle mark, and the prefetching notice is displayed. It is done.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 34(a), the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 748th, and the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed and the special prize is displayed. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "Two more times until play time" and "START: 748th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 34(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the pending icon which was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 becomes the first pending icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750 times, the system shifts to the time-saving game until symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. Although it shifts to play time (b time saving state), it shifts to the play time precursor production mode from the pattern fluctuation display 10 times before the number of times of addiction reaches 750 times, shifts to the play time precursor production mode, and until the play time. A countdown display of the number of symbol variations is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(b), the 749th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big win, and accordingly, "1" indicates that the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. is displayed in the center of the display screen. Also, the display of the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of starting between special prizes are updated to "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 34(b), two or more game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is four. In addition, the fourth reservation of the special figure 1 is a state in which the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is reserved, and for convenience of explanation, the fourth reservation icon h14 is hatched, but in the default display mode is displayed. This is because when the first reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the pattern variation display ends, it shifts to play time and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is likely to start, so avoid this and aim for a big hit. Therefore, in order to prevent the inconvenience of stopping the launch, the pending notice is limited. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game time indication effect mode is entered, the execution of the advance notice at the time of winning shown in FIG. Execution of the pre-reading notice regarding the symbol variation display held after the symbol variation display that triggers the change of the state is restricted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34(c), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1", and the display result of failure is determined. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased.

In FIG. 34(d), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 becomes the second suspended icon. The icon h12 becomes the icon h12, and the suspended icon at the display position of the fourth suspended icon h14 becomes the third suspended icon h13. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(d), since the number of times of symbol variation display after the end of the big win is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as a countdown display in the play time precursor effect mode, suggesting that it will shift to play time. 0 times left until play time" and "START: 750th time" are displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34(e), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3", and the display result of failure is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is also erased. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(e), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big win is completed, so that the play time shifts to the play time, and the central lower part of the display screen displays "Enter play time!". A character is displayed to inform that effect, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation number up to the play time is switched to the display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation displays of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. .

In this embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice is restricted for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 held after the symbol variation display that will shift to the play time, but suddenly the time saving symbol is elected. Also for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is suspended after the symbol variation display is suspended, the execution of the pre-reading notice is restricted. As a result, for example, after shifting to the electric sapo state, it may be possible to prevent the game property from being damaged by aiming for a big hit with the special figure 1.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the pre-reading announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, even in FIG. 35, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 35(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 35(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned, white display mode).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(a), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after transitioning to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 739th, and the number of symbol variation displays and special prize are displayed until the play time. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "11 more times until play time" and "START: 739th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 35(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the pending icon which was in the display position of the second pending icon h12 becomes the first pending icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 35(b), since the number of symbol variation displays remaining until the transition to the play time is 10, the transition to the play time sign effect mode is performed, and the number of symbol variation displays counted down until the play time is displayed. is started, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, "10" is displayed in the center of the display screen, indicating that the game will shift to the play time after 10 symbol variations are displayed. Further, the display of the number of times of pattern variation display until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "10 times until play time" and "START: 740th time", respectively. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(b), one game ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, and two special figures 1 are reserved. In addition, a pre-reading notice is performed for the second hold of this special figure 1, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of Sabohani. In the present embodiment, when the play time indication effect mode is entered, execution of the winning advance notice shown in FIG. That is, some of the multiple types of pre-reading notices are restricted. It should be noted that execution of all types of pre-reading announcements may be restricted when the mode is shifted to the play time precursor effect mode. In addition, in the play time predictive effect mode, setting suggestion may be performed although pre-reading notice is not performed. In addition, when a certain notice (for example, holding notice) permitted to be executed in the play time sign effect mode is performed and a big win is achieved, the game may shift to a probability variable big win with an electric sapo. Also, for example, while the symbol variation display is being performed a certain number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.), it is configured to be able to shift to a pre-reading mode in which a certain kind of pre-reading notice may be executed, and a play time prediction When shifting to the effect mode, the shift to the look-ahead mode may be avoided. In other words, when the number of symbol variation displays remaining until the transition to the idle time is 10, the transition to the look-ahead mode may not be performed. It should be noted that the look-ahead mode may be performed while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and the look-ahead mode itself may function as a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(c), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed according to the design variable display of the special figure 1. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 35(c), the 742nd symbol variation display is being executed after the big win. That is, the third symbol variation display is being executed after shifting to the play time sign effect mode. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "8" is displayed in the center of the display screen, indicating that the play time will be shifted to after eight symbol variations are displayed. Further, the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the play time and the display of the number of times of start between special prizes are updated to "8 more times until the play time" and "START: 742nd time", respectively. Also, between the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the timing shown in FIG. , There are three pending special figures 1. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(c), the variable symbol display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is performed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the sabohani display mode. After that, "decoration 7" is stop-displayed on the left pattern and the right pattern, respectively, to enter the ready-to-win state. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 35(d) to (i) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 33(d) to (i), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing step by step an example of mini-game effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, even in FIG. 36, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), so description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(c) shows the state where the first mini-game is started. When the first mini-game is started, an animation of pressing the production button 136 is displayed in the center of the display screen along with the characters "Hit!" It shows the operation acceptance period.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(d) shows that a second mini-game different from the first mini-game is being started while the first mini-game is being executed. there is The second mini-game is an omikuji mini-game, and a second mini-game display area is displayed on the display screen. The item "great good luck" is displayed side by side, and by stopping and displaying a hand-shaped cursor whose display position changes at high speed at the timing of operating the production button 136, one of "small good luck", "middle good luck", and "big good luck" is displayed. points to the item of The second mini-game is a mini-game that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the first mini-game in the order of "great good luck", "medium good luck", and "small good luck". It can be said that the degree of expectation for the big hit is high in the order of Kokichi. In this production example, the second mini-game started after the first mini-game is a mini-game whose result is displayed prior to the first mini-game.

After that, when the production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 36(e) and the cursor points to "great good luck", the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. is erased, and only the item "Good luck" is displayed, and the display of "Lucky with great luck!" is switched to "Lucky! Strong cut-in!".

After that, when the second mini-game ends, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(g) shows how the first mini-game resumes. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, a cut-in image is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 36(h). This cut-in image is an effect in which the lord's character is displayed up close together with a speech balloon with the words "It's a game!", and the cut-in image shown in FIG. This is a strong cut-in image. In addition, there are cases where a weak cut-in image is displayed without the Bancho's face in the speech bubble, and the final result is when the strong cut-in image is displayed rather than when the weak cut-in image is displayed. The jackpot pattern is easy to be displayed. After that, when the strong cut-in image is erased, effects shown in FIGS. 36(i) to 36(o) are performed. 36(i) to 36(o) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 18(l) to 19(v) and 19(w') to 19(y'). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

In this embodiment, the mini-game may be played in the normal game state. The player may be focused on transitioning to play time. That is, in the normal game state, there is a period in which a plurality of mini-games are overlapped and executed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, even in FIG. 37, only the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated, the first special design display device 212, the second special design display device 214, the normal design display device 210, the special design 1 reservation lamp 218, the special design 2 reservation lamp 220 , and the normal map holding lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is displayed still. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 37(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , so as to indicate that, "x" is displayed in both the special figure 1 symbol variation medium notification area and the special figure 2 symbol variation medium notification area.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed by the number of reserved special figures 1 reserved lamp 218 and the number of reserved special figures 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284, as well as the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 And the number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the number of lighting of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reservation number display area 284.

In FIG. 37(a), four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these four reserved icons h11 of special figure 1, Among h12, h13, and h14, the second pending icon h12 to the fourth pending icon h14 are all in the default display mode (circular plain and white display mode), but the first pending icon h11 is a display mode of sabohani, and a suspension notice (prefetch notice) is performed.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 37(a), the number of symbol variation displays (number of times of getting stuck) after shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win is the 325th, and the display of the number of symbol variation displays and the special prize until the play time. The display of the number of start times during the interval is displayed as "426 more times until play time" and "START: 324th time", respectively. Further, the four suggested balls s11 to s14 displayed in the suggested ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

In FIG. 37(b), the reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The suspended icon moved to become the variable icon h0, the suspended icon at the display position of the second suspended icon h12 becomes the first suspended icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the suspended icon at the display position of the third suspended icon h13 It becomes the 2nd reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the reservation icon which was in the display position of the 4th reservation icon h14 becomes the 3rd reservation icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 37(b), since the number of symbol variation displays after the end of the big hit is the 325th, the display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are respectively 425 times left to the time" and "START: 325th time" are updated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37(c), there is a case where an advance notice display effect is performed in which the display mode of the display of the number of times of symbol variation display until the play time is changed for a predetermined time (for example, one second). In this production example, the notice is given by changing the color of the display of the number of symbol variations to be displayed until the playing time. may change, the display position may be changed, or it may be erased for a predetermined period of time. Moreover, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of variations, and to vary the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the variations. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37(c'), at least a part of the characters may be changed in the display of the number of symbol variation displays until the play time. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 37(c'), the display color of the symbol variation display count until the play time is also changed. good. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37(c''), the big hit notice may be performed by changing the display mode of the display of the number of starts between special prizes. Here, the change mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 37(c''), and various change modes as described above can be adopted. In addition, depending on the change mode, it may suggest that the jackpot is rich or the probability variable jackpot is rich, or, for example, it may suggest that winning in a short time c is strong. In addition, it goes without saying that the above-described jackpot announcement may be made even in the time saving state a and the time saving state c before transitioning to the play time, for example, the remaining symbol variation display in the time saving state c shown in FIG. The big hit notice may also be performed by applying the display of the number of times and the display of the number of remaining symbol variation displays in the time saving state a shown in FIG. 23(c). In this case, the execution mode of the big hit notice in the time saving state or the time saving state c may be different from the execution mode of the big win notice in the normal game state. Also, in this example of effect, the big hit notice in the symbol variation display being executed has been explained, but it may be executed as a look-ahead notice. In addition, when the above-mentioned big hit announcement is made and then the game shifts to a big win, after the big win game related to the big win is finished, it is executed in a normal performance mode (default mode). Also, the above-described big hit announcement effect may not be executed in the play time indication effect mode. Thereafter, effects shown in FIGS. 37(d) to 37(j) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 37(d) to 37(j) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 36(i) to 36(o), so description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, a hold notice is given as a look-ahead notice by displaying a hold icon, which is a display mode of Sabohani. It may be a continuous notice in which a predetermined effect such as to perform is executed, or a pre-read notice that is executed only once. In addition, it is possible to display a plurality of types of display modes of the pending notice, and it is needless to say that the degree of expectation for the big win may differ depending on the displayed mode.

Also, in this production example, an example of execution before shifting to the play time has been shown, but at least one of the above-described big-hit announcement production and pre-reading announcement may not be executed during the play time, or the big-hit Both the advance notice effect and the look-ahead notice may be executed.

In addition, in this example of effect, it may be executed before the play time when the display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time is displayed, and may not be executed after the play time is over, or after the play time is over, The big hit notice may be performed by changing the display mode of the display of the number of starts between special prizes.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but a display device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, , a sub display device, etc.) may be provided, and the display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes may be displayed on this display device.

In the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
Notification means capable of executing a plurality of notifications [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 etc.],
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as " It is a time-saving state that may shift when the first number of times [for example, 750 times] is reached,
After the second time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the second time saving state is displayed. The time-saving state ends,
After the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state does not start It will not transition to play time again until ],
One of the plurality of notifications is the first notification [for example, the play time information display shown in FIG. 21(b), etc.],
The first notification is a recognizable notification about the execution status of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. and information indicating the number of symbol fluctuation display after the jackpot is displayed],
The informing means is means capable of executing the first informing in relation to power-on [for example, as shown in FIGS. and play time information is displayed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine with a characteristic notification means.

In addition, according to this gaming machine, the information of the notification regarding the second time saving state may be used as a reference for judgment by the store clerk of the amusement arcade to determine whether or not to initialize.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notifications, or may be capable of executing notifications other than a plurality of notifications. Also, the notification means may always perform a plurality of notifications, or may not perform a plurality of notifications.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if only the second time saving state ends Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the state other than the second time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

Also, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the second time-saving state may not be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A state other than the second time saving state may not be started. In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state may not necessarily start, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A second time saving state may be initiated.

In addition, the second time saving state may not be started only until the big hit after the second time saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time saving state ends and the big hit Also, the second time saving state may not be started.

In addition, the first notification may be recognizable only for the execution status of the second time-saving state, or may be recognizable for situations other than the execution status of the second time-saving state. good too. In addition, the first notification may always be made to recognize the execution status of the second time-saving state, or may not be made to recognize the execution status of the second time-saving state.

In addition, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification in relation to the power being turned on, or may be capable of notifying other than the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. may also be feasible. Further, the notification means may always execute the first notification in relation to the power being turned on, or may not execute the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. There may be

In addition, "the first notification is a notification that is at least recognizable before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state ends [for example, 21(b) and 21(b'), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays information indicating whether or not the play time has been executed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, depending on the situation when the power is turned on, there are cases in which the clerk of the amusement center can respond in various ways. While it is possible to create a situation in which a game can be played, the second time-saving state is not executed until the jackpot is won by not initializing. Also, for example, during the execution of the second time-saving state, by initializing, it is possible to prevent the player from suddenly starting in an advantageous state, and fairness can be maintained. In some cases, it may be possible to provide a player with services immediately after opening the store. Further, for example, before the execution of the second time-saving state, by initializing, the symbol variation display can increase the number of rotations up to a predetermined number of rotations. It may be possible to reduce the number of rotations by the number of rotations for the previous day.

Here, the first notification may be recognizable only before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state ends, or the second Before the time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is ended, it may be possible to recognize things other than that. In addition, the first notification may at least make sure that the second time saving state is before the start and that the second time saving state is after the end, or the second time saving state There may be a case where at least it is not recognized that it is before the time saving state is started and that it is after the second time saving state is finished.

In addition, "the first notification is a notification that may include information about the number of times of engagement before the power is cut off [for example, as shown in FIG. , information indicating the number of times the pattern variation display after the jackpot ends before the power is turned off (the number of times it gets stuck) is displayed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the first notification may contain only information about the number of times of getting stuck before the power is cut off, or information other than the information about the number of times of getting stuck before the power is cut off. may also be included. Also, the first notification may necessarily include information on the number of times of getting stuck before the power is cut off, but may not include information on the number of times of getting stuck before the power is cut off. There may be.

In addition, when ``after the execution of the first notification, the first condition [for example, as shown in FIG. Terminate [for example, as shown in FIG. 21(c), after the play time information is displayed, the play time information is erased when the effect button 136 is operated],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, when the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is performed, only the first notification may be terminated, or after the first notification is performed, the first condition is satisfied. Then, the notification other than the first notification may also end. Further, after the first notification is executed, if the first condition is satisfied, the first notification may be terminated without fail, or if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is performed , the first notification may not end.

Further, after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated only when the first condition is satisfied, or after the first notification is executed, conditions other than the first condition may be terminated. The first notification may end even if the condition of is satisfied. Further, if the first condition is satisfied only after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated, or the first condition may be satisfied even after the first notification is executed. is established, the first notification may end.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notifications is the second notification [for example, display of the number of symbol variations displayed until play time shown in FIG. 18(a), etc.],
The second notification is a notification different from the first notification,
The second notification is notification of information regarding the second time-saving state to the player [for example, as shown in FIG. etc],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the player may be able to select the game machine to play with reference to the information of the second notification.

Here, the second notification may be a notification of only information regarding the second time saving state for the player, or a notification including information other than information regarding the second time saving state for the player. good. In addition, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information about the second time-saving state for the player, or a notification that may not include information about the second time-saving state for the player. good.

Note that the second notification may be completely different from the first notification, or may be partially different.

Further, "the second notification is a notification including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, as shown in FIG. etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second notification may be a notification including information suggesting only the number of times of getting stuck, or may be a notification including information suggesting something other than the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information that at least suggests the number of times that a person has been fitted in, or may be a notification that may not include information that suggests the number of times that a person has been fitted.

Further, "the second notification is a notification including information indicating at least the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number [for example, in FIG. 18(a) As shown, information regarding the number of starts between special prizes (TS) is reported, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
Here, the second notification may be a notification including only information suggesting at least the number of times the special symbols are varied and displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting is the first number of times. The notification may include information other than information suggesting at least the number of times of variable display of special symbols until it becomes. In addition, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information suggesting at least the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting is equal to or greater than the first number of times. It may be a notification that may not include information suggesting at least the number of times of variable display of special symbols until it becomes.

Also, "the second notification is a notification that can take one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second notification may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
After the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. The notification of changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to play a game while attracting the player's attention by obscuring the information about the second time-saving state until the second condition is established.

Here, the second notification may take only one aspect out of a plurality of aspects, or may take an aspect other than one aspect out of a plurality of aspects. can be anything. Further, the second notification may always take one aspect out of the plurality of aspects, or may not take one aspect out of the plurality of aspects.

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second notification may be performed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, a notification other than the second notification may be performed. may be executed. Also, the second notification may always be performed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second notification may not be performed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Further, the second notification may be performed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second notification may be performed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second notification may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second notification may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is met after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, only the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the notification other than the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode, If a condition other than the second condition is established after execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is satisfied other than after the execution of the second notification is started in the first mode. When the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started only in the first mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second notification is started in a mode other than the mode, the second notification may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the game control means can start a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state), etc.] is a means,
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in a case other than when is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. It may not be started with.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
A game table comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time-saving state [for example, an electric sapo state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state) etc.] in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted ,
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and the transition to the low probability state (hereinafter, " number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
The third time-saving state is not started in the second time-saving state Since it does not, the "special figure E" that is displayed only in special figure 1 will not be displayed, so the c time saving state will not be started, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in cases other than when is displayed. In addition, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may not be started.

Moreover, only the third time saving state may not be started in the second time saving state, and states other than the third time saving state may not be started in the second time saving state. Moreover, the third time saving state may not always be started in the second time saving state, and the third time saving state may be started in the second time saving state.

Also, "When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number [for example, 950 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
After the third time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbols that are out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the third time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the second number of times and the third number of times, the third number of times is the smaller number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if only the second time saving state ends Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the state other than the second time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started, even if only the third time-saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the state other than the third time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the transition to the low probability state is performed,
The number of times of fitting is the number of times including the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the a time saving state Also, the number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed],
After the first time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number [for example, 100 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the first time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
After the second time-saving state is started, when the second time-saving special symbol variable display result is continuously displayed without a big win (for example, 950 times, etc.), the second time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the second number of times and the fourth number of times, the second number of times is the larger number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the number of times of getting stuck is counted even during execution of the first time-saving state, it may be positioned as a happy function for the player. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to avoid becoming too advantageous to the player.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or the number of times after the first time saving state is started The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times the results of the variable display of the special symbols are displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started may be always included, or the special number after the first time saving state is started It may be the number of times that may not include the number of times the results of the variable display of the symbols are displayed.

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if only the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the state other than the first time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state may not end if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if only the second time saving state ends Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the state other than the second time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, "the symbol display means is means including first symbol display means [eg, first special symbol display device 212, etc.] and second symbol display means [eg, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] can be,
Variable display of special symbols by the second symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") is variable display of special symbols by the first symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the time-saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] may be displayed,
There is no case where the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the execution of the second pattern variation display,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the pattern display means may include only the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or the pattern display means other than the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. may contain. The pattern display means may always include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or may not include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. can be anything.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, as a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, only the time reduction symbol may be displayed, and as a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, symbols other than the time reduction symbol are also displayed. There may be cases. Further, the time saving pattern may always be displayed as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display, or the time saving pattern may not be displayed as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display.

Further, the time saving pattern may be displayed only as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result other than the result of the execution of the first pattern variation display. There may be cases.

In addition, it is not necessary that only the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display, and designs other than the time-saving design are also displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display. It does not matter if there is no case. In addition, the time-saving design may not necessarily be displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display, or the time-saving design may be displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display. .

In addition, the time saving pattern may not be displayed only as a result of the execution of the second pattern variation display, and the time saving pattern is displayed as a result other than the result of the execution of the second pattern variation display. It does not matter if there is no case.

Also, `` After the second time-saving state is started and the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, the normal game state [for example, special low probability normal pattern low probability state, etc.] ,
The second time saving state is not started until the big hit after the second time saving state ends,
The third time-saving state may start until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit [for example, even after the play time ends, "Special E" When displayed, shift to c time saving state, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may be shifted only to the normal game state, or the second time-saving state is started and a big hit. After the second time saving state ends without becoming, it may also shift to a game state other than the normal game state. In addition, after the second time-saving state is started and the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal game state, or the second time-saving state is started and a big hit. After the second time-saving state ends without becoming, there may be a case where it does not shift to the normal game state.

In addition, the second time saving state is started and only after the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may be shifted to the normal game state, or the second time saving state is started and a big hit. Even after the second time saving state ends without becoming, you may shift to the normal game state. In addition, only the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, the normal game state may be entered, or a game state other than the second time-saving state is started. After the second time-saving state ends without a big hit, the game state may be shifted to the normal game state.

Also, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the second time-saving state may not be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A game state other than the second time saving state may not be started. In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state may not necessarily start, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, There may be cases where a second time saving state is initiated.

In addition, the second time saving state may not be started only until the big hit after the second time saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time saving state ends and the big hit Also, the second time saving state may not be started.

In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the third time-saving state may be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A game state other than the third time saving state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started from the end of the second time saving state until the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit A state may not be initiated.

In addition, the third time-saving state may be started only until the big hit after the second time-saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time-saving state ends and the big hit. Also, a third time saving state may be started.

In addition, "the third time-saving state may be started before the number of times of fitting reaches the first number [for example, as shown in FIG. may be transferred, etc.],
In the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the second time saving state starts [for example, as shown in FIG. is executed 750 times, transition to play time, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, only the third time-saving state may be started before the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, and before the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times other than the third time-saving state A gaming state may be initiated. In addition, the third time-saving state may always be started before the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number, and the third time-saving state may not start before the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number. good too.

In addition, the third time-saving state may be started only before the number of times of addiction reaches the first number, or the third time-saving state may be started other than before the number of times of addiction reaches the first number. may be started.

In addition, it is equipped with a production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
One production of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second production is a production that at least suggests information about the second time-saving state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of renderings, or may be capable of executing other than multiple renderings. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Moreover, the second production may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Further, "the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information regarding the number of starts between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

Further, "the second effect is information suggesting at least the number of times the special symbols are changed until the number of fits reaches the first number [for example, as shown in FIG. 18(a), play time Information on the number of times the pattern changes are displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state) etc.] in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted ,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state etc.],
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as "fit number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
The normal gaming state is a gaming state that is the low probability state and is a non-electric support state,
In the normal game state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, and the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design (hereinafter referred to as "first case [e.g., in FIG. 28 As shown in the figure, the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit is a condition for transitioning to the play time, and the time-saving symbol is suddenly displayed at the 750th rotation, etc.]).
In the first case, the third time saving state is not started, and the second time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. If the symbol variation display that satisfies the conditions for transition is suddenly stopped and displayed with the time saving symbol, it will not transition to the c time saving state, but will transition to play time, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the normal game state, or may be capable of starting states other than the normal game state. Further, the game control means may always start the normal game state, or may not start the normal game state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in cases other than when is displayed. In addition, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may not be started.

In addition, in the normal game state, the number of times of getting stuck may be the first number, and only the time-saving symbols may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbols. It may be the first number of times, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbols, symbols other than the time-saving symbols may also be displayed. In addition, in the normal game state, the number of times of getting stuck may be the first number of times, and the time-saving symbols may always be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbols, or in the normal game state, the number of times of getting stuck may be the first number of times. And, as a result of the variable display of the special design, the time saving design may not be displayed.

In addition, only in the normal game state, the number of times of getting stuck may be the first number, and the time saving pattern may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or in the game state other than the normal game state. Also, there may be a case where the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, and the time saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design.

Also, in the first case, the third time saving state is not started, only the second time saving state may be started, and in the first case, the third time saving state is not started, and the second A game state other than the time saving state may be started. Also, in the first case, the third time-saving state is not started, and the second time-saving state may always be started, and in the first case, the third time-saving state is not started, and the second There may be cases where the time saving state of is not started.

Also, in the first case, only the third time-saving state is not started, and the second time-saving state may be started, and in the first case, a game state other than the third time-saving state is started. Instead, the second time saving state may be started. Also, only in the first case, the third time saving state is not started, the second time saving state may be started, and even in cases other than the first case, the third time saving state is not started , a second time-saving state may be initiated.

Also, "When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number [for example, 950 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
After the third time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbols that are out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the third time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the second number of times and the third number of times, the third number of times is the smaller number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if only the second time saving state ends Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the state other than the second time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started, even if only the third time-saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the state other than the third time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

Also, "In the third time-saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time-saving state transitions to the second time-saving state [for example, FIG. 27 (i) ~ As shown in (l) of the same figure, when the number of times of symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot in the short time c state is the 750th symbol variation display, the game shifts to play time, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the number of times of symbol variation display in the electric sapo state increases, the amusement of the game may be improved.

Here, in the third time-saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, only the transition from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state may occur, and in the third time-saving state, When the number of times reaches the first number, the game state may be shifted from the third time-saving state to a game state other than the second time-saving state. Also, in the third time-saving state, when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may always shift to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, the number of times of fitting When becomes the first number of times, there may be cases where the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state does not occur.

Also, in the third time-saving state, only when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may shift to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, the number of times of fitting The third time saving state may be transferred to the second time saving state in cases other than the first number of times. Also, only in the third time-saving state, when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may shift to the second time-saving state, or the game state other than the third time-saving state Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the third time saving state may be transferred to the second time saving state.

In addition, "In the second time-saving state, it does not shift from the second time-saving state to the third time-saving state Since normal game balls do not win in the figure start port 230, the "special figure E" displayed only in the special figure 1 is not displayed, so the c time saving state is not started],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, there is a case where the game state is not disadvantaged by downgrading.

Here, in the second time-saving state, it is not necessary to shift only from the second time-saving state to the third time-saving state, and in the second time-saving state, from the second time-saving state to the third time-saving state It is not necessary to shift to the game state of . Also, in the second time-saving state, it is not necessary to shift from the second time-saving state to the third time-saving state, and in the second time-saving state, transition from the second time-saving state to the third time-saving state There may be cases where

Also, only in the second time saving state, it is not necessary to shift from the second time saving state to the third time saving state, and even in the game state other than the second time saving state, from the second time saving state to the third It is not necessary to shift to the time saving state.

Also, "In the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state is not started again Since normal game balls do not win, the "special figure E" that is displayed only in special figure 1 will not be displayed, so the c time saving state will not be started again in the c time saving state],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, in the third time-saving state, only the third time-saving state may not be restarted, and in the third time-saving state, game states other than the third time-saving state may not be restarted. . In addition, in the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state may not always be started again, and in the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state may be restarted.

In addition, only in the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state may not be restarted, and in game states other than the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state may not be restarted. .

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the transition to the low probability state is performed,
The number of times of fitting is the number of times including the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the a time saving state Also, the number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed],
After the first time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number [for example, 100 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the first time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the first number of times and the fourth number of times, the fourth number of times is the smaller number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or the number of times after the first time saving state is started The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times the results of the variable display of the special symbols are displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started may be always included, or the special number after the first time saving state is started It may be the number of times that may not include the number of times the results of the variable display of the symbols are displayed.

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if only the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the state other than the first time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state may not end if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, it is equipped with a production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
One production of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second production is a production that at least suggests information about the second time-saving state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of renderings, or may be capable of executing other than multiple renderings. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Moreover, the second production may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Further, "the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information regarding the number of starts between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

In addition, "the second effect is information indicating at least the number of times the special symbols are changed until the number of fits reaches the first number [for example, as shown in FIG. 18(a), play time Information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state) etc.] in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted ,
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as "fit number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
In the third time-saving state, there is a case where the third time-saving state transitions to the second time-saving state [for example, as shown in FIGS. etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in cases other than when is displayed. In addition, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may not be started.

Also, in the third time-saving state, there may be cases where only the third time-saving state transitions to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state There may be a case where the state is shifted to the game state. Also, in the third time-saving state, it may always shift from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, there may be cases where it does not shift from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state. There may be.

In addition, in the third time saving state only the third time saving state may shift to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the second from the game state other than the third time saving state There may be a case of transitioning to a time saving state. In addition, only in the third time-saving state may shift from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state, or even in the game state other than the third time-saving state, from the third time-saving state to the second It may be possible to shift to a time saving state.

In addition, "the number of times of fitting is the number of times that the results of the variable display of special symbols after the start of the third time saving state are displayed [for example, Fig. 26 (f) to the same figure As shown in (k), the number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed even in the c time saving state],
In the third time-saving state, when the number of fits becomes the first number of times, the third time-saving state transitions to the second time-saving state [for example, FIG. 27 (i) to the same figure (l ), when the symbol variation display is executed for the 750th time after the jackpot is completed in the c time saving state, the game shifts to play time, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, since the number of times of symbol variation display in the electric sapo state increases, the amusement of the game may be improved.

Here, the number of times of fitting may be the number of times only the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed after the third time saving state is started, or after the third time saving state is started The number of times other than the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed may be included. In addition, the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the start of the third time saving state is always included may be the number of times, or the special number after the start of the third time saving state It may be the number of times that may not include the number of times the results of the variable display of the symbols are displayed.

Also, in the third time-saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, it may only shift from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state, or in the third time-saving state, the number of times of fitting When becomes the first number of times, it may be shifted from the third time-saving state to a game state other than the second time-saving state. Also, in the third time-saving state, when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may always shift to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, the number of times of fitting When becomes the first number of times, there may be cases where the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state does not occur.

Also, in the third time-saving state, only when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may shift to the second time-saving state, and in the third time-saving state, the number of times of fitting The third time saving state may be transferred to the second time saving state in cases other than the first number of times. Also, only in the third time-saving state, when the number of fits becomes the first number, the third time-saving state may shift to the second time-saving state, or the game state other than the third time-saving state Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the third time saving state may be transferred to the second time saving state.

In addition, "When the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time-saving state, from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state in the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times [For example, as shown in FIGS. 27(i) to 27(l), when the symbol variation display is executed for the 750th symbol variation display after the jackpot is completed in the c time saving state, the game etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, when the number of times of getting stuck becomes the first number in the third time-saving state, the transition from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state may be performed only by the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times. However, when the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times moves from the third time-saving state to a game state other than the second time-saving state. Alternatively, when the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, the variable display of the special pattern next to the first number of times always shifts from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state. Also, when the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, there is a case where the transition from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state does not occur in the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times. may

Also, when the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, it is possible to shift from only the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state in the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, even if it shifts from a game state other than the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state in the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times good.

Also, when the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, it may be transferred from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state only in the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times. , When the number of times of getting stuck in the third time-saving state becomes the first number, even if the variable display other than the variable display of the special symbol following the first number of times moves from the third time-saving state to the second time-saving state good.

In addition, when the number of times of getting stuck becomes the first number only in the third time saving state, it may be shifted from the third time saving state to the second time saving state by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times , When the number of times of getting stuck in a game state other than the third time saving state becomes the first number, even if it shifts from the third time saving state to the second time saving state with the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number good.

In addition, ``When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
After the third time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbols that are out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the third time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the second number of times and the third number of times, the third number of times is the smaller number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, since the number of times of pattern variation display in the electric sapo state increases, the amusement of the game may be improved.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Also, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. may be terminated. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started, even if only the third time-saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the state other than the third time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started, even if the third time saving state ends. Well, after the third time-saving state is started, the third time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, "the symbol display means is means including first symbol display means [eg, first special symbol display device 212, etc.] and second symbol display means [eg, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] can be,
Variable display of special symbols by the second symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") is variable display of special symbols by the first symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the time-saving symbol [for example, "special figure E" etc.] may be displayed,
There is no case where the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the execution of the second pattern variation display,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the pattern display means may include only the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or the pattern display means other than the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. may contain. The pattern display means may always include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or may not include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. can be anything.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, as a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, only the time reduction symbol may be displayed, and as a result of the execution of the first symbol variation display, symbols other than the time reduction symbol are also displayed. There may be cases. Further, the time saving pattern may always be displayed as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display, or the time saving pattern may not be displayed as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display.

Further, the time saving pattern may be displayed only as a result of the execution of the first pattern variation display, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result other than the result of the execution of the first pattern variation display. There may be cases.

In addition, it is not necessary that only the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display, and designs other than the time-saving design are also displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display. It doesn't have to be. In addition, the time-saving design may not necessarily be displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display, or the time-saving design may be displayed as a result of the execution of the second design variation display. .

In addition, the time saving pattern may not be displayed only as a result of the execution of the second pattern variation display, and the time saving pattern is displayed as a result other than the result of the execution of the second pattern variation display. It does not matter if there is no case.

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the transition to the low probability state is performed,
The number of times of fitting is the number of times including the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in a time saving state Also, the number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed],
After the first time-saving state is started, when the results of the variable display of the special symbols that are out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times] are continuously displayed without becoming a big win, the first time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
In the first number of times and the fourth number of times, the fourth number of times is the smaller number of times,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the pattern variation display is missed during the execution of the first time-saving state, it is counted as the number of times of getting stuck, so it may be positioned as a happy function for the player. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during the execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to avoid becoming too advantageous to the player.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or the number of times after the first time saving state is started The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbols is displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol after the first time saving state is started may be always included, or the special number after the first time saving state is started It may be the number of times that may not include the number of times the results of the variable display of the symbols are displayed.

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if only the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the state other than the first time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state may not end if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, it is equipped with a production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect in which a character of Bancho is displayed together with the characters "during play time" shown in FIG. 25(s)],
One of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect in which a character of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26(g) is displayed],
The third production is a production that may be executed in the second time saving state,
The fourth production is a production that may be executed in the third time-saving state,
The third production mode and the fourth production mode are at least partially different modes,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of renderings, or may be capable of executing other than multiple renderings. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

In addition, the third effect may be executed only in the second time-saving state, or may be executed in a game state other than the second time-saving state. good too. Moreover, the third effect may be always executed in the second time-saving state, or may not be executed in the second time-saving state.

In addition, the fourth effect may be executed only in the third time-saving state, or may be executed in a game state other than the third time-saving state. good too. Moreover, the fourth effect may be always executed in the third time-saving state, or may not be executed in the third time-saving state.

Note that the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode may be partially different, or may be wholly different. Also, the mode of the third effect and the mode of the fourth effect may be the same mode.

In addition, it is equipped with a production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
One production of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second production is a production that at least suggests information on the second time-saving state [for example, as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of renderings, or may be capable of executing other than multiple renderings. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Moreover, the second production may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Further, "the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information regarding the number of starts between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

In addition, "the second effect is information indicating at least the number of times the special symbols are changed until the number of fits reaches the first number [for example, as shown in FIG. 18(a), play time Information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
After the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, there may be a transition to a normal game state [for example, transition to play time, the game After the time is over, transition to special low probability normal low probability state, etc.],
After the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state does not start It will not transition to play time again until ],
The third time-saving state may start until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit [for example, even after the play time ends, the result of the special figure 1 If it is suddenly displayed in a time saving pattern (“Special E”), it will shift to a c time saving state, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, there may be cases where only the game state is shifted to the normal game state, or the second time-saving state starts. After the second time-saving state ends without a big hit, the game state may shift to a game state other than the normal game state. In addition, after the second time-saving state is started and the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal game state, or the second time-saving state is started and a big hit. After the second time saving state ends without becoming, it may not be transferred to the normal game state.

In addition, the second time-saving state is started, and only after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, there may be cases where the game state is shifted to the normal game state, or the second time-saving state is started, Other than after the second time-saving state ends without a big hit, the normal game state may be entered. In addition, only the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without becoming a big hit, there may be cases where the game state is shifted to the normal game state, or games other than the second time-saving state After the state is started and the second time-saving state ends without a big hit, the state may be shifted to the normal game state.

Also, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the second time-saving state may not be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A game state other than the second time saving state may not be started. In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state may not necessarily start, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, There may be cases where a second time saving state is initiated.

In addition, the second time saving state may not be started only until the big hit after the second time saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time saving state ends and the big hit Also, the second time saving state may not be started.

In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the third time-saving state may be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A game state other than the third time saving state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started from the end of the second time saving state until the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit A state may not be initiated.

In addition, the third time-saving state may be started only until the big hit after the second time-saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time-saving state ends and the big hit. Also, a third time saving state may be started.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
Production means capable of executing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table comprising
When the probability setting change operation is accepted, one of the probability settings is selected from a plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, the setting change button 194 can be set to any one of a plurality of settings by pressing operation],
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as "fit number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
The effect means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information about settings [for example, the display of a character that may appear at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 29, etc.],
Before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion production is different [for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the first big hit end production As shown in FIG. 16, the setting suggestion effect that may be executed at times is more likely to be executed after the start of the play time than before the start of the play time. As shown in FIG. After the migration, it is easier for setting suggestion balls such as blue and green to appear],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic performance means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Also, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of effects. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one probability setting may be selected from a plurality of probability settings. Settings other than one probability setting may also be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one probability setting may always be selected from a plurality of probability settings. There may be cases where one probability setting is not selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one probability setting may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, or when the probability setting operation is accepted, settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, any one probability setting may be selected from a plurality of probability settings only when the probability setting operation is accepted. Any one probability setting may be selected from.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Further, the rendering means may be capable of executing only setting suggesting rendering suggesting information about setting, or may be capable of executing rendering other than setting suggesting rendering suggesting information regarding setting. . Also, the effect means may always execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting the information about the setting, or may not execute the setting suggesting effect suggesting the information about the setting in some cases.

Also, the effect means may be capable of executing a setting suggesting effect suggesting only information about the setting, or capable of executing a setting suggesting effect suggesting information other than the information about the setting. .

In addition, before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, only the appearance rate of the setting suggestion production may be different, or before the second time saving state is started and the first After the second time saving state is started, the probability other than the setting suggestion performance appearance rate may also be different. In addition, before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion production may always be different, and before the second time saving state is started and the first There may be a case where the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect does not differ after the second time saving state is started.

In addition, "after the second time-saving state is started than before the second time-saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, it may be possible to increase the appearance rate of the setting suggestion so as not to impair the player's desire to continue playing the game when the game continues to be out of order.

Here, after the second time-saving state is started than before the second time-saving state is started, only the setting suggestion production may be easily executed, or the second time-saving state is started. After the second time-saving state is started, the performance other than the setting suggestion performance may be executed more easily than before the second time saving state is started. In addition, after the second time-saving state is started than before the second time-saving state is started, the setting suggestion production may always be executed more easily, and the second time-saving state is started. After the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect may not be easily executed than before.

In addition, before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily.

In addition, ``When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
The setting suggestion effect is a effect that may be executed in the third mode [for example, a white setting suggestion ball etc.],
The setting suggestion effect is a effect that may be executed in the fourth mode [for example, a blue setting suggestion ball, etc.],
The third aspect and the fourth aspect are at least partially the same aspect [for example, the setting suggesting ball is in the shape of a star, etc.],
After the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect [for example , in setting 1, the blue setting suggestion ball is more likely to be displayed after the play time ends than before the play time transition],
Before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect [for example , in setting 1, it is easier to display the white suggested balls before the play time ends than after the play time transition],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Alternatively, after the second time-saving state is started, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the game state other than the second time-saving state is displayed. may also terminate. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the third mode, or may be executed in a mode other than the third mode. Also, the setting suggesting effect may always be executed in the third mode, or may not be executed in the third mode in some cases.

Also, the setting suggesting effect may be executed only in the fourth mode, or may be executed in a mode other than the fourth mode. Also, the setting suggesting effect may always be executed in the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the fourth mode in some cases.

Also, after the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily in the fourth mode than in the third mode. After the second time-saving state is ended than before the second time-saving state is started, the fourth mode may be easier to execute the performance other than the setting suggestion performance than the third mode. . In addition, after the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the fourth mode rather than the third mode. , After the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, even if it is not easy to execute the setting suggestion production in the fourth mode than in the third mode good.

Also, after the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the fourth mode rather than the third mode. , After the second time-saving state ends than before the second time-saving state is started, it may be easier for the setting suggestion effect to be executed in a mode other than the fourth mode than in the third mode. . Also, only after the second time saving state ends than before the second time saving state is started, it may be easier for the setting suggestion effect to be executed in the fourth mode than in the third mode. After the second time-saving state ends, the setting suggestion performance may be executed more easily in the fourth mode than in the third mode, except before the second time-saving state is started.

Also, before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state ends, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily in the third mode than in the fourth mode. , before the second time-saving state is started than after the second time-saving state is ended, it may be easier to execute an effect other than the setting suggestion effect in the third mode than in the fourth mode. . In addition, before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the third mode rather than the fourth mode. , Before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state ends, even if it is not easy to execute the setting suggestion production in the third mode than in the fourth mode good.

In addition, before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the third mode rather than the fourth mode. , Before the second time-saving state is started than after the second time-saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a mode other than the third mode than in the fourth mode. . Also, only before the second time-saving state is started than after the second time-saving state ends, it may be easier for the setting suggestion effect to be executed in the third mode than in the fourth mode. The setting suggestion performance may be executed in the third mode more easily than in the fourth mode before the second time saving state starts than after the second time saving state ends.

In addition, the third aspect and the fourth aspect may be partly the same or may be all the same. Moreover, all may be a different aspect.

In addition, ``When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
The setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. A lord's character is displayed along with the words "opportunity", suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to work on the game aiming at the second time-saving state even if somewhat addicted.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Also, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. may be terminated. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, only the setting suggestion production may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state, and the production other than the setting suggestion production in connection with the end of the second time saving state may also be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion production may always be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state, and the setting suggestion production may not be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state. good too.

In addition, the setting suggestion production may be executed only in connection with the end of the second time saving state, or the setting suggestion production may be executed in relation to things other than the end of the second time saving state may be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of only the second time saving state, or the setting suggestion in connection with the end of the game state other than the second time saving state There may be cases where production is executed.

In addition, ``the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the jackpot game ends [for example, as shown in FIG. etc],
When the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect is higher. Easy to be executed [For example, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the setting suggestion effect that may be executed at the end of the first big win is more likely to be executed after the start of the play time than before the start of the play time, etc.] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to sustain the desire to continue the game until a big hit is made even after the second time-saving state ends, because the setting suggestion effect is likely to appear.

In addition, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where the trigger for setting suggestion can be easily understood and can be set as the goal of the game for the player.

Here, only the setting suggesting performance may be executed when the big win game ends, or performance other than the setting suggesting performance may be executed when the big win game ends. In addition, the setting suggestion performance may always be executed when the big win game ends, or the setting suggestion performance may not be executed when the big win game ends.

Also, the setting suggestion performance may be executed only when the big win game is finished, or the setting suggestion performance may be executed at times other than when the big win game is finished. Also, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when only the big win game is finished, or the setting suggesting effect may be executed when the game other than the big win game is finished.

In addition, when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends, only the setting suggestion effect is performed. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends. Effect other than setting suggestion effect may be easily executed. In addition, when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends, the setting suggestion production is always performed. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends. However, there may be cases where the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

In addition, only when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends The setting suggestion effect is It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends The setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily at times. In addition, when the jackpot game started after only the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect is better. It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the game state other than the second time saving state is finished than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state is finished is finished. The setting suggestion effect may be more likely to be executed when the

In addition, when the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than only when the jackpot game started before the second time-saving state ends, the setting suggestion effect is It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the second time-saving state ends than when the big-win game started before the second time-saving state ends. The setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily at times. In addition, when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends rather than when the jackpot game started before only the second time saving state is started, the setting suggestion effect is It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends more than when the big win game started before the game state other than the second time saving state is started ends. The setting suggestion effect may be more likely to be executed when the

Also, when the probability setting change operation is accepted, the initial state is set when the power is restored [for example, as shown in steps S113 to S119 in FIG. 7, initialization processing is executed when the setting is changed. etc.],
Even when the power is restored and the initial state is reached, the number of times of getting stuck before the power is cut off can be retained.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, for example, when the number of times of getting stuck in the previous day is maintained, the number of times of pattern variation display until shifting to the second time saving state of the day is reduced, so that a small service can be given to the player. may be possible.

In addition, although the low setting may be detected depending on the state of transition to the second time-saving state, the reduction in the number of times of pattern fluctuation display does not mean that the setting is unchanged, so the player has expectations. may be able to

Also, "one of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect, information on the second time-saving state [for example, shown in FIG. It is a suggestive performance,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Moreover, the second production may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Further, ``the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information about the number of starts between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18(a), etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

In addition, "the second effect is information indicating at least the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, until the play time shown in Fig. 18(a) Information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the game control means can start a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state), etc.] is a means,
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in a case other than when is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. It may not be started with.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
Production means capable of executing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state,
The game control means can start a first time-saving state [for example, an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; is a means,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the transition to the low probability state is performed,
After the first time-saving state is started, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number [for example, 100 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit, the first time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as "fit number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
After the second time-saving state is started, when the second time-saving special symbol variable display result is continuously displayed without a big win (for example, 950 times, etc.), the second time-saving state is displayed. state ends,
The second time saving state is not started until the big hit after the second time saving state ends,
The production performed in the first time saving state and the production performed in the second time saving state are different [For example, as shown in FIG. Although the character of Lord is displayed, as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic performance means.

Moreover, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give variations to the performance related to the time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Also, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of effects. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if only the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the state other than the first time-saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state may not end if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, even if the first time saving state ends. Well, after the first time-saving state is started, the first time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Also, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. may be terminated. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

Also, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, only the second time-saving state may not be started, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A state other than the second time saving state may not be started. In addition, until the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, the second time-saving state may not necessarily start, and after the second time-saving state ends until the big hit, A second time saving state may be initiated.

In addition, the second time saving state may not be started only until the big hit after the second time saving state ends, and other than the time when the second time saving state ends and the big hit Also, the second time saving state may not be started.

In addition, a part of the production|presentation performed in a 1st time saving state and the production|presentation performed in a 2nd time saving state may differ, and all may differ. Moreover, the production|presentation performed in a 1st time saving state and the production|presentation performed in a 2nd time saving state may be the same.

In addition, "One of the plurality of effects is the first suggestive effect [for example, the effect including information about the remaining number of times of pattern fluctuation display until the a time saving state shown in Fig. 23 (c) ends. ] and
One of the plurality of effects is the second suggestive effect [for example, the effect including information on the number of times the pattern is changed until the play time shown in FIG. etc.] and
One of the plurality of effects is a third suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the play time ends shown in FIG. 25(c)],
The first suggestion production is a production that suggests the number of times the special symbol is displayed in the first time-saving state,
The second suggestion production is a production for suggesting the number of times of getting stuck,
The third suggestion production is a production that suggests the number of times the special symbol is displayed in the second time-saving state,
The first suggested production and the second suggested production are executed in the first time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times of display, production including information on the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time, and production including information on the number of starts between special prizes (TS) are performed],
The third suggestive effect is executed in the second time-saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. A performance is being performed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the first suggestion production may only suggest the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the first time-saving state, or may be related to the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the first time-saving state. Suggestions other than suggestions may also be performed. In addition, the first suggestion performance may always suggest the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the first time-saving state, or the suggestion of the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the first time-saving state. may not be performed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be one in which only the suggestion regarding the number of times of getting stuck is performed, or a suggestion other than the number of times of being stuck may be performed. In addition, the second suggestion effect may be one in which the suggestion regarding the number of times of fitting is always performed, or the suggestion regarding the number of times of fitting may not be performed in some cases.

In addition, the third suggestion effect may only suggest the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the second time-saving state, or suggest the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the second time-saving state. Other suggestions may also be made. In addition, the third suggestion production may always suggest the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the second time-saving state, or the suggestion of the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the second time-saving state. may not be performed.

In addition, only the first suggestive production and the second suggestive production may be executed in the first time-saving state, and productions other than the first suggestive production and the second suggestive production are also executed in the first time-saving state. may be In addition, the first suggested production and the second suggested production may always be executed in the first time-saving state, and the first suggested production and the second suggested production may not be executed in the first time-saving state. There may be.

In addition, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be executed only in the first time-saving state, and the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be executed even in a game state other than the first time-saving state. may be performed.

In addition, only the third suggestive effect may be executed in the second time-saving state, or effects other than the third suggestive effect may be executed in the second time-saving state. In addition, the third suggestive effect may always be executed in the second time-saving state, and the third suggestive effect may not be executed in the second time-saving state.

Also, the third suggestive effect may be executed only in the second time saving state, or the third suggestive effect may be executed in a game state other than the second time saving state.

Further, "One of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect [for example, information about the number of starts between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 23(c), etc.],
The second suggestion production is a production for suggesting the number of times of getting stuck,
The second suggested effect may be executed in the normal game state [for example, special low probability normal low probability state] [for example, in the normal game state, the number of starts between special prizes shown in FIG. Production including information on (TS) is being performed, etc.],
The second suggestive effect is executed in the normal game state that has shifted after the first time saving state is completed,
The second suggested effect is not executed in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state is completed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second suggestion effect may be one that only suggests the number of times of being stuck in, or may be one that makes suggestions other than the number of times of being stuck. In addition, the second suggestion effect may be one in which the suggestion regarding the number of times of fitting is always performed, or the suggestion regarding the number of times of fitting may not be performed in some cases.

Also, only the second suggestive effect may be executed in the normal game state, or effects other than the second suggestive effect may be executed in the normal game state. Also, the second suggestive effect may always be executed in the normal game state, or the second suggestive effect may not be executed in the normal game state.

Also, the second suggestive effect may be executed only in the normal game state, or the second suggestive effect may be executed in a game state other than the normal game state.

In addition, only the second suggestion performance may be executed in the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends. An effect other than the effect may also be executed. In addition, the second suggestion performance may always be executed in the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends. There may be cases where the production is not executed.

In addition, the second suggestion performance may be executed only in the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or in a game state other than the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends. A second suggestion effect may also be executed. In addition, the second suggestive effect may be executed in the normal game state shifted only after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion performance may be executed in the normal game state shifted after other than after the first time saving state ends. Two suggestive effects may be performed.

In addition, only the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the second time saving state in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state ends Effect other than the suggestive effect may not be executed. In addition, the second suggestion effect may not always be executed in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state has ended, and the second suggestion performance has not necessarily been executed in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state has ended. A suggestion effect may be executed.

In addition, the second suggestion production may not be executed only in the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state has ended, or the game state other than the normal game state that has shifted after the second time saving state has ended. Even in , the second suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, the second suggestive effect may not be executed in the normal game state shifted only after the second time saving state ends, or in the normal game state shifted after other than after the second time saving state ends. The second suggestion effect may not be executed.

In addition, ``One of the plurality of effects includes the display of the total number of prize balls obtained in a series of advantageous conditions shown in FIG. production, etc.],
The fifth effect is a effect including at least a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game,
In the first time-saving state, the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols that are out of place is the fourth number of times [eg, 100 times, etc.] The fifth production is executed [eg, the figure 23 (g) to (h), when the time-saving state ends, an effect including the display of the total number of prize balls obtained in a series of advantageous states and the number of occurrences of big hits is started] ,
In the second time-saving state, the fifth production is not executed in relation to the fact that the number of times the special symbols are displayed fluctuating is the second number [e.g., 950 times, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, even if the fifth effect is an effect including only a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game Alternatively, the effect may include a display other than the display showing the cumulative number of winning balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Also, the fifth effect may always include a display showing the cumulative number of winning balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. However, the presentation may not include the display showing the cumulative number of winning balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

Also, the fifth effect may be a effect including at least a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired only in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Alternatively, the performance may include at least a display showing the cumulative acquired number of balls acquired even in a state other than a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

In addition, in the first time-saving state, only the fifth production may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is the deviation is the fourth number, or in the first time-saving state Effects other than the fifth effect may also be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols to be lost has reached the fourth number. In addition, in the first time-saving state, the fifth production may be executed without fail in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is the deviation is the fourth number, and in the first time-saving state There may be a case where the fifth effect is not executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols to be lost has reached the fourth number.

In addition, in the first time-saving state, the fifth effect may be executed only in connection with the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols that are out of date has become the fourth number of times, or in the first time-saving state The fifth effect may be executed in relation to something other than the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols to be lost has reached the fourth number. Also, in the first time-saving state, only the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of place may be executed in the fifth production in connection with the fourth number of times, or in the first time-saving state A fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times other than the number of times of variable display of the special symbol to be lost has reached the fourth number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that is lost only in the first time-saving state has reached the fourth number, and other than the first time-saving state A fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols that are lost in the game state of (1) has reached the fourth number of times.

Also, in the second time-saving state, only the fifth production may not be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is shifted is the second number of times, and the second time-saving state Then, the production other than the fifth production does not have to be executed in relation to the fact that the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that is to be missed has become the second number. In addition, in the second time-saving state, the fifth effect may not always be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is shifted is the second number of times, and the second time-saving state Then, there may be a case where the fifth effect is executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that becomes the error is the second number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect may not be executed only in connection with the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state is the second number of times, and the second time saving state Then, the fifth effect may not be executed in relation to things other than the second number of times of variable display of the special symbols that are lost. In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that becomes a deviation is the second number of times. Then, the fifth effect may not be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times other than the number of variable displays of the special symbols that result in the error is the second number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect may not be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that is lost only in the second time saving state is the second number of times, and the second time saving state The fifth effect may not be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the special symbols that are lost in the other game states has reached the second number of times.

Also, in the first time-saving state, a first production mode [for example, a production mode in which the mission is to defeat the panda by running the character of the lord, shown in FIGS. 23(b) to 23(h) ] to execute the production,
In the second time-saving state, the production is performed in the second production mode [for example, the production mode in which the production of the appearance of the Bancho character is performed, as shown in FIGS. 25(c) to 25(w)],
The production mode in the first production mode and the production mode in the second production mode are different production modes,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase variations in the time saving state by changing the appearance.

Here, in the first time saving state, the effect may be executed only in the first effect mode, and in the first time saving state, the effect may be executed in the effect mode other than the first effect mode. Also, in the first time-saving state, the production may be always executed in the first production mode, and in the first time-saving state, the production may not be executed in the first production mode.

Moreover, the production may be executed in the first production mode only in the first time saving state, or the production may be carried out in the first production mode in a game state other than the first time saving state.

Also, in the second time-saving state, the performance may be performed only in the second performance mode, and in the second time-saving state, the performance may be performed in a performance mode other than the second performance mode. Also, in the second time-saving state, the performance may always be performed in the second performance mode, and in the second time-saving state, the performance may not be performed in the second performance mode.

Also, the effect may be executed in the second effect mode only in the second time saving state, or the effect may be executed in the second effect mode in a game state other than the second time saving state.

Also, "variation time determination means capable of determining one variation time from among a plurality of variation times [eg, CPU 304 of main control unit 300, etc.];
A plurality of fluctuation time tables [for example, the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 17, etc.],
with
The variable time determination means is the fifth number of times [e.g., 10 times since the normal game state [e.g., special figure low probability normal figure low probability state] started after the first time saving state ended etc.] until the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one from the first variable time table [for example, the "normal time (recovery mode)" table shown in FIG. 17] among the plurality of variable time tables Select the variation time of
The variable time determination means, in the normal game state [for example, special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state etc.] that has been shifted after the second time saving state is completed, the second of the plurality of variable time tables Select one variable time from the variable time table [for example, the "normal time" table shown in FIG. 17],
wherein the first variable time table is a variable time table that is not selected when the power is turned on;
The first variable time table and the second variable time table are different variable time tables,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the variable time determining means may be able to determine only one variable time from among a plurality of variable times, or may determine a variable time other than one variable time from among a plurality of variable times. can be anything. Further, the variable time determining means may always determine one variable time from among a plurality of variable times, or may not determine one variable time from among a plurality of variable times. There may be.

In addition, the variable time determination means determines the time from the start of the normal game state that shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fifth number of variable displays of the special symbols among the plurality of variable time tables. Only one variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth number of special symbol variable display after the start of the normal game state that shifted after the first time saving state ended A variable time other than one variable time may be selected from the first variable time table of the plurality of variable time tables until is executed. In addition, the variable time determination means determines the time from the start of the normal game state that shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fifth number of variable displays of the special symbols among the plurality of variable time tables. One variable time may always be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth number of special symbol variable display after the start of the normal game state that shifted after the end of the first time saving state. There may be a case where one variable time is not selected from the first variable time table of the plurality of variable time tables until is executed.

In addition, the variable time determination means determines the time from the start of the normal game state that shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fifth number of variable displays of the special symbols among the plurality of variable time tables. One variable time may be selected only from the first variable time table, or the fifth number of special symbol variable display after the start of the normal game state that shifted after the end of the first time saving state is executed, one variable time may be selected from a table other than the first variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables.

In addition, the variable time determining means determines the plurality of variable time tables only from the start of the normal game state shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fifth number of variable displays of the special symbols. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth number of variable display of special symbols from the start of the normal game state shifted after the end of the first time saving state. One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables until display other than is performed.

In addition, the variable time determining means determines a plurality of variable time tables until the variable display of the special symbols is executed for the fifth number of times only from the start of the normal game state shifted after the end of the first time saving state. You may select one variable time from the first variable time table of them, or the fifth special number of times since the game state other than the normal game state that shifted after the first time saving state ends One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table out of the plurality of variation time tables until the symbol variation display is executed.

In addition, the variable time determination means determines a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the normal game state that is shifted only after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fifth number of variable displays of the special symbols. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth special number of times after the normal game state that shifted after the end of the game state other than the first time saving state was started One variation time may be selected from the first variation time table out of the plurality of variation time tables until the symbol variation display is executed.

Further, the variable time determination means may select only one variable time from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, in the normal game state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, a variable time other than one variable time may be selected from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables. In addition, the variable time determination means may always select one variable time from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, in the normal game state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one variable time may not be selected from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables.

Further, the variable time determination means may select one variable time only from the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, in the normal game state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one variable time may be selected from a table other than the second variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables.

Further, the variable time determination means may select one variable time from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables only in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, even in a game state other than the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends, one variable time may be selected from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables.

Further, the variable time determining means may select one variable time from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables in the normal game state shifted only after the end of the second time saving state. However, one variable time may be selected from the second variable time table out of the plurality of variable time tables in the normal game state shifted after the game state other than the second time saving state ends.

Also, the first variable time table may be a variable time table that is not selected only when the power is turned on, or may be a variable time table that is not selected except when the power is turned on. Also, the first variable time table may be a variable time table that is not always selected when the power is turned on, or may be a variable time table that may be selected when the power is turned on.

The first variable time table and the second variable time table may be partially different variable time tables, or may be entirely different variable time tables.

Also, "one of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect, information on the second time-saving state [for example, shown in FIG. It is a suggestive performance,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may also suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Further, "the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information regarding the number of starts between special prizes (TS) as shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

In addition, "the second effect is information indicating at least the number of times the special symbols are changed until the number of fits reaches the first number [for example, as shown in FIG. 18(a), play time Information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
After the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, the game control means can start a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state), etc.] is a means,
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in a case other than when is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. It may not be started with.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
Variable time determination means capable of determining one variable time from among a plurality of variable times [eg, CPU 304 of main control unit 300, etc.];
Production means capable of executing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as "fit number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.],
A certain special symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "a certain special symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 31 (a2) to (a4), and FIG. 32 (b) to (i), etc.]”.) Informing that the second time saving state is started (hereinafter referred to as “notification production [e.g., FIG. 31 (a4) and FIG. 31(b3) display of characters "play time rush!!", and FIG. 32(g) character display of "play time rush!!" may be
The certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that is executed immediately before shifting to the second time saving state,
The variable display of the special symbol is executed at the variable time determined by the variable time determination means,
one of the plurality of variable times is a first variable time [e.g., 5 seconds, etc.];
one of the plurality of variable times is a second variable time [e.g., 10 seconds, etc.];
The length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time are different lengths,
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the first execution mode [for example, after 5 seconds from the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 1, "Enter play time!" The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters are displayed, etc.],
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the second execution mode [for example, after 10 seconds from the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 1, "Enter play time!" The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters are displayed, etc.],
the first mode of implementation and the second mode of implementation are different modes of implementation;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic performance means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the variable time determination means may be capable of determining only one variable time from among a plurality of variable times, or can determine a variable time other than one variable time from among a plurality of variable times. can be anything. Further, the variable time determining means may always determine one variable time from among a plurality of variable times, or may not determine one variable time from among a plurality of variable times. There may be.

Also, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of effects. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

In addition, in the variable display of a certain special symbol, only the effect for notifying that the second time saving state is started may be executed, or in the variable display of a certain special symbol, the second time saving state There may be cases where an effect other than the effect notifying that is started is also executed. In addition, an effect for notifying that the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol may always be executed, or the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol. There may be a case where the effect for notifying that is not executed.

In addition, in the variable display of a certain special symbol, there may be a case where an effect is executed to notify that only the second time saving state is started, or in the variable display of a certain special symbol, the second time saving state There may be cases where an effect is executed to notify that a game state other than the game state is started.
In addition, there may be a case where an effect is executed to notify that the second time saving state is started only in the variable display of a certain special symbol, or the variation of the special symbol other than the variable display of the certain special symbol. Also in the display, there may be a case where an effect for notifying that the second time saving state is started is executed.

Also, only the variable display of the special symbols may be executed during the variable time determined by the variable time determination means, or the display other than the variable display of the special symbols may be executed during the variable time determined by the variable time determination means. good too. Further, the variable display of the special symbols may always be executed during the variable time determined by the variable time determination means, or the variable display of the special symbols may not be executed during the variable time determined by the variable time determination means. good too.

Further, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed only during the variable time determined by the variable time determination means, or the variable display of the special symbols may be executed during the variable time other than the variable time determined by the variable time determination means. may

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. In the case of being executed, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the first execution mode. In addition, when a certain pattern variable display is executed in the first variable time, the notification effect may always be executed in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variable display is executed in the first variable time. If it is done, there may be a case where the notification effect is not executed in the first execution mode.

Further, the notification performance may be executed in the first execution mode only when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. The notification effect may be executed in the first execution mode even in cases other than the case of being executed.

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. In the case of being executed, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the second execution mode. In addition, when a certain pattern variable display is executed in the second variable time, the notification performance may always be executed in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variable display is executed in the second variable time. If it is done, there may be a case where the notification effect is not executed in the second execution mode.

Further, only when a certain pattern variable display is executed in the second variable time, the notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variable display is executed in the second variable time. The notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode even in cases other than the case of being executed.

Note that the length of the first variable time and the length of the second variable time may be partially different lengths, or may be entirely different lengths. Also, the length of the first variable time and the length of the second variable time may be the same.

Also, the first execution mode and the second execution mode may be partially different modes, or may be wholly different modes. Also, the first mode of execution and the second mode of execution may be the same.

Further, "the length of the second fluctuation time is longer than the length of the first fluctuation time,
The first execution mode is the first timing after the certain symbol variation display starts [for example, 5 seconds after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts]. is the mode of execution to be initiated,
The second execution mode means that the notification effect starts at a second timing [for example, 10 seconds after the special figure 1 symbol variation display starts] after the certain symbol variation display starts. It is a mode of execution that
The period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the second timing is longer than the period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the first timing. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In addition, "In the variable display of the special symbol in the first variable time, a production that results in a loss is executed without a certain reach production,
In the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, after the certain ready-to-win effect is performed, an effect that becomes a loss is executed [for example, the loss SP shown in FIGS. 32(c) to (i) Reach production, etc.],
In the certain symbol variation display, the certain ready-to-win effect is performed and the player can at least recognize that the player has lost [for example, as shown in FIG. The second timing is after the state in which the player can recognize that it is lost by performing a defeat effect, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, there is a case where a certain ready-to-win performance can include the possibility of a big win, and the expectation can be kept until the end.

Here, in the variable display of the special symbols in the first variable time, only the effect of losing without a certain ready-to-win effect may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols in the first variable time, An effect other than a losing effect may be executed without a certain ready-to-win effect. In addition, in the variable display of the special design of the first variable time, the effect of losing without a certain reach effect may always be executed, and in the variable display of the special design of the first variable time, or There may be a case where the effect of losing without accompanying the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols in the first variable time, a production that is not accompanied by a certain reach performance may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols in the first variable time, or It is also possible to execute an effect that results in a loss without any effect other than the ready-to-win effect. In addition, only in the variable display of the special symbols in the first variable time, the effect of losing without a certain reach effect may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols other than the first variable time, A losing effect may be executed without a certain reach effect.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time, only the performance that is lost after a certain ready-to-win performance is performed may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time After a certain ready-to-win effect is performed, an effect other than an effect that results in a lag may be executed. In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time, after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed, a production that is a lag may always be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time After a certain ready-to-win effect is performed, there may be a case where the performance that results in a lag is not executed.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time, the effect of losing only after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time , an effect that results in a loss may be executed even after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed. In addition, only in the variable display of the special symbols in the second variable time, after a certain ready-to-win performance is performed, a performance that is lost may be executed, or the variable display of the special symbols other than the second variable time. However, after a certain ready-to-win effect has been performed, a lag effect may be executed.

In addition, the second timing may come only after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the player can recognize that the player has lost, or a certain symbol variation display. The second timing may be other than after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed and the player can at least recognize that he has lost. In addition, the second timing may always come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the player can recognize that the player has lost, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. There may be a case where the second timing does not come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in , and the player can recognize at least that he has lost.

In addition, the second timing may come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the player can recognize that she has lost, or a certain symbol variation display. The second timing may be after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in , and at least the fact that the game is lost can be recognized by people other than the player. In addition, the second timing may come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and the player can only recognize that the player has failed, or in a certain symbol variation display. The second timing may come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed and the player can recognize things other than losing.

Further, the second timing may come after only a certain ready-to-win effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the player can recognize that the player has lost, or the certain symbol variation display may be performed. The second timing may be after the player can recognize at least that the player has lost by performing an effect other than a certain ready-to-win effect. Further, the second timing may come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed only in a certain symbol variation display and at least the player can recognize that the player has lost, or the certain symbol variation display may be performed. In the symbol variation display other than that, the second timing may come after a certain ready-to-win effect is performed and the player can at least recognize that the game is lost.

Also, if the certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that will result in a big hit, the notification effect is not executed [for example, FIGS. As shown in (i2), if a big win is achieved in the symbol variation display that will shift to the play time, the notification of the transition to the play time is not made, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the fact that the notification effect is not performed in a certain symbol variation display may function as a big hit notice, and the player may be expected to expect that.

Here, when a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big hit, only the notification performance need not be executed, and a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big win. In this case, effects other than the notification effect may not be executed. In addition, when a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big win, the notification performance may not necessarily be executed, and if a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big win. , there may be cases where a notification effect is executed.

Further, only when a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big win, the notification effect may not be executed, and when a certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display that results in a big win. Also in other cases, the notification effect may not be executed.

Further, "when a probability setting change operation is accepted, any one probability setting is selected from a plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, Any one of a plurality of settings can be set by pressing the setting change button 194, etc.],
The notification effect is a effect that may suggest information about settings [for example, as shown in FIG. suggests that the setting is 4 or more, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by providing the setting information to the player, it may be possible to reduce the dissatisfaction with getting stuck in the game up to a predetermined rotation.

Here, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected, or when the probability setting operation is accepted, one of the plurality of probability settings Settings other than one probability setting may also be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one probability setting may always be selected from a plurality of probability settings. There may be cases where one probability setting is not selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one probability setting may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, or when the probability setting operation is accepted, settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, any one probability setting may be selected from a plurality of probability settings only when the probability setting operation is accepted. Any one probability setting may be selected from.

Further, the notification effect may suggest only information about the setting, or may suggest information other than the information about the setting. Also, the notification effect may always suggest information about the setting, or may not suggest the information about the setting.

Also, "one of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is the information on the period until the second time saving state starts [for example, information on the number of times the pattern is changed until the play time shown in FIG. Information etc.] is a production that at least suggests
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second production may suggest only information about the period until the second time saving state starts, or information other than information about the period until the second time saving state starts may also suggest In addition, the second production may always suggest information about the period until the second time saving state starts, or if it does not suggest information about the period until the second time saving state starts There may be

Further, ``the second effect is a effect including information indicating at least the number of times of fitting [for example, information about the number of starts between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18(a), etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of getting stuck. Also, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck, or may not include information suggesting the number of times of being stuck.

In addition, "the second effect is information suggesting at least the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, until the playing time shown in FIG. Information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may also include information other than information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to. In addition, the second effect may necessarily include information suggesting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, or the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of special symbols up to.

Further, "the second production is a production that can be executed in one of a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Information on the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. effect changes from the first mode to the second mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state shown in the mode, when the lost SP reach is executed, the information regarding the number of symbol fluctuation display times until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executable only in one mode out of the plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than one mode out of the plurality of modes. may In addition, the second effect may always be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in one mode out of a plurality of modes. .

Further, after the power is turned on, only the second effect may be executed in the first mode, or after the power is turned on, in the first mode, information other than the second effect is given. may be executed. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. good too.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. may be executed. Also, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. may be used.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change only from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to a mode other than the second mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may always change from the first mode to the second mode, If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, only the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the effects other than the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode. Further, when only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, When a condition other than the second condition is met after execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, The second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is established other than after the execution of the second effect is started in the first mode. When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode, or the first When the second condition is established after the execution of the second effect is started in a mode other than the mode, the second effect may change from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the game control means can start a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state), etc.] is a means,
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when a time-saving design [for example, "special figure E" etc.] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in a case other than when is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. It may not be started with.

Also, "When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number [for example, 950 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Also, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. may be terminated. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
Game control means capable of controlling the game state [eg, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
A pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 etc.],
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to the first game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state etc.],
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a second game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state etc.],
The second game state is a game state more advantageous than the first game state,
A certain condition [for example, 750 times of symbol variation display has been executed since the jackpot ended, or as a result of symbol variation display of special figure 1, a time-saving symbol ("special figure E") was suddenly displayed etc.] is executed (hereinafter referred to as "certain special symbol variation display"), the first game state changes to the second game state without a big win. migrate and
The pre-reading notice means is a means that does not execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is postponed after the start of the certain special symbol variable display is postponed [for example, as shown in FIG. 2, there is no pre-reading notice regarding the symbol variation display that is held after the symbol variation display that will shift to the play time, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the pre-reading announcement means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the pre-read announcement means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may be able to execute only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice, or may not execute the pre-reading notice in some cases.

The game control means may be capable of controlling only the first game state, or may be capable of controlling the game state other than the first game state. Also, the game control means may always control to the first game state, or may not control only to the first game state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the second game state, or may be capable of controlling the game state other than the second game state. Also, the game control means may always control to the second game state, or may not control only to the second game state.

Also, the second game state may be more advantageous than only the first game state, or may be more advantageous than game states other than the first game state. Also, the second game state may always be more advantageous than the first game state, or it may be less advantageous than the first game state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbols satisfying a certain condition is executed, the first game state may be shifted only to the second game state without a big hit, or the certain condition is established. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, the first game state may be shifted to a game state other than the second game state without causing a big hit. Further, when the variable display of the special symbols satisfying a certain condition is executed, the first game state may always shift to the second game state without causing a big hit, or the certain condition is established. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, there may be a case where the first game state does not shift to the second game state without a big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbols satisfying a certain condition is executed, only the first game state may be shifted to the second game state without a big hit, or the certain condition is established. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, the game state other than the first game state may be shifted to the second game state without causing a big win. Further, only when the variable display of the special symbols satisfying a certain condition is executed, the first game state may be shifted to the second game state without a big hit, or the certain condition is established. The first game state may be shifted to the second game state without a big hit even in cases other than when the variable display of the special symbol to be played is executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed only when a certain condition is established, the first game state may be shifted to the second game state without a big hit, or the game state may be changed from the first game state to the second game state. If the variable display of the special symbols is executed even when the condition (1) is satisfied, the first game state may be shifted to the second game state without a big hit.

In addition, the pre-reading notice means may not execute only the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbols whose start is postponed after the start of the certain special symbol variable display is postponed. It is also possible not to execute a notice other than the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbols whose start is postponed after the start of the special symbol variable display is postponed. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may not necessarily execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is postponed after the start of the certain special symbol variable display is postponed. There may be a case where the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbols whose start is postponed is executed after the start of the special symbol variable display is postponed.

In addition, the pre-reading notice means may not execute the pre-reading notice only for the special symbol variable display whose start is postponed after the start of a certain special symbol variable display is postponed, or It may be possible not to execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbols other than the variable display of the special symbols whose start is postponed after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the look-ahead notice means may not execute a look-ahead notice regarding the variable display of special symbols whose start is suspended after only the start of a certain special symbol variation display is suspended. It is also possible not to execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbols whose start is suspended after the start of the variable display of the special symbols other than the special symbol variable display is suspended.

In addition, "the symbol display means is means including first symbol display means [eg, first special symbol display device 212, etc.] and second symbol display means [eg, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] can be,
Variable display of special symbols by the second symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") is variable display of special symbols by the first symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
The first game state is a game state in which the first symbol variation display is easier to start than the second symbol variation display,
The second game state is a game state in which the second symbol variation display is easier to start than the first symbol variation display.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust by not pre-reading the first symbol variation display remaining in the first game state due to the change of the game state. Sometimes.

Here, the pattern display means may include only the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or the pattern display means other than the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. may contain. The pattern display means may always include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means, or may not include the first pattern display means and the second pattern display means. can be anything.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, the first game state may be easier to start with only the first symbol variation display than with the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display is more likely than the second symbol variation display. Symbol variation display other than variation display may be started more easily. Further, the first game state may be such that the first symbol variation display is always easier to start than the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the second symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easily started in some cases.

In addition, the second game state may be easier to start only with the second symbol variation display than with the first symbol variation display, or with the second symbol variation display rather than with the first symbol variation display. Symbol variation display other than variation display may be started more easily. Further, the second game state may be such that the second symbol variation display is always easier to start than the first symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easily started in some cases.

Also, "the second symbol variation display is more likely to result in an advantageous big hit than the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), special figure 1 It is easier to hit the 10R probability variable jackpot when it hits with a special figure 2 than when it hits with ],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, although the big win immediately before the game state shifts is pleasing to the player, there is also a feeling that the player wants the big win with the advantageous second pattern variation display, so the excessive performance is not used. You may be able to

Here, the second symbol variation display may be more likely to result in an advantageous big hit than the first symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be more advantageous than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may be more likely to result in an advantageous big win even in cases other than the case of a big win. In addition, the second pattern variation display may be more likely to result in an advantageous jackpot than the first pattern variation display, and the second pattern variation display may be more advantageous than the first pattern variation display. There may be a case where the display is not likely to result in an advantageous big win when the big win is achieved.

In addition, only the second symbol variation display may be more likely to result in an advantageous big hit than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation display may be more advantageous than the first symbol variation display. Symbol variation display other than display may be more likely to result in an advantageous big win when a big win is achieved.

In addition, ``The number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost has been displayed continuously without becoming a big win after the jackpot game ends and the transition to the first game state (hereinafter referred to as the ``number of times of fit'') .) reaches a first number of times [eg, 750 times], the certain condition is satisfied,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, after the big win game is completed and the transition to the first game state is made, the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is continuously displayed without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. Only the condition may be established, or the number of times the variable display result of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the big win game ends and the first game state is entered. Conditions other than a certain condition may also be established when the number of times is one. In addition, when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the big win game ends and the transition to the first game state reaches the first number of times, there is a certain condition. may be established without fail, and the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game is completed and the transition to the first game state is the first. There may be a case where a certain condition is not satisfied when the number of times of

In addition, when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the big win game ends and the transition to the first game state becomes the first number of times. Only a certain condition may be established, or the number of times the result of variable display of the special symbol that is lost is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the big win game is completed and the game state is shifted to the first game state. A certain condition may be satisfied in cases other than the first number of times.

In addition, only the number of times the variable display result of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the end of the big win game and the shift to the first game state is the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, or the number of times other than the number of times the fluctuation display result of the missing special symbol is displayed continuously without becoming a big win after the big win game ends and the transition to the first game state. A certain condition may be satisfied when is the first number of times.

In addition, it is certain that the number of times the variable display result of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win only after the big win game ends and the transition to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be established, or the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special pattern is continuously displayed without becoming a big win after the big win game is completed and the game state is shifted to a game state other than the first game state. A certain condition may be met when the number of times reaches the first number of times. In addition, after only the jackpot game is completed and the state is shifted to the first game state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot becomes the first number of times. The condition may be established, and after the game state other than the big win game is completed and the game state is shifted to the first game state, the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is continuously displayed without becoming a big win. A certain condition may be met when the number of times reaches the first number of times.

In addition, "said look-ahead forewarning means, in the first period [e.g., the symbol variation that will be shifted to the play time from the symbol variation display that is executed 10 times before the symbol variation display that will be shifted to the play time] Period until display, etc.] is a means of not executing a pre-reading notice,
The first period refers to the end of the special symbol variation display after the execution of the special symbol variation display a certain number of times [for example, 10 times, etc.] before the certain special symbol variation display is started. It is the period until
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, although the big win immediately before the game state shifts is pleasing to the player, there is also a feeling that the player wants the big win with the advantageous second pattern variation display, so the excessive performance is not used. You may be able to

Here, the pre-reading notice means may not execute only the pre-reading notice during the first period, or may not execute anything other than the pre-reading notice during the first period. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not necessarily execute the pre-reading notice during the first period, or may execute the pre-reading notice during the first period. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute the pre-reading notice only during the first period, or may not execute the pre-reading notice during periods other than the first period.

Further, "the pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notices,
The pre-reading notice means provides at least one type of pre-reading notice among the plurality of types of pre-reading notices in a first period [for example, a prize-winning pre-reading notice in which Mr. Machiko's character shown in FIG. 33(b) appears] is a means of not executing
The first period refers to the end of the special symbol variation display after the execution of the special symbol variation display a certain number of times [for example, 10 times] before the certain special symbol variation display is started. It is the period until
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only multiple types of pre-reading notices, or may be capable of executing other than multiple types of pre-reading notices. Also, the pre-reading notice means may always execute multiple types of pre-reading notices, or may not execute multiple types of pre-reading notices in some cases.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute only at least one type of pre-reading notice among the plurality of types of pre-reading notices during the first period, or may execute only the plurality of types of pre-reading notices during the first period. At least one of the types other than the pre-reading notice may not be executed. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not necessarily execute at least one type of pre-reading notice among the plurality of types of pre-reading notices during the first period, or may execute the plurality of types of pre-reading notices during the first period. At least one type of prefetch notice may be executed.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute only one type of pre-reading notice out of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices during the first period, A type of pre-reading notice other than one type may not be executed. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute at least one type of pre-reading notice out of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices only during the first period, or may not execute at least one type of pre-reading notice during a period other than the first period. at least one type of pre-reading notice out of the pre-reading notices may not be executed.

Further, "When the first period starts, a certain production mode [for example, a play time precursor production mode that starts after the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 35(b) starts] is started.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, when the first period starts, only a certain production mode may be started, and when the first period starts, production modes other than the certain production mode may be started. Moreover, when the first period starts, a certain production mode may always start, and when the first period starts, a certain production mode may not start.

Moreover, when only the first period starts, a certain production mode may be started, and when a period other than the first period starts, a certain production mode may be started.

Also, "In the first gaming state, when a time-saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E"] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, the certain condition is established,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, in the first game state, only a certain condition may be established when the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design, or in the first game state, the variable display of the special design As a result, when the time saving pattern is displayed, conditions other than a certain condition may be established. Further, in the first game state, when the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design, a certain condition may be established without fail, or in the first game state, as a result of the variable display of the special design. A certain condition may not be established when the time saving pattern is displayed as .

Also, in the first game state, a certain condition may be established only when the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design, or in the first game state, as a result of the variable display of the special design. A certain condition may be established in cases other than the case where the time saving pattern is displayed as . In addition, only in the first game state, when the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design, a certain condition may be satisfied, and in the game states other than the first game state, the special design may be displayed. A certain condition may be established when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of .

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
A game control means capable of controlling the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.];
Production means capable of executing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a low probability state [e.g., special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [e.g., special figure high probability state, etc.],
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is higher than in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, play time (b time-saving state), etc.],
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and the transition to the low probability state (hereinafter, " number of times".) is a time-saving state that may shift when it reaches the first number [for example, 750 times, etc.],
One production of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second effect, information on the second time-saving state [for example, shown in FIG. It is a suggestive performance,
The second effect may be executed in a notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Jackpot announcements regarding variable display are being made, etc.],
Notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit by executing the second effect in the advance notice mode;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic performance means.

Moreover, according to this gaming machine, by functioning the suggestive effect as an advance notice, there is a case where it is possible to constantly draw attention upward to the second time-saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of performing only variable display of special symbols, or may be capable of performing display other than variable display of special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always perform the variable display of the special symbols, or may not perform the variable display of the special symbols in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. Also, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Also, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of effects. Also, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects in some cases.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the low probability state and the high probability state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the low probability state and the high probability state. Also, the game control means may always control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not control to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. It may be in a state with a high probability other than the probability of becoming. In addition, the high probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of special symbols is a big hit is always higher than that in the low probability state, or the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit than the low probability state. There may be cases where the probability of becoming is not high.

Moreover, the game control means may be able to start only the second time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the second time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state, only the number of times that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big win game ends and the transition to the low probability state is the first. It may be one that may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the big win game ends and shifts to a low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is displayed continuously without becoming a big win. If the number of times other than the first number of times reaches the first number of times, the transition may occur. In addition, after the big win game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state, the shift is always made when the number of times the result of the fluctuation display of the missing special symbol is continuously displayed without becoming a big win reaches the first number of times. Alternatively, after the big win game is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the shift is made when the number of times the variable display result of the missing special pattern is displayed continuously without becoming a big win becomes the first number of times. It may be something that may not be done in some cases.

Moreover, the second production may suggest only the information on the second time-saving state, or may suggest information other than the information on the second time-saving state. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time-saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time-saving state.

Also, the second effect may be executed only in the advance notice mode, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the advance notice mode. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the advance notice mode, or the second effect may not be executed in the advance notice mode.

In addition, by executing the second performance in the advance notice mode, only the possibility of a big win may be reported, or by executing the second performance in the advance notice mode, the big win is possible. Information other than the possibility may also be reported. Moreover, the possibility of a big win may always be notified by executing the second performance in the advance notice mode, or the big win may be achieved by executing the second performance in the advance notice mode. There may be cases where the possibility is not notified.

In addition, "while the special symbol variable display is being executed, the second effect mode changes to the advance notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode of information related to the number of times has changed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, the mode of the second effect may change only to the advance notice mode, or during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, the mode of the second production is other than the advance notice mode. The mode may also change. Also, the mode of the second performance may always change to the advance notice mode during execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the mode of the second performance may not change to the advance notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. There may be cases.

In addition, ``notify that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit by executing the second effect in the aforementioned advance notice mode,
One of the plurality of effects is a certain pre-reading notice effect [for example, a suspension notice by displaying the Sabohani icon shown in FIG. 37(a)],
The certain look-ahead forewarning effect is started before the start of the variable display of special symbols in which the second effect is executed in the forewarning mode (hereinafter referred to as "previous target symbol variable display"). It is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and is also executed during the execution of the variable display of the notice target symbols [for example, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the information regarding the number of symbol variation displays until the playing time changes, and a big hit announcement is made regarding the symbol variation display being executed, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to make the game lively by making the player expect that the second performance will be combined in the forewarning mode at the time when a certain look-ahead forewarning performance is started.

Here, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified only that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit, or the second effect may be notified in the notice mode. By executing the effect of , it is also possible to notify other than the possibility that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed will result in a big win. In addition, by executing the second effect in the advance notice mode, it may always be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit, or the second effect may be announced in the advance notice mode. There may be a case where it is not notified that there is a possibility that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed will result in a big hit by executing the effect.

In addition, by executing the second effect in the advance notice mode, it may be notified that only the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit, or the second effect may be announced in the advance notice mode. By executing the effect, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big win. In addition, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit only by executing the second effect in the advance notice mode, or the second effect may be announced in the advance notice mode. It may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit by means other than the execution of the effect.

In addition, only by executing the second effect in the advance notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit, or the second effect may be announced in the advance notice mode. It may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit by means other than the execution of the effect. In addition, by executing only the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may become a big hit, or the second effect may be announced in the notice mode. It may be notified that there is a possibility that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed will result in a big win by executing an effect other than the effect.

Further, by executing the second effect only in the advance notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit, or in a form other than the advance notice mode. By executing the second effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed may result in a big hit.

In addition, a certain look-ahead forewarning effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols which is started before the start of the variable display of the special symbols in which the second performance is executed in the forewarning mode, and is subject to the forewarning. It may be performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or during the execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is performed in the advance notice mode. , and may be executed even during execution of the notification target symbol variation display. In addition, a certain look-ahead forewarning effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols which is started before the start of the variable display of the special symbols in which the second performance is executed in the forewarning mode, and is subject to the forewarning. It may always be executed during the execution of the symbol variation display, or during the execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode. , and may not be executed even during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Also, a certain look-ahead forewarning effect is started only during execution of the variable display of the special symbols which is started before the start of the variable display of the special symbols in which the second performance is executed in the forewarning mode, and It may be executed while the target symbol variable display is being executed, or during the execution of the special symbol variable display which is started before the special symbol variable display in which the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode is started. Also, it may be executed even during execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

In addition, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during the execution of the special symbol variable display, which is started only before the start of the special symbol variable display in which the second effect is executed in the preview mode, and the preview is performed. During the execution of the variable display of the special symbols which is started other than before the start of the variable display of the special symbols in which the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode. , and may be executed even during execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

In addition, ""Information on the second time saving state" means "Information on the number of times of variable display of special symbols until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number [for example, shown in FIG. 18 (a), Information on the number of symbol variations displayed until the play time, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, "the second effect may be executed in a normal mode [for example, the display mode of displaying the number of symbol variations until the play time is displayed, as shown in FIG. 37(b)],
The advance notice mode is a mode that differs from the normal mode in at least one of color, size, and display area mode.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executed only in the normal mode, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the normal mode. Also, the second effect may always be executed in the normal mode, or the second effect may not be executed in the normal mode.

Also, only the second effect may be executed in the normal mode, or effects other than the second effect may be executed in the normal mode.

Also, "When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number [for example, 950 times] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The second time-saving state ends,
The second production is not executed in the period from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit There is no transition to play time again until it becomes],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started, only the second time saving state ends when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Also, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state is displayed. may be terminated. In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends without fail. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end if the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. There may be.

In addition, if only the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, even if the second time saving state ends. Well, after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends when a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may

In addition, only the second production may not be executed in the period from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit. During the period of , the effect other than the second effect may not be executed. In addition, the second performance may not necessarily be executed in the period from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit. There may be a case where the second effect is executed during the period of.

In addition, the second performance may not be executed only in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may not be executed during a period other than the period of . In addition, the second effect may not be executed in the period from the end of only the second time saving state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time saving state is finished The second effect may not be executed during the period until the big win.

In addition, "the second effect is not executed in the period from the start of the second time saving state to the big hit [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w), the play time ends Then, the information about the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is deleted, etc.],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, only the second production may not be executed in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big win, and the big win after the second time saving state ends. During the period up to, the performance other than the second performance may not be executed. In addition, the second performance may not necessarily be executed in the period from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time-saving state to the big hit. There may be a case where the second effect is executed during the period of.

In addition, the second performance may not be executed only in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may not be executed during a period other than the period of . In addition, the second effect may not be executed in the period from the end of only the second time saving state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time saving state is finished The second effect may not be executed during the period until the big win.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that starts when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state [for example, as shown in FIG. When transitioning to the state (special low probability state), information on the number of times the pattern variation is displayed until the play time is displayed],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be started only when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may be started only when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may also be started when The second effect may always start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. may be

In addition, "the game control means, the first time-saving state [for example, electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time-saving state) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game normally applied to the jackpot]] is an initiable means,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the first time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the first time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

In addition, the first time-saving state may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the jackpot game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. In addition, the first time saving state may always be started when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big win game ends and shifts to the low probability state. can be anything.

In addition, the game control means can start a third time-saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time-saving pattern is suddenly displayed and shifted (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time-saving state), etc.] is a means,
The third time-saving state is a time-saving state that may be started when the time-saving design is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special design,
The time-saving pattern is a pattern different from the jackpot pattern,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be able to start only the third time saving state, or may be able to start states other than the third time saving state. Moreover, the game control means may always start the third time-saving state, or may not start the third time-saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern may be started as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. may be started in a case other than when is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be always started when the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, or the time saving pattern is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern. It may not be started with.

In addition, ``the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In the following, additional notes will be given including what has been explained so far.

(Note 0)
a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols;
A game control means capable of controlling a game state;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means that can be controlled in a low probability state and a high probability state,
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a big hit is higher than in the low-probability state,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state,
The second time-saving state is the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is lost continues without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter referred to as " It is a time-saving state that may shift when the first number of times is reached,
After the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state is terminated when the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without a big hit,
The second time saving state is not started until the big hit after the second time saving state ends,
A playground characterized by:

FIG. 38 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means 901 to the game area 902 can be ejected from the game area 902 and supplied to the ejection means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that a mode in which the above-described display means 903 is further provided on the upper tray 126 of the pachinko machine 100 described above as shown in FIG. may That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. A single touch operation, repeated hitting operation, or long-pressing operation on the touch panel may execute an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. When the long-press auto-repeat function is enabled, the touch panel may be configured such that a pseudo repeated tapping operation is performed on the touch panel in a state in which is continuously touched. Alternatively, the long-press auto-repeat function may be configured not to be enabled. Also, in some productions, the long-press auto-repeat function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto repeated hit function may be activated on the touch panel, or may not be activated. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects by repeated tapping operations on the touch panel, and when performed on the touch panel, the long-press auto repeated tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured so as to be infrequent. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38 encloses balls, circulates the enclosed balls for use in the pachinko machine, uses the enclosed balls as launch balls, and pays out the balls. may be carried out on credit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a slot machine (rotary game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 39 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 39 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001 . Three reels (a left reel 1010, a middle reel 1011, and a right reel 1012) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 39) are housed in the central part of the main body 1001. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 1010 to 1012 . As for the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 . The reel backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line 1014 . A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five prize lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal prize line and a lower horizontal prize line are added. When 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right The five lines of the downward winning line and the right upward winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. A reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . In this embodiment, each time the insert medal button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three, two medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1031 is depressed, and three medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1032 is depressed. It is designed to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by means of the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010-1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The payout button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting them from the medal payout port 1055 . The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 1032 . The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057 . Also, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 .

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046 . The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual game history information of the player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided below the stop button unit 1036. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062 .

A sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 1060 is arranged above the front door 1002 , and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the production device 1060 . This rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right and left shutters 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 1000 (game display). (user side).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

The game machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. A casino machine 2000 that adds the number of bonus coins to the remaining credit amount when winning, and issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit amount from a receipt issuing machine 2010 when cash out 2009 is selected. may be

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. and a home-use video game machine 5000 having a storage section for storing electronic data that implements the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 4B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data via a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this and a controller for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 4(c) includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and the acquired game-related data ( and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home-use video game machine 5000 in FIG. 4D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and acquired game-related data ( and a controller for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage and the operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 storing electronic data. Electronic data for implementing the present invention may be downloaded from this data server 6000 to a home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

Also, the present invention can be applied to a game program that mimics the actions of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for home-use game machines. In that case, the recording medium for recording the game program can be DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Further, although the present invention is exemplified by pachinko machines and slot machines as game machines, it is not limited to these, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, rock-paper-scissors game machines, smart balls, and the like.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

41 to 61, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. 41 to 61 are used in principle only for explanations using FIGS. In the description using FIG. 61, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.
<Overall composition>
First, using FIG. 41, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. This figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a launcher. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the side of the player).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided at a game machine installation office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk (amusement parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door. In the present embodiment, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of being opened and closed with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage tray has a ball storage tray 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a ball ejection button 130 for ejecting the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126 by the operation of the player, and a game ball guided to the shooting device 110 by the operation of the player on the game board. A ball shooting handle 134 that is shot into a game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices by the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game parlor. Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, a return operation button for instructing the player's balance to be returned to the card unit is provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 . Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 having a cross key and an enter button is also provided.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

FIG. 42 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 41 viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 and is used to temporarily store game balls, is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the game balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 44). A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting condition, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is imparted (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, there is a main board case 158 housing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 44) that controls the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 160 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to performance, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( 44) and includes a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 44) for controlling the launch of game balls. ), a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 44) that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. An interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192 , a setting change button 194 and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 . In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least a setting change mode in which one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. can move to In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 411(A), the character ratio/setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. , the character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162 . Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 43(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right when viewed from the front. An arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the upper side, and the lower side may be referred to as the lower side. Although not shown in FIG. 43, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side facing the player may be called the front side or the front side, and the back side may be called the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on its front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of, for example, resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 201 . When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, it is possible to carry out error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop to disable the continuation of the game, etc.). The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and a performance display region 208d. The and right design display areas 208c display different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124 .

FIG. 43(b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), on the main control lamp substrate 254, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol reservation lamp 216. , a special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, a special pattern 2 holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp RK, an electric sapo middle lamp RD, a right hand lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR. In addition, hereinafter, the normal pattern may be referred to as "general pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as "special pattern".

The normal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, each consists of two upper and lower stages and a total of eight LEDs.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games that are reserved (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation game is held to a predetermined number (eg, four) making it possible to The special figure 1 pending lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game can be reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). and In addition, the special figure 2 suspension lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). is possible.

Further, the high-probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state. The electric sapot middle lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shortened and that the electric tulip (electric chew) blade member 2311 to be described later is in the electric sapot state where it is easy to open for a long time. . The right-handed display lamp RM is a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, and an electric support state, and is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state in which he/she can benefit from right-handed hitting. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

A game board 200 shown in FIG. 43(a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 discharges game balls that have entered a warp entrance 242a provided on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to a stage 244 from a warp exit 242b. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is a stage on which the game ball exiting the warp device 242 shows reciprocating motion, rotating motion, and the like. In this stage 244, the residence time of the game ball becomes longer as the game ball reciprocates and rotates.

Also, the first effect movable body 7 is arranged above the game area 124 while being supported by the main body 104 . The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light-emitting portion 71 in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes capable of emitting full-color light are arranged. Furthermore, on the right side of the game area 124, a second effect movable body 8 imitating a person's right arm is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm 81 and a forearm 82. An upper arm motor (not shown) rotates the upper arm to the shoulder position and a forearm (not shown) rotates the forearm to the elbow position. A motor and a finger motor (not shown) for bending and extending five fingers are provided. The second effect movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a movable area by an upper arm motor and a forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 43( a ), part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper cover 203 . In addition, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205 , and a normal figure start opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205 . The normal figure starting port 228 is configured with a device for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, called a gate or through chucker, and is located on the right side of the game board 200 in this embodiment. One is placed in the Balls that have passed through the normal figure start port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out, and the entered game balls are released. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 .

In addition, in this embodiment, one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 . A star-shaped production lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230 . Furthermore, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special figure starting port 230 . When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. Along with discharging to the plate 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. A ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In addition, in this embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 124, and this attacker unit 23 is also provided with an electric chew type first special figure start port separately. Hereinafter, the first special figure starting port 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure starting of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23 The mouth may be called the first special figure start mouth (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in an advanced state and is in a difficult winning state, and in a retracted state becomes an easy winning state. In the following description, the advanced state of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closed, and the retreated state may be referred to as open. Further, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with light-emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full-color light.

The attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special figure starter opening 232 , a first variable winning opening 234 , and a second variable winning opening 235 in addition to the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231 . These variable winning openings may be called "attackers". A first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in an advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in a retreated state to an easy-to-win state. In the following description, the advanced state of the first door member 2341 may be referred to as closed, and the retracted state may be referred to as open. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, when it is advanced, it forms a ball passage and is in an easy-to-win state, and retreats. In this state, it becomes difficult to win a prize. In the following description, the extension of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as opening, and the retraction may be referred to as closing.

As shown in FIG. 43( a ), the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center part has a configuration in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter when hitting to the right due to its arrangement. . On the other hand, in the central part of the stage 244 described above, there is a special route 244a that makes it easier for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. is provided. In addition, even if it does not pass through the stage 244, the 1st special figure start opening (fixed) 230 can also be aimed at from the left side. Therefore, the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting opening that can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Furthermore, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When the ball enters the general winning slot, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the ball has entered the general winning slot, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls. It is discharged to the ball storage dish 126 . Balls that enter the general winning slot are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, the game area 124 is provided with a disk-shaped ball hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill, and a plurality of game nails. An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with the intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and releases the firing rod. And the shot mallet passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124.例文帳に追加Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the direction of travel by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc., and enters various winning openings and starting openings. The player reaches the out port 240 without winning the starting port or only passing through the normal starting port 228.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed in the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of a game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104 . Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received in this discharged ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted. , a payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. there is

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the main control section 300 as a whole. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit contains two counters). is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302. FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and a ball storage tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 and A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general figure display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example , General Figure Reservation Lamp 216, Special Figure 1 Reservation Lamp 218, Special Figure 2 Reservation Lamp 220, High Accuracy Medium Lamp RK, Electric Sapo Medium Lamp RD, Right Strike Lamp RM, Round Display Lamp RR, etc.) for display control drive circuit 330, a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 as a normal electric accessory, and a first variable prize as a special electric accessory A driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including driving means for driving the first door member 2341 of the opening 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 .

When the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start openings 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. output to The random value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start ports 230 and 231, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special figure 1. stored in the register for Also, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing Latch and store the latched value in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to Special Figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply. is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with 1 sub control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. good too.

Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main controller 300 . The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Also, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402 . The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp driving circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452 . Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 . The game board lamp 442 includes the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting part 71 provided on the first movable effect body 7, the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the attacker unit 23, and the like. there is The game frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, and a button lamp 138 for causing the effect button 136 to emit light.

In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the first effect movable body 7 on the upper part shown in FIG. A drive circuit 422 for driving and controlling motors of various production devices such as the production movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of various production devices, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect depression of various buttons that constitute the production buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Based on the signal from the CPU 504, the VDP ( video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, image display data, and the like. In this embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of retaining the storage state even when power is cut off. As a result, for example, information for displaying a display relating to the history of big hits can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. A RAM in which stored information volatilizes when power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and provides prize balls or ball rental based on control signals output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of has been completed. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606 . In addition, the payout control unit 600 provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Rental ball information or the like indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600 . The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. These sensors detect when 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300 .

The shooting control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stopping of shooting output by the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball shooting handle 134 by the player, which is output by a shooting intensity output circuit provided in the ball shooting handle 134. A firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and a ball feeder 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled based on a control signal that indicates the firing intensity corresponding to the amount. control.

The power control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 45(a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. I will explain the types of Toku-zu and Universal-zu.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first starting opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting openings 230 and 231, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting opening 232. A special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the second start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, has detected that the has entered. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks some lamps of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) "Special figure 1 Variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks some lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) of the eight lamps. 2 variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop pattern mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time decided before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 , the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "special figure 1 or 2 variable display" to the stop display of the special figure 1 or 2 stop design mode may be referred to as special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in succession.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether one of the special figures 1 and 2 is performing the variable display of the other special figure, the specification to start the variable display of the special figure (such A pachinko machine with such specifications is sometimes called a "simultaneous variation machine".)

FIG. 45(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. In this FIG. 45(a), four kinds of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown. In FIG. 45(a), the outline parts in the figure indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” and “special figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 . ``Special figure A'' is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot pattern, and when ``special figure A'' is stop-displayed, it shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize winning port 234 is opened, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, the "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big win pattern, and when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, control is performed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared. Also, in some rounds, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win (for example, it is difficult to win due to short opening) may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, determination of whether or not there is a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether to make a normal big win or a probability variable big win is made by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special variable game is high (variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state with a high probability of winning this jackpot is called a special high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is a special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special low probability state and the special high probability state, and the special low probability state and the special high probability state. The times are configured to be very different. In addition, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where it shifts to a time saving state (electrical support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state, such as by shortening the time from the end of the jackpot in the special variable game to the start of the next jackpot. refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is called the normal high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "normal high probability change"), and the state that is not in the time saving state is called the normal low probability state. Thus, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on the condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric sapo state" is the state related to the general map, and the "time saving state" is the state related to the special map or the state related to the general map and the special map. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric sapo state and is in a normal state with high probability. In the general pattern high probability state, it becomes easier to win the general pattern variation game than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it will always be lost) in the general pattern low probability state (non-electrical sapo state), whereas the general pattern high probability state (electrical sapo state ) rises to 100/100 (ie, always wins). In addition, in the electric sapo state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric sapo state (normal figure variable short). For example, in the non-electrical support state, the variation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Also, in the electric sapo state, compared to the non-electric sapo state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew open period). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electrical support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric sapo state, the blade members 2311 are more likely to open than in the non-electric sapo state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric sapo state per winning to the normal figure start port 228, opens twice in the electric sapo state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, close again for 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases due to the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. In addition, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-electric support state is maintained. Especially in a big hit game, if game balls are picked up by electric chews with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the first variable prize winning port 234 or the second variable prize winning port 235 decreases, the player will not be able to win. This is because there may be disadvantages. In addition, in this embodiment, in the electric sapo state (time saving state), all of the normal map fixed change, normal map variable short, electric chew open period extension, and electric chew open number increase are performed, but at least of these If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage becomes high, and an electric support state (time saving state) may be established. Alternatively, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases, and if either one of the extension of the electric chew open period or the increase in the number of electric chew open times is performed, as an electric support state (time saving state) good too. In the non-electrical support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which game balls are easy to enter. This special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is in an easy-to-win state over a long period of time in the electric sapo state than in the non-electric sapo state. In this embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, after the end of the jackpot game performed after that, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 50 times, and in the 51st time, the electric support state is maintained. Move to the support state (low-probability normal state). On the other hand, when winning a jackpot without electric support ("special figure B"), the game does not shift to an electric support state after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished. Further, when the "special figure B" is stop-displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big-hit design, a small-hit design ("special design C") is also prepared for the special-figure 1. FIG. When the "special figure C" hits a small hit, the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. The open time and the number of times the second door member 2351 is opened can be appropriately set. In the small-hit game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable winning hole 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is obtained, a small-hit game is executed. is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. A small win is a win whose control state does not change before and after the small win game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small win game after the end of the small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous variation machine, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and shifts to a small winning game, the situation where the special figure 2 is being displayed in a variable display can occur. . In this case, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit, the variable display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small winning game related to the small win ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 is resumed. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable display, and when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 1 is variablely displayed. A certain situation can occur, but in this case, if one of the special symbols becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the wrong result is displayed. It will happen.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 45(b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure e"). Figure c”). The "special figure a" is a 6R normal big win pattern, and when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning port 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, the control state is reached. becomes a special low probability normal high probability state. In addition, the "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big win pattern, and when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, control is performed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big win pattern, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, it shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, The control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In some rounds, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared. Also, in the special figure 2, three types of jackpot patterns are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared.

Also, in the special figure 2, a small winning figure ("special figure d") is prepared in addition to the big winning figure. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize winning opening 235 opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. Here, when compared with the small hit pattern of special figure 1 ("special figure C"), the small hit with special figure 1 ("special figure d" is stopped) In the case where FIG. C" is stopped display), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning hole 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, it becomes a game property that a ball is not given in the small hit of the special figure 2 and a ball is given in the small hit of the special figure 1. - 特許庁The open time and the number of times the second door member 2351 is opened can be appropriately set.

Furthermore, even in the special figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 kinds of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". Special figure 1 starting opening (fixed) 230, special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 or special figure 2 starting opening 232, that is, special figure 1 starting opening (fixed) 230 or special figure 1 starting opening (Variable) On the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered 231, or that the second starting opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 , "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → . . . In some cases, the display is changed in the order of "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→ . . . That is, the decorative design display device 208 variably displays the decorative design separately from the first special design display device 212 and the second special design display device 214 . Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric sapo state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed variably, the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly In the probability variation state where the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the special figure 2 is changed, the decorative pattern is not changed. is performed, and in the probability variation state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative design is not performed, and the design variation display is performed only in the 4th design and the 1st special figure display device 212.

Modes other than the case of confirming the 6R probability variation big hit with the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case of confirming the 10R probability variation big hit with the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. When a big hit or a small win is reported in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, there are 3 decorative patterns with the same number other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". A combination of decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit ("special figure B") is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state 10R probability variation big hit (" In the case of confirming that it is a special figure c"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the "special figure D" or "special figure e" of the lost pattern, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c display a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described so far (for example, a random eyes) to stop displaying.

Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative design variable display" to the stop display of the decorative design stop design mode will be referred to as the decorative design variable display ("decorative design variable display"). There is also.) The variable display of decorative patterns is controlled by the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 45(d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal pattern: "normal pattern A", which is a winning pattern, and "normal pattern B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the normal map display device 210 alternately lights the two LEDs arranged vertically. Variation display” (normal figure variation game) is performed. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the winning pattern "normal pattern A" and the losing pattern "normal pattern B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 45(d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variable display of the normal pattern" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern may be referred to as the variable display of the normal pattern.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random number, a special figure electric sapo decision random number, a special figure design random number, and the like. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the reserved number of special figures, special figure winning random numbers, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area that stores the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure that is divided into the maximum number (in this example, four) areas that can hold the start of the success/failure determination (lottery), A random number storage area for normal maps is also provided. As will be described later, a plurality of types of starting information are stored as one set in the starting information storage unit for special figures, and each set of these starting information is stored in order of winning (reservation order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 detects the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it monitors whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects that the power has been cut off), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected that the power has been cut off), step Proceed to S107. Even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The output port to the first sub-controller 400) outputs a clear signal, and the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308 is performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps in order to execute the initialization process.

If it is determined not to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), is the reason for this to be the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is turned ON (step S115). If it is determined that there is (step S115; Yes), setting change processing is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor in the role product ratio/setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments of the setting monitor are incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor indicate "6". When it is set, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected. is determined. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194 . In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the character ratio/setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Also, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting 1 to 6 are set, but settings other than six levels may be used, and settings may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is held and the held setting value is displayed. good too.

If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No) or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is turned ON ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is executed to initialize the basic circuit 302 (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read. All areas) are added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 to calculate the checksum, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes initialization processing to initialize the pachinko machine 100 . In this initialization processing, interrupt inhibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Note that in this embodiment, even if the initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Further, here, the normal return command and the setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This return-to-normal command is a command indicating that the initialization processing (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the general pattern winning random number counter and the special pattern random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S121 except while the timer interrupt processing that starts at predetermined intervals is being performed.

On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (permanent setting) to the stack pointer. Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment). A partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320 . Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) before the last time is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308 and stored in the two-previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. memorize to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control section timer interrupt processing, which repeats activation at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is this time detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that a prize has been won when a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal the previous time, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is converted into predetermined prize winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal from the time before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal this time). information indicating that it is), general winning mouth, first variable winning mouth 234, second variable winning mouth 235, first special figure start opening (fixed) 230, first special figure start opening (variable ) 231, and the second special figure start opening 232, or the passage of the normal figure start opening 228 is determined. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning openings, these variable winning openings 234 and 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 matches the above-described winning judgment pattern information, It is determined that there is a prize in the 1st special figure starting port (fixed) 230, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning of the 1st special figure starting port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with winning the subsequent first special figure start port (fixed) 230 Without performing Branch to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal the time before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there has been a winning until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches with the pattern information, then it is determined whether or not it matches with the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then used by the main control unit 300, the normal figure winning random value and Update the random number counter for generating each special random number. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. As a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the memory area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for general pattern winning that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308. If the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for normal figure winning, and In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers has made the next round. Keep In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for normal figure winning random number generation has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one round The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal pattern display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device 214. Various types of timers, including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time for variable/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning of winning openings 234, 235 or starting openings 230, 231, 232, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original number-of-balls-storage area.

Also, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired. A plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 .

In step S219 executed subsequent to step S217, payout request number transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. , power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bit 4-5 is the current processing type (0-3) for encryption, and bit 0-3 is encryption. It shows the number of payout requests after the processing.

In step S221, a general pattern state update process is performed. This general pattern state update process performs one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general pattern state. For example, in the middle of the normal pattern fluctuation display (the value of the normal pattern display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), in the normal pattern state update process, the two LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210 are alternately lit and extinguished. Drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation game).

In addition, in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the general pattern fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the general pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the pattern The lighting/extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a losing symbol. It controls the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general pattern state update process. Here, along with performing the lighting/extinguishing drive control described above, a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal map stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 45(d)) and the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 45(d)). display. Furthermore, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the normal chart stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal pattern variation game.

Also, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is hit, as described later, the normal pattern per flag is turned on. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting normal figure operation in the setting area, for a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44 ), a signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 500 ms), the attacker unit A signal to hold the blade member 2311 in the closed state is applied to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) for opening and closing the blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 provided in 23 Along with outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for blade closing time management changes from 1 to 0), the general pattern non-operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, as described later, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on. When this general pattern loss flag is on, even in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the general pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal chart non-operation is set. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, normal figure related lottery processing is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the normal pattern fluctuation game and the opening and closing control of the first special pattern start port (variable) 231 are not performed (normal pattern state is not in operation), and the reserved normal pattern When the number of variable games is 1 or more, the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is won or not by random number lottery based on the normal pattern winning random value stored in the random value storage area. A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If the prize is not won, the winning flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is displayed from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variable display of a figure, and this variable display time is stored in a normal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a normal figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is stored in the normal pattern reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time the hit determination is performed, the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is changed. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this normal pattern pending number storage area. Also, the random number used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and determines in advance the stop pattern and the fluctuation time before the propriety determination process, and the prior determination The result (special figure lookahead result) is stored in the lookahead result storage unit in RAM308.

Then, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure status update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, according to the state of special figure 2, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the predetermined out of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variation display (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of hours stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of shortening of hours of working hours.

Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a losing flag, a special pattern probability change flag, and a normal pattern probability change flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 2 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, special figure Probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, special pattern c shown in FIG. If special figure b, 6R big hit flag is on, special figure probability change flag is off, normal figure probability change flag is on special figure a, small hit flag is on special figure d, loss When the flag is on, so that each mode of the special figure e is performed, the LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to turn on and off, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that represent By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 includes 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure e), 6R probability variation jackpot design (special figure b), 6R normal jackpot design (special figure a), small hit design (special figure Fig. d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) is confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, but the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed When the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, at the timing of the big hit pattern display of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is discarded and the lost pattern is stopped and displayed. It will be done. Also, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, when the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 The progress of the variable display time of special figure 1 will be interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variable display of special figure 1 until the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small winning pattern of the special figure 2 to the end of the small winning game.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 2 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of working hours storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the shortening of working hours flag is turned on, the shortening of working hours flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the jackpot game (during the special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is, after additional storage in the RAM308 as information to be included in the command data described later, the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, a big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for this purpose. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning port 234). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (backward state) is output to a part of the various solenoids 332), and information indicating the open period is stored in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. set. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal to hold the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advance state) is output to the opening/closing solenoid of the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize winning port 234 (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44). At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this exemplary embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative pattern display device 208 will end the big hit, the effect waiting time is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. Also, if the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in RAM 308, and provided in RAM 308 turn on the short working hours flag. In addition, if the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of times of working hours is not set to the number of times of working hours storage, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Also, if the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player by shortening the time from the end of the big win in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big win. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern probability change). In the general pattern high probability state, the probability of hitting in the general pattern variation game is higher than in the general pattern low probability state. In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the blade member 2311 tends to open more. The state in which any of these normal map fixed variable, normal map variable short, and electric chu opening is set is called the electric sapo (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Also, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This is a special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game when the normal pattern high probability state is reached during the jackpot game. There is a problem that many game balls enter the game, and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big win (the number of balls released) increases, increasing gambling. is. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so the big hit The time saving flag may remain on even during the game.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 2 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

As mentioned above, although the example of the big-hit game using the 1st variable prize-winning opening 234 was demonstrated, the small-hitting game using the 2nd variable prize-winning opening 235 is also the same.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0), Set special figure 2 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update processing) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, according to the special figure 1 state, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process described above is performed. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process of replacing "special figure 2" with "special figure 1" in the content described in the above special figure 2 state update process, so the description is omitted. In addition, the order of special figure 2 state update processing and special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 variation game is not performed, the special figure 2 state is inactive, and neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the jackpot game. And using the earliest special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of reserved special figure 2 fluctuation games is 1 or more is executed. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure 1 variation game is not performed, the special figure 1 state is inactive, neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the jackpot game, and it is suspended. Executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of special figure 1 fluctuation games is 1 or more . That is, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variation game regardless of whether the special figure 2 is in the variation game, and the special figure 2 is the special figure 1 during the variation game Regardless of whether there is, it is configured to be able to start the variation game (simultaneous variation machine).

The notification of the result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the variable probability state, the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232 The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231, and the normal game state And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 This will take precedence over the announcement of the results of the lottery. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probability variable state becomes a big hit, in parallel with the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232, or once the special figure 2 is started The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is executed. may occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state becomes a big hit, the lottery based on the winning prize to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 In parallel with the notification of the lottery results, or the notification of the lottery results of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230, special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is interrupted to start the special figure 2 A lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the mouth 232 may be notified.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 starting information (special 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 ROM 306 Using the success/failure determination table stored in , it is determined (hit/failure determination) whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is made. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the decided propriety determination result of the special figure 2 The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display are determined. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the success/failure determination, the acquired special figure fluctuation time determination random number, etc., was stored in the ROM 306 Determine the variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 using various tables.

The main control unit 300, after retrieving the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and special 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reservation number of the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the above-mentioned special figure status update processing and special figure related lottery processing are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures are configured to vary at the same time. However, depending on the state of one of the special symbols, the lottery process and the variation game regarding the holding of the other special symbol may not be performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are to be varied simultaneously, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variation display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probability variation state, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, regarding the variable display of the special figure 1 A decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols, or a plurality of decorative pattern display devices for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols, although the effect display is not performed. may be provided to display each lottery result separately. In addition, when the variation regarding a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits. Command type (in this example form, basic command, winning mouth winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2 A command to be sent at the start of the fluctuation, a command to specify which one of the special figures 1 and 2 is stopped first), per special figure start command, special figure per end command, large winning mouth open command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command, etc. Information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc., and further this implementation In the form, when the special figure fluctuation start command is set, the stop design information that can specify the stop design is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, it contains the number of big hit rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231, special figure 2 start It includes the presence or absence of winning to the mouth 232, the presence or absence of winning to the first variable winning mouth 234, the presence or absence of winning to the second variable winning mouth 235, and the like. In the case of the lookahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of special figures 1 and 2, the number of lookaheads stored in the number of lookahead storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the lookahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information.

In addition, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related lottery process selected by Set information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Effect control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period stored in the RAM 308 in the command data Effect control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game is set. In the above-described big winning opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data, notice information (advance notice information, false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the ball storage tray full error. do. When a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, a device indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400 Set information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, and drive circuits 324, 326, 330 The display data to be output to the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various state display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of I / O310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310. FIG.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt ending process is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. return to On the other hand, in step S243, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. after that, it enters the HALT state.

Next, the general figure related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal figure propriety determination table, and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1/2 propriety determination table. There is, and FIG. 48(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table.

The general pattern suitability determination table shown in FIG. 48( a ) is a general pattern suitability determination table used at the time of general pattern suitability determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), when this success/failure determination table is used, there is no hit value in the normal low probability state, that is, the probability of winning is 0%. In the high-probability state, the range of possible random numbers is 0-65535, and the winning value is 0-65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, in the normal pattern low probability state (when short time operation is not activated), it may be possible to hit with a certain probability (for example, 1%), or in the normal pattern high probability state (when short time operation), a certain (eg, 1%).

The special figure 1/2 propriety determination table shown in FIG. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the big hit lottery of the special figures 1 and 2.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the big hit lottery of the special figures 1 and 2.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

Also, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is a special high probability state or a special low probability state, 6580 / 65536 A small hit of opening and closing 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit of opening and closing once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special figure 1. be done. It should be noted that a small hit may not occur in the special figure 1, and a small win only in the special figure 2 (a small win of opening 12 times and a small win of opening and closing once) may occur. Also, the probability of a small hit may be changed for each setting.

Thus, in this embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special low probability state, but it is almost the same probability. It's set to run. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit differs depending on the setting. The higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big hit, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a big hit. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the less likely it is to become a big hit, but when shifting to the variable probability state, the number of occurrences of small wins tends to increase compared to the high setting, and different game characteristics can be provided in some cases.

In this embodiment, in any setting, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state, but the big difference is the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 be done. In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is, for example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected. In the special figure high probability state, when hitting to the right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special figure start port 232, and it is possible to perform a large number of variable display of the special figure 2, as a result , It is designed to increase the frequency of small hits. In this embodiment, since it can be said that the frequency of occurrence of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where there are four (full) pattern variation displays of the special figure 2 that are being held, one time of the special figure 1 is longer than the time it takes to digest all the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 Since it takes a longer time to digest the symbol variation display, it is difficult for the special figure 1 to generate a big hit. On the other hand, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the variation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit to the right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability will not change, but the time until the result of the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed is about Since it is every 10 minutes, even if the player hits to the right, it is substantially disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special figure low probability state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 580 seconds in the case of losing and small hits, but the variation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 48(c) shows an example of a special figure determination sorting table, and the stop symbol is decided based on the result of determination of special figure 1 or special figure 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to a special figure stop design mode (see FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b)) is defined for each success/failure determination result.

First, if the result of special figure 1 success/failure determination is a big hit, one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "special figure A" is the 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "special figure B" is the 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Moreover, if the result of the special figure 1 propriety determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, the "special figure C" is a small win in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short openings up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of special figure 2 success/failure determination is a big hit, one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is the 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, "special figure b" is the 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and " Special figure c" is a 10R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 propriety determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "special figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is opened once for a short period of time.

Next, processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. First, in step S301 of FIG. 49(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and in accordance with the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform processing to change to

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 .

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the performance data read out in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, the star-shaped production lamp 206, the light emitting part 71 provided in the first production movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read out in step S309 includes a command to the upper first effect movable body 7 or the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side shown in FIG. This command is output to the drive circuit 422 .

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal from the main controller 300 . In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

FIG. 49(c) is a flow chart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main process, and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, transmission of the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission processing (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing, and other processing for updating the random value for effect etc.

Next, processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. First, in step S401 of FIG. 50(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, the effect data corresponding to this command (the effect data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the effect data displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207) is stored in the ROM ( (not shown)), and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 50(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-controller 400 . In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-controller 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 50(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM explained in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

FIG. 50(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers 1 and 2 of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 . Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 generates information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, specific configurations of the character item ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the character ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. is.

As described above, the character ratio/setting display 196 includes a character ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The character ratio monitor displays the continuous character ratio (RY) and the character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

Here, the continuous role ratio refers to the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the role when the role is operated continuously (i.e., the first It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning with the variable winning opening 234 open. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls may be used. In addition, the role ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the role (that is, the first special figure start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234 and the second 2) refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning with the variable winning port 235 open. In addition, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special starting opening (fixed) 230, the first special starting opening (variable) 231, the second special opening opening 232 for the number of out balls And it may be a ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in a general winning hole.

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous role product ratio, when it is determined that the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role product ratio is displayed blinking, and then to output a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 . In addition, it may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156 . As a result, the model application test for the game machine may be smoothly performed.

Also, as a result of calculating the role ratio, if it is determined that the ratio is over 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the role ratio is displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ). Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the role product ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In the present embodiment, when the continuous role product ratio or the role product ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED blinks. good too.

As shown in FIG. 51B, the DIP switch board 198 is provided with eight DIP switches. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each DIP switch can be read to change the appearance probability of the effect. Appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc. can be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning hole 235 is not opened in the big winning game, but is opened only in the small winning game. may For example, as the special figure 2 jackpot, a 3R jackpot (substantially a 1R jackpot), a 6R jackpot, or the like, which is opened by the second variable winning port 235 rather than the first variable winning port 234, may be prepared. .

Moreover, although the small hit was prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit may be provided only for the special figure 2. - 特許庁That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may provide a small hit that repeats short opening a maximum of a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that only opens once. . By doing this, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 does not become a winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning port 234 is in a difficult winning state, If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult winning state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the 2nd special figure start opening 232, and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small winning game is higher than the winning probability of the big winning game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 can be set up to a certain number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small win that repeats short opening, and it can be expected that this small winning game will earn more balls.

Next, a specific example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The decorative design display device 208 is shown in FIG. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218, the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration. (same up to the example shown in FIG. 59).

FIG. 52 also shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206 which is one of the game board lamps 442 .

Further, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(a), a combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Note that the background here is white with no pattern, but a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is white with no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the ornamental symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the pattern is changing (or design is stopped) and notifying the number of reservations. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right of the display area, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 is provided. In addition, the notification area during the design fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 pattern fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 pattern is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "○", If it is a small hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "△". , and if it is not correct, it is stopped with "x". Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a preview notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go The fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decoration symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations of special figure 1 is also represented by the number of reserved icons of special figure 1, in addition to the number of lights of special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations of special figure 1 display area, The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations display area of special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of the pending|holding icons of special figure 2. FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icon on the right side becomes the reserved icon with the older winning prize.

In FIG. 52(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display mode of the pending icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. All of the pending icons shown in FIG. 53 are circular, but may be modified from this circular shape, for example, may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 53(a) shows a pending icon in display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. In the drawings, white is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the suspension represented by the suspension icon is digested. The display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. In addition, you may make it suggest that a big-hit expectation degree is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win.

FIG. 53(b) shows the pending icon in the display mode B. FIG. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawings, green is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 25%.

FIG. 53(c) shows the pending icon in the display mode C. FIG. The display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. In the drawings, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 53(d) shows a pending icon in display mode D. FIG. The display mode D is a display mode consisting of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. In the drawings, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode symbolizing the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the second display mode is a display mode in which many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and can be said to be a display mode in which the pachinko machine manufacturer can be recognized. In other words, it is a display mode famous for being used by a certain pachinko machine manufacturer. In addition, it can be said that it is a display mode unique to the pachinko machine manufacturer, or that if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that it is a display mode in which the same manufacturer's pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is called a maker pattern. Manufacturer patterns include animal patterns and other animal patterns, flower patterns, fruit and other plant patterns, fireworks patterns, striped patterns, checkered patterns, and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of are arranged regularly (or irregularly). In addition, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. It should be noted that there are cases where a single specific color symbolizes a pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, it may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), or it may be a model (model pattern) instead of the maker.

FIG. 53(e) shows a pending icon in display mode E. FIG. The display mode E is a rainbow display mode. The rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) that constitutes the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing one color at a time. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the display area. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests a big hit decision.

In addition, as the display mode F, there may be further prepared a display mode which is a non-patterned and golden display mode and suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win is 70%.

In the five display modes described above, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the lower the frequency of appearance. good too. That is, the pending icon in the display mode D (manufacturer's design) may have the lowest appearance frequency.

In addition, the five display modes shown in FIG. 53 are also used for a variable icon in which the pending icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable icon.

Furthermore, the star-shaped production lamp 206 provided directly under the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon.

The right end of FIG. 53 shows the lighting mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206 . The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emission mode A (white light emission mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. In addition, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode B (green light emission mode) that represents the display mode B (green display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. In addition, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode C (red light emission mode) that represents the display mode C (red display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. Furthermore, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode) that represents the display mode E (rainbow color display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light-emitting mode of the production lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the light-emitting regions. These lighting modes also suggest the same degree of expectation of a big win as the display modes of the pending icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the color of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the light emission color of the production lamp 206 differ in hue because the display media are different. Both colors are described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 is not provided with a light emission mode representing the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emission mode as the manufacturer pattern. no.

In addition, as the light emission mode E, a gold light emission mode may be further prepared which suggests that the expectation of a big win is 70%.

Other displays (for example, title background display, etc.) on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. Also in other displays, the degree of expectation of the big win may be suggested by the display mode, or the display mode in the other displays may be irrelevant to the degree of expectation of the big win.

Also, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, the lord's kimono, etc.) may be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 53 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). In the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 as well, the degree of expectation for the big win may be suggested depending on the display mode, or the degree of expectation for the big win may be irrelevant.

Also, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. 44) can emit light in a light emission mode representing a display mode other than the second display mode. For example, the light-emitting portion 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7 and the light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the attacker unit 23 can emit light in white, green, red, and rainbow colors, respectively. In addition to the case where the 7 colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the luminescent area, the luminescent color changes continuously one by one so that each of the 7 colors that make up the rainbow can be displayed. In some cases, it is displayed by light emission. Such rainbow color changing light emission may also be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206 . The light emission mode of the lamps other than the production lamp 206 may also suggest the same degree of expectation for the big win as the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon, or the light emission mode of the lamps other than the production lamp 206 may indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. It may also be a light emission mode unrelated to.

Furthermore, except for display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) and display mode E (rainbow color), it is also used as the color of the decoration.

54A and 54B are diagrams showing decorations included in the second effect movable body 8. FIG.

In the second effect movable body 8 which imitates a person's right arm, four fingers other than the fifth finger (little finger) are decorations. All of these four fingers are invisible when they are bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 54(a) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 extended while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54( a ), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824 . That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 54(b) shows the second effect movable body 8 extending the third finger (middle finger) 823 with the forearm 82 lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54(b), decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. As shown in FIG. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 54(c) shows the second effect movable body 8 extending the second finger (index finger) 822 while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54(c), the palm side of the second finger 822 is decorated with a decoration C (red). That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 54(d) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the first finger (thumb) 821 extended while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54(d), the palm side of the first finger 821 is decorated with a decoration D (gold). That is, it is painted gold.

In the second effect movable body 8, the palm side of the fifth finger (little finger) 825 is not decorated.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decoration are different here because the display media are different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. described as being

Further, each decoration applied to the second effect movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the pending icon and the variable icon. Therefore, when the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a big win is 5%, and when the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of a big win is 25%. When the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a big win is 50%, and when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended, the expectation of a big win is suggested. is 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorations, the decorations with the maker's pattern and the rainbow-colored decorations are not provided. Therefore, in the advance notice by the decorative body, a high probability advance notice with a jackpot expectation of 75% or more is not performed.

It should be noted that although the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested in the same manner as the reserved icon and the variable icon, the value of the degree of expectation may be different from the value of the reserved icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) 60%, and decoration D (gold) 90%.

Returning to FIG. 52 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. The pending icon is also shown in dashed lines.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and there is no reservation of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds) and the winning to the special figure 2 starting port 232 does not make much sense. In the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 in FIG. 52, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of special figure 2 remains the stop display of "x". .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 whose display result is more likely to be displayed is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in this embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), as described above, the display result of the special figure 1 is likely to be displayed , As shown in FIG. 52(a), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state) When it is , On the contrary, the reserved icon display area of special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the pending icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the pending icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 52(a) is lit in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icons h11 and h12.

In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of variation start on the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the 4th symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the pending icon → start of variation of the decoration symbol. However, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 52(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG.

In FIG. 52(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the reserved icon of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) expressed in eighth notes. In addition, in response to the increase in the hold indicated by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) is increased. The display mode of the pending icon h12 indicating the pending state is changed to the lighting mode C (red lighting mode). That is, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 206 is the same or similar to the red color of the pending icon h12. The timing for starting the display of the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 and the timing for changing the star-shaped production lamp 206 to the lighting mode C may be the same, or the pending icon h12 may be displayed earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same is true up to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the drawing, the size of the pending icon h12 and the size of the production lamp 206 are approximately the same, but the production lamp 206 is actually larger. Therefore, if the production lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the reserved icon h12 and the change timing of the production lamp 206 is earlier, the player may be given a stronger expectation for the big win indicated by the red color. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative pattern combination, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 52(e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The pending icon in red (display mode C) is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first pending icon (holding icon h11). Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 52(g), the suspension represented by the red (display mode C) suspension icon is digested, and the special figure 1 symbol variation display is started. That is, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the red (display mode C) pending icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 . Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 52(h), the variable display of decorative patterns enters into a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 52(i), the red (display mode C) variation icon h0 is not displayed, and the star-shaped production lamp 206 is also extinguished according to the non-display of this variation icon h0. In FIGS. 52 to 57, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variation icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies up to the example shown in FIG. 59). Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 52(j), it has developed into super reach (old reach). A reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(j). Here, the reach title LT1 is displayed in black letters on a green background display as "jii reach". In this reach title LT1, the background is the same or similar color to green suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit with pending icons and decorations, but as shown in FIG. A background color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation for the big win, and the green color does not suggest the degree of expectation for the big win.

The character of the old man appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(k), and then the animation of the character of the old man is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(l) following the animation display of the character of the old man, the character of the old man who looks depressed is displayed. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner, the shaking variation of the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative patterns are combined in the left pattern display region 208a, the middle pattern display region 208b and the right pattern display region 208c. is displayed as stopped. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 52(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

The star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0 maintains the turned-off state until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, but until it develops into super reach (Fig. 52(j) (until timing), the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission in the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variable display of the decorative pattern reduced and displayed at the lower right corner starts to shake and fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 52(l)). Furthermore, the light emission in the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative pattern is performed (until the timing of FIG. 52(m)).

The example shown in FIG. 52 described above is an example in which the display mode of the pending icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442, are related.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the reach title display are related.

FIG. 55 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 55(a), one special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and this special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode. is displayed. Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 55(a) is lit in the default lighting mode A (white lighting mode), which is the lighting mode representing the display mode of the pending icon h11.

In FIG. 55(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 1 to 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th symbol of the special figure 1. In addition, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11 that has been at the display position of the first suspended icon until then is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. When the default display form of the suspended icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in mode D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) functions as a normal notice. The speaker 120 outputs an effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note in accordance with the timing of the display start of the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) (timing of the display mode change). In addition, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode) until now, changes to light emission mode C (red light emission mode). That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in the light emission mode of the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). . More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests a lower level of expectation for a big win than the level of expectation for a big win suggested by the display mode D of the variation icon h0. Note that the effect lamp 206 may change to a light emission mode (light emission mode D (rainbow color)) that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the display mode D of the variation icon h0 suggests, or may change to a light emission mode D (rainbow color). or a color that is not used in the variable icon, or the color that is used in the pending icon or the variable icon may be lighted in a different light emission mode (for example, red flashing light, etc.). Also, the timing for starting the display of the variable icon h0 and the timing for changing the effect lamp 206 may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, and the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies up to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be about the same as the pending icon, but the effect lamp 206 is actually larger. Therefore, if the production lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variation icon h0 and the change timing of the production lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the red color, and then the variation icon. By looking at the manufacturer's pattern of h0, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. In addition, since the production lamp 206 does not emit light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the rarity of the highly anticipated maker's pattern is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker's pattern are improved. can increase

In FIG. 55(c), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 55(d), the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the variation icon h0. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 55(e), it has developed into Super Reach (Kengo Reach). A ready-to-win title LT2 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(e). Here, the reach title LT2 is displayed in black letters on a rainbow background display as "Kengo Reach". That is, the same display mode as the display mode used as the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the ready-to-win title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win. Also, the first performance movable body 7 arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 on the front side thereof. Further, the rectangular light-emitting portion 71 arranged on the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a light-emitting mode D representing rainbow colors (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode). That is, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light-emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the ready-to-win title LT2, suggesting the expectation of a big win. In addition, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and for example, it is the same color as the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode will be similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (Fig. 57 (j) described later) (same for reach title LT3 in ).

The background color of this reach title LT2 is, as shown in FIG. The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the "red" jackpot is "35%", the expectation of the "manufacturer pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the "rainbow" jackpot is " 100%”. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned "Jii-Reach", the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the type of background color of the Reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the light emission color of the light emitting unit 71 can be selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color". is "20%", the expectation level of "red" is "45%", and the expectation level of "rainbow color" is "100%". In other words, unlike the background color type of the reach title LT2, the "manufacturer's pattern" is not set for the light emission color type of the light emitting unit 71. FIG. Note that the background color of the reach title LT2 and the light emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related to each other (the same color). However, even in that case, the "manufacturer's pattern" is not set as the light emission color of the light-emitting unit 71, and light is emitted in another color (for example, instead of the "manufacturer's pattern", "golden lighting" or " red flashing”).

In the state shown in FIG. 55(e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap the background display of the reach title LT2, but the first effect movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's design, the display can be lowered only to a position where it does not overlap the background display. Furthermore, not only the background display but also the suspended icon and variable icon of the maker's pattern are configured so that the effect movable body does not overlap.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be the manufacturer's pattern, but the light-emitting portion 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern. It may be so arranged that it cannot be lit even in a rainbow-colored light emission mode. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may remain turned off, or may emit light in a red light emission mode.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(f), display of an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the villain, the master swordsman, has started. This animation continues until FIG. 55(i). In FIG. 55(i), the lord of the main character wins against the enemy master swordsman, and in the variable display of decorative patterns displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner, the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" fluctuates. is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative designs are combined in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b and the right design display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 55(j), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device by the zone effect.

FIG. 56 also shows the decorative design display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the production lamp 206 shown in FIG. 56(a) is in a state of being extinguished. In addition, in this FIG. 56, the sub liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 is also displayed. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 56(a) is in a state in which nothing is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 56(a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 56(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the pending icon is also completed. The suspended icon is shifted one place to the right, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is changed to the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 in the default display mode without changing the display mode in this example. is displayed as In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(b), the variable display of the decorative design is started in each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c. A zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the pattern, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is difficult to see. The zone title ZT display is an oval with the words "Training Zone" in red letters on a solid blue background. In this zone title ZT, a "training zone" is written in a color identical to or similar to red, which suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, with a pending icon or decoration. However, this red color does not suggest the potential for a big win. That is, when the zone title ZT is displayed, it is always written in red letters as "training zone", and is never written in other colors as "training zone". It should be noted that neither the character color of reach title LT1 shown in FIG. May suggest. On the other hand, the maker's pattern only suggests the degree of expectation of the big win, and there is no case of not suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win. Therefore, the display of various settings (for example, the tone of the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.) that can be changed by the player on the gaming machine, the display of the number of games played, the number of consecutive jackpots, etc., do not use the manufacturer's pattern. do not have. When the maker pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big win is always suggested, and a big win can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a maker's pattern with a high expectation is used without suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, the player misunderstands that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and expects excessively. In the case of not suggesting a degree, by not using a maker pattern with a high expectation, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation of a big win is high, and the expectation is excessively fueled. can be reduced.

In FIG. 56(b), in which the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207 has started to display the animation of the zone effect, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in FIG. 60(c), the color of this lord's kimono can be selected from among ``white'', ``green'', ``red'' and ``rainbow''. The expectation level is "20%", the expectation level for the "green" jackpot is "30%", the expectation level for the "red" jackpot is "45%", and the expectation level for the "rainbow" jackpot is "100%". It has become. In addition, it is designed not to be displayed in the "manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 56(i). In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 in the fourth pattern / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. has started blinking.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. This wilderness background display continues until FIG. 56(i). Further, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(c), the variable display of the decorative design performed in each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c can be visually recognized. . Also, in FIG. 56(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second pending icon, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the green (display mode B) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) represented by sixteenth notes. In this example, the production lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the suspension indicated by the green (fifth display mode) suspension icon h12, and the production lamp 206 remains off. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a combination of decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains extinguished.

In FIG. 56(e), the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed variable. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) suspended icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first suspended icon (suspended icon h11). Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 is still extinguished.

In FIG. 56(g), the suspension represented by the green (display mode B) suspension icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the green (display mode B) pending icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 . The star-shaped production lamp 206 that was in the off state is based on the suspension represented by the green (display mode B) suspension icon that has been displayed so far, according to the start of the symbol fluctuation display by the first special figure display device 212 , starts emitting light in a light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing green (display mode B). That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in a light emitting mode in a color identical or similar to the green color of the variation icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start to emit light until the change to be notified starts. The timing for starting the display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing for starting the light emission of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 in the light emission mode B may be the same, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier. Alternatively, the production lamp 206 may be faster. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 56(h), the variable display of the decorative pattern enters into a ready-to-win state, but in this example, it does not develop into a super ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3-Decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". Also, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing of the non-display of the variation icon h0 may be the same, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. In addition, the production lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variation icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the above-described animation display of the zone effect, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is changed again in the pseudo-continuous notice, the lord is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the lord's kimono is used to suggest the degree of expectation for the big win. may Even in this case, the “manufacturer pattern” should not be displayed. In other words, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the “manufacturer pattern” under any circumstances. By not displaying the "manufacturer's pattern" on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in this way, the rarity of the highly anticipated maker's pattern is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker's pattern can be enhanced. . It should be noted that "pseudo-continuous advance notice" means an advance notice that the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special patterns corresponding to the lottery for one big win. This is an advance notice in which the variable display and the temporary stop display may be performed multiple times.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the pending icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related, and in which super reach is performed.

FIG. 57 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(a), the decorative design combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is displayed still.

In addition, in FIG. 57(a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 57(a) is lit in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 57(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 2 to 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of special figure 1. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG.

In FIG. 57(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) expressed in eighth notes. Also, in this example, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 52, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) is replaced by the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the increased hold. changes to the luminescence mode C (red luminescence mode). In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 57(e), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The pending icon in red (display mode C) is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first pending icon (holding icon h11). When the red pending icon (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first pending icon, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the pending icon h11 changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). ). In accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon, the speaker 120 outputs a production sound (change sound) expressed in quarter notes. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the red light emission mode (light emission mode C) maintains that light emission mode, and the light emission mode does not change even if the display mode of the pending icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the pending icon, does not change its luminous mode, but if you look closely, you can see the pending icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) with the lowest appearance frequency, which is displayed by the player who discovers it. may greatly improve the interest in the game. Note that in response to the change of the pending icon h11 to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the effect lamp 206 also changes to a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) (e.g., light-emitting mode F (golden light emission mode))).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The pending icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 57(g), the suspension indicated by the suspension icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(g), variable display of decorative symbols has started, and the suspended icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. In this example, when the suspended icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow). , the variation icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The change icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal announcement of the finalization of the big win. At this timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon, the effect sound (change sound) represented by half notes is output from the speaker 120 . Further, in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped production lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the light emission mode C until now, changes to the light emission mode D that represents the rainbow color (display mode E). (Rainbow color emission mode). That is, it starts to emit light in the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). There is no change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E ( rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 57(h), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 57(i), the variation icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). In this way, the production lamp 206 may continue to emit light even when the variation icon h0 is hidden only when it emits light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode) that confirms the big win. Note that the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or turn off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the lighting mode. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 57(j), it has developed into super reach (front reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color). Also, a reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(j). Here, the reach title LT3 is displayed with black letters on a rainbow colored background as "Mr. Reach". As shown in FIG. 60(a), the background color of reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "manufacturer pattern", and "rainbow color". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the "red" jackpot is "35%", the expectation of the manufacturer's pattern is "75%", the expectation of the "rainbow" jackpot is "100" %”. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned "Jii Reach", the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the type of background color of the Reach title LT3. Also, the lighting mode D (rainbow-colored lighting mode), which is the lighting mode of the production lamp 206, is the same or similar to the lighting mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(k) displays an animation of the character of Tono, and the subsequent decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative designs are combined in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b and the right design display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 57(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, the effect lamp 206, which continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even after the start of super reach, emits light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even during super reach. is continued, and even if the combination of decorative patterns is stop-displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big win game start performance is started. In addition, the effect lamp 206 may be turned off according to the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 .

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect in which the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the decoration provided on the second effect movable body 8 are related.

FIG. 58 also shows the decorative design display device 208. As shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 58, the star-shaped production lamp 206 is omitted, and instead, the second production movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. As for the production lamp, as described above, the light emission mode may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain turned off, or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 58(a), one special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and this special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode. is displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58(a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 positioned at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side, and is in a position avoiding the display screen. facing downwards.

In FIG. 58(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 1 to 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th symbol of the special figure 1. In addition, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11 that has been at the display position of the first suspended icon until then is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The pending icon h11, which was in the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even when changed to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58(b) remains positioned at the initial position.

In the decorative design display device 208 where the variable display of the decorative design is started, the button effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(c) displays an operation prompting notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of Mr. Lord. The variable display of decorative symbols is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbols are changing by the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 and the like. . It should be noted that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation prompting notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 58(d), the effective period has decreased, and in the same figure (e), the player has pressed the effect button 136. As shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, the success or failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, the success is achieved. In the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. h0 is displayed. That is, the button effect is successful, and the normal notice is started. In accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variation icon h0, the effect sound (change sound) represented by eighth notes is output from the speaker 120. FIG. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit red light. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button effect, there are cases where a notice of entering the ready-to-win state is notified when successful.

As shown in FIG. 58(f), even if the success or failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still positioned at the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 58(g), When entering a ready-to-win state in the variable display of decorative symbols, the second effect movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm 81 starts rotating upward and the forearm 82 also starts rotating upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 begins to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 from the front side. In subsequent FIG. 58(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. As a result, the variation icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second effect movable body 8 is further rotated upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 58(i), it has developed into super reach (buttock reach). A reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(i). Here, the reach title LT4 is displayed with black letters on a red background display as "Mr. Reach". In addition, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58(i), the forearm 82 vibrates in a state in which the forearm 82 is lifted high, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and decoration C (red) is displayed. is visible. This decoration C is a display mode representing red, which is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red) which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the degree of expectation of a big win. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but they may be different display modes.

Also, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be in a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a slightly different hue from the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode will be similar to the display mode C (red).

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(j), animation of a buttocks character is displayed. The movable body 8 has started to return to the initial position. Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(k), a proud-looking lord character is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to its initial position. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of the decorative designs in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b and the right design display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 58(l), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 moves shown in FIG. .

Figures 59(a) to 59(e) are the same as Figures 58(a) to 58(e), and button effects are executed.

Also in FIG. 59(f), the button effect is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 that has been changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs an effect sound (change sound) expressed in quarter notes in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the change icon h0. Note that the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may not emit light in the light emission mode representing the maker's pattern, but may emit light in the red light emission mode.

In subsequent FIG. 59(g), similarly to FIG. 58(g), the ready-to-win state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols, and the second effect movable body 8 has started its operation. It should be noted that, for example, when the variation icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the motion effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. may Also, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed more than when the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 58(g) is displayed. The motion presentation of 8 may be easily performed. In other words, it is preferable that the action effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed as the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher. In addition, when the display of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is performed, the motion effect of the second effect movable body 8 may always be performed.

In FIG. 59(h), as in FIG. 58(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display. It's becoming Also, as in FIG. 58(h), the forearm 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is greatly lifted.

In FIG. 59(i), it develops into a super reach (front reach), and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reach title LT5. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black letters on the background display of the maker's pattern as "Mr. Reach". In addition, the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59(j) is similar to the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58(j). Furthermore, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C is visible, but the decoration C is in the display mode showing red, and is different from the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) that was the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. are different modes of decoration. That is, in terms of the degree of expectation for a big hit, the decoration is one step lower. It should be noted that the first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 54(e)) with a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, the degree of expectation for a big hit (75%) suggested by display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is lower. Since the player can see the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) with the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5, In some cases, the player has a sufficiently hot feeling, and the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 can calm down the player's feelings a little.

Note that the background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same or similar to the manufacturer pattern, and for example, the display pattern D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display form of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the shape of the polka dots are slightly different. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the display mode will be similar to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern).

Figures 59(i) to 59(l) are the same as Figures 58(i) to 58(l). It will be displayed as a stop, and it will be a big hit.

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 60(a) in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Grandfather Reach", and this background color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "kengo reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "dono reach" suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the CPU 504 controls the first sub control unit 400 Determines the background color based on commands received from Both of the reach title LT2 of "Kengo Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Lord Reach" include the manufacturer's pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common relationship is used as the relationship between the background color and the degree of expectation for a big hit, but different relationships may be used.

FIG. 60(b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-controller 400. As shown in FIG.

The CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the light emission color determination table shown in FIG. 60(b) in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 71 emission color is determined. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation for the big win, and the CPU 404 determines the color of the light emitted based on the command received from the main control unit 300 . White, red, and rainbow colors are available for the luminescent colors, and there are no maker-specific luminescent colors. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the red luminescent color and the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the red background color of the reach title are different in magnitude. Furthermore, the degree of expectation is different from the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested by the red display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 53 .

FIG. 60(c) is a diagram showing the lord's kimono color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-controller 500. As shown in FIG.

This determination table is a table for determining the color of the lord's kimono to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone rendering described with reference to FIG. As in the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 selects the lord's kimono based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 50(a). determine the color of At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 60(c) is used. As described above, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, so the manufacturer's pattern is not prepared for the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation for the big win.

In the above description, the sound effects such as the appearance sound of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the sound of the display mode change are output from the speaker 120. A dramatic sound is output (Fig. 56(c)), and a short eighth note dramatic sound is outputted corresponding to the display mode C (red) (Fig. 52(c), Fig. 57(c), Fig. 58( f)), corresponding to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), a longer quarter note effect sound is output (FIGS. 55(b), 57(e), and 59(f)), and the display mode E ( Rainbow color), the longest half note effect sound was output (FIG. 57(g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the output time of the effect sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, a display mode with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (display mode D and display mode E, which is higher than 50%) and a display with a relatively low expectation of a big win. The effect sound may differ between modes (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, the special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only for the appearance sound of the pending icon or variable icon in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) and the changing sound to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), a specific effect sound different from that in other display modes is output. You may make it The specific effect sound here may be a sound effect related to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or a sound effect representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, , the cry of the animal patterned animal may be output as the specific effect sound.

Further, in the above description, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 52(j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. , the background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 55(e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 57(j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation for the big win. However, the display mode of the title characters may suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and in this case, the title characters are displayed in different display modes according to the degree of expectation of the big win. . On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and in this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title characters and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display characters, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice characters, background display, and balloon line display, The degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the display mode (color or pattern) of the variation icon. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration effect.

Also, during the jackpot game, the light emitting means (the effect lamp 206, the light emitting portion 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game frame lamps 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emission mode. Therefore, unless the symbol variation display is being performed, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. It should be noted that even during the jackpot game, the light-emitting means does not emit light in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern (display mode D).

Also, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second game state (eg, special figure high probability state) than in the first game state (eg, special figure low probability state). In addition, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the player's setting operation, but if it is a specification that can be changed in the custom mode, it can be changed in the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode )), the appearance frequency of the maker's pattern may be higher in the second mode (for example, custom mode).

In addition, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when hitting right in a special figure low probability state, it takes a long time until the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It may be possible that the maker pattern may appear in a special figure high probability state in which a small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in a 1 type 2 type mixed machine that wins V via a small win, the maker pattern does not appear in the variable performance that wins a small win in the normal game state, and the small win is won in the time-saving game state. In the variable presentation, the maker pattern may appear.

Also, although the appearance frequency of the maker pattern is the lowest, its appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be lower than the appearance frequency of red but higher than the appearance frequency of rainbow. It should be noted that, as described above, this appearance frequency may be changeable by the player's setting operation.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative pattern display device 208. - 特許庁

Further, as display means in place of the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. may This light guide plate is an optical member that emits forward light incident from the side. A pattern can be displayed. Even when a light guide plate is used instead of the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not displayed.

52 to 59, white, green, red, gold, rainbow colors, and maker patterns that may or may not represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, Although blue, which does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, is used for description, other colors and patterns may be used.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon, the default display mode will not change to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). In this case, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may be changed. and display mode B (green). Conversely, while the default display mode is not changed to the display mode E (rainbow color), the default display mode may be changed to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). may be made possible. Also, the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) may be changed from the default display mode, from the display mode C (red), and from the display mode B (green).

As described above, various effects using colors have been described. ), light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting portion 71 of first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R , upper frame lamp 122U, game frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.), a predetermined color displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (lord's kimono), and a second effect movable body Strictly speaking, the predetermined colors of the decorations of the decorations provided in 8 are different in each display because the display media and effects are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine the "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can also be said that it is the same or similar "predetermined color".

FIG. 61 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player's side).

This slot machine 1000 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001 . Three reels (a left reel 1010, a middle reel 1011, and a right reel 1012) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 61) are housed in the center of the main body 1001. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 1010 to 1012. . As for the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown in FIG. 61) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line 1014 . A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five prize lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal prize line and a lower horizontal prize line are added. When 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right The five lines of the downward winning line and the right upward winning line may be effective as the winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. A reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, and when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted. Three pieces are put in. The bet button 1032 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. Insertion includes both. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

A start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 . That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, an internal lottery process is executed to determine which of a plurality of types of winnings is won based on the operation of the start lever 1035, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively favorable or relatively unfavorable state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 . The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012, respectively. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The payout button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals placed on the bet and ejecting them from the medal payout port 1055 . The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61 is provided with an operation key unit 1090 which is the same as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided a production button 1091 which is the same as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. luminous.

A sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002 . This production device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 consisting of two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged behind the door member 1063, It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player's side), and the effect movable body 1058 appears on the right side. Light-emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full-color light are arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Also, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 61 is provided with the decorative body described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. A display device or the like may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, the display screen may be curved.

Also in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61 , a sub liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057 .

On the liquid crystal display device 1057 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device, display modes A to E are displayed, such as character display of the title, background display of the title, background display of the notice, frame display of the notice, and character display of the notice. Used. That is, the display of the maker's pattern in the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestive image suggesting the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state and the degree of expectation for bonus acquisition. In addition, the side lamp 1044, the light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, and the button lamp (not shown) that causes the effect button 1091 to emit light can emit light in light emission modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the lighting mode that represents the manufacturer's design.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In an enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means to the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, as shown in FIG. The ball reservoir dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses balls, circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine, uses the enclosed balls as launch balls, and pays out the balls by credit. may be

According to the above description,
"Suggestion images that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big win, the degree of expectation of shifting to AT state, the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [for example, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. Lamps 442 (see FIG. 44), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138, etc. shown in FIG. Side lamp 1044, light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and left door 1063b, button lamps (not shown) that cause the effect button 1091 to emit light],
A game table comprising
The display means displays the suggestive image in a first display mode [for example, a white display mode shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 60(a), a green display mode shown in FIG. c), red display mode shown in FIG. 60(a), etc.],
The display means can display the suggestive image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53(d) and 60(a)]. is a
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The light-emitting means has a first light-emitting mode representing the first display mode [for example, white light-emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 60(b), green light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 53(c), red light emission mode shown in FIG. 60(b), etc.],
The light-emitting means does not emit light in a second light-emitting mode representing the second display mode [for example, a light-emitting mode of green and yellow polka dots on a white background].
A gaming machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 and a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode can be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be an expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light-emitting body provided on an accessory such as movable means.

Further, even if the first light emission mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the light-emitting means does not emit light in a light-emitting mode generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

Further, the display means can display the suggestive image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 0%. Alternatively, a display mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation may be used.

again,
``The display means can display the suggestive image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 53(e) and FIG.
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 100%] than the second display mode,
The light-emitting means may emit light in a third light-emitting mode representing the third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored light-emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 60(b)]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first light emission mode is a light emission mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
The second light emission mode is the same or similar light emission mode as the second display mode,
The third light emission mode is the same or similar light emission mode as the third display mode,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The first light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the first display mode, the second light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the second display mode, and the third light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the second display mode. The light emission mode may be a light emission mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first luminescence mode and the first display mode differ only due to the difference in media such as the luminescence means and the display means, the first luminescence mode is the same as the first luminescence mode. It can be said that the light emission mode is the same as the display mode, and the third light emission mode can be said to be the same light emission mode as the third display mode.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode using multiple colors [e.g., yellow and green],
The third display mode is also a display mode using multiple colors [e.g., seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple)].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 100%,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests a big hit.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode [e.g., manufacturer's pattern or manufacturer's color] that symbolizes the manufacturing company or sales company of the gaming machine.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or sales company of the game machine can be recognized.

According to the above description,
"Suggestion images that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big win, the degree of expectation of shifting to AT state, the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] liquid crystal display device 1057 etc.],
43, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. body 1058] and
A game machine comprising
The display means displays the suggestive image in a first display mode [for example, a white display mode shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 60(a), a green display mode shown in FIG. c), red display mode shown in FIG. 60(a)],
The display means can display the suggestive image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53(d) and 60(a)]. is a
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The movable means has a first decoration according to a display mode representing the first display mode [for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 54(a), a green decoration shown in FIG. ) includes the red decoration shown in
The movable means does not include a second decoration [for example, decoration of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background] in a display mode representing the second display mode [for example, FIG. reference],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode can be enhanced. Further, since the movable means whose movable area is closer to the player than the display means does not include the second decoration, misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared can be prevented. It is possible to reduce the excessive stimulation of feelings.

The degree of expectation may be an expectation of a big hit.

Also, the movable means may be an effect movable means (accessory).

Moreover, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the movable means is not provided with decorations that are generally recognized to have a relationship with the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or pattern. In other words, it may be a portion that does not change in color or pattern. Alternatively, it may be a part (liquid crystal display device, light-emitting diode, etc.) that displays colors or patterns, or a part that can display by changing colors or patterns.

Further, the display means can display the suggestive image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 0%. Alternatively, a display mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation may be used.

again,
``The display means can display the suggestive image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 53(e) and FIG.
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 100%] than the second display mode,
The movable means does not include a third decoration [e.g., rainbow-colored decoration] in a display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 54],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, the second finger (index finger) 822] on which a display in a display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means can take a state in which the first portion is invisible to the player and a state in which the first portion is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. It may not be provided with the second portion on which the display in the display mode is displayed. Further, the movable means may not be provided with the third portion on which the display in the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 54).

again,
"The first decoration is a decoration with a display mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
The second decoration is a decoration with a display mode that is the same as or similar to the second display mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the third decoration is a decoration with a display mode identical to or similar to the third display mode. 』
was also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the first display mode, the second decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the second display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to a display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only different due to the difference in media such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that it is the same display mode as .

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Furthermore, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 100%.

again,
"The movable means displays the suggestive image in the second display mode rather than when the suggestive image in the first display mode is displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 58(g)]." If it is [for example, FIG. 59 (g)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturing company or sales company of the game machine.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or sales company of the game machine can be recognized.

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modifications, and various examples described above, the constituent element may be used in other embodiments, examples, and modifications or various examples. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it is established as a unified technical idea.

62 to 84, game machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, pinball game machines such as pachinko machines and reel game machines such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 62 to 84 are used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 84, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

<Overall composition>
First, using FIG. 62, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a launcher. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the side of the player).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided in a game machine installation business office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of the store (amusement parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of being opened and closed with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate has an upper plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball ejection button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in a lower tray 128 by operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a game board for discharging game balls guided to a launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball shooting handle 134 that shoots out to the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 64) by the operation of the player, and built in the production button 136, and the production A chance button lamp 138 for causing a button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a player's balance returning instruction to the card unit. and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 . Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 62, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 63 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 62 viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 and is used to temporarily store game balls, is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the game balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 65). A game ball that has passed through this payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches an upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the condition for giving is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 housing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 65) that controls the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to performance, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( (see FIG. 65), and a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game clerk; ), a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 65) that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192 , a setting change button 194 and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 . In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least a setting change mode in which one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. can move to In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 71(A), the character ratio/setting display 196 has two-digit seven-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit seven-segment LED on the right side. , the character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162 . Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side is sometimes called the front or front, and the far side is sometimes called the back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is called the right when viewed from the front. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side is sometimes referred to as the upper side, and the lower side is sometimes referred to as the lower side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201 . The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201 . When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, it is possible to carry out error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop to disable the continuation of the game, etc.). The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . Below the game area 124, a normal design display device 210, a first special design display device 212, a second special design display device 214, a normal design reservation lamp 216, a first special design reservation lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 is provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal design may be referred to as "general figure" and the special design may be referred to as "special figure".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and a performance display region 208d. , and the right design display area 208c display different decoration designs, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The normal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games that are reserved (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation game is held to a predetermined number (eg, four) making it possible to The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). making it possible.

In addition, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL are also provided. The time saving middle lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal figure is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The high-probability medium lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative pattern display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal figure start opening 228, a first special figure start opening 230, and a second special figure start opening 232. , a variable winning opening 234 is provided.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is called a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is called a general winning opening 226b. When the ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are awarded. When the ball is ejected to the upper tray 126 and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it. For example, 1 ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these constructions, prize balls are paid out to the player based on winning. In this embodiment, different ball detection sensors detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226a and game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226b. Further, when a plurality of general winning holes 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entering game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning holes 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entering game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. Balls entered into the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is configured with a device for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, called a gate or through chucker, and is located on the right side of the game board 200 in this embodiment. One is placed in the Unlike the balls that have entered the general prize winning opening 226, the balls that have passed through the normal figure starting opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 .

The first special figure starting port 230 is arranged only one at the lower center of the game board 200 in this embodiment. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. Along with discharging to , the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is discharged to the game island side after being guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. And, in this embodiment, the specification to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such specifications may be called a "special 2 priority variation machine" etc.) And It is

The second special figure starting port 232 is configured by an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230, and has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. In the middle, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the normal pattern variation game is won and the normal pattern display device 210 stops displaying the winning pattern, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. Along with that, the special figure fluctuation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. A ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal pattern starting port 228 (by a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the normal pattern starting port 228 when hitting to the left. . Therefore, as a general rule, there is no winning in the normal figure variation game during left-handed hitting, and therefore, as a general rule, the blade member 232a is not opened or closed. On the other hand, when hitting to the right, it is possible to expect the game ball to enter the normal figure starting port 228, so that the normal figure fluctuation game may be won and the blade member 232a may open and close. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200 . The variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (eg, opening time of 29 seconds, closing time of 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (eg, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper tray 126 as prize balls.

In this embodiment, the variable prize winning port 234 and the general prize winning port 226b are integrated with the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. FIG. The ball-entering unit U1 is further provided with a V-shutter VS and a V-pass switch VC. The V-passing switch VC is opened upward and allows game balls to pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing gaming ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves back and forth by means of a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by a drive circuit 334 . When the V-shutter VS moves forward (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A game ball that enters the variable winning port 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided forward, rolls up to the V shutter VS, passes the V pass switch VC, or fails to pass. In some cases, the player is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁The V-pass switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322 . In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In this embodiment, the V-shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V-shutter VS opens (retreats) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V winning prize can be obtained, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big win game ends, and if the V winning prize cannot be obtained, the control state changes to the special figure low probability state after the big winning game ends. remains That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the passage of the game ball through the V passage switch VS.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with the intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The shot mallet is passed through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124.例文帳に追加Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc. Exit (1st special figure start opening 230, 2nd special figure start opening 232), without winning any prize opening or start opening, or just passing through normal figure start opening 228 Reach 240. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed in the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of a game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104 . Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning ports) are received in the discharged ball receiving port and are passed through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via.

In addition, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged in the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of this embodiment, these production devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted. , a payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. there is

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the main control section 300 as a whole. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit contains two counters). is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302. FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a predetermined pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general figure display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, Normal figure holding lamp 216, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp etc.) and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and a predetermined movable member, for example, as a normal electric accessory Various solenoids 332 including driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure start opening 232, door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, and driving means for driving the V shutter VS and a drive circuit 334 for control are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 .

In addition, when the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and converts the latched value to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Store in the value storage register. Also, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 .

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply. is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main control section main processing, which will be described later, is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with 1 sub control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. good too.

Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main controller 300 . The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Also, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402 . The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp driving circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452 . Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 .

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a driving circuit 422 for controlling the driving of the production devices 2 to 4, and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (video display processor) that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. 516 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, image display data, and the like. In this embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of retaining the storage state even when power is cut off. As a result, for example, information for displaying a display relating to the history of big hits can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. A RAM in which stored information volatilizes when power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and provides prize balls or ball rental based on control signals output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of has been completed. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via a CR interface unit 606 . In addition, the payout control unit 600 provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Rental ball information or the like indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600 . The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. These sensors detect when 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300 .

The shooting control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stopping of shooting output by the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball shooting handle 134 by the player, which is output by a shooting intensity output circuit provided in the ball shooting handle 134. A firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and a ball feeding device 634 that feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled based on the control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 66(a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. I will explain the types of Toku-zu and Universal-zu.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start opening 232. The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on the condition that the second start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been thrown. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats all the lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Variation game) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the central one segment "variation display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop pattern mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time decided before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 , the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "special figure 1 or 2 variable display" to the stop display of the special figure 1 or 2 stop design mode may be referred to as special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in succession.

FIG. 66(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. In this FIG. 66(a), three types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure c" are shown. In FIG. 66(a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure a” and “special figure b”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 . "Special figure a" is a 3-round (R) definite variable big hit pattern that is scheduled to be definite variable acquisition, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal big hit pattern that has no chance of definite variable acquisition. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, variable probability acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when entering the third round which is the final round of the jackpot game, the V shutter VS opens (retreats) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. be possible. If the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS (if the V winning prize is won), after the big hit game ends, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, and the special figure high probability state that has shifted is the big hit game. It is maintained while the pattern variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In this embodiment, if the V shutter VS is opened, there is enough time to maintain the open state, the possibility of the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS is high, and the "special figure a" is a probability variable acquisition can be said to be a planned big hit (the same applies to "special figure A" and "special figure B" to be described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the third round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, is entered, and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS. The control state remains in the special low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In this way, the transition to the special figure high probability state required V winning, but the transition to the general pattern high probability state is started on the condition that the big hit game ends. That is, if you hit the jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the general pattern high probability state. It is maintained for 120 times, and 50 times in the case of special b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special figure c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 .

FIG. 66(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. FIG. In this FIG. 66(b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D"). Figure B”). "Special figure A" is a 10R definite variable big hit pattern scheduled for definite variable acquisition, and "Special figure B" is a 2R definite variable big hit pattern scheduled for definite variable acquisition. That is, if the special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, after the big hit game is over, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state normal figure high probability state, and after the big hit game is finished This state is maintained while the pattern variation display is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins the V prize in the second round, after the big win game is over, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state general figure high probability state, and after the big win game is over, the special figure pattern. This state is maintained while the variable display is performed 120 times here as well.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“special figure C” and “special figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 . The "special figure C" is the same general losing pattern as the "special figure c", but the "special figure D" is a special pattern called a time saving pattern, which will be described later in detail.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a special figure variation game is a big hit is determined by hardware random number lottery, and the big winning pattern to be stopped is determined by software random number lottery. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game of a specific period, it is determined whether or not the "sudden reduction in working hours" is won by lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden reduction in working hours" is won, the second special figure display The device 214 stop-displays the "time saving pattern". Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the normal pattern high probability state. Ordinary figure high probability state is called a time saving game state (power support state). Here, the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined higher advantage for the player than the non-time-saving gaming state, such as by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric sapo state" is a state related to the normal game, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to the special game or a state related to the normal game and the special game. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a general pattern high probability state. In the general pattern high probability state, it becomes easier to win the general pattern variation game than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the normal pattern fluctuation game is 1/100 in the normal pattern low probability state (non-time saving game state), while in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving game state) it rises to 99/100. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-time-saving game state (normal figure variable short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Also, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 tends to be longer (extension of electric chew open period). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the blade member 232a tends to open more (increase in the number of electric chew openings). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state per winning to the normal figure start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. In addition, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-time-saving game state is maintained. Especially in a jackpot game, if game balls are picked up by electric chews with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is In addition, in this embodiment, when simply described as "non-time-saving game state", during the jackpot game shall be excluded.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, all of the regular figure fixed change, the regular figure variable short, the extension of the electric chew open period, and the increase in the number of electric chew openings are performed, but at least one of these is performed If so, the player's advantage becomes high, and it may be a time-saving game state. In this case, in each of the time-saving game states of a short time, b short time, and c short time, which will be described later, change the normal figure probability change, normal figure variable short, extension of the electric chew open period, and increase in the electric chew open number of times. good too. For example, in the case of a short time, normal figure fixed change, normal figure variable short, electric chew open period extension, and electric chew open number increase are all performed, but in b time short and c short time, normal figure fixed change, normal figure variable short , extension of the electric chew open period, and increase in the number of electric chew open times may be executed. Alternatively, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases, and if either one of the extension of the electric chew open period or the increase in the number of electric chew openings is performed, it may be a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which game balls are easy to enter. This special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state over a long period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the special figure changes 120 times after the end of the subsequent jackpot game. The time saving game state (ordinary pattern high probability state) is maintained until the display is performed, and at the 121st time, it shifts to a non-time saving game state (normal pattern low probability state). In addition, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the variation display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game to be performed thereafter. In the first time, it shifts to a non-time-saving game state (ordinary figure low probability state). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the jackpot pattern of all of the special figures, after the end of the jackpot game, to shift to the time-saving game state, but even if a jackpot pattern (non-time-saving jackpot pattern) that does not shift to the time-saving game state is provided Well, when it becomes a big hit with a non-time-saving big hit pattern, it may be kept in the non-time-saving game state without shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big win game. Further, in addition to the big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols may be prepared. In the small-hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 operates predetermined times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. It only stays open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per actuation. In the opening of the door member 234a for a small hit, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the door member 234a in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state before the start of the small win game is restored.

FIG. 66(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 11 kinds of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 11". That the ball entered the special figure 1 starter opening 230 or the special figure 2 starter opening 232, that is, the first starter sensor detected that the ball entered the special figure 1 starter opening 230, or the special figure 2 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting port 232, each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208 is displayed. "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → "Decoration" "Variation display of patterns" is performed. That is, the decorative design display device 208 variably displays the decorative design separately from the first special design display device 212 and the second special design display device 214 . Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

In the case of notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special b"), a combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns with the same number are arranged in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) are stopped. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the definite variable jackpot (3R definite variable jackpot of "special figure a", 10R definite variable jackpot of "special figure A", 2R definite variable jackpot of "special figure B"), in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped. In addition, when notifying the "special figure c" or "special figure C" of the missing pattern, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c display a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described so far (for example, a random eyes) to stop displaying. Furthermore, in the case of notifying that the player has won the lottery in a short time, three "decorations 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative design variable display" to the stop display of the decorative design in the stopped design mode may be referred to as the decorative design variable display. The variable display of decorative patterns is controlled by the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 66(d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal pattern: "normal pattern A", which is a winning pattern, and "normal pattern B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the detection by the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the normal map display device 210 lights up all seven segments, and turns on the central one segment. Perform "Normal figure fluctuation display" (Normal figure fluctuation game) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the winning pattern "normal pattern A" and the losing pattern "normal pattern B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 66(d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variable display of the normal pattern" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern may be referred to as the variable display of the normal pattern.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random number, a special figure electric sapo decision random number, and a special figure design random number. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the reserved number of special figures, the special figure winning random number, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area that stores the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure that is divided into the maximum number (in this example, four) areas that can hold the start of the success/failure determination (lottery), A random number storage area for normal maps is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in order of winning (reservation order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 detects the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it monitors whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), step Proceed to S107. Even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The output port to the first sub-controller 400) outputs a clear signal, and the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308 is performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps in order to execute the initialization process.

If it is determined not to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), is the reason for this being that the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that there has been an operation). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is turned ON (step S115). If it is determined that there is (step S115; Yes), setting change processing is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor in the role product ratio/setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments of the setting monitor are incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor indicate "6". When it is set, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected. is determined. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194 . In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the character ratio/setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Also, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting 1 to 6 are set, but settings other than six levels may be used, and settings may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is held and the held setting value is displayed. good too.

If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No) or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is turned ON ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is executed to initialize the basic circuit 302 (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read. All areas) are added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 to calculate the checksum, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes initialization processing to initialize the pachinko machine 100 . In this initialization processing, interrupt inhibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Note that in this embodiment, even if the initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Further, here, the normal return command and the setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This return-to-normal command is a command indicating that the initialization processing (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the general pattern winning random number counter and the special pattern random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S121 except while the timer interrupt processing that starts at predetermined intervals is being performed.

On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out, and the stack pointer is reset (permanent setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and after resetting to each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 in step S233 in timer interrupt processing of the main controller 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment). A partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320 . Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) before the last time is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308 and stored in the two-previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. memorize to Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control section timer interrupt processing, which repeats activation at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is this time detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that a prize has been won when a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal the previous time, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is converted into predetermined prize winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal from the time before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal this time). information indicating that it is), when it matches the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special figure starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 It is judged that there was passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first start opening sensor that detects the entry ball to the first special figure start opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that there is a winning to the start port 230, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning to the first special figure start port 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 . Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal the time before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there has been a winning until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches with the pattern information, then it is determined whether or not it matches with the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then used by the main control unit 300, the normal figure winning random value and Update the random number counter for generating each special random number. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. As a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the memory area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for general pattern winning that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308. If the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for normal figure winning, and In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers has made the next round. Keep In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for normal figure winning random number generation has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one round The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal pattern display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device 214. Various types of timers, including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time for variable/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning opening 234, 226 or starting opening 230, 232, the value of the number of winning balls storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is updated in the RAM 308. Read out, add 1, and set in the original prize number storage area.

Also, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired. A plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 .

In step S219 executed subsequent to step S217, payout request number transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. , power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and encryption in bits 0-3 It shows the number of payout requests after the processing.

In step S221, a general pattern state update process is performed. This general pattern state update process performs one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general pattern state. For example, in the middle of the general pattern fluctuation display (the value of the general pattern display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), in the general pattern state update process, the 7 segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 is repeatedly lit and extinguished. Extinguishment drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation game).

In addition, in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the general pattern fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the general pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the pattern The lighting/extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to be in the display mode of the losing symbol. 7-segment LED lighting/extinguishing control is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general pattern state update process. Here, along with performing the lighting/extinguishing drive control described above, a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal map stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 66(d)) and the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 66(d)). display. Furthermore, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the normal chart stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal pattern variation game.

Also, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is hit, as described later, the normal pattern per flag is turned on. When this normal pattern per flag is on, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the normal pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting normal figure operation in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds) In addition, information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 500 m seconds), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing drive of 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM308.

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for blade closing time management changes from 1 to 0), the general pattern non-operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, as described later, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on. When this general pattern loss flag is on, even in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above has ended (the value of the general pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal chart non-operation is set. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, normal figure related lottery processing is performed. In this general figure related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not in operation), and of the reserved general figure fluctuation game If the number is 1 or more, a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area determines whether the result of the general pattern variation game is winning or not. A winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON when winning is determined. If the prize is not won, the winning flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is displayed from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variable display of a figure, and this variable display time is stored in a normal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a normal figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is stored in the normal pattern reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time the hit determination is made, from the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this normal pattern pending number storage area. Also, the random number used for the hit judgment is erased.

Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and determines in advance the stop pattern and the fluctuation time before the propriety determination process, and the prior determination The result (special figure lookahead result) is stored in the lookahead result storage unit in RAM308.

Then, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure status update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, according to the state of special figure 2, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is lit and extinguished Repeated lighting and extinguishing control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variation display (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special pattern probability change flag, and a normal pattern probability change flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 2 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on is a special figure A shown in FIG. 66 (b), a special figure B when the 2R jackpot flag is on, a special figure C when the losing flag is on, and a special figure when the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is on D so as to be in each mode, the lighting and extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, special figure 2 display device 214, 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure A), 2R probability variation jackpot design (special figure B), loss design (special figure C), time saving design (special figure D) Performs a fixed display of any one of the symbols.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (eg 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 2 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is notified to the player. In addition, if the number of times of time saving stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, during the jackpot game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is, after additionally storing in the RAM308 as information to be included in the command data described later, the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. FIG. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round (10 rounds for special figure A, 2 rounds for special figure B) of the final round of the jackpot with probability variation, a predetermined open period (for example, 10 seconds) V shutter A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in an open state is output to the VS open/close drive solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332), and the open period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. set the information to be displayed. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (timing when the value of the V shutter open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening and closing drive of the V shutter VS ( A part of the various solenoids 332) outputs a signal to hold the V-shutter VS in the closed state. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and that the probability variation has been obtained (V prize effect period (for example, 3 seconds)), the RAM 308 stores Information indicating the V winning effect period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 2 waiting time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the V winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round except for the first time), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds ) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which the image for informing the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, the effect is stored in the memory area of the timer for managing the effect standby time provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the waiting period.

Also, if the 10R big hit flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in RAM 308 to turn on. Even when the 2R big hit flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. to turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number (950 times) is set to the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM308 is turned on.

Shortening of the working hours here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big win in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big win. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern probability change). In the general pattern high probability state, the probability of hitting in the general pattern variation game is higher than in the general pattern low probability state. In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a tends to open more than in the general pattern low probability state. The state in which any of these normal map fixed variable, normal map variable short, and electric chu opening is set is called an electric sapo (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Also, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This is, when the normal pattern high probability state is in the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit increases and the gambling nature increases.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 2 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0), Set special figure 2 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update processing) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, according to the state of special figure 1, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 variable display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED that constitutes the special figure 1 display device 212 is lit and extinguished Repeated lighting and extinguishing control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the special figure 1 variable display (special figure 1 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags such as a 3R big hit flag A, a 3R big hit flag B, and a losing flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 1 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has passed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on To special figure a shown in FIG. 66 (a), special figure b when 3R big hit flag B is on, special figure c when the off flag is on, special figure 1 display The lighting and extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the device 212 is performed, and the setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in the setting area of the RAM 308 is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines one of the 3R probability variable jackpot design (special figure a), 3R normal jackpot design (special figure b), and loss design (special figure c). display.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the fixed display special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special figure 1 variation game. In addition, if the number of times of time saving stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, during the jackpot game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 1. The processing ends after additionally storing the special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

Also, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the value of the special figure 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. FIG. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R big hit flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), a predetermined open period (for example, 10 seconds) V shutter VS solenoid for opening and closing drive ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to a part of various solenoids 332 , and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the V shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (timing when the value of the V shutter open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening and closing drive of the V shutter VS ( A part of the various solenoids 332) outputs a signal to hold the V-shutter VS in the closed state. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and that the probability variation has been obtained (V prize effect period (for example, 3 seconds)), the RAM 308 stores Information indicating the V winning effect period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 1 waiting time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the V winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds except for the first time), and in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative pattern display device In order to set the waiting period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by 208 is finished is displayed, information indicating the waiting period for the effect is stored in the memory area of the timer for managing the waiting time for the effect provided in the RAM 308. set. Also, if the 3R big hit flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving provided in the RAM 308 is set. turn on the flag. Even when the 3R big hit flag B is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of this big win game, the number of times of time saving (50 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving number provided in the RAM 308 is set. turn on the flag. It should be noted that, in the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to ON.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 1 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here first, the special figure-related lottery process (special figure 2-related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1-related lottery process ) is performed (step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 fluctuation games are not performed, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 states are both inactive and reserved special figure 2 It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not played, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and reserved. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

As for these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation game and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variation game does not start variation because the special figure 2 variation game is in the process of varying first. Also, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the reservation of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, by the decorative design display device 208, the notification of the result of the determination of the special figure fluctuation game is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232 , the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, a special figure variation game with a high degree of advantage (in this example, a special figure 2 variation game) is performed with priority over a special figure variation game with a low degree of advantage (in this example, a special figure 1 variation game). For this reason, it may become easier to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 starting information (special Figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special figure 2 start information, using the success/failure determination table stored in ROM 306 A decision is made as to whether the game is a big hit or a loss (hit/fail judgment). Also, even in the success/failure determination of the special figure 1, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the decided propriety determination result of the special figure 2 The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display are determined. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the success/failure determination, the acquired special figure fluctuation time determination random number, etc., was stored in the ROM 306 Determine the variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 using various tables.

The main control unit 300, after retrieving the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and special 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reservation number of the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 fluctuation game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is preferentially digested over the reservation of the special figure 1 Toku-zu 2 priority variation is given as an example, but the Toku-zu 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage is started with priority over the Toku-zu 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage, and the reservation of Toku-zu 1 is It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is digested with priority over holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage and the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the reservation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won. It may be a start-up winning order variation that starts in order. In the start-up winning order change, the upper limit of the pending number is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so compared to the priority change where the upper limit of the pending number is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 You may be able to increase the hold limit by

In the above description, the lottery process and variable game related to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update By performing the process and the special figure related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it may be configured to simultaneously change a plurality of special figures. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of the respective special symbols are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when the variation regarding a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicates that data is set when on), Command type (in this example form, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc., and symbol variation stop ( In the case of a rotation stop) command, it includes values of various big hit flags and loss flags. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start opening 230 is won, whether or not the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won, whether or not the variable winning opening 234 is won, etc. including. In the case of the lookahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of special figures 1 and 2, the number of lookaheads stored in the number of lookahead storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the lookahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information.

In addition, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related lottery process selected by Set information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data, which is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the reserved special figure Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described big winning opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data, notice information (advance notice information, false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of predetermined errors, such as the presence or absence of the front frame door open error or the lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is added to the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212 through the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 , Display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various state display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of I / O310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310. FIG.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt termination process is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. return to On the other hand, in step S243, when power is restored, specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. after that, it enters the HALT state.

Next, processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. First, in step S301 of FIG. 69(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and in accordance with the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform processing to change to

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 .

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the performance data read out in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read out in step S309 includes a command to the effect devices 2 to 4, this command is output to the driving circuit 422. FIG.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 69(b) is a flow chart of the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal from the main controller 300 . In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

FIG. 69(c) is a flow chart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main process, and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, transmission of the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission processing (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing, and other processing for updating the random value for effect etc.

Next, processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described. FIG. 70(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. First, in step S401 of FIG. 70(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the performance data corresponding to this command (the performance data by the decorative pattern display device 208) is read out from the ROM (not shown), etc., and the performance data is updated. is required, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 70(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-controller 400 . In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-controller 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 70(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM explained in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

FIG. 70(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-controller main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers 1 and 2 of the VRAM 518 . As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 . Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 generates information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, specific configurations of the character item ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the character ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 71(B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. is.

As described above, the character ratio/setting display 196 includes a character ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The character ratio monitor displays the continuous character ratio (RY) and the character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

Here, the continuous role ratio refers to the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the said role when the role is continuously operated (i.e., the variable winning during the jackpot game It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning to the variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the role ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the role (that is, the second special figure start port 232 and the variable winning port 234 are opened and won It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous role product ratio, when it is determined that the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role product ratio is displayed blinking, and then to output a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 . In addition, it may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156 . As a result, the model application test for the game machine may be smoothly performed.

Also, as a result of calculating the role ratio, if it is determined that the ratio is over 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the role ratio is displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ). Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the role product ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In the present embodiment, when the continuous role product ratio or the role product ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED blinks. good too.

As shown in FIG. 71B, the DIP switch board 198 is provided with eight DIP switches. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each DIP switch can be read to change the appearance probability of the effect. Appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc. can be set.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described, although there are parts that overlap with what has been described so far.

FIG. 72(a) is a table summarizing the types of big wins and game states after the big win game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. The probability of hitting the jackpot at high probability is 1/91. When the setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/88. When the setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/84. The higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

In addition, the normal pattern winning probability at the normal pattern low probability is 1/100, while the normal pattern winning probability at the normal pattern high probability is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the special figure 1, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is even (50% each), and in the special figure 2, the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B is 7:3.

Also, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V passing switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region ON), it becomes with variable probability, so the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is not opened even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS is opened only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. Whether it is a special figure A or a special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operation area ON), the game state after the jackpot game ends is a special figure high probability normal figure It becomes a high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times.

In addition, after the special figure high probability general figure high probability state or the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times, it shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). The time saving that is started after the jackpot game is called a time saving.

FIG. 72(b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), in order to aim at the special figure 1 start port 230, it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area. That is, in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the general figure start port 228, it is almost impossible to win the general figure fluctuation game, and the player should not hit the right hand. The ball should be launched toward the left area (should be hit left). It should be noted that the normal state is a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability general figure high probability state or a special figure high probability general figure high probability state, it is easy to win the general figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim for the general figure start port 228, out of the game area , It is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the right side area where the normal figure start port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 72 (a), the probability of being able to acquire a big hit (special figure a) with probability variation in special figure 1 is 50%, while in special figure 2 with probability variation is 100%. In addition, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game is always 120 times in the special figure 2, while it may be 50 times in the special figure 1. - 特許庁Therefore, since it is easier for the player to win a big hit with the special figure 2 than with the special figure 1, the player should be allowed to enter the second special figure start port 232 to aim for the big hit with the special figure 2. . Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side area (should hit to the right).

Also, in the case of a jackpot game, in order to aim at the variable winning hole 234, the game ball is shot toward the right side area where the variable winning hole 234 is provided in the game area (to hit to the right). Become. FIG. 72(b) shows that there are cases where the time saving game state is maintained 120 times and 50 times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in FIG. 72 (b), while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving game state), when the special figure is not hit even once, That is, when the special figure loss continues 950 times, the time saving game state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving gaming state is maintained as a result of the special figure losing continuing for a predetermined number of times is called play time, and this time-saving is called b time-saving. The b time-saving game state can be shifted only once after the power is turned on until the first hit, and after a big win once, it can be shifted only once before the next big win. Therefore, if 950 times the special figure loss continues in the b time saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time saving game state, the b time saving game state so far continues, 1100 times special figure loss If it continues, it shifts to a non-time-saving game state (normal state). In addition, the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for transition to the b time saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time saving game state and the c time saving game state described later.

Further, the time saving pattern may be stopped and displayed only in the pattern variation display of the special figure 2, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and (b). The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is called c time-saving. This time-saving design is the reservation of the special figure 2 that remained at the time of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state) (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 remaining It may be referred to as "suspension".) may be elected in a short time c in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is performed as a result of being digested in a non-time-saving gaming state. When c time saving is won, the time saving design is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 64), and the decorative design display device 208 displays "decoration 11" (time saving decorative design) shown in FIG. 66 (c) ) are displayed side by side. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the jackpot game. The odds of suddenly winning the short time are 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining reservation at the time when the time saving game state started after the jackpot game ended, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time saving game state started continuously 950 times special figure loss In addition to the remaining hold, it is possible that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state that was started by suddenly winning the time-saving is completed may suddenly win again in the time-saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state and b time saving game state, there is a case where the time saving pattern is elected. Also in this case, the time saving design is stop-displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 64). However, on the decorative pattern display device 208, three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. . And in this embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state and the b time saving game state are given priority over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed at the time, the time saving pattern is invalidated and the time saving game state is not entered.

Furthermore, if you hit the right in the non-time-saving game state, win the normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew), if you win c time-saving There is a transition to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining reservation, but also the new special figure 2 reservation may be shifted to the c time saving gaming state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time-saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal pattern start port 228, it may not be possible to win the normal pattern fluctuation game, or even if the normal pattern fluctuation game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a It may be an open pattern that is extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the condition for transition to the b time-saving gaming state is satisfied by all losing in the c time-saving gaming state (950 consecutive special figure losing), and the c time-saving gaming state is shifted to the b time-saving gaming state. In some cases.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state and the b time saving game state, the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 However, it may be changed so that it is not displayed. In other words, it may be arranged such that it is not stopped and displayed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, a specific example of game progress in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the time saving game state ends and shifts to a non time saving game state from a little before the time saving game state ends.

Each diagram shown in FIG. 73 shows a decorative pattern display device 208, a lamp during shortening of working hours TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a lamp during high probability HL. For each lamp, black represents the lit state and white represents the off state (same up to the example shown in FIG. 83). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a) is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or during symbol stop) and notifying the number of reservations, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right part, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right part, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 is provided. In addition, the notification area during the design fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped with "○", and if it is lost, it will be displayed with "X". Stop is displayed. Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a preview notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go The fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG.

Further, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a), the decorative design combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. A mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed. In FIG. 73(a), since the symbol variation display of the special figure has ended, the variation icon disappears and is not displayed.

The control state (game state) shown in FIG. 73(a) is a time-saving game state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The lamp TL during short working hours shown in FIG. 73(a) is lit, and the lamp HL during high accuracy is extinguished. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 72(b), right-handed hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state, and the right-handed hitting display lamp RL shown in FIG. 73(a) is also lit. In addition, on the left side of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a), a right-handed first display RH1 prompting right-handed is displayed. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed during the time-saving game state even after the symbol variation display of the special figure is finished, and continues to be displayed even after shifting to the demo screen. It should be noted that the right-handed indicator lamp RL also continues to light up after the transition to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 73 (a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) started after the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or 950 times the special figure loss continues. It is a time saving game state (b time saving game state) started. The background of the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a) is the background of a castle town representing the time-saving gaming state. Moreover, the state in FIG. 73(a) is a state in which the time-saving game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. At the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a), characters "4 remaining" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) started after the jackpot game ended, the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) where the 950 times special figure loss started continuously (b time-saving game state), suddenly winning and starting Depending on the reduced working hours gaming state (c reduced working hours gaming state), the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ, and the display mode of the remaining number of working hours gaming state display may also differ. In addition, the background in the decorative pattern display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability general figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time saving game state remaining number display is also different. good too.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, a pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 .

In the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a reserved icon representing the reservation of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lights of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the pending icons are displayed side by side, and the pending icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the pending icon on the right) is the older pending icon.

In FIG. 73(a), three reserved icons h21, h22, h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2, and these three reserved icons h11, h12, All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default appearance is a round, non-patterned, white appearance. In the drawings, white is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the suspension represented by the suspension icon is digested. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. In addition, you may make it suggest that a big-hit expectation degree is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. In the following description, when the default display mode is used, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 73(a), in order to make it easier to understand that the four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the pending icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

In FIG. 73(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. That is, in this figure, the pattern variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64) not shown is started, and further, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the reserved icon is finished, and the decoration The variable display of the pattern has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h21, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The display mode of this variation icon is also the default display mode (round, unpatterned, white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Furthermore, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC that can select the music output from the speaker 120 is started above the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. be. In the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(b), the music title "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 (not shown). This music output will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78 and later.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(c), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a combination of decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". Note that the music selection display MC disappears once each time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and is resumed each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In FIG. 73(d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. Further, the pending icon is shifted to the right by one, and only one pending icon h21 is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(e), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814".

In FIG. 73(f), the symbol variable display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed variable. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the right by one, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of pending is 0. Also, the pending icon h21 in the default display mode, which was the first pending icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 73(f) has a red display mode different from the default display mode. In the drawings, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. A variation icon h0 in a red display mode suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the current symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is being executed. In addition, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed, and next to it, " LAST" is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of times remaining in the time saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 disappears and is not displayed, but it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(f), the display of the second right-handed display RH2, which is different from the first right-handed display RH1 and prompts the right-handed player, has started to be displayed. The right-handed second display RH2 describes that the reservation of the special figure 2 is aimed at the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the right arrow. This is a notification that recommends that you acquire a special figure 2 remaining reservation that suddenly leads to a short-time election. At the stage of FIG. 73(f), the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0, but even if the number of reservations of special figure 2 is full (4 pieces), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Furthermore, from the speaker 120, a right-handed notification of urging right-handed hitting and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2 (audio output of “right-handed and accumulating the hold”) is started. Music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 . It should be noted that while the sound for informing the player to hit the right hand is being output, the output sound of the song 1 may be reduced, or the sound of the song 1 may be completely silenced. Whether it is a right hitting notification by the right hitting second display RH2 or a right hitting notification from the speaker 120, the execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time saving game state is started. . The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the last special symbol, or the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. It may be after the timing. In addition, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the symbol of the last special symbol, or the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. It may be the timing after the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 64) (not shown). good.

In FIG. 73(g), there are two wins in the second special figure start port 232, the number of reservations of special figure 2 increases by two, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the fourth pattern / number of reservations display area 284 The indicated numerical value is 2, and the two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 73(h), a ready-to-win state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, there is one more winning at the second special figure start port 232, the number of reservations of special figure 2 is increased by one, and the number shown in the number display area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is 3 , and the third pending icon h23 is also displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, although it entered the ready-to-win state in FIG. 4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". In addition, at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(i), the character "end" is displayed, which indicates that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state has ended. . When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is finished, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 which have been displayed until then disappear and become non-display. In addition, the right-hand hitting information that has been output from the speaker 120 has ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be simultaneous with the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Alternatively, it may be the timing before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern after the end of the variable display of the last special symbol, or the timing before the end of the variable display of the last special symbol. good too. The reservation of special figure 2 has finally accumulated up to 4 and has reached the full state. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (deleted) according to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display that suggests that four reservations of special figure 2 have accumulated ( For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that preparation is complete, or the like may be performed. In this case, if four reserves of the special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns. It should be like this (it should be deleted).

In Figure 73 (j), it shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 73(j) is turned off, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is also turned off. When shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, if the reservation of the special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining reservation is preferentially digested because it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. As described above, there is a possibility that the time saving pattern shown in FIG. 66(c) is stopped and displayed only for the special figure 2 symbol variation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving gaming state. . During the period (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period") during which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving game state is performed, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a special background. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the main character, Tonosama, is running, and the characters are displayed as "one-shot reversal".

In addition, in the withdrawal period, since the special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested, in order to more clearly notify how many more special figure 2 reservations are left, the special figure 2 reservation icon display area 282 is in the time saving game state are displayed continuously from In addition, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(j), variable display of the decorative design is started, and three reserved icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is also 3, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 2.

In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 72 (b), left-handed hitting is recommended in a non-time-saving game state, and the right-handed display lamp RL shown in FIG. 73 (j) is also extinguished, and the decoration shown in FIG. 73 (j) The symbol display device 208 does not display the right-handed first display RH1 either. However, in the pullback period, while the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed information that encourages left-handed hitting is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 73(j), even if the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state, the left-handed notification is not executed in the pullback period. In FIG. 73(k), the hitting to the right is continued, and the game ball is being shot toward the right area of the game area 124. In FIG. It should be noted that the same applies if the player changes from right-handed to left-handed but happens to be right-handed due to excess momentum. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 provided in the right area, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (Figure 74(m), etc.). In FIG. 73(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228, but the left hitting notification is not executed. This is because, as explained using FIG. 66(a), the special figure 1 does not have a time saving pattern, and when you hit left, you can not suddenly get time saving, so you dare to hit left. Not recommended. However, since it is extremely rare to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 by winning per normal figure when hitting to the right, hitting to the right is not recommended. Ultimately, it is a good idea not to shoot the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that, even during the recovery display in the case where power failure occurs during the pull-back period and the power is restored, the left-handed information is not executed. Also, during this recovery, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228, left-handed information is not executed. On the other hand, when power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pull-back period, and during recovery display in the case of recovery, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, left-handed notification is executed. . It should be noted that, similarly to the left-handed notification to be described later with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, the left-handed notification during the recovery display may be a left-handed display and a left-handed notification sound, or may be a notification that only displays the left-handed display. , or the notification may be only a left-handed notification sound. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(m), the combination of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", which is a losing decorative design combination, is stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "541".

In FIG. 73(n), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/holding number display area 284, the blinking of the display of "-" has started. In this figure 73 (n), the number of Toku-zu 2 remaining reservations is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the toku-zu 2 reservation number display area in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 2, and the Toku-zu 2 Two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of .

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(o), the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 5", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed, and here too, it was not suddenly won in a short time. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "245".

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step.

In FIG. 74(a) continuing from FIG. 73(o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/holding number display area 284, the blinking of the display of "-" has started. In this FIG. 74 (a), the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations is also reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the special figure 2 reservation number display area in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure 2, only one suspended icon h21 is displayed in the suspended icon display area 282 of FIG.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(b), the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 9-decoration 5" of the decorative design which is lost is stopped and displayed, and here too, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "195".

In FIG. 74(c), the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 remaining reservation is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/reservation number display area 284, the display of "-" starts blinking, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2 becomes 0, and the special figure 2 is reserved No pending icon is displayed in the icon display area 282 .

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(d), the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 6-decoration 1", which is a losing decorative design, is stopped and displayed. rice field. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "261". The withdrawal period ends with this FIG. 74(d). In this example, the pullback period is the period shown in FIGS. 73(j) to 74(d). It should be noted that the pullback period is a period of different length depending on the number of special figures 2 remaining pending and the time length of the symbol variation display of each special figure.

In FIG. 74(e), the background of the decorative design display device 208 has changed because the withdrawal period has ended. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e) displays a background (white background with no pattern) representing the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, because the withdrawal period has ended, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed informing period. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e), a left hitting first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative design. The display mode of this left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character "left-handed" is written in a figure in which a leftward arrow is deformed. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting. In FIG. 74(e), the reserved design variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative design is displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reservation number display area 284, blinking of the display of "-" is started, and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. In addition, even one pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the newly displayed special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. - 特許庁In FIG. 74 (f), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1 in the 4th pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 2, and the reservation icon display of special figure 1 The area 281 displays two pending icons h11 and h12.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(g), the combination of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "923". In addition, the number of reserved special figures 1 is further increased by one, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figures 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special figures 1 A third pending icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 74(h), the symbol variable display of the new special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed variable. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the left by one, and two pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is not displayed. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the withdrawal period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within a single symbol variation display depending on the time length of the special figure symbol variation display. For example, it may be displayed across multiple symbol variation displays. In addition, the left-handed notification period may be ended with a predetermined number of times (eg, once) symbol variation display, or a predetermined number of special figures 1 pending (eg, one or four) When accumulated, it ends. You may make it In such a case, the left-handed informing period becomes an indefinite period.

In addition, when power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed informing period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the hitting-to-left notification in the hitting-to-left notification period may be performed only by the hitting-to-left first display LH1, or may be performed only by the hitting-to-left notification from the speaker 120. FIG.

In FIG. 74 (i), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is further increased by two, and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1 in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 4, and the reservation icon of special figure 1 The display area 281 displays four pending icons h11 to h14.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(j), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "729".

In FIG. 74(k), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 3, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the left by one, and three pending icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 74(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228. In FIG. That is, hitting to the right is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 74(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a left-handed second display LH2 prompting a left-handed player. This left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period of time each time a right-handed hit is detected. It should be noted that while the left-handed second display LH2 is displayed, the speaker 120 may notify the left-handed player (for example, return to the left-handed one).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the holding of the special figure 1 increases again, and the holding number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four pending icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x". At the same time, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "924".

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations is only one. That is, in FIG. 75 (f), the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 was started with 0, and the last special figure 2 design fluctuation display that can maintain the time saving game state, the special figure 2 start port 232 wins only once didn't. As a result, shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth design / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The numerical value is 1, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 75 (j), it shifts from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 75(j), the design variation display of the special figure 2 remaining reservation, which is the only one, is immediately started, and the decorative design is displayed in variation. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, the right hit is detected (Fig. 75 (k)), but the left hit second display LH2 is not executed (Fig. 75 (l)). The display ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(m) stops displaying the combination of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", which is a failing decorative pattern. In this example, too, he was not elected in a short period of time. With this figure 75(m), the pullback period ends. The pullback period in this example is the period of FIGS. 75(j) to 75(m), which is shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of only one special figure 2 remaining pending is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. Also, even if the number of special figure 2 remaining pending is 2 or 3, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 74, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. There may be a withdrawal period.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 75, the pullback period has ended, and as shown in FIG. is doing. In addition, because the withdrawal period has ended, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

Furthermore, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started due to the end of the withdrawal period. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting. In FIG. 75(n), the reserved design variable display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative design variable display is also started, and in the same figure (o), the decorative design variable display is continued. is doing.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In FIG. 76(a) continuing from FIG. 75(o), the withdrawal period ends and the first special figure 1 symbol variation display ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3 ” is stopped and displayed. In this example, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started), the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230 is performed until the symbol variation display is finished. There was not one time, and I could not save the reservation of special figure 1. Therefore, immediately following FIG. 76(a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, and as shown in FIG. 76(b), the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. Left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(b). During this time, the player continues to hit left and continues to aim for winning the special figure 1 start opening 230, but there is still no winning to the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the left hitting notification period ends soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears (FIG. 76(c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. It is started, and the decorative pattern also starts the variable display.

In the example shown in FIG. 76 as well, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the regular pattern starting port 228 (FIG. 76(g)), as shown in FIG. A left-handed second display LH2 prompting left-handed hitting is displayed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there is no withdrawal period. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of special figures 2 remaining pending is 4, and in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of special figures 2 remaining pending was 1, whereas the example shown in FIG. So, the number of special figures 2 remaining pending is 0. That is, in FIG. 77 (f), the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 was started with 0, and the last special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display that can maintain the time saving game state, won the special figure 2 start port 232 once there was no As a result, shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth design / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (i) where the last special figure symbol variation display is completed The numerical value is 0, and no single pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, if you shift from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. , The background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state changes to a white background with no pattern representing the non-time-saving game state. Also, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting.

In FIG. 77 (j), the reserved design variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative design is also started, and in the following figure (k), the special figure 1 design The variable display is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the combination of "decorative pattern 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" which is a failure. In the example shown in FIG. 77, as in the example shown in FIG. 76, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 starts) until the symbol variation display ends. During this time, there was no winning to the special figure 1 start port 230, and the reservation of special figure 1 could not be accumulated. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately following FIG. For example, 30 seconds), there is no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demonstration display is started on the decorative pattern display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(l) displays a design demonstration. In the demo display, a setting menu is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 by operating the production button 136 shown in FIG. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 from the setting menu. As shown in FIG. 77(l), even after transitioning to the demonstration display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed informing period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 77(m), when the left-handed informing period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and becomes non-display. In this example, there is still no winning to the special figure 1 starting gate 230, and the demonstration display continues to be displayed. While the demo display is being displayed, game balls are continued to be shot, and when it is detected that the game balls have passed through the normal figure starting port 228 (Fig. 77(n)), as shown in Fig. 77(o). Then, a left-handed second display LH2 prompting a left-handed player is displayed in the demo display screen. Note that the left-handed information in the demonstration display may be output with a sound together with the display, or may be output with only the sound instead of the display. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the pattern demonstration is displayed as the demonstration display, but the same applies when the animation demonstration is displayed.

In addition, the notification of hitting to the right can be made by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122 in addition to the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120 . In addition, left-handed information can also be given by the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, voice output from the speaker 120, or by blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122. FIG.

Furthermore, the left-handed first display LH1 in the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when the game ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 were different in display mode. , may have the same display mode. Also, the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, but they may be the same.

In addition, the notification of the playing method during recovery from the power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, if it is recovery during the pullback period, even if hitting to the right is detected, hitting to the left is not reported. On the other hand, if it is a recovery during the pattern fluctuation of the special figure in the non-time-saving gaming state, if hitting to the right is detected, hitting to the left is performed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. Music that can be selected changes depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 63, setting values with different jackpot probabilities can be changed. Usually, the player does not know which setting value is set. Which set value is set is an important matter of interest for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, setting suggestions suggesting set values are performed using music. The predetermined condition is not established until the big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining reservation being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving gaming state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In other words, the predetermined condition is to win a big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state.

As a predetermined condition, instead of hitting the jackpot with the special figure 2 remaining reserved, or in addition to hitting the jackpot with the special figure 2 remaining reserved, the result of the look-ahead while the jackpot game is on hold will result in a big hit again. It may also be that there is a reservation (so-called reservation renso). Alternatively, it may be to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time-savings). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variable jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (2R probability variable jackpot special figure B) or the shortest number of times (3R normal jackpot special figure b) Alternatively, it may be winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.

Also, in place of or in addition to the setting suggestion suggesting the setting value, a piece of music suggesting that there is a hold during the jackpot game that will result in a second big win as a result of a look-ahead (so-called hold renso). It may be a song that suggests the type of hit (for example, whether or not it has a probability change, or that a round promotion will occur, etc.), or it may be a song that suggests that it is the 10th consecutive big hit. It may be music. Furthermore, suggesting game information by music is useful if the game information is usually unknown to the player.

FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not met.

The time when music can be selected is a jackpot game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state. Music cannot be selected while the special symbol is stopped, and thus music cannot be selected even during the demonstration display. However, music may be selected from the setting menu described above.

It should be noted that it is also possible to select a song even while the special figure is stopped.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is not met, since the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected, the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set to.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied are five songs from song 1 to song 5. FIG. Music 1 is the default music, and this music 1 is set when the RAM is cleared. In addition, this music 1 is set each time the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, music 1 is set from the beginning, but when music other than music 1 is selected, music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 73(j).

FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is established when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining reservation being digested in a non-time-saving game state, and one song is selected by internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. Result selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100 side. The selection rate shown in FIG. 78(b) corresponds to the distribution rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs suggesting setting values. The song 6 is not a song suggesting a set value like the songs 1 to 5, but the song 7 is a song suggesting that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 actually has a setting of 3 or more. If not set, it will not be selected. The song 8 is a song suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. Incidentally, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, song 6 is selected with a probability of 100%.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the songs are similarly selected by lottery when the predetermined condition is satisfied the second time and thereafter. The same piece of music may be selected when the predetermined condition is met a plurality of times. Note that it is also possible to increase the number of songs so that songs that have been selected once are no longer selected.

The number of songs described above with reference to FIG. 78 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, songs 1-5 may include songs 6-8. Furthermore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery. good.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after a predetermined condition is met even once. It should be noted that FIG. 78(b) is referred to for the jackpot game state when a predetermined condition is established, and the jackpot game state in FIG. It's about.

In the non-time-saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 78(a), songs 1 to 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. . Further, if the song 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the song 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the songs 1 to 5 are played. Similarly, selection can be made by operating the operation key unit 190 . Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving game state and cannot be selected by the player's operation. That is, when the song 6 is released, by repeating the operation of the upper button 191, the song titles of the songs 1 to 6 are displayed in order on the song selection display MC, and the song title of the song 6 is displayed. When the upper button 191 is operated in this state, the music title returns to music 1, and the music titles of music 7 and music 8 are never displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state, or in the big-hit game state in which the predetermined condition was not established (for example, in the big-hit game state that was started by winning the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), music 1 to music 5 Up to, can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time-saving gaming state. Also, if song 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same way as songs 1 to 5. FIG. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, even if the predetermined condition is met, the songs 7 and 8 will not be selected by lottery and will not be released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 3 or 4, the song 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is established, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the song 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 5 or 6, music 7 or music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied. can be selected by operating As described above, if songs 6 to 8 are selected by lottery once in a time-saving game state or a jackpot game state in which a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the player can thereafter select them. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly here, when music 6 is released and music 7 and music 8 cannot be selected, by repeating the operation of the upper button 191, the music selection display MC shows the music titles of music 1 to music 6. When the upper button 191 is operated in a state in which the song title of song 6 is displayed, the song title returns to song 1, and the song titles of song 7 and song 8 are displayed on the song selection display MC. never.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing stepwise an example different from the example shown in FIG. 73, continued from FIG. 73(h).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(a) continuing from FIG. 73(h), same as the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. A combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "End" is displayed, which indicates that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is completed.

Also, the third pending icon h23 shown in FIG. 80(a) has changed from the default display mode to a gold display mode. On the drawings, gold is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the gold display mode corresponds to a so-called pre-reading notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is 75% in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon.

In FIG. 80 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), it shifts from the time-saving gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off. The middle lamp HL is also extinguished. In addition, the background of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to a special background on which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120 .

Furthermore, the display mode of the first pending icon h21 shown in FIG. 80(b) is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode that suggests that you will suddenly win a time-saving game. It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the pre-reading notice suggesting that the winner will suddenly be elected in a short time is started when the pullback period is started. It should be noted that the gold-colored pending icon is the second pending icon h22.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(c), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and the normal notice is being executed. In other words, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for winning suddenly in a short period of time is 75% in the current pattern variation display. It should be noted that the gold-colored pending icon is the first pending icon h21.

In FIG. 80(e), the time saving pattern (special figure D) shown in FIG. 66(b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(e), characters indicating success are displayed, and three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. 66(c) are stopped and displayed side by side. In other words, it is reported that the winner was suddenly elected in a short time. However, although it was suddenly won in a short time, it did not win a big hit, so the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol/holding number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Furthermore, the mini-symbols are stopped at a particular combination of numbers (321) rather than the decoration 11 combination. This particular combination is a combination that is stop-displayed only when winning a time-saving symbol that is not stop-displayed in the event of a loss or a big hit.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game is shifted to a short time game state without going through a big winning game. The time saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 80(f) is lit, and the background of the decorative design display device 208 is the castle town background representing the time saving gaming state. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, characters "949 remaining" are displayed as a time saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time saving game state continues 949 more times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is lit by shifting to the time-saving gaming state. In addition, the gold display mode icon, which was the first reserved icon h21 until now, has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbols has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the pattern variation display started here is 75%. Note that the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the display of the music selection display MC has also started.

In FIG. 80(g), the variable display of decorative symbols enters a ready-to-win state. Then, in FIG. 80 (h), it develops into super reach, and the reserved icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also shows the remaining number of time-saving game states such as "remaining 949". It's gone. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, instead of the song 1 that has been output until now, the song A dedicated to super reach is being output.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative designs are displayed in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c. The combination is displayed stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "777". The big hit here is the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, but the predetermined condition is not established because it is suddenly elected in a short time and shifts to a short time gaming state.

In FIG. 80(j), the opening effect of the jackpot game has started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a character display saying congratulations on the jackpot. In addition, since the variable winning hole 234 is arranged in the right area, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is lit. Note that the lamp TL during the time saving is turned off. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. The right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which a letter indicating "throw to the right" is displayed between right-pointing arrows vertically spaced apart, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification sound of "strike to the right".

Further, since the jackpot game is started without the predetermined condition being satisfied, at least the tunes 1 to 5 can be selected, and the tune selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the jackpot game. In the music selection display MC, a display UD imitating the up button 191 and the down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 62 is displayed. Music can be selected by operating the down button 192 . The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. It should be noted that while the sound for informing the player to hit the right hand is being output, the output sound of the song 1 may be reduced, or the sound of the song 1 may be completely silenced.

In FIG. 80(k), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Also, the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound for notifying that the player hits to the right, and only the music 1 is output. Furthermore, the music animation according to the music 1 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decoration design display device 208 where the 1st round was started. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, the lord, demonstrates swordsmanship to music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. A song selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 80(l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variable jackpot, the V shutter VS is opened in the second round (final round), and a V prize can be obtained. At the beginning of the second round, the decorative design display device 208 displays the character display "Aim for the V" prompting the game ball to pass through the V passage switch VS, and the music video is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC has disappeared and is not displayed. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, it is not possible to select a song. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 1 .

In FIG. 80(m), the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VS, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is performing V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has been won. In other words, it is notified that the state will shift to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. When the V prize notification is performed, the music video is hidden, but may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, but the speaker 120 may output the V prize notification sound together with the music 1, or may output the V prize notification sound instead of the music 1. . Also, even after winning the V prize, it is not possible to select a song until the 2nd round is over, but once the V prize is won, it is possible to select a song during the remaining period of the 2nd round. may

In FIG. 80(n), the end effect of the big win game has started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the character display of the end of the big win. Further, the right hitting first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed in this ending effect. Also, the song 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect. Furthermore, in the ending effect, the music selection display MC is resumed, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192 . However, in the ending effect, it may be arranged such that selection of music cannot be performed in the same manner as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. Thus, during a part of the period during the jackpot game, it is not possible to select a song. Also, during the period in which super reach is performed in FIG. 80(h), song selection cannot be performed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 80(a), (c), and (i), music selection cannot be performed even while the special symbol is stopped. Also, when the specific mode is set or when the setting menu is displayed, music cannot be selected.

By hitting right during the period of the jackpot game, the second special figure starting port 232 is also won, and up to four special figure 2 reservations are accumulated. When the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the holding of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is digested, and the variable display is started. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(o), the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative design is started. In addition, at the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, characters "119 remaining" are displayed as a time saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time saving game state continues 119 more times. Furthermore, the time saving middle lamp TL and the high accuracy middle lamp HL shown in FIG. 80(o) are also lit. Further, a right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, a song selection display MC showing the song title “song 1” is also displayed, and song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 .

FIG. 81 shows step by step an example in which the first pending icon h21 of the pending icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is completed is in a golden display mode. It is a diagram.

In the example shown in FIG. 80, the third reserved icon h21 of the reserved icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure was completed was a gold display mode, but in this example, the first is displayed in gold. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 80 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the gold display mode shown in FIG. 81(a) is a variation icon h0 in the gold display mode when digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (when the withdrawal period starts). (see FIG. 81(b)).

Here, looking at the result of the look-ahead, the currently performed special figure 2 symbol variation display (symbol variation display corresponding to the gold display mode variation icon h0) is a big hit symbol variation display. Also, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 81(b)) to be started next, it is suddenly elected in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since a big hit is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h21 is performed in the time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state obtained by the big win. is not suddenly renewed in a short time, but in order to give priority to the short time gaming state obtained by the big hit, the winning of the short time is suddenly invalidated. Therefore, it is not displayed in the time saving display mode like the first pending icon h21 shown in FIG. 80(b), and in FIG. 81(b), the first pending icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. It is That is, even if there is a reservation for winning a winning schedule for the time saving pattern, if there is a reservation for winning a big hit before the reservation is consumed, the pre-reading notice for the time saving pattern is prohibited.

In FIG. 81(c), the variable display of decorative symbols enters a ready-to-win state. Then, in FIG. 81(d), super reach has developed, and music A dedicated to super reach is being output from the speaker 120 instead of music 1 that has been output until now. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(e), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. is doing. The big hit here is the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving game state, and the predetermined condition is established.

In FIG. 81(f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is informed that this music 8 has been selected by lottery. Music 8 is also output from the speaker 120 . The song 8 is a song suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and the player who knows this knows that the pachinko machine 100 currently being played is a high setting pachinko machine. In addition, the song 8 is a song that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare song because the selection rate is low. In some cases, the interest in the game improves. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(f) displays the first right-handed display RH1 and the second right-handed display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the tune 8 and "hit to the right". A right-handed notification sound is also output.

In FIG. 81(g), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Also, the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound for informing the player to hit to the right, and only the music 8 is output. Furthermore, the music animation according to the music 8 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decoration design display device 208 where the 1st round was started. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho poses to music 8, and the lyrics of music 8 are also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 80(k) and 80(l), the lyric display of music 1 without setting suggestion is the character display of the first color (for example, black character display), but the lyric display of music 8 suggesting high setting. is the second color lettering (eg, gold lettering). Note that the lyrics of the song 7 may be displayed in a third color (for example, red characters). In addition, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 81(g).

In FIG. 81(h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 81 as well, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music video is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is not displayed. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 8 .

In FIG. 81(i), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs V-winning notification to notify that the V-winning has been won, and the music video is hidden. Also, the music selection determination display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 81(j), the end effect of the jackpot game is started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD is restarted. Also, the song 8 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect.

In FIG. 81 (k), the transition to the time-saving game state is completed, and the variable display is started with the special figure 2 reserved. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when a predetermined condition is met and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the music selection display MC displaying the name of the music 8 is also started in the time-saving game state. Music 8 is continuously output from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 81(l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is a failure. . This stop-displayed special figure 2 symbol variation display is a suspension symbol variation display represented by the first suspension icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining suspension is started (when the pullback period is started). be. As described above, originally, it was a pattern variation display that suddenly won a time saving, but since the jackpot with a time saving was won first, the time saving pattern is not stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. , It does not shift to the time saving game state based on the time saving pattern. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time saving pattern is regulated in the time saving game state, and the time saving pattern is a pattern that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time saving game state. However, the time saving pattern may be stop-displayed even in the time saving game state.

In FIG. 81 (m) following from (l), the number of remaining times of the time-saving game state is decreased by one, the characters "remaining 118" are displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the same figure ( In n), the combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 81(o), the number of time-saving game state remaining number display is further decreased by one, the characters "remaining 117" are displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started. A music selection display MC showing the title of the music 8 is displayed, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120 as well.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing step by step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is being displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 was not operated even when the music selection display MC was displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 82, the operation key unit 190 is operated. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 81 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(a), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the pattern variation display of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving gaming state. has ended.

In FIG. 82 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), it shifts from the time-saving gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, and high accuracy The middle lamp HL is also extinguished. In addition, the background of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background displaying the character display of one-shot reversal, and the display of the music selection display MC displaying the title of music 1 has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 82(c), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82(d), the song title of song 2 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and song 2 is output from speaker 120 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the up button 191 was pressed. Output is started. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) has elapsed since the operation key unit 190 was operated. It should be noted that if the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the predetermined time elapses, the name of the song on the song selection display MC is changed, and the song output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Also, the music may be determined when the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In FIG. 82(e), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a ready-to-reach state, and in subsequent FIG. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(g), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. and a predetermined condition is established.

In FIG. 82(h), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 6 is displayed on the song selection determination display MD. Also, music 6 is output from the speaker 120 . Music 6 is a music that does not suggest setting. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(h) displays the first right-handed display RH1 and the second right-handed display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the tune 6 and "strike to the right". A right-handed notification sound is also output.

In FIG. 82(i), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound of hitting to the right, and only music 6 is output. Furthermore, on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started, a music video corresponding to the music 6 output from the speaker 120 is displayed. The music video here is an animation in which the manabu style bancho poses in accordance with music 6, and the lyrics of music 6 are also displayed. Also in FIG. 82(i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 82(j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 82 as well, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music video is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is not displayed. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 6 .

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VS, and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Also, the song 6 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect.

In FIG. 82 (l), the transition to the time-saving gaming state, the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display is started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background of the castle town representing the time-saving gaming state, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In addition, since there was no V prize, the probability variable state is not established, and the high-probability middle lamp HL remains extinguished.

Further, when a predetermined condition is established and the music piece 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music piece selection display MC displaying the name of the music piece 6 is started in the time-saving game state. Music 6 is output from the speaker 120 continuously from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 82(m), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82(n), the default song name of song 1 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and when song 1 is selected after a predetermined time has elapsed, song 1 is output from speaker 120. be started. In this example, songs 7 and 8 have not been released, and song 6 returns to song 1.

If a specific operation (for example, pressing the lower button 192 or pressing the OK button for a long time) is performed during a specific period (for example, the opening effect period during the jackpot game shown in FIG. 82(h)), a predetermined Music 6 may be released even if the conditions are not satisfied. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting-suggesting music.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without a predetermined condition being satisfied.

Figure 83 (a), Figure 81 Unlike the example so far, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". , the combination of decorative symbols that are lost is displayed stopped. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(a), the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white plain background representing the non-time-saving gaming state. Three pending icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, of which the first pending icon h11 is displayed in gold. In addition, the time-saving medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all extinguished. Further, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 83(a).

In FIG. 83(b), the suspended design variable display indicated by the first suspended icon h11 in gold display mode is started, and in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(b), the decorative design variable display is started. It is Also, in the variation icon display area 280, a gold variation icon h0 is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 83(c), the variable display of decorative symbols enters a ready-to-win state. Then, in FIG. 83( d ), it develops into super reach, and music A exclusively for super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of music 1 . In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(e), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variable jackpot (special figure a) is won. there is Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, the predetermined condition is not established. Also, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 83(f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 83(f), the music title "Music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the notification of hitting to the right.

In FIG. 83(g), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound of hitting to the right, and only music 1 is output. Also, on the decorative design display device 208, a music selection display MC displaying the title of "music 1" is displayed, and a music video corresponding to the music 1, in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 83(h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times during the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in order of the music title of music 2, the music title of music 3, the music title of music 4, and the music title of music 5, and "music 5" is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(i). is displayed, and a music video with lyrics display corresponding to music 5 is displayed. Also, music 5 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 83(j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(k) where the second round has started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "Music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. A video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music piece 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music piece 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music piece 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a piece of music is selected, the piece of music may be output from the beginning.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(l) where the third round of the final round has started, the music selection display MC disappears and music selection cannot be performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the moving image of the song with the lyrics display corresponding to the song 1 . Also, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 83(m), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decoration symbol display device 208 performs V-winning notification to notify that the player has won the V-winning, and the music video is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 83(n), the end effect of the jackpot game is started, and the display of the music selection display MC is restarted. Also, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 83 (o), the transition to the time-saving gaming state, the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display is started, and in the decorative design display device 208, the background of the castle town representing the time-saving gaming state is displayed, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the jackpot game to the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not output continuously, and the music is restarted after being interrupted. When switching to the game state or the time-saving game state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

In addition, the predetermined condition for music selection was to win a big hit in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in a non-time-saving gaming state, but for example, a 10R big hit During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIGS. 83(h) and 83(j), and during the 2R jackpot game, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. good too.

Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called one-and-two mixed machine that wins a small hit in a time-saving game state and wins a big hit by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.],
The notification means, in the non-time-saving gaming state, first notification prompting the launch of the game ball toward the first game area [for example, left-handed first display LH1 and left-handed second display LH2, etc. ],
The notification means, when the first condition [for example, there are four special figure 2 remaining pending] is established when shifting from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state,
The first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state period (retraction period) in which the first notification is not executed during the periods of FIGS. 73(j) to 73(o) to 74(d) [for example, FIG. ,
After the first period is over, the first notification [eg, left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed,
A playground characterized by 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In addition, said 1st information is always performed in said 2nd period.

Further, the notification means may not perform the first notification even when a power failure occurs during the first period and the power is restored thereafter.

again,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] is, when the second condition [for example, there is only one special figure 2 remaining hold] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state If established,
After the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification in a third period shorter than the first period [for example, the period of FIG. 75 (j) to the same figure (m)] is not executed [for example, FIG. 75(l)],
After the third period is over, the first notification [ For example, left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed,
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In this game machine, too, it is possible to make an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
``The notification means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] is, when the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, If the special figure 2 remaining reservation is 0], after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the second period [for example, the period of FIG. 77 (j) to (l)] over the second When executing one notification [for example, left-handed notification of left-handed first display LH1] [for example, if it is executed as shown in FIG. In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In this game machine, too, it is possible to make an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"Second start opening [for example, second special figure start opening 232] arranged in the second game area [for example, right area],
Second symbol display means [for example, second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing second symbol variation display [for example, special symbol 2 symbol variation display] based on the winning to the second start port When,
with
The notification means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208], in the time-saving gaming state, the second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] prompting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area is to run
The notification means, the number of reservations indicating the number of reservations of the second symbol variation display [for example, the number notification in the number of reservations display area of the special figure 2, which is the lower left part of the fourth symbol / number of reservations display area 284] is to run
The notification means is the last second symbol variation display in the time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "last second symbol variation display".) During execution [for example, FIG. h)], a third notification [e.g., right-handed second display RH2], which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the shooting of the game ball toward the second game area, is executed. is a
The notification means executes the third notification in the last second symbol variation display, and the number of pending numbers that has been executed before the start of the last second symbol variation display. It is executed without changing the notification mode of notification [for example, FIG. 73 (f) to (h)],
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In the last second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the holding of the second symbol variation display is accumulated. First, since the pending number notification is executed without changing the reporting mode, the player can confirm the pending number of the second symbol variation display. By executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the shooting of game balls toward the second game area and prevent the player from losing money.

The notification means may always execute the third notification during execution of the last second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notification means, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the second period has ended, in response to the fact that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area is detected to carry out one notification,
The notification means does not perform the first notification during the first period even if it is detected that the game ball is being shot toward the second game area.

again,
``The first start port [eg, the first special figure start port 230] arranged in the first game area [eg, the left region],
First symbol display means [e.g., first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing first symbol variation display [e.g., special symbol 1 symbol variation display] based on the winning to the first start port When,
with
The first symbol display means does not stop displaying the time saving pattern [for example, the time saving pattern (special figure D) shown in FIG. 66(b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time saving gaming state. is a
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbols in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 80 (e)],
When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the second pattern variation display, the time saving game state is shifted to without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 80(f)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even in the same non-time-saving game state, if there is a hold in the second symbol variation display, the time-saving pattern may be won, and compared to the case where there is no hold, the time-saving game state is entered again. likely to migrate. Therefore, the player is prevented from aiming at the first starting opening in vain by not performing the first notification.

In addition, it has a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice that suggests that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed,
Said look-ahead notice means wins a certain kind of jackpot with a hold that is digested earlier than a hold of said second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays said time-saving symbols. If so, the pre-reading notice may not be executed for the second suspension.

In addition, when the reservation digested earlier than the second reservation wins the probability variable jackpot, even if the second reservation is canceled after the probability variable jackpot game, the time reduction based on the time reduction pattern. It may be one that does not transition to the game state.

That is, after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot is completed, the game state is shifted to the time saving game state, and the time saving pattern is not stop-displayed even if the second suspension is terminated. Moreover, it is already said time-saving game state at the time when said 2nd reservation was digested.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In an enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means to the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table. The illustrated top plate 126 and bottom plate 128 are not provided.

As explained above, this enclosed pachinko machine encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use. It may be run on credit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a slot machine (rotary game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 84 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

Slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. Three reels (a left reel 1010, a middle reel 1011, and a right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 84) are housed in the center of the main body 1001. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on strip-shaped members at regular intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 1010-1012. . As for the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 . The reel backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line 1014 . A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five prize lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal prize line and a lower horizontal prize line are added. When 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right The five lines of the downward winning line and the right upward winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. A reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . In this embodiment, each time the insert medal button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three, two medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1031 is depressed, and three medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1032 is depressed. It is designed to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by means of the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the accumulated number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010-1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The payout button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting them from the medal payout port 1055 . The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 1032 . The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057 . Also, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 .

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046 . The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual game history information of the player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided below the stop button unit 1036. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062 .

A sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 1060 is arranged above the front door 1002 , and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the production device 1060 . This rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right and left shutters 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 1000 (game display). (user side).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Also, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be curved.

Furthermore, although the present invention is exemplified by pachinko machines and slot machines as game machines, it is not limited to these, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, rock-paper-scissors game machines, smart balls, and the like.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the predetermined conditions for music selection are: winning the n-th consecutive bonus; (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle) to win a bonus, winning the 10th consecutive AT, winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, For example, winning an AT that has the role of .

Also, the jackpot game state in the example shown in FIGS. 73 to 83 is a bonus game state, ART state, AT state, etc. in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. In addition, the time-saving game state becomes an ART state, an AT state, or the like when the jackpot game state is the bonus game state, and an AT state, an RT state, or the like when the jackpot game state is the ART state. .

Also, although the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, it may be reset when power is restored across dates, or may be reset at a specific time (for example, If power is restored by 6:00 a.m., resetting may be disabled.

Furthermore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the selected music is set to the preset initial music.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with sound output means [for example, speaker 120] capable of outputting music,
The sound output means can output music in a first advantageous state [for example, jackpot game state, bonus game state, ART state],
The first advantageous state is a state advantageous to the player,
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display that is performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in a non-time-saving game state, the result of looking ahead during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again There is a reservation that will be (so-called reservation renso), the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of times to save time), Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (e.g., the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or the jackpot with the smallest number of time-savings), winning the n-th consecutive jackpot, winning the n-th consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus with matching symbols (e.g. 7 red symbols), Winning a bonus with matching symbols on a specific winning line (e.g. middle horizontal winning line), Winning the 10th consecutive AT , a predetermined AT start condition (e.g., winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT with a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The first number of songs that the sound output means can output in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. )] and the second number of songs that can be output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 78(b) 1 song "1"] is different,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs differs from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, thereby enhancing the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, and enhancing the game. Interest can be improved.

again,
``The second number of songs [e.g., 1] is a number smaller than the first number of songs [e.g., 5 or more and 8 or less].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By reducing the number of pieces of music that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the feeling of specialness in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be done.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
The sound output means is capable of outputting music even in the second advantageous state,
The second advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player, different from the first advantageous state [for example, a time-saving game state, if the first advantageous state is a bonus game state ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state if the first advantageous state is ART state],
The display means does not display moving images corresponding to music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state [for example, FIGS. ~ same figure (o)],
The display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state [for example, FIGS. ~ (k) in the same figure],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first advantageous state, the game can be livened up by displaying moving images together with the output of the music, and in the second advantageous state, while the game is livened up by the output of the music, for example, It is possible to prevent interfering with the variable performance for informing whether or not to win.

again,
"In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means is used to provide game information [e.g., the set value, the result of prefetching during the suspension of the jackpot game, and the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation that becomes
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, by suggesting the game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the willingness to play to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot usually know.

again,
"Equipped with operation means [eg, operation key unit 190],
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means [for example, FIG. etc. is displayed and selection is impossible],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, the music is made unselectable in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that display means may be provided, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The display means may display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state,
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can select the first music [for example, music 7 or Song 8] is added, and the first song can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first song cannot be selected in the normal game state [eg, non-time-saving game state]. There may be [eg FIG. 79].

In a part of the period [for example, the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained] in the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot game state], it is a mode in which it is not possible to select a song using the operation means. may

Part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, time-saving gaming state] [for example, during the period of super reach, the period when the special symbol is stopped, the period when the demo display is being performed, or the demo display Even during the period during which the menu display is being performed], the selection of music using the operation means may be disabled.

Alternatively, during a part of the normal game state [for example, non-time-saving game state], it may not be possible to select a song using the operation means.

Further, when a power failure occurs while a song is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial song may be handled as the selected song.

In the following, additional notes will be given including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
It is possible to output music during special games (for example, jackpot games, etc.),
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to Supplementary Note 1,
The specific number is a number less than the predetermined number,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 3)
The game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
A predetermined number of songs can be output even during advantageous games (for example, time-saving games, etc.),
A video corresponding to the type of music being output is displayed during a special game, but a video corresponding to the type of music being output is not displayed during an advantageous game.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The music output during the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied may suggest predetermined information related to the game.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
During the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the player can select the music to be output using the operation means, but during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player outputs the music using the operation means. Unable to select songs
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
The non-time-saving gaming state is
A game state in which a game ball should be shot toward the first game area (left area),
The time-saving game state is
A game state in which a game ball should be shot toward the second game area (right area),
If the first condition is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
Regulating the execution of the first hitting method notification (left hitting notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the shift from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state,
After the first period ends, perform the first hitting method notification over the third period,
A playground characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The game machine according to appendix 6,
If the second condition different from the first condition is established when shifting from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state,
Restricting the execution of the first hitting method notification in a second period shorter than the first period after shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
After the second period ends, the first hitting method notification is performed over the third period,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 8)
The game machine according to appendix 6 or 7,
If the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
After the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be performed over the third period,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8,
The first condition is to remember the first number of special reservations,
The second condition is to remember the second number of special reservations that is less than the first number,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 6 to 9,
When moving from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, execute the second hitting method notification (right-handed notification) to notify that the second game area should be fired,
In the final variation in the time-saving gaming state,
A third hitting method notification (hold and save notification) that is different from the second hitting method notification executed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation and notifies that the second game area should be shot. while executing, displaying the number holds in the same manner as the number holds displayed in the changes prior to the final change;
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 6 to 10,
In the special game judgment based on the special in the non-time-saving gaming state, the special pattern (time-saving design) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special 2 (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time-saving gaming state You may win a special pattern,
When winning the special pattern, without going through a special game, it shifts to a time-saving game state,
A playground characterized by:

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

85 to 140, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. 85 to 140 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 85 to 140 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 140, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.
<Overall composition>
FIG. 85 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85 is a gaming machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door with a ball storage tray. 108, a shooting device 110, and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided in a game machine installation business office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of the store (game parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door. In this specification, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of being opened and closed with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage tray has a ball storage tray 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a ball ejection button 130 for ejecting the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126 by the operation of the player, and a game ball guided to the shooting device 110 by the operation of the player on the game board. A ball shooting handle 134 that is shot into a game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices by the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game parlor. Also, although not shown in FIG. 85, a return operation button for instructing the player's balance to be returned to the card unit is provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 . Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 having a cross key and an enter button is also provided.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player to shoot, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward the game area 124 of the game board with the corresponding shooting intensity, and corresponds to an example of shooting means.

FIG. 86 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 85 viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 and is used to temporarily store game balls, is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the game balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting condition, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is imparted (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a payout, a payout control unit that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and an error cancellation switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses the board 170, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power control section that supplies power to various electrical game machines. A power supply board housing a power supply board 182 comprising a power switch 178 for turning on/off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. A case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

85, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. When the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least one of a plurality of settings (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different jackpot probabilities can be set. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode that can be used. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. The character ratio/setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically, and a single-digit 7-segment LED is modularized on the right side. (YH) and continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right when viewed from the front. An arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the upper side, and the lower side may be referred to as the lower side. Although not shown in FIG. 87, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be called the front side or the front side, and the back side may be called the rear side or the back side. Sometimes.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200R of the game board 200 in the front view is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a transparent game board 201 that serves as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of, for example, resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . A main control lamp board 207 is provided below the game area 124 .

FIG. 87(b) is an enlarged view of the main control lamp board 207. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), on the main control lamp board 207, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol reservation lamp 216. , a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, a second special symbol reservation lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp RK, an electric sapo middle lamp RD, a right-handed display lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR. ing. In addition, hereinafter, the normal design may be referred to as "general figure" and the special design may be referred to as "special figure".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD) in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and a performance display region 208d. The and right design display areas 208c display different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the normal pattern display device 210 is a display device for displaying the normal pattern, and is composed of two vertical LEDs in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. .

The normal pattern suspension lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later). In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. one). The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. allows it to be retained. In addition, the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variation games, and in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. ).

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state. The lamp RD in the electric sapo indicates that the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and that the door member 2320 (see FIG. 88) of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in the electric sapot state in which it is easy to open for a long time. It is a lamp for The right-handed display lamp RM is a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, and an electric support state, and is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state in which he/she can benefit from right-handed hitting. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, one special 1 starter chucker 23 is arranged in the central lower portion of the game board 200 . The special 1 starting chucker 23 has a cover plate 231 in front.

FIG. 87(c) is a view showing the back side of the cover plate 231 of the special 1 starting chucker 23 as seen obliquely from the bottom right.

The special 1 starting chucker 23 has a first special figure starting port 230 between the cover plate 231 and the game board 201. - 特許庁In the first special figure starting port 230, game balls released from the rotating body unit 28, a part of which is visible in the vicinity of the center lower part in FIG. do not have. That is, as shown in FIG. 87(c), the rotating body unit 28 is provided with a start port side guide path 288 and out discharge ports 289L and 289R on both sides thereof. The exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 is located directly above the first special figure starting port 230, but is located at a position spaced from the first special figure starting port 230 in the vertical direction by more than one game ball. are placed. Therefore, the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 may stray to the left and right and may not enter the first special figure start opening 230. In addition, it may be configured so that the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 enters the first special figure start opening 230 100%.

When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. Along with discharging to the plate 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. A ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), a first ball passage 2681 and a second ball passage 2682 extend from the left side directly above the rotor unit 28, of which only a portion is shown. Details of the rotating body unit 28, the first ball passage 2681 and the second ball passage 2682 will be described later.

In addition, on the right side of the first special figure starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 87(a), a second variable winning opening 235 serving as a second attacker is arranged. The second attacker rotates the second door member 2351 forward with the lower edge as the rotation axis. Furthermore, one general winning opening 226 is arranged above the second attacker, and two general winning openings 226 are diagonally arranged on the left side of the special 1 starting chucker 23 . When the ball enters the general prize winning opening 226, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the ball has entered the general winning opening 226, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are awarded. It is discharged to the ball storage tray 126 as a ball. A player can freely take out the balls discharged to the ball storage tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the player based on winnings. A ball entering the general winning hole 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Also, on the game board 200 shown in FIG. 87(a), the first attacker unit is arranged on the right side, and the electric sorting unit is arranged on the left side. The first attacker unit is covered by a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591, and is normally visible through the lower right transparent plate 2591, but in FIG. do not have. The electric sorting unit is also covered with a transparent left transparent plate 2691, and should be visible through the left transparent plate 2691, but it is not shown in that way in FIG. 87(a). It should be noted that both the first attacker unit and the electric sorting unit are units that are partially transparent on the back side.

A first stereoscopic film effect 271 and a second stereoscopic film effect 272 are arranged above the game area 124 . The first stereoscopic film effect body 271 is provided so as to overlap the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, and in FIG. 87(a), both appear to be integrated. The details of the first stereoscopic film effect 271 and the second stereoscopic film effect 272 will be described later.

A third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is arranged on the right side of the game area 124 . More than half of the third stereoscopic film effect 273 is covered with a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591 and a transparent upper right transparent plate 2592 . Also, between the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 and the upper right transparent plate 2592, the above-described first attacker unit that allows a part of the back side to be transmitted is arranged. Originally, the third stereoscopic film effect 273 can be seen through the transparent plates 2591 and 2592 and the first attacker unit 25, but it is not shown in that way in FIG. 87(a).

A fourth stereoscopic film effect 274 is arranged on the left side of the game area 124 . More than half of the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 is also covered with part of the transparent game board 201 and the transparent left transparent board 2691 . Also, between the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 and the left transparent plate 2691, an electric distribution unit 26 (see FIG. 88) through which a part of the back side is transparent is arranged. Originally, a part of the transparent game board 201, the left transparent board 2691, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 can also be seen through the electric distribution unit 26, but in FIG. Not shown. The details of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 will also be described later.

Furthermore, a substantially circular LED lighting effect body 278 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 . A plurality of LEDs 2781 are provided on the outer periphery of the LED light emission effect body 278, and the LED light emission effect body 278 is a effect body that emits light in a radial direction. Compared to each stereoscopic film effect body such as the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274, the LED light emission effect body 278 is Although it is arranged in the rear, the light emitted in the radial direction from the LED lighting effect body 278 is diffused, and there is also light directed forward. Therefore, these three-dimensional film effects 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the sides by the LED light emission effects 278 . The LED light effect body 278 is arranged in front of these three-dimensional film effect bodies 271 to 274 so that these three-dimensional film effect bodies 271 to 274 are illuminated from the front by the LED light emission effect body 278. can be

In addition, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped hitting direction changing member (not shown) called a windmill and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls that have not won any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Balls contained in the ball storage pan 126 are delivered to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, and the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 are passed through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to reach the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the electric distribution unit 26, a ball hitting direction changing member (not shown), a game nail, etc., and enters various prize winning openings and starting openings. Win a prize or reach an out port 240 without winning a prize in any prize winning port or starting port. Note that the game board 200 may be provided with an out sensor. The out sensor is a sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the winning opening, a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the starting opening, and a game ball that has entered the out opening. Further, the sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the prize winning opening, the start opening and the out opening.

FIG. 88 shows a state in which the lower right transparent plate 2591, the upper right transparent plate 2592, and the left transparent plate 2691 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 88, the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 are also removed, and the LED light emission effect body 278 is also removed. ing. As a result, the frame 208f of the decorative design display device 208 is illustrated in FIG.

In FIG. 88, the first attacker unit 25 is illustrated on the right side, and the electric sorting unit 26 is also illustrated on the left side.

The first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 88 is provided in the right area of the game area 124 . When hit to the right, the game ball goes over the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 described later, enters the right route 1243, and heads for the right area. The right route 1243 is covered with an upper right transparent plate 2592, but a normal pattern starting port 228 is arranged at the point where it branches and merges. The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. One is arranged on the right side of the board 200 . Balls that have passed through the normal figure start port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out, and the entered game balls are released. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 . The normal pattern starting port 228 is provided on the upstream side of the first attacker unit 25, and the game balls that have passed through this normal pattern starting port 228 and the game balls that have not passed go to the first attacker unit 25. .

A second special figure starting port 232 is arranged on the upstream side of the first attacker unit 25 . The door member 2320 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction with respect to the ball passage in the second special figure start opening 232 . The door member 2320 and the second special figure starting port 232 are sometimes called an electric tulip (electric chu). The ball detection sensor 2322 for the second special figure starting port 232 is arranged facing sideways on the downstream side of the door member 2320 that has advanced to the front side. In the electric chew shown in FIG. 88 , the door member 2320 is retracted, and even a game ball entering the electric chew inlet 2323 falls and does not reach the ball detection sensor 2322 . On the other hand, with the door member 2320 moving forward, the game ball passing through the electric chew inlet 2323 reaches the ball detection sensor 2322 . A game ball that has reached the ball detection sensor 2322 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. A game ball that did not enter the electric chew introduction port 2323 or a game ball that entered the electric chew introduction port 2323 but dropped advances to the intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25 .

At an intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25, a first variable winning opening 234 serving as a first attacker is arranged. In the first attacker, the first door member 2341 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction with respect to the ball passage. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable prize winning opening is arranged facing upward below the first door member 2341 that has advanced forward. In the first attacker shown in FIG. 88, the first door member 2341 is retracted, and the game ball that has flowed down to the intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25 falls and passes through the ball detection sensor 2342, It is detected by the detection sensor 2342 . A game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is guided to the back side of the first attacker unit 25 . A V sorting device (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the first attacker unit 25, and the game balls that have passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 are directed to a V winning hole (not shown) or to an out hole. Distribute The first door member 2341 advances and retreats by the small winning game, and if the game ball enters the V winning opening, it becomes a V winning and the big winning game is started. On the other hand, when the first door member 2341 advances forward, the game ball passes over the advanced first door member 2341 and it is difficult to pass the ball detection sensor 2342 . The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. In the ball passage formed by the advanced first door member 2341, a plurality of deceleration ribs 234r projecting forward are provided at intervals. At the first door member 2341 advanced to the front side, the inclination of the first door member 2341 makes it easier for the game ball to flow down, but the game ball is caught on the deceleration rib 234r, and the game ball stays on the first door member 2341 for a while. may stay for a while. When the first door member 2341 retreats while the game ball stays on the first door member 2341, the game ball staying on the first door member 2341 drops at once, and the game ball stays on the first door member 2341. is detected by the ball detection sensor 2342 of . Therefore, compared with the case where the first door member 2341 retreats while the game ball is passing through the first door member 2341, the winning rate to the first variable winning port 234 is improved, and the deceleration rib 234r increases the winning rate. It also serves as a means of improvement.

A game ball that has passed over the first door member 2341 that has advanced forward passes through a vertical ball passage 251 without passing through a V sorting device (not shown) and is discharged from the first attacker unit 25. be done. The vertical ball passage 251 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 251r along the passage. These deceleration ribs 251r also protrude forward.

A game nail is not provided in the first attacker unit 25 described above.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed ahead of the first attacker unit 25, and there are provided a plurality of game nails 238 although not shown in FIG. These game pegs 238 may cause the game balls to go to the general winning opening 226 . Also, if the second door member 2351 of the second attacker is open, the second variable winning opening 235 may win. Furthermore, if the second attacker's second door member 2351 is in a closed state, it may go to the out port 240 .

The electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 88 is provided in the left area of the game area 124 . When hit to the left, the game ball advances from the first area 1241 or the second area 1242 to the left area. Left-handed is the recommended way to hit in the normal state (low-probability normal state). In addition, right-handed hitting is the recommended way to hit in a short-time state (high-probability normal state). The first area 1241 and the second area 1242 are adjacent areas, and the first area 1241 is on the downstream side in the shooting direction of the ball. In other words, the second area 1242 is located farther from the return ball preventing piece 203 than the first area 1241 is. Therefore, when aiming at the first area 1241, it is necessary to shoot the game ball with a stronger firing intensity than when aiming at the second area 1242, and when aiming at the second area 1242, the first area 1241 is required. It is necessary to shoot the game ball with a weaker shooting intensity than when aiming. However, even if the game ball is shot with a high firing intensity, it may rebound off the wall 1241 a that defines the first area 1241 and enter the second area 1242 . A ball passage 1245 extends from the first region 1241 and is provided with a plurality of deceleration projections 1245p. Further, the second region 1242 is also provided with a plurality of deceleration projections 1242p.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the ball passage 1245 and the electric distribution unit 26, and there are provided a plurality of game nails 238 (not shown in FIG. 87). It is Also, a part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the second area 1242 and the electric distribution unit 26, and although not shown in FIG. 238 is provided. Hereinafter, the area in which a part of the game board 201 is provided may be referred to as a sorting front area 125 .

A game ball that has passed through the ball passage 1245 and a game ball that has entered the second area 1242 enter the distribution front area 125 . The pre-sort area 125 branches into three routes: a right route 125R, a central route 125C, and a left route 125L. Each route is demarcated by game nails 238 . The game nail 238 may be made of metal or resin. Ball passage 1245 connects to right route 125R, and second region 1242 connects to left route 125L. The center route 125C is a route provided in the lower half of the distribution front region 125 and positioned between the right route 125R and the left route 125L. A game ball that has passed through the right route 125R or a game ball that has passed through the left route 125L may enter this center route 125C. Also, a game ball passing through the right route 125R may enter the left route 125L, and a game ball passing through the left route 125L may enter the right route 125R.

The electric distribution unit 26 is provided with roughly three ball paths. The three sphere paths become first sphere path 2601 , second sphere path 2602 , and third sphere path 2603 . Each route will be explained below.

First, the first sphere path 2601 will be described. The first sphere path 2601 becomes the right sphere path connected from the right route 125R. The first ball path 2601 is provided with a first upstream ball delaying portion 2651, a third ball direction changing portion 263, a first downstream ball delaying portion 2652, and a first ball direction changing portion 261 from the upstream side. Both the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 are provided in a vertical ball path portion, and are provided in locations where the moving speed of the game ball tends to increase. The first upstream ball delay section 2651 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball heading toward the third ball direction changing section 263, and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 moves toward the first ball direction changing section 261. It is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed description of the first upstream sphere delay section 2651 and the first downstream sphere delay section 2652 will be given later.

The third ball direction changing part 263 has a direction changing member 2631 and a motor (not shown). The first ball direction changing portion 261 has a direction changing member 2611 and a motor (not shown), the second ball direction changing portion 262 has a direction changing member 2621 and a motor (not shown), and the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 has a direction changing member 2641 and a motor (not shown). The following description of the third ball direction changing portion 263 is the same for the direction changing portions (261, 262, 264) other than the third ball direction changing portion 263.

The direction changing member 2631 has a right slanted surface 263R and a left slanted surface 263L. This direction changing member 2631 is rotated by a motor (not shown) to change its posture between a rightward posture and a leftward posture. The rightward posture is the posture of the direction changing member 2631 shown in FIG. 88, in which the right inclined surface 263R is inclined downward and to the right, and the left inclined surface 263L is vertical. The leftward posture is the posture of the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth spherical direction changing portion 264 shown in FIG. 88, in which the left inclined surface 263L is inclined downward to the left and the right inclined surface 263R is vertical. The direction changing member 2631 uses random numbers to determine to which posture and at what timing the posture is to be changed. The speed of change (rotational speed) is also determined using random numbers, and the posture may change slowly or quickly. The attitude of the direction changing member 2631 and how the attitude changes can be visually recognized by the player. It is impossible to launch the game ball of As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows downward and to the right along the right inclined surface 263R. That is, it flows down toward the first downstream sphere delay portion 2652 and continues to move along the first sphere path 2601 . On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows downward to the left along the left inclined surface 263L, deviates from the first ball path 2601, and reaches the central Enter the third sphere path 2603 .

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows downward and to the right along the right inclined surface 261R. A first guide port 2613 is opened at the lower right of the first ball direction changing portion 261 . Therefore, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the right facing posture, the game ball is directed to this first guide port 2613 . The game ball passes through the first guide port 2613, is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26, and enters the first ball passage 2681. - 特許庁The first ball passage 2681 is divided into a transparent upstream passage 2681a and a similarly transparent downstream passage 2681b, and game balls guided to the back side of the electric sorting unit 26 first flow down the upstream passage 2681a. do. Then, the game ball falls into the downstream passage 2681b at the downstream end of the upstream passage 2681a, and then flows down the downstream passage 2681b. The game ball falls from the downstream end of the downstream passage 2681b to the rotor unit 28, which is only partly visible in FIG. Since the first ball passage 2681 is transparent, the game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681 can be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows downward to the left along the left inclined surface 261L. An out port 241 is provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball entering this out port 241 passes through a path 2604 (see FIG. 89) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. , and finally discharged to the game island side.

Next, the second ball path 2602 will be described. The second sphere path 2602 becomes the left sphere path connected from the left route 125L. The second ball path 2602 is provided with a second upstream ball delaying portion 2653, a fourth ball direction changing portion 264, a second downstream ball delaying portion 2654, and a second ball direction changing portion 262 from the upstream side. The fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is provided side by side with the third ball direction changing portion 263 in the first ball path 2601 and the third ball path 2603 interposed therebetween. The second ball direction changing portion 262 is provided side by side with the first ball direction changing portion 261 and the third ball path 2603 interposed in the first ball path 2601 . Both the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 are provided in a vertical ball path portion, and are provided in locations where the moving speed of the game ball tends to increase. The second upstream ball delaying section 2653 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball heading for the fourth ball direction changing section 264, and the second downstream ball delaying section 2654 moves toward the second ball direction changing section 262. It is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed description of the second upstream sphere delay section 2653 and the second downstream sphere delay section 2654 will also be given later.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is in the left facing posture, the game ball flows downward to the left along the left inclined surface 264L. That is, it flows down toward the second downstream sphere delay portion 2654 and continues to move along the second sphere path 2602 . On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is facing rightward, the game ball flows downward along the right inclined surface 264R, deviates from the second ball path 2602, and reaches the center. into the third sphere path 2603 of .

As shown in FIG. 88, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is in the rightward posture, the game ball flows downward to the right along the right inclined surface 262R. A second guide port 2623 is opened at the lower right of the second ball direction changing portion 262 . Therefore, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is in the right facing posture, the game ball is directed to this second guide port 2623 . The game ball passes through the second guide port 2623, is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26, enters the transparent second ball passage 2682, and flows down the second ball passage 2682. - 特許庁The game ball falls to the rotor unit 28 from the downstream end of the second ball passage 2682 . Since the second ball passage 2682 is also transparent, the game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682 can be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing portion 262 is facing leftward, the game ball flows downward to the left along the left inclined surface 262L, and then directly below the second ball direction changing portion 262. to reach Directly below the second spherical direction changing portion 262 cannot be reached via the right, and can be reached only via the left. An out port 242 is provided directly below the second ball direction changing portion 262, and the game ball entering this out port 242 passes through a path 2604 (see FIG. 89) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. , and finally discharged to the game island side.

Next, the third sphere path 2603 will be described. In FIG. 88, in order to distinguish the third ball path 2603 from the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602, the third ball path 2603 is hatched downward to the left. A third sphere path 2603 becomes the central sphere path connected from central root 125C. In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the third ball path 2603 due to the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 pointing to the left, or when the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 A game ball may enter due to the direction changing member 2641 that is in the rightward posture. The third ball path 2603 is provided with a general prize winning opening 227 on the upstream side, that is, on the upstream side of the position where the game balls enter by the direction changing members 2631 and 2641 . A game ball that has entered the general winning hole 227 is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 and deviates from the third ball path 2603 . A detailed description of the general prize winning opening 227 provided in the third ball path 2603 will be given later. In addition, the third ball path 2603 is provided with an effect switch 269 on the downstream side, that is, on the downstream side of the position where the game balls enter by the direction changing members 2631 and 2641 . The effect switch 269 is a gate-shaped ball detection sensor, and a game ball flowing down the third ball path 2603 without entering the general winning opening 227 on the upstream side always passes. When the game ball passes through this production switch 269, a certain production is started. A game ball that has passed through the performance switch 269 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 . The game balls discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 are only the game balls that have passed through the third ball path 2603 . That is, neither the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 nor the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 . Incidentally, instead of the effect switch 269, a normal figure starting port 228 called a gate or a through chucker may be provided. In this case, the normal figure start opening 228 is provided in each of the right side area and the left side area.

The electric sorting unit 26 described above is not provided with a game nail.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the electric sorting unit 26 and the out port 240, and there are provided a plurality of game nails 238 (not shown in FIG. 87). It is In addition, the above-described two general prize winning openings 226 are arranged.

Next, in FIG. 87(a), a detailed description will be given of the rotator unit 28, a part of which is visible in the vicinity of the central lower portion.

FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the rotator unit 28 viewed from the back side of the game board. In FIG. 89, the left rear side of the paper surface is the front side (player's side), and the right hand side is the rear side (back side).

FIG. 89 shows a first ball passage 2681 (an upstream passage 2681a and a downstream passage 2681b) and a second ball passage 2682 extending from the back side of the electric sorting unit 26 toward the rotor unit 28. FIG. A downstream end 2682</b>L of the second ball passage 2682 opens just above the central portion of the rotor unit 28 . On the other hand, the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681 (downstream passage 2681b) opens right above the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body unit . Also, the second ball passage 2682 is positioned on the back side of the first ball passage 2681 .

Furthermore, the length of the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the length of the first ball passage 2681 (the combined length of the upstream passage 2681a and the downstream passage 2681b).

Further, although no game nail is provided in the first ball passage 2681, the upstream passage 2681a of the first ball passage 2681 is provided with one deceleration rib r1 and delay means d1, and the downstream passage 2681b is provided with a deceleration rib r1 and a delay means d1. , a plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are provided. The deceleration ribs r1 and r2 are longitudinally extending ribs that protrude into the ball passage. Also, the plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are alternately provided on the opposing walls. On the other hand, the second ball passage 2682, which is longer than the first ball passage 2681, is also provided with one deceleration rib r3 and delay means d2, although no game nail is provided. When the game ball collides with the deceleration ribs r1, r2 and r3, the movement speed of the game ball is reduced. The delay means d1, d2 are cylindrical parts with a diameter greater than the width of the ball passage. At the lower ends of the delay means d1 and d2, openings through which game balls fall are provided. The game ball that has reached the delay means d1 makes a circular motion along the cylindrical inner peripheral surface, and eventually falls from the opening at the lower end. The movement speed of the game ball is also reduced by these delay means d1 and d2. Considering the number of deceleration ribs, the relatively short first ball passage 2681 can reduce the moving speed of the game ball more than the relatively long second ball passage 2682. As a result, the time from the electric distribution unit 26 to reach the rotor unit 28 through the first ball passage 2681 and the time from the electric distribution unit 26 to the rotor unit 28 through the second ball passage 2682 The time to is approaching.

Also, in FIG. 89, a path 2604 provided inside the electric sorting unit 26 is indicated by a dotted line.

90 is a diagram showing the rotor unit 28 shown in FIG. 89. FIG. 90(a) and 90(c) are perspective views of the rotor unit 28 as seen from diagonally above, with the diagonally lower left side of the paper being the front side (player side) and the diagonally upper right side being the rear side. (Back side) becomes.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the rotor unit 28 has a cylindrical upper cover 281, an outer peripheral guide surface 282, and a pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 arranged inside the outer peripheral guide surface 282. . A pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 are arranged at positions opposed to each other by 180 degrees, each having a fan-like shape and having a height approximately equal to that of the upper cover 281 . The rotating body unit 28 includes a motor 28M, and a rotating shaft 28A (see FIGS. 90(b) and 90(c)) rotated by the motor 28M is positioned at the center of the rotating body unit 28. As shown in FIG. A pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 are fixed to the rotating shaft 28A by a base plate (not shown), and rotate around the rotating shaft 28A when the motor 28M rotates. The base plate (not shown) is covered from above by a pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834, and the pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834 also rotate together with the pair of ball receiving openings 2831, 2832 when the motor 28M rotates. A pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 cover the central portion of the rotating body unit 28 and are inclined toward the outer peripheral side. That is, the inclined plate 2833 located on the left side shown in FIG. 90(a) is inclined downward toward the left side, and the inclined plate 2834 located on the right side is inclined downward toward the right side. An outer peripheral guide surface 282 is provided below the lowest position of the pair of downwardly inclined inclined plates 2833 and 2834 . Therefore, the game ball dropped onto the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 rolls on the inclined plates 2833 and 2834 according to the inclination of the inclined plates 2833 and 2834 and is guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282 .

FIG. 90(b) shows a state in which the cylindrical upper cover 281, the pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832, the base plate (not shown), and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 are removed from the rotor unit 28. It is a perspective view when viewed from the front side, and the left front side of the paper surface is the front side (player side).

As shown in FIG. 90(b), the outer guide surface 282 has an opening 2821 on the front side. The outer peripheral guide surface 282 is a surface inclined downward toward the opening 2821, and the position of the opening 2821 is the lowest position. In addition, portions 2822 and 2823 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 in the vicinity of the opening 2821 have steep angles of inclination. Further, a peak portion 2824 is provided on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 at a position opposed to the opening 2821 by 180 degrees. This peak portion 2824 is inclined to both sides from a slightly elevated position 2825 . The opening 2821 is connected to the starting entrance guideway 288 . As described with reference to FIG. 87(c), the exit opening 2881 of the starting opening side guideway 288 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the first special figure starting opening 230 in the vertical direction. A game ball on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 rolls on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 according to the inclination of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and enters the start port side guide path 288 from the opening 2821 . The game ball that has entered the starting port side guideway 288 passes through the starting port side guideway 288, is released from the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288, and goes to the first special figure starting port 230. However, there are cases where the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 strays to the left and right and does not enter the first special figure start opening 230.

FIG. 90(d) is a perspective view of the rotator unit 28 as seen from the lower front side, and the front side of the paper surface is the front side (player side).

This FIG. 90(d) also shows the exit opening 2881 of the starting entrance side guideway 288. As shown in FIG. 90(b) and 90(d) also show out discharge ports 289L and 289R provided on both sides of the start port side guideway 288. As shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 90(b), after the pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 and the base plate (not shown) and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 are removed, an out-discharging surface 289 connected to the out-discharging openings 289L and 289R is removed. is visible. The out-discharge surface 289 is a surface that slopes downward toward the out-discharge ports 289L and 289R. This out discharge surface 289 is a surface provided below the outer peripheral guide surface 282 by one game ball or more. A game ball entering a pair of rotating ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 falls on the out discharge surface 289, is discharged from the out discharge openings 289L and 289R to the game area 124, and reaches the out opening 240. - 特許庁However, the game balls discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R may enter the first special figure starting port 230 very rarely. It should be noted that the game balls discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R may be configured to enter the out port 240 100%.

Further, FIGS. 90(b) and 90(d) show a start winning ball guide path 284 provided below the exit opening 2881 of the start entrance side guide path 288. As shown in FIG. The starting winning ball guide path 284 is a path that is bent downward at approximately 90 degrees, with an upstream end opening forward and a downstream end opening downward. A ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 passes through the starting port route 233 of the special 1 starting chucker 23 shown in FIG. On the other end side of the start winning ball guide path 284, a ball detection sensor 2841 for detecting a ball entering the first special figure start port 230 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2841 is finally discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 90(c) shows a state in which the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and the members forming the out-discharge ports 289L and 289R (out-discharge surface 289, etc.) are further removed from the rotor unit 28 shown in FIG. 90(b). It is a perspective view when it sees from diagonally above.

The rotating body unit 28 is entirely made of a transparent member, and game balls rolling on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and game balls flowing down the out discharge surface 289 can be visually recognized in some cases. Such a rotating body unit 28 is provided with an LED substrate 285 on which a plurality of LEDs 2851 are mounted. The LED substrate 285 is covered with a lens plate (not shown) and provided below the out-discharge surface 289 . When a plurality of LEDs 2851 emit light, the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and the out discharge surface 289 are illuminated from below, and together with the movement of the game ball, the production effect is enhanced.

The rotating body unit 28 described above is not provided with a game nail.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the state of the electric distribution unit 26 and the state of the rotator unit 28. As shown in FIG.

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91(a) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. In this state, the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion is also facing rightward. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 flows down the first ball path 2681 through the first guide port 2613 and falls to the rotor unit 28 . In the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 91(a), both of the pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 are not directly below the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681, but are located outside the downstream end 2681L. state. Therefore, the game ball passing through the first ball passage 2681 drops onto the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 and is guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282 . Then, it rolls on the outer peripheral guide surface 282, passes through the starting port side guide path 288 from the opening 2821 shown in FIG. Head to the special figure start port 230.

On the other hand, the fourth spherical direction changing portion in the second spherical path 2602 has the direction changing member 2641 directed to the left, and the second spherical direction changing portion has the direction changing member 2621 directed to the right. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 passes through the second guide port 2623 and flows down the second ball path 2682 to reach the center of the rotor unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It falls upward and is again guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282 . Then, like the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601, it passes through the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. Head to the first special figure starting port 230 shown in c).

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 91(b) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. is in the rightward posture, and in the first ball direction changing portion, the direction changing member 2611 is in the rightward posture. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 flows down the first ball path 2681 through the first guide port 2613 and falls to the rotor unit 28 . The rotor unit 28 shown in FIG. 91(b) has a pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 that rotate in a positional relationship facing each other by 180 degrees. It is located directly below. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 2681 passes through the ball receiving opening 2832 and falls onto the out discharge surface 289 shown in FIG. discharged to

On the other hand, the fourth spherical direction changing portion in the second spherical path 2602 has the direction changing member 2641 directed to the left, and the second spherical direction changing portion has the direction changing member 2621 directed to the right. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 passes through the second guide port 2623 and flows down the second ball path 2682 to reach the center of the rotor unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It drops upward and is guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282 . Then, through the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. 90 (b), through the starting port side guide path 288, is released from the exit opening 2881, toward the first special figure starting port 230 shown in FIG. 87 (c) . In the second ball path 2602, when the game ball reaches the second ball path 2682, it is always released from the exit opening 2881 through the start port side guide path 288 and goes to the first special figure start port 230. It will be. That is, it is not affected by the state of the rotating body unit 28 . In this way, when the state of the electric distribution unit 26 is the state in which the game ball is directed to the second ball path 2602, that is, the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion is in the leftward posture, If the direction change member 2621 of the second ball direction change part is in the state of facing right, if the number of reservations of special figure 1 is one less than the maximum number of reservations, the reservation of special figure 1 is full You may make it alert|report that it becomes. For example, in the customization setting, if it is set to use the ball shooting handle 134 to make the notification, the ball shooting handle 134 vibrates to make the notification. In addition, a ball detection sensor is provided in front of the second ball path 2602, and when the game ball passes through this ball detection sensor in a state where the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is one less than the maximum number of reservations, the above notification is given. may be performed.

In the electric sorting unit 26 shown in FIG. 91(c), the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601 is in a state where the direction changing member 2631 faces rightward, but the first ball direction changing portion changes direction. The member 2611 is in a state facing left. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 enters the out port 241 provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing section 261, and is provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, as shown in FIG. Through the indicated path 2604, it is finally discharged to the game island side.

In addition, the direction changing member 2641 is directed leftward in the fourth spherical direction changing portion in the second spherical path 2602, and the direction changing member 2621 is also directed leftward in the second spherical direction changing portion. Therefore, the game ball entering the second ball path 2602 enters the out port 242 provided directly below the second ball direction changing portion, and this game ball is also provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. Through the path 2604, it is finally discharged to the game island side.

In the electric sorting unit 26 shown in FIG. 91(d), the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601 is in a leftward posture. Therefore, the game ball leaves the first ball path 2601 and enters the third ball path 2603 in the center.

In addition, the fourth ball direction changing portion in the second ball path 2602 is in a state in which the direction changing member 2641 is directed rightward. Therefore, the game ball leaves the second ball path 2602 and enters the third ball path 2603 in the center.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the third ball path 2603 passes through the performance switch 269 shown in FIG.

It should be noted that each of the first ball path 2601, the second ball path 2602, and the third ball path 2603 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 26r1 projecting forward. Further, deceleration ribs 26r2 projecting in the left-right direction are alternately arranged in the vertical portion on the downstream side of the third ball path 2603. As shown in FIG.

Also, the distance from the fourth spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third spherical path 2603 is greater than the distance from the third spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third spherical path 2603 (see arrow 3d). (see arrow 4d) is longer. Since the distance is different in this way, the time and rolling manner until the game ball moves to the third ball path 2603 can be changed by the third ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) and the fourth ball direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631). 2641) can be enjoyed for every two ball direction changes. Note that the distance from the fourth spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third spherical path 2603 is greater than the distance from the third spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third spherical path 2603 (see arrow 3d). (see arrow 4d) may be shorter. That is, the distance from the third spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2631) to the third spherical path 2603 (see arrow 3d) and the distance from the fourth spherical direction changing portion (direction changing member 2641) to the third spherical path 2603 It is sufficient if the distance (see arrow 4d) is different.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the flow of game balls as a result of hitting to the left.

In the following, although there may be overlaps with the explanation so far, the explanation so far will be summarized and explained again.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal state (ordinary pattern low probability state). When hitting left, the game ball enters the first area 1241 or the second area 1242 . In the positional relationship between the first region 1241 and the second region 1242, when fired with a relatively strong firing intensity, the first region 1241 can be aimed, and when fired with a relatively weak firing intensity, the second region 1242 can be aimed at. However, even if the game ball is shot with a relatively high firing intensity, the game ball may bounce off the wall 1241a (see FIG. 88) that separates the first area 1241 and enter the second area 1242. obtain. It should be noted that even if the player intends to hit the ball to the right, the firing strength may be insufficient, resulting in a left-handed hit.

A game ball that has entered the first area 1241 advances to the end of the right route 125R in the distribution front area 125, enters the left route 125L from the middle of the right route 125R, and enters the center route 125C from the middle of the right route 125R. There are times when it gets into. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second region 1242, when proceeding to the end of the left route 125L in the distribution front region 125, when entering the right route 125R from the middle of the left route 125L, and from the middle of the left route 125L to the center It may enter route 125C.

When the game ball proceeds along the right route 125R, it enters the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26, and in the third ball direction changing section 263, the game ball is directed to the first ball direction changing section 261. or is directed to the third sphere path 2603 . If the game ball is directed to the first ball direction change portion 261, the game ball still follows the first ball path 2601 and at the first ball direction change portion 261, the game ball is directed to the first ball path 2681. Or directed to the out port 241 . The first ball direction changing section 261 can be regarded as a means (first distribution means) for distributing game balls to the right direction (direction of the first ball passage 2681) and left direction (direction of the out port 241). When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 , the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240 in the rotating body unit 28 .

When the game ball advances on the left route 125L, it enters the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26, and in the fourth ball direction changing section 264, the game ball is directed to the second ball direction changing section 262. or is directed to the third sphere path 2603 . If the playing ball is directed to the second ball direction change portion 262, the game ball still follows the second ball path 2602 and at the second ball direction change portion 262, the playing ball is directed to the second ball path 2682. Or directed to the out port 242 . The second ball direction changing section 262 can be regarded as a means (second distribution means) for distributing game balls to the right direction (direction of the second ball passage 2682) and left direction (direction of the out port 242). When the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 , the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28 .

In the rotating body unit 28, even if the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230, the game ball does not necessarily win the first special figure start port 230, and the first special figure It may deviate from the starting port 230 and reach the out port 240 .

When the game ball advances through the central route 125C, it may enter the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and enter the general winning hole 227. When the game ball does not win the general winning hole 227 , the game ball proceeds along the third ball path 2603 and passes through the performance switch 269 . Also, even if the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 at the third ball direction changing portion 263, even if the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 at the fourth ball direction changing portion 264, Even if there is, the game ball proceeds along the third ball path 2603 and passes through the effect switch 269 . A game ball that has passed through the performance switch 269 is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 . The game ball discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 may win either of the two general winning openings 226, 226, and if it does not win any of the general winning openings 226, The out port 240 is reached. Here, the electric distribution unit 26 had only one general prize winning opening 227, but after passing through the electric distribution unit 26, the two general winning openings 226, 226 are, judging from the number of general winning openings, After passing through the electric sorting unit 26, it can be said that the probability of winning a prize in the general prize opening is higher. The number of prize balls is the same in both the general prize winning opening 227 in the electric distribution unit 26 and the two general prize winning openings 226 after passing through the electric distribution unit 26 .

Also, when the game ball advances through the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240 at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28. . The rotating body unit 28 uses a pair of rotating ball receiving ports 2831 to move game balls in the direction of the starting port side guide path 288 (the direction of the first special figure starting port 230) and the direction of the out discharge surface 289 (the direction of the out port 240 direction) can be seen as a means for distributing, and the direction of movement of the game ball is directed to the direction of the starting port side guideway 288 (the direction of the first special figure starting port 230), and the out discharge surface 289 It can also be regarded as ball direction changing means capable of changing to a state of directing in the direction (the direction of the out port 240). On the other hand, when the game ball advances through the second ball path 2602 , the game ball is always directed to the first special figure starting port 230 . However, when the game ball travels through the second ball path 2602, the possibility of reaching the rotor unit 28 is lower than when the game ball travels through the first ball path 2601. For example, when the game ball travels the first ball path 2601, at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 50%, is directed to the out port 240 with a probability of . On the other hand, in the first ball direction changing portion 261 in the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a probability of 50% and directed to the out port 241 with a probability of 50%. Therefore, when the game ball advances the first ball path 2601, the game ball will be directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 25%. On the other hand, when the game ball advances through the second ball path 2602 and reaches the rotor unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 100%. However, at the second ball direction changing portion 262 in the second ball path 2602, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 with a probability of 25% and directed to the out port 242 with a probability of 75%. Therefore, even when the game ball advances through the second ball path 2602, the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 25%. That is, the probability that the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 is the same regardless of whether the game ball progresses through the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602. . However, when looking only at the rotating body unit 28, as described above, the game ball passing through the second ball direction changing section 262 is more likely to be the starting point than the game ball passing through the first ball direction changing section 261. It is easy to be guided to the side guideway 288 . In addition, in this example, the third ball direction changing portion 263 upstream of the first ball direction changing portion 261, the probability of directing the game ball to the first ball direction changing portion 261 and the upstream of the second ball direction changing portion 262 The probability that the fourth ball direction changing section 264 directs the game ball to the second ball direction changing section 262 is the same. In the electric distribution unit 26, the motors of the respective direction changing members are controlled so as to achieve the above-described probability per unit time (while the random number table prepared in advance makes one round). According to the example described above, even if a game ball enters the first area 1241, the game ball does not necessarily follow the first ball path 2601, and even if the game ball enters the second area 1242, the game ball Although the ball does not always follow the second ball path 2602, by aiming at the first area 1241, the game ball can reach the rotor unit 28 with a relatively high probability. The probability of winning mouth 230 is relatively low. On the other hand, by aiming at the second area 1242, the game ball can only reach the rotator unit 28 with a relatively low probability, but if it reaches the rotator unit 28, the first special figure start port 230 The odds of winning are relatively high. The player can enjoy choosing which of the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 to target. Moreover, both the game ball that has entered the first area 1241 and the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 can be visually recognized by the player until they reach the electric distribution unit 26 or the back side of the game board 201. You can enjoy watching how it rolls.

FIG. 93 shows an example of a game explanation displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

FIG. 93 shows the decorative design display device 208 from (a) to (f). In any of the decorative design display devices 208, a combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is displayed as mini-designs in the upper left corner of the display area. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 2081 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the control state (game state) here is a normal game state (normal pattern low probability state). I encourage you to strike. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with a reserved icon display area 2082 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 2081 . In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided. In the reserved icon display area 2802 of special figure 1, reserved icons h11 and h12 representing the reservation of special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(a), a diagram representing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and when the game ball is hit left, the game ball flows down 2. It introduces that there are two routes. Specifically, these two routes are the first area 1241→right route 125R→first ball path 2601→third ball direction changing portion 263→first ball direction changing portion 261 (hereinafter referred to as the “first route ) and a route of second area 1242→left route 125L→second ball path 2602→fourth ball direction change portion 264→second ball direction change portion 262 (hereinafter referred to as “second route”). Become.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(b) as well, a diagram representing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and which area of the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed. It explains that there is no difference in the player's profit even if the target is . That is, as described above, the probability that the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 is the same whether the game ball travels the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602. are the same.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(c), a diagram representing the rotator unit 28 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and an explanation of the rotator unit 28 is displayed. That is, when the game ball reaches the rotator unit 28, compared to the first ball path 2601 (first route), if it is via the second ball path 2602 (second route), the first special figure start opening It explains that the chances of winning 230 will be doubled. As described above, in the first route, the game ball is guided to the starting port side guideway 288 only with a probability of 50%, and in the second route, the game ball is guided to the starting port side guideway 288 with a probability of 100%. be done. In addition, even if it is guided to the starting port side guideway 288, it does not necessarily win the first special figure starting port 230, rarely, it deviates from the first special figure starting port 230 and reaches the out port 240 sometimes.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(d), a diagram representing a first area 1241 and a second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the first area 1241 is surrounded by a line. As an explanation for the first area 1241, it is displayed that if the game ball is aimed to reach the rotor unit 28, the first area 1241 should be aimed. In FIG. 93(d), only the explanation display for the first area 1241 is displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(e), a diagram representing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the second area 1242 is surrounded by a line. . Then, as an explanation for the second area 1242, it is displayed that if you aim to win a prize to the first special figure start port 230, you should aim for this second area 1242. In FIG. 93(e), only the explanation display for the second area 1242 is displayed.

Also in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 93(f), a diagram showing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen. In this decorative pattern display device 208, the most detailed explanation display is displayed for the first area 1241 (first route) and the second area 1242 (second route).

The explanation display described above may be displayed only when there is no pending special figure (for example, during demonstration display). Alternatively, the explanation display may also be displayed during the jackpot game. For example, the explanation display may be displayed during the ending effect of the big hit game. Further, the explanatory display may be displayed not only during the ending performance during the jackpot game, but also in a relatively relaxed situation.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of the game description displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

The explanatory display explained with reference to FIG. 93 is an example in which the symbol variation of the special figure is performed during stop display, but the example shown in FIG. 94 is an example performed during the symbol variation of the special figure.

The control state (game state) of FIG. 94(a) to FIG. 94(c) is a normal game state (normal pattern low probability state). characters are displayed.

In FIG. 94(a), the special symbol is in the process of changing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol in a large size in the center of the screen, and also displays the varying mini symbol on the upper left. . A variation icon h10 is displayed in the variation icon display area 2081. FIG. In this example, the detailed explanation display explained with reference to FIG. 93(f) is displayed in a telop-like display 2083 in which characters flow to the left on the variable display of decorative patterns displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. is displayed.

In FIG. 94(b), the pattern variation of the special figure that was performed in FIG. 94(a) is finished, and the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is still displayed in the center of the screen. . Also, at the upper left of the display area, a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is displayed as a mini-design. Note that the change icon h10 is no longer displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(b), the continuation of the explanatory display displayed in FIG. 94(a) is displayed. That is, the telop-like display 2083 is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 94(c), the symbol variation of the special figure is started. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(c), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the varying mini design is also displayed in the upper left. In addition, the pending icon is shifted and displayed, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(c), the continuation of the explanatory display displayed in FIG. 94(b) is displayed. That is, the telop-like display 2083 is continuously displayed.

As described above, there is a case where the explanation display (tutorial display) continues to be displayed even during symbol variation over a plurality of variations or during symbol stoppage.

The control state (game state) of FIG. 94 (d) to (f) is also a normal game state (normal pattern low probability state). characters are displayed.

In FIG. 94(d), the symbols of the special symbols are being changed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of the decorative symbols in a large size in the center of the screen, and also displays the mini symbols during variation in the upper left. . A variation icon h10 is displayed in the variation icon display area 2081. FIG. In this example, the conversation notice 2084 is started during the symbol variation. The conversation notice 2084 is a kind of look-ahead notice, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the character that appears. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(d), a princess character having the second highest reliability of a big hit appears, and originally, the character display of "chance" is displayed, but here, The explanatory display described with reference to FIG. 93(a) is displayed instead.

In FIG. 94(e), the pattern variation of the special figure that was performed in FIG. 94(a) is finished, and the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is still displayed in the center of the screen. . Also, at the upper left of the display area, a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is displayed as a mini-design. Note that the change icon h10 is no longer displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(e), the conversation notice 2084 disappears and the explanation display disappears.

In FIG. 94(f), the symbol variation of the special figure is started. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(f), the variable display of the decorative design is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the mini design that is being changed is also displayed in the upper left. In addition, the pending icon is shifted and displayed, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94(f), the character of the lord with the highest reliability of the big hit appears, and the character display of "It's intense heat" should be displayed, but here it is displayed. , the explanatory display described with reference to FIG. 93(e) is displayed instead.

As described above, the explanatory display may be displayed as part of the conversation preview. Also, the conversation notice may be not the look-ahead notice but the notice of the symbol variation display that is currently being performed. Furthermore, the form of the notice accompanied by the explanation display is not limited to the conversation notice, and may be a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, or the like.

Next, a modified example of the means for changing the motion of the game ball centering on the electric distribution unit 26 explained so far will be explained. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are given the same reference numerals as those used so far.

95 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIG. 92. FIG. Here, differences from the example shown in FIG. 92 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 95, the distribution front area 125 provided with the game nail 238 is removed from the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. Therefore, the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26 is connected from the first area 1241 without branching, and the game ball entering the first area 1241 is the first ball of the electric distribution unit 26. The route 2601 is always followed. In addition, the second area 1242 is connected to the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26 without branching, and the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 is transferred to the second ball path of the electric distribution unit 26. 2602 must be reached.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 95, the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 are also removed, and the third ball path 2603 is also eliminated. Therefore, the first spherical direction changing portion 261 and the second spherical direction changing portion 262 are provided side by side. Also, the game ball that has entered the first area 1241 is directed to the first ball passage 2681 or the out port 241 in the first ball direction changing portion 261 . The game ball that has entered the second area 1242 is directed to the second ball passage 2682 or the out port 242 in the second ball direction changing portion 262 .

95, in the first ball direction changing section 261, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a 50% probability, directed to. The game ball that has flowed down the first ball passage 2681 is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the second ball direction changing portion 262, the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 with a probability of 25% and directed to the out port 242 with a probability of 75%. The game ball that has flowed down the second ball passage 2682 is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 100%. Therefore, even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. The probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 95 has a simpler structure than the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 92, and the flow of the game ball is easier for the player to understand. In addition, even in the first modification shown in FIG. 95, even if the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball It does not necessarily win a prize, and it may come off the first special figure start port 230 and reach the out port 240.

96 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIG. 92. FIG. Again, the description will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 92, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 96, there is a distribution front area 125, and a game ball that has entered the first area 1241 can proceed to the right route 125R to the end, or to the left route 125L or the center route 125C from the middle. may enter. Also, the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 may proceed to the end of the left route 125L, or may enter the right route 125R or the central route 125C from the middle.

When the game ball advances through the central route 125C, the game ball may enter the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and enter the general prize winning opening 227. When the game ball does not win the general winning hole 227 , the game ball advances along the third ball path 2603 , passes the performance switch 269 , and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 .

96, the first ball direction changing portion 261 and the second ball direction changing portion 262 are removed from the means for changing the motion of the game ball shown in FIG. ing.

When the game ball proceeds along the right route 125R, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 or the third ball path 2603 in the third ball direction changing section 263 of the electric distribution unit 26. . When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 , the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 or the out port 240 in the rotating body unit 28 .

When the game ball proceeds along the left route 125L, the game ball is directed to the second ball path 2682 or the third ball path 2603 in the fourth ball direction changing section 264 of the electric distribution unit 26. . When the game ball is directed to the second ball passage 2682 , the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 in the rotating body unit 28 .

In the third ball direction changing portion 263 or the fourth ball direction changing portion 264, the game ball directed to the third ball path 2603 is distributed from the middle of the third ball path 2603 (downstream side of the general winning opening 227) to the third ball path. After flowing down the ball path 2603 and passing the production switch 269, it is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. - 特許庁

96, in the third ball direction changing section 263, the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681 with a probability of 50%, and the third ball is directed to the third ball with a probability of 50%. Path 2603 is directed. The game ball that has flowed down the first ball passage 2681 is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the fourth ball direction changing section 264, the game ball is directed to the second ball path 2682 with a probability of 25% and directed to the third ball path 2603 with a probability of 75%. The game ball that has flowed down the second ball passage 2682 is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 100%. Therefore, even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. The probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 96 is similar to the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. It is simple and the flow of the game ball is easy for the player to understand. In addition, even in the second modification shown in FIG. 96, even if the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball It does not necessarily win a prize, and it may come off the first special figure start port 230 and reach the out port 240.

97A and 97B are diagrams showing modifications of the third spherical direction changing portion 263 and the first spherical direction changing portion 261. FIG.

Both the direction changing member 2631 of the third spherical direction changing portion 263 and the direction changing member 2611 of the first spherical direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 97(a) are replaced with fixed members made of resin. This resin fixing member is also provided with right inclined surfaces 263R, 261R and left inclined surfaces 263L, 261L. The direction changing members 2631 and 2611 shown in FIG. 97(a) are not rotatable but fixedly arranged, but the right inclined surfaces 263R and 261R shown in FIG. , and the left inclined surfaces 263L and 261L are always inclined downward to the left. The game ball is directed leftward or rightward depending on how it hits the direction changing members 2631 and 2611. - 特許庁

Both the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 97(b) are replaced with three resin-made game nails. These three game nails 239 made of resin are formed integrally with the base plates 2632 and 2612 of the direction changing members 2631 and 2611, respectively. Therefore, the angle of the game nail cannot be adjusted. Three game pegs 239 are positioned at the vertices of a triangle, and the game ball is directed leftward or rightward depending on how it hits these three game pegs 239 .

Metal game nails may be used instead of resin game nails.

Also, the direction changing member described with reference to FIG. H.262 may be used.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which the distribution front area 125 is changed. The changes will be mainly described below.

In the pre-distribution area 125 shown in FIG. 98, a first center route 125C1 and a second center route 125C2 are prepared in addition to the right route 125R and the left route 125L. The right route 125R branches into a first central route 125C1, and the left route 125L branches into a second central route 125C2. However, the first central route 125C1 and the second central route 125C2 are not connected in the middle, and the game ball passing through the right route 125R does not enter the left route 125L and passes through the left route 125L. There is no case where the game ball enters the right route 125R.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 98, the ball passage 1245 is connected to the right route 125R and the second area 1242 is connected to the left route 125L. Also, the right route 125R connects to the first ball path 2601, and the left route 125L connects to the second ball path 2602. First central root 125C1 leads to third ball path 2603 and second central root 125C2 leads to fourth ball path 2605. FIG. The fourth ball path 2605 is also provided with a general winning opening 227 . The fourth ball path 2605 merges with the third ball path 2603 at the location where the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is provided. That is, the game ball directed to the right side by the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 enters the third ball path 2603, and the game ball passing through the fourth ball path 2605 also enters the third ball path 2603, A game ball directed to the left in the ball direction changing portion 263 also enters the third ball path 2603 .

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example in which the upstream portion of the third ball path 2603 in the electric sorting unit 26 is changed. The changes will be mainly described below.

The third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 99 includes a prize-winning route 2603W that enters the general prize-winning port 227, a left detour route 2603L that flows down the left side of the general prize-winning port 227 without winning the general prize-winning port 227, and a general prize-winning port. 227 is provided with a right detour route 2603R that flows down the right side of the general winning opening 227 without winning. The winning route 2603W is a route that is easy to follow when entering straight from the central route 125C.

Also, although the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602 are provided side by side with the third ball path 2603 interposed therebetween, they may be provided so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the above description,
``first ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the first ball direction changing section 261 shown in FIG. 95];
a second ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, a second ball direction changing section 262 shown in FIG. 95];
with
The first ball direction changing means moves the game ball through a first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or a route passing through the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26] A means that can be changed to a first state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2611 is facing left],
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the first guide port 2613) or a route through the starting port side guide path 288]. [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2611 is directed to the right],
The second ball direction changing means moves the game ball through the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 242) or a route through the route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26 ] to a second state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2621 is facing left],
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the second guide port 2623) or a route passing through the starting port side guide path 288]. A means that can be changed to four states [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2621 is facing right],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Since there is a possibility that the game ball passes through either of the two routes toward either of the two ball direction changing means, the player can see the rolling mode of the game ball changed by each ball direction changing means. Even if it is difficult for the game ball to go to the target route because one of the ball direction changing means is dirty, the player can play the game expecting that the game ball will go to the other ball direction changing means.

The first route may be a route extending from the out port to the back side of the game board. This first route may be a route invisible to the player.

Also, the second route may be a route (first ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, rotating body unit 28). Alternatively, the second route may be a route to the winning means. This second route may be a route at least partially visible to the player. It should be noted that passing the second route may always win the winning means, or even passing the second route may not win the winning means.

again,
``The second route is a route that is more advantageous to the player than the first route because the game balls pass through it [for example, a route that allows you to win prize balls, you can win more prize balls. , can get a starting prize, etc.]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first route is a route toward an outlet [e.g., outlets 241 and 242].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first route may be a route extending from the out-port [for example, the out-ports 241 and 242].

again,
"The second route is a route to the winning area [for example, the first special symbol start gate 230],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] may not be provided between the second route and the winning area.

again,
"The first ball direction changing means and the second ball direction changing means are provided side by side.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"a launching means [e.g., launching device 110];
a first region [for example, a first region 1241 shown in FIG. 95] provided on the upstream side of the first ball direction changing means;
a second region provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means [for example, a second region 1242 shown in FIG. 95];
with
The first ball direction changing means is means for reaching the game ball that has passed through the first area,
The second ball direction changing means is means for reaching the game ball that has passed through the second area,
A game ball can be shot into either the first area or the second area by the shooting means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can play a game by shooting a game ball aiming to pass the game ball through a desired ball direction changing means, or can play the game by appropriately changing the ball direction changing means targeted during the game. .

It should be noted that the first ball direction changing means may be a means by which the game ball that has passed through the first area always reaches.

Also, the second ball direction changing means may be a means that the game ball that has passed through the second area always reaches.

again,
"There is no game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] between the first region and the first ball direction changing means,
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second region and the second ball direction changing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``If the second route is provided and the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the starting port side guideway 288], and a route other than the second route [for example, the out discharge surface 289 route]; and
a first ball passage [for example, a first ball passage 2681] through which the game ball directed to the second route by the first ball direction changing means flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing means;
a second ball passage [for example, a second ball passage 2682] through which the game ball directed to the second route by the second ball direction changing means flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing means;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first ball passage is not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238],
The second ball passage is also not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238],
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the first ball passage and the fifth ball direction changing means,
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second ball passage and the fifth ball direction changing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
``First ball direction changing means [for example, first ball direction changing unit 261] that changes the moving direction of the game ball;
A second ball direction changing means [for example, a second ball direction changing unit 262] that changes the moving direction of the game ball;
with
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the first guide port 2613) or a route through the starting port side guide path 288]. means variable in a first percentage [e.g., 50%];
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the second guide port 2623) or a route through the starting port side guide path 288]. is variable by a second percentage [e.g., 25%] to
The first percentage is a percentage higher than the second percentage,
The second route [for example, the route toward the induction port or the route passing through the starting port side guidance path 288] is a game ball that passes through the first ball direction changing means [for example, the starting port side with a probability of 50% The game ball passing through the second ball direction changing means [for example, passing the route through the starting port side guideway 288 with a probability of 100%] passes through than is an easy route,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

A player enjoys watching the rolling mode of the game ball changed by each ball direction changing means, and even if one ball direction changing means is dirty and the game ball is difficult to go to an aimed route, the other ball direction changing means is moved. A game can be played in anticipation of the direction of the game ball.

In addition, in the amusement machine, the game ball heading for the second route via the second ball direction changing means is the game ball heading for the second route via the first ball direction changing means. It is configured to be easier to pass through the second route than a sphere.

The second route may be a route (first ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, rotating body unit 28).

Further, a third ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing part 263] is provided upstream of the first ball direction changing means, and the first ball direction changing means [for example, The first ball direction changing section 261] may be means through which the game ball passing through the third ball direction changing means may pass. Further, a fourth ball direction changing means [for example, a fourth ball direction changing part 264] is provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means, and the second ball direction changing means [for example, The second ball direction changing section 262] may be means through which the game ball passing through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass. Furthermore, the first ball direction changing means is a means for preventing the game ball passing through the fourth ball direction changing means, and the second ball direction changing means is a means for preventing the third ball from passing It may be means that the game ball that has passed through the direction changing means does not pass.

again,
"The distance from the first ball direction changing means to the second root [for example, the distance including the length of the first ball passage 2681] and the distance from the second ball direction changing means to the second route [for example, the distance including the length of the second ball passage 2682] is different [for example, the difference is that the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the first ball passage 2681],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

You can enjoy the time until the game ball goes to the second route and the rolling mode for each of the two ball direction changing means.

again,
"A first delay means (for example, one deceleration rib r1 and a delay means d1 and a plurality of deceleration ribs r2];
A second delay means (for example, one deceleration rib r3 and a delay means d2] and
with
The number of the first delay means and the number of the second delay means are different,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``If the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the starting port side guideway 288], and to a route other than the second route [for example, the route passing through the out discharge surface 289]. a fifth ball direction changing means [e.g., rotating body unit 28] that may direct the
Said fifth ball direction changing means, when directing the game ball via said first ball direction changing means [for example, first ball direction changing section 261] to said second route [for example, game ball falls on a pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834], or when heading to a route other than the second route [for example, when a game ball falls into the ball receiving openings 2831, 2832]. be,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It should be noted that the fifth ball direction changing means is means for directing the game ball that has passed through the second ball direction changing means [for example, the second ball direction changing section 262] to the second route. good too.

In addition, there is a guide means [for example, the rotating body unit 28] that guides the game ball to the second route and guides the game ball to a route other than the second route, and the guide means may be means for guiding the game ball passing through the first ball direction changing means to the second route or to a route other than the second route. . Furthermore, the guiding means may be means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the second ball direction changing means to the second route.

again,
"A game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
A gaming machine comprising a second detecting means (for example, a ball detecting sensor 2841 shown in FIG. 90(d)) capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route. 』
also explained.

It is possible to enjoy the rolling aspect of the game ball heading toward the second detection means.

Further, even if the first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route, the game ball does not necessarily pass the second route, and the second detection By providing the means, it may be possible to inform the player of the passage of the game ball through the second route (for example, payout of prize balls due to winning or output of payout sound).

again,
"The first ball direction changing means moves the game ball through a first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or a route passing through the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. ] [for example, the direction changing member 2611 shown in FIG.
The second detection means is a means that cannot detect the game ball that has passed through the first route,
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

When a special ball (ball with string, ball with oil, small ball, etc.) for the purpose of fraud passes through the first route, the special ball is not detected by the second detection means. Scratches and dirt in the area after passing the first route may make it easier to identify evidence of cheating when inspecting the gaming machine.

The second route may be a route that is more advantageous to the player than the first route because the game ball passes through it.

In addition, it may be a mode provided with a first detection means [for example, an out sensor] that can detect the game ball that has passed through the first route, and further, the first detection means is the second detection means. It may be a means that cannot detect a game ball that has passed through the route of. By doing this, when a special ball (ball with string, ball with oil, small ball, etc.) for the purpose of fraud passes through the second route, the special ball is detected by the first detection means. Since it is not detected, traces of cheating can be easily confirmed during inspection of the gaming machine due to scratches or stains in the area after passing through the second route. The first detection means may be provided at the exit end of the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, or may be provided at the gutter where the out balls gather on the back side of the game board 200. It may have been

again,
``If the second ball direction changing means is also in a state of directing the game ball to the second route when the first ball direction changing means is in the state of directing the game ball to the second route. is [for example, FIGS. 91(a), (b), (d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the game ball passes through any of the ball direction changing means, it may be possible to direct the game ball to the second route.

At a certain first timing, the state of the first ball direction changing means and the state of the second ball direction changing means may be a state in which the game ball is directed to the second route. .

again,
"a launching means [e.g., launching device 110];
a first region [for example, a first region 1241] provided on the upstream side of the first ball direction changing means;
a second region [for example, a second region 1242] provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means;
with
Said first ball direction changing means is a means by which game balls passing through said first area may reach,
Said second ball direction changing means is a means by which game balls that have passed through said second area may reach,
A game ball can be shot into either the first area or the second area by the shooting means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can play a game by shooting a game ball aiming to pass the game ball through a desired ball direction changing means, or can play the game by appropriately changing the ball direction changing means targeted during the game. .

again,
"There are cases where the game ball passing through the first area does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, when it passes through the third ball path 2603]. configured as
It seems that there is a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, the case where it passes through the third ball path 2603]. configured to
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
"A third ball direction changing means [for example, a third ball direction changing section 263] that changes the moving direction of a game ball;
a fourth ball direction changing means [for example, a fourth ball direction changing section 264] that changes the moving direction of the game ball;
A fourth route through which the game ball can pass [for example, the central route 125C];
with
The third ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a third route [for example, a route downstream of the general winning opening 227 in the third ball path 2603] [for example, FIG. )] is a means capable of changing the state of the direction changing member 2631 shown in
The fourth ball direction changing means is means capable of changing the state of directing the game ball to the third route [for example, the state of the direction changing member 2641 shown in FIG. 91(d)],
The fourth route is a route through which a game ball can pass without going through any of the third ball direction changing means and the fourth ball direction changing means,
The third route is a route that can be reached by a game ball that has passed through the fourth route,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Since the game ball goes to the third route whether or not it passes through either of the two ball direction changing means, the rolling mode of the game ball up to the third route is controlled by each ball direction changing means. In some cases, the player enjoys watching how the ball changes, and in some cases, the player enjoys watching the rolling state of the game ball that does not go through each ball direction changing means.

again,
"The third route is a route that may occur when game balls that have passed the fourth route do not reach [for example, when they enter the general winning slot 227].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

There is a case where you can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

again,
``An entrance [for example, a general winning entrance 227] provided between the fourth route and the third route,
Game balls that have passed through the fourth route may enter the entrance,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

There is a case where you can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

In addition, the entrance may be an entrance where a lottery is performed when a game ball enters (special figure start entrance or normal figure start entrance), or an entrance where prize balls are generated when a game ball enters ( It may be a winning opening), or an entrance (out opening) in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters.

Also, there may be a case where the game ball that has entered and passed through the entry port heads for the third route. That is, the entrance may be of a gate type.

Moreover, between the fourth route and the third route, a plurality of entrances may be provided, or a plurality of types of entrances may be provided.

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising a plurality of routes [eg, a first ball path 2601 and a second ball path 2602] between the fourth route and the third route. 』
also explained.

There is a case where you can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball after passing through the fourth route.

again,
`` A first region [for example, a first region 1241] provided upstream of the third ball direction changing means,
Said third ball direction changing means is a means in which there is a case where the game ball that has passed through said first area reaches [for example, when it proceeds to the end of the right route 125R],
The fourth route is a route in which a game ball that has passed through the first region reaches [for example, enters from the middle of the right route 125R].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The player may be able to enjoy where the game ball passes through up to the third route.

again,
``A second region [for example, a second region 1242] provided upstream of the fourth ball direction changing means,
The fourth ball direction changing means is a means in which there is a case where a game ball that has passed through the second area reaches [for example, when it progresses to the end of the left route 125L],
The fourth route is a route in which a game ball that has passed through the second area reaches [for example, enters from the middle of the left route 125L].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The player may be able to enjoy where the game ball passes through up to the third route.

again,
`` A first ball direction changing means [for example, a first ball direction changing part 261] provided downstream of the third ball direction changing means,
The first ball direction changing means is a means through which game balls that have passed through the third ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 91(a), (b), and (c)],
Said first ball direction changing means is means for not passing the game ball heading for said third route [for example, FIG. 91(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A second ball direction changing means [for example, a second ball direction changing part 262] provided downstream of the fourth ball direction changing means,
The second ball direction changing means is a means through which game balls that have passed through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 91(a), (b), and (c)],
Said second ball direction changing means is a means for not passing game balls heading for said third route [for example, FIG. 91(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The first ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state of directing the game ball to a first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241)],
The first ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state of directing the game ball to a second route [for example, a route passing through the start entrance side guideway 288],
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state of directing the game ball to the first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 242)],
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state of directing the game ball to the second route [for example, a route passing through the start entrance side guideway 288],
The first route is a route to an outlet [for example, outlets 241 and 242],
The second route is a route to the winning area [for example, the first special figure start gate 230],
The third route is a route toward an area [for example, a part of the transparent game board 201] provided with a game nail [for example, the game nail 238].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first route may be a route extending from the out ports [eg, the out ports 241 and 242] [eg, a route passing through the path 2604 provided inside the electric sorting unit 26]. The second route may be a route toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotor unit 28) (a route toward the induction port (first induction port 2613, second induction port 2623), or a route toward the first ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682). The third route may be a route to a play area [eg, play area 124]. In addition, when the game ball that has passed through the third route reaches an entrance [for example, the general winning opening 226] provided in the game area [for example, a part of the transparent game board 201] or may reach an out port [e.g., out port 240] provided in the game area [[e.g., part of the transparent game board 201] It may be configured as

In the above description,
"A first area [eg, the first area 1241] where the game ball easily enters when the game ball is shot with a first launch intensity [eg, a relatively strong launch intensity],
A second area [for example, the second area 1242] where the game ball easily enters when the game ball is shot with a second launch intensity [for example, a relatively weak launch intensity];
A first sorting means [for example, a first ball direction changing part 261] through which game balls that have entered from the first area can pass;
A second sorting means [for example, a second ball direction changing part 262] through which game balls that have entered from the second area can pass;
with
The first sorting means may sort game balls in a first direction [for example, the right direction (the direction of the first ball passage 2681)],
The second distribution means may distribute game balls in a second direction [for example, the right direction (the direction of the second ball passage 2682)],
When the first distribution means distributes the game balls in the first direction [for example, occurs with a probability of 50%], the second distribution means distributes the game balls in the second direction. The second direction [e.g., 100% chance of winning] is more likely than the case [e.g., 25% chance of winning], but the first direction [e.g., 50% chance of winning] It is a direction that is easy to win a certain winning means [for example, the first special figure start port 230],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim at the first area or aim at the second area. Also, although it is difficult to be sorted in the direction in which it is easy to win a certain prize-winning means, when it is sorted, it is easy to be sorted in the direction in which it is easy to win a prize in the second route with a high probability of winning, and the direction in which it is easy to win a prize by the certain prize-winning means. , and the first route, which is less likely to win the prize than the second route, can be selected according to the taste of the player.

The first sorting means may sort game balls in a direction different from the first direction [for example, the left direction (the direction of the out port 241)].

Also, the second distribution means may distribute game balls in a direction different from the second direction [for example, the left direction (the direction of the out port 242)].

again,
"The first area is an area into which a game ball fired in a manner recommended in a certain game state [for example, normal state] may enter,
The second area is an area into which game balls fired in a manner recommended in a certain game state [for example, normal state] may enter.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, a game ball shot in a manner recommended in a certain game state may enter the first area or the second area. In other words, it is possible to make the game ball enter the first area or the second area by executing the recommended hitting method in a certain game state.

The player can select the first area or the second area in the common game state of the certain game state. That is, the player can arbitrarily select a route in one game state.

again,
"A game ball that has entered the first area reaches the first sorting means [for example, first ball path 2601 → third ball direction changing part 263 → first ball path 2601 → first ball direction changing part 261] has a third region [for example, the distribution front region 125] that passes before
In the third area, a game ball that has entered the second area reaches the second sorting means [for example, second ball path 2602→fourth ball direction changing section 264→second ball path 2602→ second ball direction changing portion 262],
A game ball that has entered the first area reaches the second sorting means from the third area [for example, second ball path 2602→fourth ball direction changing section 264→second ball path 2602→second 2 ball direction change part 262],
A game ball that has entered the second area reaches the first sorting means from the third area [for example, first ball path 2601→third ball direction changing section 263→first ball path 2601→second 1 ball direction change part 261]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the game ball that has passed through the first area may change direction in the third area so as to move toward the second sorting means (instead of the first sorting means). A game ball that has passed through the area may change direction in the third area so as to face the first sorting means (not the second sorting means).

While selecting one area, the rolling direction of the game ball may change accidentally, and the same flow of the game ball as entering the other area may be confirmed.

again,
"The first area and the second area are adjacent areas [for example, adjacent areas in the left-right direction],
A gaming ball fired at the first firing intensity may enter the second area,
A gaming ball fired at the second firing intensity may enter the first area,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

While aiming at one area, the rolling direction of the game ball may change accidentally, and the same flow of the game ball as when aiming at the other area may be confirmed.

again,
`` A fifth distribution means [e.g., rotating body unit 28] provided in front of the certain winning means [e.g., first special figure start port 230],
The fifth sorting means is a means through which the game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means [for example, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage 2681] pass through;
The fifth sorting means is a means through which the game balls sorted in the second direction by the second sorting means [for example, the game balls flowing down the second ball passage 2682] pass through,
Game balls distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means [for example, reaching 100% of the start entrance side guideway 288] are distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means The fifth sorting means guides the game ball to the certain winning means [for example, passes the starting port side guideway 288 ] easy to be
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, a guiding means [for example, a rotating body unit 28] provided in front of the certain winning means is provided, and the guiding means is a game ball distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means. [For example, a game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681] is a means for passing through, and the guiding means is a game ball distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means [for example, the second Game balls flowing down the ball passage 2682] pass through, and the game balls distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means , than the game ball distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means [for example, reaching the starting port side guideway 288 with a probability of 50%], the guidance means to the certain winning means It may be configured to be easily guided [for example, to pass through the starting port side guideway 288]. The guiding means, the game balls sorted in the second direction by the second sorting means than the game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means, It is easy to guide to the certain winning means.

Moreover, the probability that the guiding means guides the game balls distributed in the first direction by the first distributing means to the certain winning means is higher than the probability that the guiding means is determined by the second distributing means. The probability of guiding the game balls distributed in the second direction to the certain winning means is higher. That is, the probability of winning the certain winning means from the guiding means is higher than the game balls distributed in the first direction by the first distributing means. A game ball distributed in a direction is higher.

Ultimately, since it is only necessary to pay attention to the guiding means, it is possible to show the prize-winning route in an easy-to-understand way for the player even if a plurality of routes are provided.

again,
"The advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the first area and the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the second area do not change [for example, the game ball is the first special Both have the same probability of being directed to the starting port 230 at 25%],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

There are no nails in the distribution control design of the first distribution means, the distribution control design of the second distribution means, and the vicinity of the first distribution means and the vicinity of the second distribution means, respectively. Although the points are the same in terms of design, there may be slight differences due to individual differences. However, it is not to the extent that the player can experience it.

Even if the probability that the game ball entering the first area wins the certain winning means is the same as the probability that the gaming ball entering the second area wins the certain winning means good. The same here means almost the same considering that an extremely rare event occurs. That is, it is a meaning including substantially the same.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
The display means is means for displaying an explanatory display regarding at least one of the first area and the second area [for example, FIGS. 93(a), (b), (d) to (f)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The display means displays an explanation that the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the first area and the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the second area are the same. [For example, the explanation display shown in FIG. 93(b)] may be displayed.

In addition, although the display means is more likely to occur in the first case than in the second case, the second direction is a direction in which it is easier to win a prize than in the first direction. An explanation display [for example, the explanation display shown in FIG. 93(f)] may be displayed.

Further, the display means may display an explanation display regarding both the first area and the second area [for example, the explanation display shown in FIG. and the second region, only the first region [for example, the description display shown in FIG. 93 (d)] may be displayed, or only the second region may be displayed.

In addition, a third distribution means (for example, a third ball direction change 263]. Said third sorting means may sort game balls into a direction toward said first sorting means and a direction not toward said first sorting means. Further, a fourth distribution means (for example, a fourth ball direction change 264]. Said fourth sorting means may sort game balls into a direction toward said second sorting means and a direction away from said second sorting means. By providing the third distribution means and the fourth distribution means, it is possible to finely adjust the amount of game balls heading for the certain winning means.

Also, in the vicinity of the first special figure starting port 230, another winning area (for example, the second special figure starting port 232) is provided, the starting port side guideway 288, the first special figure starting port 230 and other winnings A new sorting device (for example, a sorting unit 291 shown in FIGS. 104(b) and 104(c) to be described later) may be provided between the regions. With this new sorting device, sorting may be further performed between the first special figure starting port 230 and other winning areas. In addition, a V winning area is provided instead of the first special figure starting port 230, and a new sorting device provided between the starting entrance side guideway 288 and the V winning region allows the V winning region and other regions ( For example, the distribution may be further performed between outlets). Also, instead of the first special figure start opening 230, a first big prize opening is provided, and a new sorting device provided between the start opening side guideway 288 and the first big prize opening makes the first big prize opening and another area (for example, the second big prize opening). Here, there is a chance of winning the V prize when passing through the first big winning hole, but there may be no chance of winning the V prize even if the player passes through the second big winning hole. Furthermore, a large winning opening is provided instead of the first special figure starting opening 230, and a new sorting device provided between the starting opening side guideway 288 and the large winning opening allows the large winning opening and other areas ( For example, the prizes may be further sorted among the general winning slots. The general prize-winning opening referred to here corresponds to a general prize-winning opening that increases the number of prize balls separately from the prize winning to the big prize-winning opening during the jackpot game.

Moreover, it is also possible to apply to feather accessories in so-called two types of models. That is, a role (for example, a pair of 1241, the area where the first movable member moves and the game ball can enter is called the first area 1241, and the area where the second movable member moves and the game ball can enter is called the second area 1241. 2 area 1242 . Then, instead of the first special figure starting port 230, a V winning area is provided. By doing so, in a game state in which a character having the first movable member and the second movable member is movable, if the first movable member is aimed to move, there is a high probability that it will be guided to the rotating body unit 28, but V The probability of winning the winning area is low, and if the movement of the second movable member is aimed, the probability of being guided to the rotating body unit 28 is low, but the probability of winning the V winning area is high. However, even if the game ball enters the first area 1241 and follows the first ball path 2601, or enters the second area 1242 and follows the second ball path 2602, The probability that the game ball is directed to the V winning area is the same.

The electric distribution unit 26 is not provided with a game nail, and the rotating body unit 28 is not provided with a game nail. In addition, no game nail is provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting opening side guideway 288 and the first special figure starting opening 230. Therefore, in the route of first ball path 2601→third ball direction changing portion 263→first ball direction changing portion 261→first ball passage 2681→rotator unit 28→first special figure start opening 230, the game nail is It means that it is not provided. In addition, the game nail also follows the route of second ball path 2602→fourth ball direction changing portion 264→second ball direction changing portion 262→second ball passage 2682→rotator unit 28→first special figure start opening 230. It means that it is not provided. As shown in FIG. 88, game pegs are provided in the distribution front region 125, but even if there is a game peg, the third ball direction changing portion 263 or the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 will eventually move. If guided, regardless of which route the game ball passes through, the probability that the game ball is directed to the first special figure start port 230 is the same. Also, even if the electric distribution unit 26 is struck through the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 85), there is no effect on the direction change of the game ball at each ball direction change portion. Furthermore, even if the rotating body unit 28 is struck through the transparent plate member 118, guidance of the game ball in the rotating body unit 28 is not affected. From these facts, the action of hitting by the player is meaningless, and it can be expected that the player who understands this will stop hitting.

Next, the general prize winning opening 227 provided at a position on the upstream side of the position where the game balls enter by the direction changing members 2631 and 2641 of the third ball path 2603 will be described in detail.

FIG. 100(a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the third sphere path 2603 cut in the vertical direction, but the cut surface is omitted from hatching. In FIG. 100(a), the right front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the left back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Also, FIG. 101 is a partially enlarged side view of the third ball path 2603 taken vertically, but hatching of the cross section is omitted. In FIG. 101, the right side of the paper surface is the front side, and the left side of the paper surface is the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the third ball path 2603 is not provided with a game nail. Figures 100 and 101 show the inlet 2603s of the third spherical path 2603 connected to the end of the central root 125C (see Figure 101). In the entrance 2603s, the front wall 2603f portion is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the rear wall portion 2603b portion is inclined downward toward the front side. be guided.

100 and 101 also show a front wall 2603f and a rear wall 2603b that form the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26. FIG. The general prize winning opening 227 is an opening provided in the rear wall 2603b. That is, the general prize winning opening 227 is opened toward the rear side (back side). Of the edges defining the general prize winning opening 227, an upper end portion 227a protrudes downward. It can also be said that the general prize winning opening 227 is opened obliquely upward.

FIG. 100(b) is a diagram showing the cross-sectional shape of the third ball path 2603 when the inlet 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is horizontally cross-sectioned.

In FIG. 100(b), the upper side of the drawing is the front side, and the lower side of the drawing is the rear side. As shown in FIG. 100, the portion of the rear wall 2603b between the entrance 2603s and the general winning opening 227 is formed with a ridge 2603t that extends vertically and protrudes forward. In FIG. 100(b), the game ball B is indicated by a solid line and a one-dot chain line. The game ball B indicated by a solid line is the game ball B in contact with the protrusion 2603t. On the other hand, a game ball B' indicated by a one-dot chain line is a game ball in a state of being leaned to the right rear side. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 100(b), dust Du is accumulated in the right rear corner. A game ball B' indicated by a one-dot chain line hits the protrusion 2603t and cannot completely approach the right rear corner of the third ball path 2603, avoiding contact with the dust Du, and the dust on the game ball. is prevented from adhering.

The protrusion 2603t is provided with an inclined portion SL1 inclined downward toward the front side on the side of the entrance 2603s, and the game ball is directed more forward by the inclined portion SL1. An inclined portion SL2 inclined downward toward the rear side is provided on the side of the ridge portion 2603t on the side of the general prize winning opening 227 . This inclined portion SL2 continues to the edge that defines the general prize winning opening 227. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, a protrusion 2603p is formed at a position facing the general prize winning opening 227 on the front wall 2603f. The protrusion 2603p is provided with a guide curved surface CS for guiding the game ball toward the general winning opening 227. As shown in FIG. The guide curved surface CS is composed of a curved surface facing the general prize winning opening 227 . A path toward the general winning opening 227 is formed in the third ball path 2603 by the inclined portion SL2 following the edge defining the general winning opening 227 and the guide curved surface CS provided on the projection 2603p. This route is a route from above the general prize winning port 227 toward the general prize winning port 227 obliquely downward. In FIG. 100(a), a game ball B that has flowed down to this side of this path and a solid-line arrow representing the movement of the game ball B along this path are shown. A game ball that has entered the general winning hole 227 advances toward the rear side (back side) and then falls downward as indicated by the dotted arrow. A game ball falling downward is detected by a ball detection sensor (not shown). When the ball detection sensor detects a game ball, it is assumed that a prize has been entered into the general prize-winning port 227, and the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls are placed in the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Discharge. It should be noted that the ball that enters the general winning hole 227 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the process until the game ball enters the general winning hole 227 provided in the middle of the third ball path 2603 and how it failed to enter. FIG. 102 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603, and is a diagram schematically showing the structure shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 for easy understanding. , and the right side of the page is the back side.

FIG. 102(a) shows how the game ball B enters the third ball path 2603 from the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603. FIG. In FIG. 102(a), the rear wall 2603b and the ridge portion 2603t shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 are shown integrally, but the inclination of the inclined portion SL1 causes the game ball B to flow down along the front wall 2603f. It's getting easier. If the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f, the direction of movement of the game ball B is easily directed backward (back side) by the guide curved surface CS provided on the projection 2603p. The projection 2603p changes the motion of a passing game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball.

In addition, the game ball B may flow down along the rear wall 2603b as well as along the front wall 2603f. In this case, like a game ball B'' indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. entry is blocked.

FIG. 102(b) shows how the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f and reaches the guide curved surface CS provided on the projection 2603p. The guide curved surface CS is provided at a position facing the general prize winning opening 227 . Further, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position spaced apart from the general prize winning opening 227 . Furthermore, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position closer to the player than the general prize winning opening 227 . When the game ball B has moderate momentum, it enters the general prize winning opening 227 from the guide curved surface CS as indicated by the arrow A. On the other hand, if the game ball B does not have enough momentum, as indicated by the arrow B, it moves in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS. The game ball B, which has traveled in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS, passes through the performance switch 269 shown in FIG.

FIG. 102(c) shows how the game ball B has landed on the lower end portion of the edge defining the general prize winning opening 227. FIG. The game ball B shown in FIG. 102(c) has reached the general winning opening 227, and then moves toward the rear side (back side) from the general winning opening 227 as indicated by the arrow shown in FIG. 102(c). to proceed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 102(d), the momentum of the game ball B is slightly insufficient, and before the game ball B rides on the lower end portion of the edge defining the general winning opening 227, it collides in front of it. It ends up flowing down the third ball path 2603 as indicated by the arrow.

In the above explanation, it has been explained that the momentum of the game ball B may or may not enter the general winning hole 227, but the momentum of the game ball B is related to the movement speed of the game ball. In addition, the moving direction of the game ball B and the state of the moving game ball (for example, spin state, etc.) also affect winning to the general winning hole 227 .

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a modification of the third ball path 2603, and is a cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603 taken vertically, with the left side of the paper facing forward and the right side of the paper facing rearward. Become. In the following description, redundant description will be omitted, and there will be occasions where the description will focus on the characteristic portions of the modified example. In addition, the same reference numerals as those used up to now will be assigned to the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements that have been explained so far. In addition, in FIG. 103, the general prize winning opening 227 is indicated by an arrow for easy understanding.

FIG. 103(a) is an example in which the projection 2603p is removed from the front wall 2603f. As described above, the projection 2603p changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with the passing game ball. Depending on the moving direction of B and the state of the moving game ball, it may enter the general winning opening 227 .

It should be noted that the third spherical path 2603 itself may be replaced with one having an inverted conical peripheral surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. When the game ball B flows down (flows in a spiral shape) while circling its peripheral surface, it becomes easier to enter the general winning hole 227 . In this case, when a game ball passing upstream of the position where the general winning hole 227 is provided contacts the inverted conical peripheral surface, the movement of the game ball is changed.

Further, a device having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (see FIG. 88), which will be described later in detail, may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general winning opening 227. In this case, the force to move in the circumferential direction is applied to the game ball passing upstream of the position where the general winning hole 227 is provided, and the motion of the game ball changes in the lateral direction.

FIG. 103(b) shows an example in which the edge defining the general winning opening 227 does not have the upper end portion 227a protruding downward. The general prize winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 103(a) was an opening provided diagonally with respect to the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 103(a)), but is shown in FIG. 103(b). The general prize winning opening 227 is an opening provided parallel to the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 103(b)). Even with such a general winning hole 227, there are cases where the game ball B enters the general winning hole 227 depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 103(b), since the projection 2603p is provided, the motion of the game ball is changed, and it is easy to enter the general winning hole 227.

FIG. 103(c) is an example in which the protrusion 2603p is removed from the example shown in FIG. 10(b), like the example shown in FIG. 103(a). Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the direction of movement of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, it may enter the general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 103(c). In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 103(c), a game ball B that flows upstream from the general winning opening 227 is more likely to flow down the third ball path 2603 than entering the general winning opening 227. It may be a route. On the other hand, the third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 100 to 102 may also be a ball path in which the game ball B is more likely to flow downstream of the third ball path 2603 than entering the general winning hole 227. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the guide curved surface CS of the projection 2603p is enlarged, etc., so that the game ball B flowing upstream from the general prize winning opening 227 moves to the downstream of the third ball path 2603. It is also possible to use a ball path that makes it easier to enter the general prize winning opening 227 than the flow of the ball.

Also, here, the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (see FIG. 88) may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general winning opening 227. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 100 itself is installed on the island facility, the inclination of the whole pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, and in this case, the pachinko machine 100 is installed in a posture in which the upper part of the pachinko machine 100 is inclined rearward. By doing so, it becomes easier to enter the general prize-winning port 227 . The tilt adjustment of the pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction when installed on the island facility can be applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 102 and others.

Although the general prize winning opening 227 is an opening through which game balls enter backward (backward), the technique described here can also be applied to an opening through which the game ball enters forward.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example in which a game ball entrance opening toward the rear side (back side) is provided in the middle of the ball path.

FIG. 104(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603, in which the left side of the paper surface is the front side and the right side of the paper surface is the rear side. The third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 104(a) is also not provided with a game nail, and is provided with two general winning holes 227. FIG. In other words, another general prize winning port 227 is provided with the same structure further downstream of the same structure as the structure in which the general prize winning port 227 shown in FIG. 102 is provided. Between the general winning opening 227 on the upstream side and the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side, a slant portion SL1 is also provided on the rear side so that the game ball B can easily flow down along the front wall 2603f.

Note that an out port may be provided in place of the general prize winning port 227 on the downstream side. Further, one or a plurality of general prize winning openings 227 may be provided further downstream than the downstream general prize winning opening 227 , and three or more winning openings may be provided in the third ball path 2603 .

FIG. 104(b) is a distribution unit 291 that distributes game balls to the first flow path 2301 provided with the first special figure start port 230 and the second flow path 2321 provided with the second special figure start port 232 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 1(c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA' of the distribution unit 291 shown in FIG. 1(b). In FIG. 104(b), the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. In addition, in FIG. 104(c), the left side of the paper surface is the front side, and the right side of the paper surface is the rear side. In addition, in FIG.104(c), in order to illustrate each entrance easily, it has shown with the arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 104(b) and 104(c), neither the first channel 2301 nor the second channel 2321 are provided with game nails. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104(b), the distribution unit 291 has a distribution section 2912 that distributes game balls entering from the unit entrance 2911 to the left and right channels. The allocating part 2912 changes the attitude of allocating the game balls according to their own weight. The distribution unit 291 has a transparent or translucent portion where the unit entrance 2911, the distribution section 291, and the outlets 243 and 244 are provided, and the player can visually recognize how the distribution section 291 distributes the game balls B. It is possible. Since the distributing unit 2912 changes its distributing posture depending on how the game ball hits and the movement of the game ball (for example, spin), it is impossible to shoot the game ball by predicting the posture of the distributing unit 2912 . The distribution unit 291 has the first flow path 2301 on the left side and the second flow path 2321 on the right side.

Note that the distributing portion 2912 may be rotated left and right by a motor. It should be a regular movement.

As shown in FIG. 104(c), the distribution unit 291 is provided on the front surface of the game board 201. As shown in FIG. In the second flow path 2321 of the sorting unit 291, there are a second special figure starting port 232 (see the solid line arrow) that opens upward and an out port 244 that opens toward the rear side (back side). is provided. The out port 244 is positioned near the front surface of the game board 201 , and the game ball entering the out port 244 goes to the back side of the game board 201 . In addition, the downstream side of the second flow path 2321 from the position where the second special figure start port 232 is provided may be made opaque and invisible to the player, but this is also transparent or translucent and the game is played. It may be made visible to a person.

The position of the second special figure starting port 232 may be a position on the bottom wall 2321b of the second flow path 2321 (for example, see the two-dot chain line arrow), and in the case of this position, the second special figure Like the out port 244, the starting port 232 opens toward the rear side (back side). In addition, the out port 244 is located above the second special figure starting port 232 . In addition, the position of the out port 244 and the position of the second special figure starting port 232 may be reversed, and in this case, the second special figure starting port 232 is positioned above the out port 244. .

Even if it is the second special figure starting port 232 indicated by the solid line arrow, even if it is the second special figure starting port 232 indicated by the two-dot chain line arrow, it is provided in the middle of the extending direction of the second flow path 2321 It is a thing. On the other hand, the out port 244 is provided in a direction intersecting (here, a direction substantially perpendicular to) the extending direction of the second flow path 2321, and more specifically, is provided in the front-rear direction. be. At the downstream end of the second flow path 2321, a ball detection sensor 2322 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the second special figure starting port 232 is provided.

Although the second channel 2321 has been described above with reference to FIG. 104(c), the same applies to the first channel 2301 as well.

Also, the configuration of the second special figure starting port 232 and the out port 244 described with reference to FIG. 104(c) may be applied to the special figure 1 starting chucker 23 shown in FIG. 87(c). That is, the first special figure starting port 230 shown in FIG. 87 (c) is configured as the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. An interval of one game ball or more provided between the figure starting port 230 may be configured as an out port 244 shown in FIG. 104(c). In this case, both left and right intervals of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 and the first special figure starting port 230 are lost. For example, blocked by a wall. In this configuration, game balls discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R shown in FIG. 87(c) reach the out port 240 shown in FIG. 87(a) with a probability of 100%. However, leaving one of the left and right intervals of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 and the first special figure starting port 230, From this interval It may be a mode that allows the entry and exit of game balls.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example in which a game ball is moved laterally in the middle of the ball path, and then the game ball enters a game ball entrance opening toward the rear side (back side). In FIG. 105, the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Further, in FIG. 105 as well, the entrance 2606W is indicated by an arrow for easy understanding.

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram showing an example of a ball path in which the third ball path 2603 described with reference to FIG. 102 is rotated by 90 degrees.

The ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105(a) is also not provided with a game nail. At the entrance 2606s of this ball path 2606, the right side wall 2606R is longer and downwardly inclined toward the inside of the passage than the left side wall 2606L. Therefore, the game ball B tends to come closer to the left wall 2606L.

In the middle of the right side wall 2606R, there is an entrance 2606W for game balls. This entrance 2606W may be a general winning opening, a big winning opening, a special figure start opening, or an out opening. The entry port 2606W is laterally open. An upper end portion 2606a of the edge defining the inlet 2606W protrudes downward. Also, the right side wall 2606R is provided with an inclined portion SL3 connected to the upper end portion 2606a. It can also be said that the entry port 2606W is opened obliquely upward to the left.

On the other hand, a projection 2606p is formed on the left side wall 2606L at a position facing the inlet 2606W. The protrusion 2606p is provided with a guide curved surface CS for guiding the game ball toward the inlet 2606W. The guide curved surface CS is configured by a curved surface facing the entry port 2606W. A path toward entrance 2606W is formed in ball path 2606 shown in FIG. there is This route is a route from above the entry port 2606W to obliquely downward toward the entry port 2606W.

If the game ball B flows down along the left side wall 2606L, the moving direction of the game ball B is easily turned rightward by the guide curved surface CS provided on the projection 2606p. The protrusion 2606p changes the movement of a passing game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball.

In addition, the game ball B may flow down along the right side wall 2606R as well as along the left side wall 2606L. In this case, it collides with the upper end portion 2606a and is prevented from entering the inlet 2606W. The game ball B that has not entered the entry port 2606W advances downstream of the ball path 2606. - 特許庁

At the back of the entrance 2606W (lower right in FIG. 105(a)), an entrance area 2606E having a space larger than one game ball is provided. A downstream path 2606K is formed in the entry area 2606E toward the rear side. The flow-down path 2606K opens to the game board 201 and serves as a path through which the game balls B flow down to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁A game ball that has entered the entry port 2606W enters the downstream path 2606K, passes through the downstream path 2606K, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is discharged to the game island side. The flow path 2606K is provided with a ball detection sensor for detecting game balls.

FIG. 105(b) is a diagram showing an example in which the projection 2606p shown in FIG. 105(a) is removed and instead a plurality of projections 2606T are provided.

A right side wall 2606R of the ball passage 2606 shown in FIG. 105(a) is provided with a projection 2606T protruding inside the ball passage, one on the upstream side of the entry port 2606W and one on the downstream side of the entry port 2606W. It is On the other hand, the left side wall 2606L of the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105(b) is provided with one projection 2606T at a position facing the entrance 2606W. In the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105(a), convex portions 2606T are alternately provided on the right side wall 2606R and the left side wall 2606L along the flowing direction of the game ball. The game ball B is directed diagonally downward to the left by the convex portion 2606T provided on the upstream side of the right side wall 2606R. If there is a projection 2606T provided on the left side wall 2606L where the game ball B is headed, this time the game ball B is directed obliquely downward to the right by the projection 2606T. If there is an entrance 2606W at the destination of the game ball B, the game ball B may enter the entrance 2606W. A plurality of convex portions 2606T shown in FIG. 105(b) change the movement of the game ball B when the game ball B passing through touches it.

In addition, in the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 105(b), the upper end portion 2606a protruding downward from the edge defining the inlet 2606W is also removed, and the inlet 2606W is an opening provided parallel to the ball path 2606 ( (see arrows in FIG. 105(b)). Even with such an entrance 2606W, a plurality of projections 2606T change the movement of the game ball, making it easier to enter the entrance 2606W.

FIG. 105(c) is an example in which a plurality of projections 2606T are removed from the example shown in FIG. 105(b). Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the direction of movement of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, it may also enter the entrance 2606W shown in FIG. 105(c). Further, the same structure as the second upstream sphere delay section 2653 (see FIG. 88) may be provided between the entrance 2606s of the sphere path 2606 and the entrance 2606W.

In the above description,
"A first ball path through which game balls pass [for example, third ball path 2603, first path 2301, second path 2321, ball path 2606],
A first winning opening provided in the middle of the first ball passage [for example, general winning opening 227, first special figure start opening 230, second special figure start opening 232, entrance opening 2606W],
with
The first prize winning opening is open to the wall surface [eg, the rear wall 2603b, the game board 201],
If the game ball that has entered the first ball passage wins the first winning opening [for example, FIG. 102 (c)], the first winning opening passes through the first winning opening It is configured so that it may reach downstream from the position where the mouth is provided [for example, FIG. 102 (d)].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By providing the first winning hole in the middle of the first ball path, the game area can be made compact, and the area other than the game area can be enlarged.

The first ball passage may be a passage partitioned by a wall surface, or may be a passage formed by a wall surface.

The wall surface may be the front surface of the game board.

The first prize winning opening may be formed in the ball passage unit [for example, the electric distribution unit 26, the distribution unit 291], or may be opened in the game board.

The first prize winning opening may be a variable winning opening or a general winning opening. Moreover, it may be a special figure start opening, or it may be a normal figure start opening.

The first prize winning port may be one in which prize balls are paid out when a prize is won, and when entered, may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine and then discharged to the game island side, or may be a gate. It may be one that remains in the game area even after entering like.

again,
``Equipped with a second ball path [for example, the right root 125R, the central root 125C, and the left root 125L in the distribution front region 125] formed by the game nail,
The first ball passage is a ball passage that is not provided with a game nail,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the winning rate of the first winning slot does not change due to external factors (for example, adjustment of the game peg by the game store), both experts and amateurs can play equally.

It should be noted that a second ball passage formed by a metal game nail may be provided, and the first ball passage may be a ball passage in which the metal game nail is not provided. That is, the first ball passage may be provided with a game nail made of resin. Incidentally, the resin-made game nail may be formed integrally with the game board or the ball passage unit.

Alternatively, the game nail may be made of resin.

again,
"Protrusion 2603p, having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653, and convex section 2606T" are provided,
A game ball in contact with the variation imparting means is more likely to enter the first winning port than a game ball not in contact with the variation imparting means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can enjoy how the direction of flow of the game ball is changed by the change imparting means.

The first ball passage is provided with a change imparting means that changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball passing upstream of the position where the first winning hole is provided. may be

again,
"The change imparting means is provided at a position spaced apart from the first winning opening [for example, a position upstream of the first winning opening].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Depending on the power and direction of the game ball that has left the variation imparting means, the player can enjoy entering the first winning hole or flowing down the first ball path.

again,
``The change imparting means is provided at a position facing the first winning hole [for example, a position on the wall facing the wall].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can enjoy predicting the destination of the game ball whose flowing direction is changed by the change imparting means.

again,
``The change imparting means is provided at a position closer to the player [for example, the position of the front wall 2603f] than the first winning hole [for example, the opening (227) provided in the rear wall 2603b]. be,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The area in the plane direction facing the player in the game area can be made compact.

again,
"The first ball passage is formed in a ball passage unit [eg, electric distribution unit 26, distribution unit 291],
At least a part of the ball passage unit is transparent or translucent so that the first winning hole is visible to the player.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can visually recognize through the ball passage unit how a game ball enters the first winning hole.

In addition, the game ball passing through the first ball passage may be configured to be visible.

The first prize winning opening may be formed in the ball passage unit, or may be opened in the game board.

The ball passage unit may be partially transparent or translucent, or entirely transparent or translucent.

again,
"The first prize winning opening is open in the front-rear direction,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first prize winning opening may be opened toward the front side (front side, player side) or may be opened toward the back side (rear side).

again,
"The second prize winning opening provided downstream of the first ball passage [for example, the general winning opening 226 provided between the electric sorting unit 26 and the out opening 240 shown in FIG. 88] prepared,
The first prize-winning port and the second prize-winning port are general prize-winning ports with the same number of prize balls [for example, 4],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It should be noted that the game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may be more likely to flow downstream of the first ball passage than entering the first winning hole [for example, FIG. 103 (c ), the third sphere path 2603].

A game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may enter the first winning port more easily than flowing down the first ball passage [for example, see FIGS. third sphere path 2603].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the downstream general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 104(a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball passage.

The variation providing means may be ball delaying means capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, having the same structure as the second upstream ball delaying section 2653].

A game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may flow downstream of the first ball passage more easily than entering the first winning hole [for example, see FIG. 103(c) third sphere path 2603].

A game ball flowing down the upstream of the first ball passage may enter the first winning port more easily than flowing down the first ball passage [for example, see FIGS. third sphere path 2603].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the downstream general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 104(a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball passage.

The variation providing means may be ball delaying means capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, having the same structure as the second upstream ball delaying section 2653].

Next, the first upstream sphere delay section 2651, first downstream sphere delay section 2652, second upstream sphere delay section 2653, and second downstream sphere delay section 2654 shown in FIG. 88 will be described. As described above, the first upstream sphere delay 2651 and the first downstream sphere delay 2652 are arranged in the first sphere path 2601, and the second upstream sphere delay 2653 and the second downstream sphere delay 2654 are arranged in the second sphere. It is arranged on the path 2602, and since all the delay sections have the same structure with the only difference being the arrangement position, the second upstream sphere delay section 2653 will be described here as an example.

FIG. 106(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 taken along a vertical plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. The cross section of the fourth spherical direction changing portion 264 is hatched.

The second upstream ball delay portion 2653 has a tubular ball passage portion 2653A. A game ball passes through the inside of this ball passage portion 2653A. Therefore, the ball passage portion 2653A forms part of the second ball passage 2602. As shown in FIG. The inner peripheral surface of the ball passage portion 2653A is provided with an R surface 2653b, an inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a cylindrical surface 2653d with the same inner diameter. The upstream end of the R surface 2653b constitutes the upstream end of the ball passage portion 2653A, and the inverted conical surface 2653c is connected to the downstream end of the R surface 2653b. The cylindrical surface 2653d is connected to the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c, and the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d constitutes the downstream end of the ball passage portion 2653A. In other words, the inner peripheral surface is narrower on the downstream side than on the upstream side. The width here is the length in one of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball (the direction from top to bottom in FIG. 106(a)), and the inner peripheral surface is annular. Therefore, any orthogonal direction has the same length. That is, the width referred to here is the inner diameter of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 106(a). In addition, when the length of the inner peripheral surface differs depending on the direction, the width is defined as the direction in which the length is the shortest. The width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W2 of the second spherical path 2602 where it connects to the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 . Also, the width W3 of the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. Furthermore, the width W4 of the downstream end of the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 (the width of the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d) is narrower than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. In this way, it is important that the width of each part has a magnitude relationship with the width of other parts. The width W2 of the portion connected to the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 is 13.0 mm, the width W3 of the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is 11.5 mm, and the width of the downstream end of the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 (cylindrical surface 2653d The width W4 of the downstream end of the nozzle may be 11.5 mm. The width of the cylindrical surface 2653d is 11.5 mm. The cylindrical surface 2653d is an adjustment allowance for making the height (passage length) of the ball passage portion 2653A greater than or equal to a certain value, and can be omitted if a certain value can be secured only by the reverse conical surface 2653c. .

FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 as seen obliquely from above. In FIG. 107, the left front side of the paper surface is the front side (player's side).

The second upstream ball delay section 2653 is separate from the electric distribution unit 26 . That is, it is removably attached to the second ball path 2602 . In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, locking portions 2653L and 2653R extending on both lateral sides of the ball passage portion 2653A are locked to the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit . The rear side of the second ball path 2602 is defined by a rear wall 2603b. Since the second upstream ball delay part 2653 is detachable, the parts to be replaced when the second upstream ball delay part 2653 becomes dirty or damaged can be reduced. In addition, the second upstream ball delay unit 2653 can be reused in other pachinko machines 100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106( a ), a ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 that forms part of the second ball path 2602 is positioned downstream of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 . A slight vertical gap 2653s is provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 as well. The width W5 of the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is wider than the width W4 of the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, but is wider than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. is narrow. Similarly to the inverted conical surface 2653c, the spherical behavior stabilizing portion 266 is also a portion formed with an inverted conical inner circumferential surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. , narrower than the width of any portion of the ball passage portion 2653A in the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. Further, it can be said that the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is the narrowest width in the portion of the second ball path 2602 upstream of the downstream end. The width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the second ball path 2602 is most constricted at the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizer 266 . The width W5 of the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 12.0 mm. Also, the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 11.3 mm, which is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball (11 m). The widths (W1 to W6) of each portion described above may have other values as long as the ratio relationship is the same.

The inclination angle of the inner circumferential surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 that decreases downstream is greater than the inclination angle of the reverse conical surface 2653c of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 that decreases downstream. is the angle. The tilt angle here means the tilt angle with respect to the vertical axis.

After passing through the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizer 266, the ball path branches to the left and right, the left path becomes the second ball path 2602, and the right path connects to the third ball path 2603 (see FIG. 88). A path 2607 is reached. Both the path on the left side (second ball path 2602) and the path on the right side (connection path 2607) have a width wider than the diameter of the game ball (11 m), and the game ball can easily pass through either path. It is possible. Therefore, ball clogging is less likely to occur. Directly below the downstream end of ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is arranged across the branching portion of the left path (second ball path 2602) and the right path (connection path 2607). . In addition, these passages (2602, 2606) are provided with a deceleration rib 26r1 at the central portion in the width direction.

On the other hand, on the upstream side of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 in the second ball path 2602, a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 projecting forward is provided. The portion of the second ball path 2602 where the spherical path changing rib 26r3 is provided forms a curved path facing leftward. 26r3 is provided. The shape of the spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 is also curved.

Next, the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the second ball path 2602 will be described. FIG. 106(b) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the second upstream ball delay section 2653. As shown in FIG. FIG. 106(c) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. As shown in FIG. FIG. 106(d) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball passing through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266. As shown in FIG.

A game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 contacts the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. The trajectory of the game ball coming into contact with the curved ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 tends to change outward, that is, to the left, and the game ball tends to spin. The game ball whose trajectory changes to the left and is spun contacts the left portion of the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delaying portion 2653, and then starts circular movement along the inner peripheral surface. That is, the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 spirally moves toward the downstream side (see FIG. 106(b)). The game ball travels in a spiral rather than falling straight down, resulting in a longer moving distance and a slower moving speed. The game ball stays in the second upstream ball delay part 2653 while it is moving in a spiral shape, albeit for a short time.

In the gap 2653s provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying portion 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the inner peripheral surface along which the game ball that has moved in a spiral moves is interrupted. It is easy to end the spiral movement of the game ball. Also, since the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is slightly wider than the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying portion 2653, the continuity of the spiral is interrupted here as well, and the spiral movement tends to end. The game ball, which has completed its spiral movement, advances obliquely downward while colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, which has an inverted conical shape whose diameter is gradually reduced. The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 eliminates the moment that the game ball that has moved in the circumferential direction is going to move outward, and tries to make the game ball go straight down. At the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the behavior of the game ball is restrained and stabilized with an image of the game ball getting stuck. For example, the behavior of the game ball that has moved rattlingly while colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is settled (see FIG. 106(c)).

Eventually, the game ball passes through the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 and falls onto the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 . That is, the game ball B falls directly downward from the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 and contacts the direction changing member 2641 (see FIG. 106(d)). When the game ball contacts the left inclined surface 264L of the direction changing member 2641, it flows down the left path (second ball path 2602). On the other hand, when the game ball contacts the right inclined surface 264R of the direction change member 2641, it flows down the right path (connection path 2607).

The trajectory of the game ball from the second upstream ball delay section 2653 to the fourth ball direction change section 264 on the second ball path 2602 has been described above. The same applies to the trajectory of the game ball over the part (261-263).

It should be noted that both the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 and the direction changing member 2641 have the same function in that they change the moving direction of the game ball, but the direction changing member 2641 is more To greatly change the moving direction of a game ball. Also, the spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 is fixed and not a movable member, but the direction changing member 2641 is a movable member. That is, the state of the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 does not change, but the state of the direction changing member 2641 changes, and the moving direction of the game ball changes according to the state change.

Next, a modification of the spherical delay section will be described. Again, the second upstream ball delay section 2653 will be described as an example, and components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a modification of the ball delay section. This partial cross-sectional view is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of the downstream side of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 when the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 is sectioned along a vertical plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. The cross section of the delay portion 2653 is hatched.

In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 106, a cylindrical surface 2653d having the same inner diameter as the downstream portion of an inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side is provided on the downstream side. In the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108( a ), the cylindrical surface 2653 d is omitted and the inverted conical surface 2653 c extends to the downstream end of the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 . That is, there is no surface perpendicular to the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 .

In addition, the inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side is flat, but in the second upstream spherical delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. A curved outer curved surface 2653 e is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 . Also on this outer curved surface 2653e, the game ball circulates along the outwardly convex curved surface. In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108(c), an inner curved surface 2653f, which is an inwardly convex curved surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side, is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. ing. Also on this inner curved surface 2653f, the game ball circulates along the inwardly convex curved surface.

In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 108(d), a screw groove 2653g is formed on an inverted conical surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. The thread groove 2653g is a groove connected in a spiral shape, and the game ball can easily move around along the thread groove 2653g.

FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the ball behavior stabilizer 266. As shown in FIG. This cross-sectional view is a view showing the cross-sectional shape when the downstream end (the narrowest part) of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is taken in the horizontal direction. It is In FIG. 109, the lower side is the front side (player's side). In addition, here too, the same reference numerals as those used so far are attached to the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements explained so far.

First, FIG. 109(a) shows the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. The ball behavior stabilizer 266 shown in FIG. 106 is entirely covered with walls. A front wall 2603f is shown on the front side of the ball behavior stabilizer 266 . Incidentally, both the wall constituting the ball behavior stabilization portion 266 and the front wall 2603f are transparent, and the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the ball behavior stabilization portion 266. FIG.

The ball behavior stabilizer 266 shown in FIG. 109(b) has an open front side and is composed of left and right side walls 266L and 266R and a rear wall 266B. As for the inner dimension of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266, the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction, and the length in the left-right direction corresponds to the width, which is 11.3 mm, for example. The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 109(b) stabilizes the behavior of the game ball only in one horizontal direction.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109(c) has a front side blocked by another plate member 266F′, and the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. , 266R and a front wall 266F integrally formed with the rear wall 266B. Both the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109(c) and the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. Stabilize the behavior of the game ball by two directions.

The ball behavior stabilizer 266 shown in FIG. 109(e) has an open front side and an arc-shaped rear wall 266B' connecting left and right side walls 266L and 266R. The arc of the arcuate rear wall 266B' becomes a circular hole in a circle with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11.3 mm). The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109(e) restrains the rear half of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. As described in the explanation of FIG. 103(c), when the pachinko machine 100 itself is installed on the island facility, the inclination of the whole pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted. If the pachinko machine 100 is installed with the upper part tilted rearward, the rear half of the game ball B is caught in the arc-shaped rear wall 266B' shown in FIG. Stabilize.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 109(f) blocks the front side of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. It has the same configuration as the stable section 266 .

In the above description,
"Ball delaying means capable of slowing down the movement speed of the game ball [for example, the first upstream ball delaying section 2651, the first downstream ball delaying section 2652, the second upstream ball delaying section 2653, the second downstream ball delaying section 2654 ]When,
a ball behavior stabilizing means [for example, a ball behavior stabilizing unit 266] capable of stabilizing the behavior of a moving game ball;
Ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the first ball direction changing part 261 to the fourth ball direction changing part 264];
with
The ball behavior stabilizing means stabilizes the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the ball delaying means,
The ball direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

The moving speed of the game ball is changed to prevent the game ball from being stopped and shot at the timing of directing the game ball to the ball direction changing means, while preventing the game ball from heading toward the ball direction changing means. By stabilizing the behavior of the ball direction changing means, it is possible to improve the accuracy of changing the direction of the game ball.

Incidentally, the ball direction changing means may be a ball sorting means for sorting the moving direction of the game ball.

again,
"The ball delay means is provided in the ball passage forming part [for example, the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit 26],
The ball delay means is separate from the ball passage forming part,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By making it separate from the ball passage forming portion, the number of parts to be replaced can be reduced even if the ball delay means is damaged or soiled. Also, the ball passage forming portion can be reused when it is desired to attach the ball delay means with different performance to another game table.

The ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided in the ball passage forming portion, and the ball behavior stabilizing means may be separate from the ball passage forming portion.

again,
``The ball delay means has a part through which the game ball passes, the width of which is narrower on the downstream side [eg, 11.5 mm] than on the upstream side [eg, 12.5 mm],
The width is the length in one direction out of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to delay the movement speed of the game ball that has made contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means by making it easier for the game ball to come into contact with the wall surface.

again,
``The ball delay means has an inverted conical surface [for example, an inverted conical surface 2653c] whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side at a portion through which the game ball passes.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A game ball that touches the wall surface constituting the ball delay means travels downstream while circling along the wall surface. That is, it goes downstream while moving in a spiral. By doing so, the moving speed of the game ball can be slowed down. If the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means is delayed, the time for the game ball to go downstream while circling along the wall surface is shortened, and the rate at which the moving speed of the game ball is lowered is reduced. do. Furthermore, when the game ball does not contact the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, the moving speed of the game ball does not decrease. As described above, the degree of decrease in the moving speed of the game ball is not fixed, and the moving speed of the game ball becomes random. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the stop hitting of the game ball and the shooting of the game ball with the timing of the ball direction changing means.

A part of the wall surface constituting the ball delay means (the inner wall of the portion of the ball delay means through which the game ball passes) may extend vertically downward.

The ball delay means may have a portion through which the game ball passes, which is curved inwardly from the upstream side to the downstream side, or convexed outwardly from the upstream side to the downstream side. It may be composed of a curved surface of

A thread groove may be formed in a wall surface constituting the ball delay means.

again,
"The width of the narrowest portion [eg, the downstream end] of the ball behavior stabilizing means is narrower than the width of the narrowest portion [eg, the downstream end] of the ball delaying means [eg, 11.5 mm]. [for example, 11.3 mm],
The width is the length in one direction out of the directions orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The outward force applied to the game ball by the ball delay means (the force due to the centrifugal force generated by going downstream while circling along the wall surface constituting the ball delay means) constitutes the ball behavior stabilizing means. It can be suppressed by hitting the game ball against the wall surface. That is, the outward force changes to a downward force when the game ball collides with the wall surface constituting the ball behavior stabilizing means. Thereby, the behavior of the game ball can be stabilized.

The length (width) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the left-right direction may be narrower than the length (depth) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may have a rectangular cross-sectional shape.

The length (width) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the left-right direction may be the same as the length (depth) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may have a square cross-sectional shape.

The cross-sectional shape of the ball behavior stabilizing means may be U-shaped, U-shaped, or circular.

again,
"The ball direction changing means is provided directly below the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means falls vertically and contacts the ball direction changing means, the accuracy of the change in the moving direction of the game ball given by the ball direction changing means can be enhanced.

again,
`` A spherical orbit changing means [for example, a spherical orbit changing rib 26r3] is provided on the upstream side of the spherical delay means,
The ball trajectory changing means causes the game ball moving toward the ball delaying means to come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means [for example, the wall surface on the left side of the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delaying part 2653]. It gives a change to the trajectory of the game ball so that it becomes easier to
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The game ball easily comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, and the ball delay means makes it easy to slow down the moving speed of the game ball.

The ball direction changing means has a greater influence on the game ball than the ball trajectory changing means. That is, the ball direction changing means largely changes the direction of the moving game ball, whereas the ball trajectory changing means changes the direction of the moving game ball only slightly.

again,
"A gap [for example, gap 2653s] is provided between the downstream end of the ball delay means and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position spaced apart from the ball delaying means. Alternatively, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position in contact with the ball delaying means.

again,
In the path through which the game ball whose movement direction is changed by the ball direction changing means [for example, the left path (second ball path 2602) and right path (connection path 2607) shown in FIG. 106] A game machine comprising a deceleration rib [for example, a deceleration rib 26r1] that protrudes and is capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball. 』
also explained.

Next, the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 will be described.

In FIG. 110, various members overlapping the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 are removed from the game board 200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the

As shown in FIG. 110, a first stereoscopic film effect 271 and a second stereoscopic film effect 272 are arranged in the upper part. Also, a third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is arranged on the right side, and a fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 is arranged on the left side. The first stereoscopic film effect 271 is provided so as to overlap the second stereoscopic film effect 272 .

Also, in FIG. 110, a decorative design display device 208 is shown. The decorative pattern display device 208 can perform image display effects by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition. A part of the right end of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered with a part of the left side of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 arranged on the right side.

Further, FIG. 110 also shows a substantially circular LED lighting effect 278 . As described above, the LED lighting effects 278 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 2781 on the outer circumference, and the three-dimensional film effects 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the sides by the LED lighting effects 278 . Note that each of the stereoscopic film effects 271 to 274 may be irradiated with light from the front by an LED light emission effect 278 . Also, a member may be provided to cover the LED lighting effect body 278 from the front, and at least a part of the member may be covered with a part of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 .

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a state in which the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 and the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 alone. FIG. 112(a) is a perspective view of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 when viewed slightly from the right side, and FIG. 112(b) is a schematic perspective view of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 when viewed from above. It is a diagram.

The first three-dimensional film effect body 271 is formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, and has a flat plate portion 2711 and a three-dimensional portion 2712 . Of the flat plate portion 2711 and the three-dimensional portion 2712, at least the three-dimensional portion 2712 is transparent. Transparency may be transparent or translucent (same in this specification). Also, the three-dimensional portion 2712 may be wholly transparent, or only partially transparent.

FIG. 112(c) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a transmissive portion and an impermeable portion in the three-dimensional portion 2712. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 112(c), the portion bordering the seven-segment number is the impermeable site npe, and the site surrounded by the impermeable site npe is the permeable site per. Note that the inside of the impermeable portion npe may be the permeable portion per.

Matters regarding the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 described above are the same for the other stereoscopic film effect bodies 272-274. Also, the three-dimensional film effect may be formed using a material suitable for weight and strength, and is not limited to a resin film having a thickness of about 0.01 mm. It may be formed using a sheet of 1 mm to less than 0.8 mm, a plate of 0.8 mm or more, or the like.

FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 as seen slightly from the right side.

The stereoscopic portion 2722 of the second stereoscopic film effect 272 is provided with a mounting portion 2723 on which the stereoscopic portion 2712 of the first stereoscopic film effect 271 is put. The front surface 2724 of the mounting portion 2723 shown in FIG. 113 is entirely transparent and flat, but may be wholly or partly shaped like a lens. A double-sided tape is attached to the side surface 2725 of the mounting portion 2723, and the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 by the double-sided tape. By using a transparent double-sided tape, it is possible to irradiate light from the side.

FIG. 114 is a perspective view showing how the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 .

In FIG. 114, the first stereoscopic film effect 271 to the fourth stereoscopic film effect 274 are shown. are shown differently. In a portion of the second stereoscopic film effect 272 where the first stereoscopic film effect 271 does not overlap, the second stereoscopic film effect 272 is visible in front view. Also, as shown in FIG. 114, the portion surrounded by the dashed line in the first stereoscopic film effect 271 is the portion that does not overlap the second stereoscopic film effect 272, and the second stereoscopic film The effect object 272 does not exist.

Also, as shown in FIG. 114, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 are arranged such that the lower left edge 2726 of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 and the upper edge 2741 of the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 are placed in contact with each other. That is, the second stereoscopic film effect 272 and the fourth stereoscopic film effect 274 are arranged adjacent to each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, a screw hole 271N and a positioning hole 271H are provided on the left and right sides of the flat plate portion 2711 of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, respectively. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111, the game board back base 200b is provided with sets of screw receiving cylinders 200bP and positioning projections 200bT, one on each side. The left positioning projection 200bT is inserted into the left positioning hole 271H for alignment, and the right positioning projection 200bT is inserted into the right positioning hole 271H for alignment. When the alignment is completed, the screw can be inserted into the left screw hole 271N and the left screw receiving cylinder 200bP, and the screws are screwed. Further, screws can be inserted through the right screw hole 271N and the right screw receiving cylinder 200bP, and the right screw is also screwed. Thus, the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 is screwed to the game board back base 200b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the flat plate portion 2721 of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 is also provided with screw holes 272N and positioning holes 272H on the left and right sides, respectively.

Each of the stereoscopic film effects 271-274 is placed over the lens. Part of the top lens 2752, part of the right lens 2753, and part of the left lens 2754 are shown in FIG. Any one of these lenses 2752-2754 refracts light from the back side to diffuse or focus it to the front side. Each of these lenses 2752-2754 is provided with a light diffusing portion. However, the lens may be a simple transparent plate.

The upper lens 2752 is provided with screw receiving holes and positioning projections on the left side and the right side, respectively. As shown in FIG. 114, the left positioning projection is inserted into the left positioning hole 272H of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 for alignment, and the right positioning projection is positioned on the right side of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272. It is inserted into the hole 272H and aligned. When the alignment is completed, screws can be inserted into the left screw hole 272N of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 and the left screw receiving hole provided in the upper lens 2752, and the screws are screwed. Also, screws can be inserted through the right screw hole 272N of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 and the right screw receiving hole provided in the upper lens 2752, and the right side is also screwed. Thus, the second stereoscopic film effect 272 is screwed to the upper lens 2752 . FIG. 114 shows a screw 271S for screwing the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 to the game board back base 200b and a screw 272S for screwing the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 to the upper lens 2752. It is A positioning projection 200bT provided on the game board back base 200b and a positioning projection 2752T provided on the upper lens 2752 are also illustrated. As shown in FIG. 114, the positioning means (positioning protrusion 200bT) and fixing means (screw 271S) of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 and the positioning means (positioning protrusion 2752T) and fixing means (positioning protrusion 2752T) of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272 The position in the front-rear direction is different from that of the screw 272S). That is, the positioning means (positioning protrusion 200bT) and fixing means (screw 271S) of the first stereoscopic film effect body 271 are the positioning means (positioning protrusion 2752T) and fixing means (screw 272S) of the second stereoscopic film effect body 272. It is located in front of the By doing so, the effect means are arranged with depth.

Next, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 will be taken as an example to describe the mounting structure of the stereoscopic film effect body. It is a matter that can be applied.

115 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273. FIG. In FIG. 115, the left front side is the front side, and the right back side is the rear side.

FIG. 115 shows the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, the right lens 2753, the right lens mounting base 2763, and the right LED board 2773 from the front side.

A flat plate portion 2731 of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is provided with three screw holes 273N and two positioning holes 273H.

The right lens 2753 is provided with six screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6, two positioning projections 275T, and three screw holes 275N.

The right lens mounting base 2763 is also transparent, and is provided with four screw receiving cylinders 276P1 to 276P4 and four screw holes 276N.

A plurality of LEDs 277L are arranged in a matrix on the right LED board 2773, and four notches 277C and four screw holes 277N are provided.

The two positioning projections 275T of the right lens 2753 are inserted into the two positioning holes 273H of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, respectively, and aligned. When the alignment is completed, each of the three screw holes 273N of the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 and the three screw receiving holes 275H1, 275H5, and 275H6 out of the six screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6 provided in the right lens 2753 are closed. Each can be inserted, and the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is screwed to the right lens 2753 . The third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is screwed in a state in which the upper left end portion protrudes leftward from the right lens 2753 . FIG. 115 shows three machine screws 273S used for screwing. Also, in the right lens 2753 shown in FIG. 115, the area covered by the screwed third stereoscopic film effect 273 is indicated by hatching downward to the right. Furthermore, in FIG. 115, a region connecting the positions of these three small screws 273S is indicated by a dotted line. The position of the center of gravity of the third stereoscopic film effect object 273 is located outside the area indicated by the dotted line.

The right lens mounting base 2763 is to which the right lens 2753 and a part of the upper lens 2752 are mounted. The holes 275N are aligned and screwed. Also shown in FIG. 115 are three screws 275S1 to 275S3 used to screw the right lens 2753. FIG. Of these three screws 275S1 to 275S3, only the upper one screw 275S1 is covered with the screwed third stereoscopic film effect 273, as indicated by hatching downward to the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, the lower two screws 275S2 and S275S3 are visible, but the upper one screw 275S1 is invisible. Note that the screw 275S1 is shown in FIG. 111 in which the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 is removed. In addition, the bottom three screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4 provided at the right end of the right lens 2753 are not used at all, and are screwed as indicated by hatching downward to the right. It is covered by the effect 273 and is invisible as shown in FIG. Furthermore, among the four screw receiving cylinders 276P1 to 276P4, the uppermost screw receiving cylinder 276P1 positioned closest to the upper lens 2752 is aligned with the screw hole of the upper lens 2752 (not shown). screwing is performed. The screw used for screwing is also covered by the screwed third stereoscopic film effect body 273 and is invisible as shown in FIG. 110, but in FIG. , whose screw is shown as screw 275S4.

The right lens mounting base 2763 and the right LED board 2773 are screwed to a frame plate (not shown here). That is, the right lens mounting base 2763 allows four screws 276S to pass through four screw holes 276N. These four screws 276S pass through notches 277C of the right LED board 2773 and are fixed to a frame plate (not shown). The right LED board 2773 is screwed to a frame plate (not shown) by inserting four screws 277S into the four screw holes 277N.

The right LED substrate 2773 is covered with a light diffusion portion provided on the right lens 2753 . On the other hand, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 covers the light diffusion part, and through the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, it is possible to visually recognize the light emission effect by lighting and blinking of the LED 277L mounted on the right LED board 2773. .

In addition, although each is fixed with screws here, they may be fixed with a transparent double-sided tape.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the LED board attached to the frame plate. 116, the substantially circular LED lighting effects 278 shown in FIG. 110 are removed.

FIG. 116 shows top LED board 2772 , right LED board 2773 , and left LED board 2774 .

FIG. 117 shows each lens mounting base mounted on each LED board 2772-2774. 117, the substantially circular LED lighting effects 278 shown in FIG. 110 are removed.

FIG. 117 shows top lens mounting base 2762, right lens mounting base 2763, and left lens mounting base 2764. FIG. The upper lens mounting base 2762 has substantially the same shape as the upper LED board 2772 shown in FIG. 116 and overlaps the entire upper LED board 2772 . The right lens mounting base 2763 has substantially the same shape as the right LED board 2773 shown in FIG. 116 and overlaps the entire area of the right LED board 2773 . The left lens mounting base 2764 is longer downward than the left LED board 2774 shown in FIG. 116 and overlaps the entire area of the left LED board 2774 .

FIG. 118 shows each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762-2764. 118, the substantially circular LED lighting effects 278 shown in FIG. 110 are removed.

Top lens 2752, right lens 2753, and left lens 2754 are shown in FIG.

The left lens 2754 covers the left end portion of the upper lens mounting base 2762 as well as the left lens mounting base 2764 from the front side. The upper lens 2752 also covers the upper left end portion of the right lens mounting base 2763 in addition to the upper lens mounting base 2762 from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 116-118, the LED boards 2772-2774 have corresponding lens mounting bases 2762-2764, and the lens mounting bases 2762-2764 also have corresponding lenses 2752-2754. The term “corresponding” here refers to those that are arranged directly above and have the largest number of overlapped regions. However, part of the LED substrate may be covered with another lens. Further, of the three-dimensional portion 2732 of the third three-dimensional film effect body 273 shown in FIG. 115, the upper left end portion is a lens (upper lens 2752) different from the lens (right lens 2753) arranged under the other portions. illuminated by light passing through

The light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the upper LED substrate 2772 passes through the upper lens mounting base 2762, passes through the upper lens 2752 and part of the left lens 2754, and passes through the first stereoscopic film rendering body 271 and the second stereoscopic film. The effect body 272 is irradiated with light from the rear side by LEDs mounted on the upper LED board 2772 . The light emitted by the LED mounted on the right LED board 2773 passes through the right lens mounting base 2763, passes through the right lens 2753 and part of the upper lens 2752, and passes through the third stereoscopic film effect body 273 to the right LED board. 2773 is illuminated from behind by an LED mounted on it. The light emitted by the LED mounted on the left LED board 2774 passes through the left lens mounting base 2764, passes through the left lens 2754, and part of the third stereoscopic film effect 273 and the second stereoscopic film effect 272 Light is emitted from the rear side by the LEDs mounted on the left LED board 2774 .

In the above description,
"A decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a first stereoscopic film effect body 271, a second stereoscopic film effect body 272, a third stereoscopic film effect body 273, a fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274],
A member [eg, right lens 2753] provided with a plurality of screw holes [eg, screw holes 275N, 275H1 to 275H6];
with
The decorative body covers screw holes through which screws are not inserted [for example, screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4] among the plurality of screw holes.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

When traces of perforations leading to screw holes into which screws are not inserted are found in the decoration, the game clerk can grasp that there is a possibility that the game table is illegally modified. Further, when the member is reused for another game table, it can be screwed even if a screw hole through which no screw is inserted is used, and the degree of freedom of the fixing position of the member can be increased.

The decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film.

A part of the member may not be covered with the decoration.

The decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the center of gravity of the decorative body is positioned outside an area connecting the positions of the plurality of screws for fixing the decorative body. may

The decorative body may be fixed with a double-sided tape. For example, the decorative body may be fixed to the member with double-sided tape.

The decorative body may be sandwiched and fixed between two or more other parts.

The decorative body may be fixed by two or more fixing methods (for example, screws, double-sided tape, holding by other parts).

again,
``A screw [for example, screw 275S1, 275S4 shown in FIG.
The screw is covered with the decorative body [for example, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, the said member may be sufficient as the said thing.

The screw may secure the member [eg, right lens 2753] to some structure [eg, right lens mounting base 2763].

again,
``The member [for example, the right lens 2753] is screw-fixed using a part of the plurality of screw holes [for example, the screw hole 275N].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

The member [eg, right lens 2753] may be screwed to the object [eg, right lens mounting base 2763].

again,
``The screw is for fixing an object [e.g., upper lens 2752] different from the member [e.g., right lens 2753] [e.g., 275S4 shown in FIG. 111].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

The object different from the member may be of the same kind as the member, or may be of a different kind.

again,
``Equipped with a first effect means [for example, the right LED board 2773] capable of executing the first light emission effect,
The decorative body has at least a portion with transparency,
The member [for example, the right lens 2753] has, at least in part, a light diffusing portion that diffuses the transmitted light,
The first effect means is covered with the light diffusion part,
The decorative body [for example, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273] covers the light diffusion part,
The first light emission effect [for example, lighting and blinking of the LED 277L mounted on the right LED board 2773] is visible through the decoration,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the decorative body may cover the light diffusing part so that the first light emitting effect can be visually recognized through the decorative body.

The first light emission effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decoration.

The decorative body may be wholly permeable, or may be partially permeable.

The member may be one that diffuses the light that is transmitted entirely, or one that diffuses the light that is partially transmitted.

The first rendering means may be, for example, an LED board or a liquid crystal display.

The first light emission effect may be a effect by lighting or blinking of an LED, or may be an image display effect by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

The member may be, for example, a lens member.

again,
``Equipped with a second effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of executing a second light emission effect,
A part of the second effect means [for example, a right end part] is covered with a part [for example, a left part] of the decoration body [for example, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decoration.

The second effect means may be a liquid crystal display, and the second light emission effect may be an image display effect by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

again,
``Equipped with a third effect means capable of executing a third light emission effect [for example, the LED light emission effect body 278],
The decorative body is irradiated with light from the front or side by the third light emitting effect,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The third light emission effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decoration.

At least part of the second member covering the third display means may be covered with part of the decoration. That is, the second member covering the third display means may be entirely covered with a part of the decoration, or only a part of the second member covering the third display means may be covered with the decoration. It may be covered with a part of the decoration.

again,
"The decorative body [for example, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273] has a flat part [for example, the flat part 2731] and a three-dimensional part [for example, the three-dimensional part 2732],
The flat plate portion uses a part of the plurality of screw holes [for example, the screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6] [for example, the screw receiving holes 275H1, 275H5, 275H6] to secure the member [for example, the right lens 2753].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The flat plate portion covers the screw holes [for example, the screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4] through which no screws are inserted among the plurality of screw holes [for example, the screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the above description,
"A first decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a first three-dimensional film effect body 271],
A second decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a second three-dimensional film effect body 272];
with
At least part of the second decoration is covered with at least part of the first decoration,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By overlapping the first decorative body and the second decorative body, the decoration of the game table can be made to have a more three-dimensional appearance.

The first decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film. The second decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film.

The first decoration is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the position of the center of gravity of the first decoration corresponds to the position of the plurality of screws for fixing the first decoration. It may be located outside the bound area. The second ornament is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the position of the center of gravity of the second ornament coincides with the positions of the screws for fixing the second ornament. It may be located outside the bound area.

The second decorative body may be entirely covered with the first decorative body, or may be entirely covered with only a part of the first decorative body. Alternatively, only a part may be covered with the whole of the first decoration, or only a part may be covered only with a part of the first decoration. good too.

The first decoration may be fixed to a first member, and the first member may have a portion that does not overlap with the first decoration. The second decoration may be fixed to a second member, and the second member may have a portion that does not overlap with the second decoration.

The position where the first decoration is fixed to the first member may be on the front side (player side) of the position where the second decoration is fixed to the second member.

A part of the shape of the first decoration may be similar to a shape of the part of the second decoration.

The first decorative body may be fixed to the second decorative body with double-sided tape.

again,
"The second ornament has a portion that does not overlap the first ornament in the front-rear direction [for example, FIG. 114],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first decoration and the second decoration are formed by a portion where the first decoration and the second decoration overlap and a portion where only the inner decoration (the second decoration) can be seen. The combination of , can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect when viewed from an oblique direction than when viewed from the front.

again,
``The first decoration has a part that does not overlap the second decoration in the front-rear direction [for example, the part surrounded by the dashed-dotted line in FIG. 114].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first decoration and the second decoration are formed by a portion where the first decoration and the second decoration overlap and a portion where only the front decoration (the first decoration) is visible. It is possible to make the combination more three-dimensional when viewed obliquely than when viewed from the front.

again,
``Equipped with a third effect means capable of executing a third light emission effect [for example, the LED light emission effect body 278],
The first decorative body is irradiated with light from the front side or the side by the third light emitting effect,
The second decorative body is irradiated with light from the front or side by the third light emitting effect,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The shadow of the combination of the first decoration and the second decoration can provide decoration with a sense of depth and three-dimensionality.

again,
"At least a part of the first decoration is transparent [for example, FIG. 112],
At least part of the second decoration [for example, the mounting portion 2723] is covered with a transparent part (hereinafter referred to as "first part") of the first decoration. There is [e.g., FIG. 113],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be made more three-dimensional and deep.

The first decorative body may be entirely permeable, or may be partially permeable.

The second decoration may be wholly covered with the first portion, or may be partially covered with the first portion. .

again,
``Equipped with a fourth effect means [for example, an upper LED board 2772] capable of executing a fourth light emission effect,
The part of the second decoration covered by the first part (hereinafter referred to as the "second part") [for example, the mounting part 2723] has transparency,
The fourth effect means is covered with at least the second part,
The fourth light emitting effect is visible from the first part through the second part,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body, which have a three-dimensional effect, can perform a lighting effect.

At least a portion of the second portion may be permeable. That is, the second portion may be wholly permeable, or may be partially permeable.

The fourth rendering means may be, for example, an LED board or a liquid crystal display. The fourth light emission effect may be a effect by lighting or blinking of an LED, or may be an image display effect by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

At least a portion of the second portion may be uneven. That is, the second portion may be entirely uneven, or may be partially uneven. Alternatively, at least a portion of the second portion may be planar. That is, the second portion may be entirely planar, or may be partially planar. Further, the second portion may be formed in a shape imitating a lens. The second portion may have the shape formed entirely or only partially.

again,
"The first decorative body has an impermeable part (hereinafter referred to as a "third part") [for example, a border part of characters, etc.],
The first site is a site surrounded by the third site,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In some cases, the first portion can be emphasized and visually recognized by the player.

The second decorative body may have a transmissive portion and an impermeable portion surrounding the transmissive portion.

again,
"The first decorative body has a first flat plate part [eg, flat plate part 2711] and a first three-dimensional part [e.g., three-dimensional part 2712],
The first flat plate portion is fixed to the first member [for example, the game board back base 200b],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second decorative body has a second flat plate part [eg, flat plate part 2721] and a second three-dimensional part [e.g., three-dimensional part 2722],
The second flat plate portion is fixed to a second member [e.g., the upper lens 2752],
The first decorative body is also fixed to the second decorative body [for example, fixed with double-sided tape],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Next, other components that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 118 will be further described. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are given the same reference numerals as those used so far. Also, redundant description may be omitted.

First, the attacker unit 25' used in place of the first attacker unit 25 arranged on the right side of the game area 124 will be described.

FIG. 119 is a schematic configuration diagram of the attacker unit 25'.

A normal figure starting port 228 shown in FIG. 88 is provided upstream of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. Both the game ball that has passed through this normal figure starting port 228 and the game ball that has not passed reach the attacker unit 25'.

Also on the upstream side of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, a second special figure starting port (electric chew) is arranged as in the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. The second special figure starting opening 232 shown in FIG. 119 also has a door member 2320 that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction with respect to the ball passage, and the door member 2320 changes the size of the starting opening. The ball detection sensor 2322 for the second special figure starting port 232 is arranged upward in the vicinity of the downstream end of the electric chew guide member 2324 arranged below the door member 2320 . In FIG. 119, the door member 2320 is advanced forward with respect to the ball passage. The game ball B that has reached the attacker unit 25' rides on one end side of the door member 2320 if the door member 2320 is advanced forward (closed state). The door member 2320 is gradually inclined downward toward the other end side (right side in the drawing), and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door member 2320 . That is, the ball passage is formed by the door member 2320 that has advanced. The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the door member 2320 does not enter the second special figure starting port 232 and goes downstream (see the solid line arrow).

On the other hand, when the door member 2320 is retracted with respect to the ball passage (open state), the game ball B is guided by the electric chew guide member 2324 and passes through the ball detection sensor 2322 as indicated by the dotted arrow. . A game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2322 enters an electric chew ball entrance 2325, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is discharged to the game island side. That is, the electric chew back ball passage 2326 is connected to the electric chew entrance 2325 . This electric chew back ball passage 2326 extends downward on the back side of the game board 201 .

In the ball passage formed by the advanced door member 2320, a plurality of deceleration ribs (not shown) projecting forward are provided at intervals. These decelerating ribs are similar to the decelerating ribs 234r shown in FIG. There is a case where the game ball stays on the door member 2320 for a while by being caught by the rib. When the door member 2320 retreats with the game balls staying on the door member 2320, the game balls staying on the door member 2320 drop at once, and the ball detection sensor 2322 continuously detects the game balls. may be

A plurality of game pegs 238 are arranged at an intermediate position of the attacker unit 25', and the route along which the game ball B advances while hitting these game pegs 238 is divided into three routes. That is, the route is divided into a route to the general prize winning port 226, a route to the out port 245, and a route to the attacker (variable prize winning port). A back ball passage 2261 for general winning opening is connected to the general winning opening 226 . A ball detection sensor 2262 is provided inside the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening. be paid out. In addition, the out-port back ball passage 2451 is connected to the out-port 245 . A ball detection sensor is not provided in this out-port back ball passage 2451 . It should be noted that the out port 245 may be used as the general prize winning port 226, and two general prize winning ports 226 may be arranged vertically.

In addition, the back ball passage 2261 for the general prize winning opening and the back ball passage 2451 for the out opening merge to form one combined back ball passage JR.

A game ball B traveling along a route toward an attacker (variable winning opening) reaches a downstream portion of the attacker unit 25'. In the downstream part of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, a first variable winning opening 234 serving as a first attacker is arranged, like the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. Furthermore, a second variable winning port 235 serving as a second attacker is also arranged on the downstream side. That is, two variable winning openings are arranged in the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG.

The first attacker on the upstream side has the same configuration as the first attacker shown in FIG. Variable mouth size. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable prize winning opening is arranged facing upward below the first door member 2341 that has advanced forward. In the first attacker shown in FIG. 119, the first door member 2341 advances forward with respect to the ball passage. The game ball B that has reached the downstream portion of the attacker unit 25' rides on one end side of the first door member 2341 if the first door member 2341 is advanced forward (closed state). The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the other end side (left side in the drawing), and the game ball B rolls on the upper surface of the first door member 2341 . That is, a ball passage is formed by the first door member 2341 that has advanced. The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the first door member 2341 goes to the second attacker without winning the first variable winning opening 234 (see the solid line arrow).

On the other hand, when the first door member 2341 is retracted with respect to the ball passage (open state), the game ball B is guided by the first attacker guide member 2344 and detected by the ball detection sensor 2342 as indicated by the dotted arrow. pass through. A game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is guided to the rear side of the attacker unit 25' from the first attacker ball entrance 2343. On the back side of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, similarly to the first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. It is sorted out whether it is made to go to the V winning opening shown in the figure or to go to the out opening. The first door member 2341 advances and retreats by the small winning game, and if the game ball enters the V winning opening, it becomes a V winning and the big winning game is started.

The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward toward the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. In the ball passage formed by the advanced first door member 2341, a plurality of deceleration ribs (not shown) projecting forward are provided at intervals. At the first door member 2341 advanced to the front side, the inclination of the first door member 2341 makes it easier for the game ball to flow down. may stay for some time. When the first door member 2341 retreats while the game ball stays on the first door member 2341, the game ball staying on the first door member 2341 drops at once, and the game ball stays on the first door member 2341. A game ball may be continuously detected by the ball detection sensor 2342 of . Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball B is guided by the guide member 2344 for the first attacker and passes through the ball detection sensor 2342, the winning rate to the first variable winning port 234 is improved, and the deceleration rib is the winning rate improving means. also plays the role of

As with the first variable winning port 234, the size of the second variable winning port 235 is variable by the second door member 2351, but the position of the ball detection sensor is the same as that of the first variable winning port 234. is different. A game ball heading for the second variable winning port 235 falls through the drop path FR. The drop passage FR shown in FIG. 119 is a passage that extends from the oblique upper right to the oblique lower left. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning port 235 is arranged not below the second door member 2351 but on the downstream side of the second door member 2351 facing the upstream side. In FIG. 119, the second door member 2351 advances forward with respect to the drop passage FR at a position in the middle of the drop passage FR. The game ball B that has fallen halfway through the drop passage FR falls to one end side of the second door member 2351 if the second door member 2351 is advanced forward (open state). The second door member 2351 is also gradually inclined downward toward the other end (left side in the drawing), and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the second door member 2351 . That is, a ball passage is formed by the second door member 2351 that has advanced. A game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the second door member 2351 passes through the ball detection sensor 2352 and enters the second variable winning port 235 . The game ball B that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2352 enters the ball entrance 2353 for the second attacker. The second attacker entrance 2353 is connected to the confluence back ball passage JR where the back ball passage 2261 for the general prize winning opening and the back ball passage 2451 for the out exit merge.

On the other hand, when the second door member 2351 is retracted with respect to the drop path FR (closed state), as indicated by the dotted line arrow, the game ball B passes through the drop path FR to the end and moves onto the rolling path RR. to fall. Therefore, the winning to the second variable winning opening 235 is missed without passing the ball detection sensor 2352 . The rolling passage RR is connected to an out port 240 provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204 .

Further, as will be described later in detail, the upper surface of the second door member 2351 is provided with an upper extending portion UJ1 (see FIG. 120) having a function of preventing the falling game ball B from rebounding. However, if, at the timing when the second door member 2351 begins to retreat from the advanced state (open state), the game ball falls on the upper surface of the second door member 2351, and the second door member 2351 begins to retreat. Even if there is a so-called irregular game ball that spins on the game ball and jumps out toward the ball detection sensor 2352 without hitting the upper extension part UJ1, the prize-winning prevention protrusion 2351a and the prize-winning prevention rib 235r Winning to the second variable winning port 235 is blocked. The prize-winning projection 2351a is a projection projecting forward from the end of the second door member 2351 on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball. The prize-winning projection 2351a protrudes in front of the ball detection sensor 2352 even when the second door member 2351 is completely retracted (maximum retracted position) (see FIG. 120(b)). Therefore, even if there is an irregular game ball that jumps out toward the second variable winning port 235, the game ball collides with the winning prevention projection 2351a and rolls without being able to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352. It falls on passage RR. The winning prevention rib 235r is a vertical rib positioned above the winning prevention projection 2351a of the second door member 2351 in the maximum retracted position (see FIG. 120(b)). The irregular game ball that has jumped out toward the second variable winning port 235 collides with this winning prevention rib 235r and cannot pass through the ball detection sensor 2352 in the same way as when it collides with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a. , may drop onto the rolling passage RR.

FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining countermeasures against rebounding of game balls that have fallen down the drop path FR.

FIG. 120(a) is a view showing the downstream portion of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119 from the back side. That is, it is a view of the downstream portion of the front wall 25F of the attacker unit 25' viewed from the back side. Therefore, the front side of the drawing is the back side (rear side), and the back side is the front side.

The drop passage FR is provided between the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B (not shown) (see FIG. 120(b)), and is a passage that continues to the rolling passage RR. In FIG. 120, it is a gray portion from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right. Note that FIG. 120(a) shows upstream connecting side walls FR1 and FR2 that connect the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B (not shown) that define the drop path FR.

Also, in FIG. 120(a), both the first door member 2341 and the second door member 2351 are indicated by dotted lines. Both the first door member 2341 and the second door member 2351 advance from a predetermined rear position (maximum retreat position) on the rear wall 25B side to a predetermined front position (maximum advance position) in the ball passage. . As shown in FIG. 120(a), the game ball B1 rolls on the upper surface 2341U of the first door member 2341 and is guided by the upper end R portion FR2r of the upstream side connecting side wall FR2, enters the drop path FR, and starts falling. do.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), the drop path FR is provided with a rib SDR for deceleration. In this figure, the deceleration ribs SDR provided on the front wall 25F are indicated by solid lines, and the deceleration ribs SDR provided on the rear wall 25B (not shown) are indicated by dotted lines. Due to these deceleration ribs SDR, the game ball falling down the falling path FR falls while meandering in the front-rear direction, and the force of the falling is weakened.

When the second door member 2351 advances forward, the upstream portion of the second door member 2351 in the ball passing direction blocks the middle of the downstream side of the drop passage FR, and the game has fallen halfway through the fall passage FR. Ball B2 collides with upper surface 2351U of second door member 2351 . The front wall 25F is provided with a U-shaped ridge portion UJ that protrudes rearward. The U-shaped ridge portion UJ has an upper extending portion UJ1 extending along the second door member 2351 at a position higher than the second door member 2351 advanced to the forward position.

FIG. 120(b) is an enlarged view of the B-B' section shown in FIG. 120(a). In FIG. 120(b), the right side is the front side and the left side is the rear side.

FIG. 120(b) shows the front wall 25F and the rear wall 25B. Further, the second door member 2351 retracted to the maximum retracted position is indicated by a solid line, and the second door member 2351 advanced to the maximum advanced position is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. Although only the upstream portion of the second door member 2351 in the ball passing direction advances into the drop passage FR, the entire second door member 2351 may advance into the drop passage FR. Alternatively, although the second door member 2351 advances and retreats in a linear motion, it may be configured such that at least a portion of it appears in and disappears from the fall path FR by rotating.

The upper extending portion UJ1 protrudes rearward from the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 advanced to the maximum advanced position at a height position equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. When the game ball B2 that has fallen halfway down the drop path FR and collided with the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 bounces off the upper surface 2351U, it hits the upper extension portion UJ1, and the bounce may be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 120(a), the upper extending portion UJ1 extends in the longitudinal direction (ball passing direction) of the advanced second door member 2351, and the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351 extends. When the rolling game ball B3 comes into contact with the upper extension part UJ1, it also has a function of guiding the game ball B3.

Further, the U-shaped ridge portion UJ has a lower extending portion UJ2 extending along the rolling path RR at a position below the maximum advanced position of the second door member 2351 . The lower extending portion UJ2 protrudes rearward from the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR at a height position equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. When the second door member 2351 is positioned at the maximum retracted position, the drop path FR is not blocked by a part of the second door member 2351, and the game ball falling down the drop path FR does not pass through the drop path FR. It passes to the end and drops onto the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR. When the game ball B4 dropped on the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling path RR bounces back (especially when it bounces diagonally toward the front side), the game ball B4 hits the lower extension part UJ2 and bounces off. may be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 120(a), the lower extension part UJ2 extends in the direction in which the rolling path RR extends, and the game ball B4 rolling on the rolling path RR is positioned at the lower extension part UJ2. It also has the function of guiding the game ball B4 when it comes into contact with UJ2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the rear wall 25B is provided with a ball bouncing prevention ridge extending along the rolling path RR at a position below the maximum advanced position of the second door member 2351. A JJ is also provided. This ball bouncing restraint projection JJ projects forward from the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling passage RR at a height position equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. When the game ball B4 that has fallen onto the rolling path RR bounces back (especially when it bounces toward the rear side), the game ball B4 may hit the ball bouncing prevention ridge JJ and bounce back. is suppressed. In this attacker unit 25', the game ball that has fallen down the drop path FR hits the bottom surface RR1 of the rolling path RR and rebounds upward to enter the second variable winning opening 235 (passing the ball detection sensor 2352). Prize winning is suppressed by the ball bouncing suppression rib portion JJ and the lower extension portion UJ2.

The front wall 25F is also provided with a guide ridge GJ projecting rearward at a position corresponding to the intermediate portion of the drop path FR. This guide ridge GJ is linear and extends in the direction in which the drop passage FR extends, and its lower end is connected to a U-shaped ridge portion UJ. A game ball that has begun to drop down the drop path FR may be weakened by the deceleration rib SDR and then come into contact with the guide ridge GJ. The game ball in contact with the guide ridge GJ is guided in the extending direction of the guide ridge GJ, and if the second door member 2351 is in an advanced state, it rides on the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351, and the second door member 2351 If the door member 2351 is retracted, it drops to the rolling path RR.

In addition, the attacker unit 25' is provided with an arc-shaped detour DR in the direction opposite to the ball passing direction of the second door member 2351 advanced to the maximum advanced position. The arc-shaped detour passage DR is a passage branched from the middle of the drop passage FR and connected to the upstream end of the rolling passage RR, and is formed by the arc-shaped connecting side wall ARW connected to the lower end of the upstream side connecting side wall FR2. It is On the second door member 2351 that has advanced to the maximum advance position, for example, when the game balls fall together, the game balls collide with each other and the game balls are repelled in the direction opposite to the ball passing direction. Sometimes. The game ball flipped to the opposite side falls from the second door member 2351 (see arrow D in the figure) and enters the detour DR. If the detour path DR is not provided, the game ball flipped to the opposite side will be stuck at the upstream end of the second door member 2351 in the ball passing direction, and there is a risk of hindering the forward and backward movement of the second door member 2351. However, since the detour path DR is provided, the game ball can escape and the second door member 2351 can smoothly repeat the advancing and retreating motions without worrying about ball clogging.

The U-shaped ridge portion UJ also has an arcuate portion UJ3 curved along the arcuate detour DR. The game ball that has entered the detour DR may come into contact with the arcuate portion UJ3. The game ball that contacts the arcuate portion UJ3 is guided by the arcuate portion UJ3 and reaches the rolling path RR.

FIG. 120 also shows relief openings 25Fa provided in the front wall 25F. A win-blocking protrusion 2351a protruding forward from the second door member 2351 indicated by a chain double-dashed line is inserted into the relief opening 25Fa shown in FIG. 120(b). The escape opening 25Fa is a space in which the winning prevention projection 2351a projecting forward is accommodated when the second door member 2351 advances to the maximum advance position. The tip of the prize winning prevention projection 2351a does not protrude further forward from the escape opening 25Fa, and when a decorative sticker is stuck on the front wall 25F, the decorative sticker makes it impossible for the player to recognize the existence of the prize winning prevention projection 2351a. . However, an opening may also be provided in the decorative sticker, and the tip of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a may be projected further forward from the escape opening 25Fa as one of effects.

FIG. 120(b) also shows a winning prevention rib 235r located above the winning prevention projection 2351a of the second door member 2351 at the maximum retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a gap CS is provided between the front edge of the second door member 2351 advanced to the maximum advanced position and the front wall 25F. Due to this gap CS, the second door member 2351 can move from the maximum retracted position to the maximum advanced position in a short period of time. Even if the second door member 2351 is at the maximum retraction position, the irregular game balls flying out toward the second variable winning port 235 surely collide with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a. Furthermore, since the second door member 2351 is provided with the gap CS, it can be retracted from the maximum advanced position in a short period of time. Therefore, when the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235 is opened only once for a very short time such as 0.06 seconds, the game ball rides on the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351. Even so, the second door member 2351 retreats before the game ball reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, preventing the game ball from winning and reducing the winning rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the winning prevention protrusion 2351a projects forward from the rear wall 25B even when the second door member 2351 is retracted to the maximum retracted position. The amount of protrusion T1 by which the winning prevention protrusion 2351a protrudes forward from the rear wall 25B is greater than the amount of protrusion (the amount of protrusion from the rear wall 25B) T2 by which the ball bouncing prevention rib portion JJ protrudes forward from the rear wall 25B. less. In order to increase the collision rate of irregular game balls, the protrusion amount T1 may be the same as the protrusion amount T2 from the rear wall 25B, or may be larger than the protrusion amount T2. Also, the amount of protrusion T2 from the rear wall 25B is larger than the amount of protrusion (the amount of protrusion from the front wall 25F) T3 of the U-shaped ridge portion UJ protruding rearward from the front wall 25F. This pachinko machine 100 is installed so as to fall slightly to the rear side, and since game balls tend to come close to the rear wall 25B side, the projection amount T2 from the rear wall 25B is larger than the projection amount T3 from the front wall 25F. is doing. However, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed substantially vertically, both protrusion amounts T2 and T3 may be set to the same extent. The protrusion amount T3 from the front wall 25F may be larger than the protrusion amount T2 from the wall 25B.

According to the above description,
"A rolling passage [for example, a rolling passage RR] on which game balls roll,
a falling passage [for example, a falling passage FR] through which game balls fall toward the rolling passage;
A game machine comprising
The rolling passage rolls the game ball that has fallen through the drop passage,
The drop passage is provided with a ball bouncing prevention means [for example, a ball bouncing prevention rib portion JJ and a lower extension portion UJ2] for suppressing a game ball that has fallen down the drop passage from hitting the rolling passage and bouncing upward. is a
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

A game ball that has fallen down the drop path hits the bottom surface of the rolling path, and in some cases, the side surface, etc., and the game ball bounces back. , It may be possible to prevent irregular movement of the game ball.

again,
``Movable means [e.g., second door member 2351] that appears and disappears at least partially [e.g., ball passage direction upstream part] in the middle of the drop passage,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the movable means may partially appear in the middle of the drop path, or may appear entirely. Moreover, at least a part of the movable means may appear by rotating in the middle of the drop path.

again,
"The movable means constitutes the drop passage in a state where at least a part of it appears in the middle of the drop passage [for example, the state of the second door member 2351 indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 1272(b)]. , a gap [for example, a gap CS] between the player side wall [for example, the front wall 25F],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By providing the gap, the amount of movement of the movable means can be reduced, and the change time for appearing and disappearing in the drop path can be shortened.

The movable means advances and retreats with respect to the drop passage in the front-rear direction. It may be one that advances to

again,
"Equipped with a winning opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235],
The winning opening allows a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable means [for example, the upper surface 2351U of the second door member 2351] at least partially appearing in the middle of the falling path to win a prize.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Unexpected prize winning in which the game ball falling down the falling path hits the bottom surface of the rolling path and bounces upward to enter the winning opening is suppressed by the ball bouncing suppressing means.

again,
"The drop path is provided between a front wall [e.g., front wall 25F] and a rear wall [e.g., rear wall 25B],
The movable means advances from a rear position [e.g., maximum retraction position] to a front position [e.g., maximum extension position], and at least a portion appears in the middle of the drop passage,
The ball bouncing prevention means has a first ball bouncing prevention portion [for example, a ball bouncing prevention ridge JJ] disposed on the rear wall,
The first ball bouncing prevention part protrudes forward at a position downstream of the drop path from the front position,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first ball bouncing prevention portion is arranged above the rolling passage. That is, the first ball bouncing prevention portion is arranged between the rolling passage and the front position.

again,
``The ball bouncing prevention means has a second ball bouncing prevention portion [for example, the lower extension portion UJ2] disposed on the front wall,
The second ball bouncing prevention part protrudes rearward at a position downstream of the drop path from the front position,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second ball bouncing prevention portion is arranged above the rolling passage. That is, the second ball bouncing prevention portion is arranged between the rolling passage and the front position.

The second ball bouncing prevention section may be arranged downstream (below) the drop passage relative to the first ball bouncing prevention section.

again,
"Comprising a ridge protruding rearward from the front wall,
The ridge portion moves the game ball [eg, game ball B3] from the upper surface [eg, upper surface 2351U] of the movable means [eg, second door member 2351] advanced to the forward position [eg, maximum advanced position]. provided at a height position equal to or less than the diameter [e.g. upper extension UJ1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the ridge portion is provided above the movable means advanced to the front position. The ridge portion may function as a ball bouncing restraining means for restraining the game ball that has fallen down the drop path from hitting the movable means and rebounding upward. In addition, the ridge may guide the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable means that has advanced to the front position, making it easier for the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the movable means.

again,
``A detour path [for example, detour path DR] in which a game ball can move from the upper surface of the movable means at least partially appearing in the middle of the falling path to the rolling path,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if a plurality of game balls fall collectively on the upper surface of the movable means, ball clogging on the upper surface can be prevented by providing the detour passage.

Next, the ball passage unit connected to the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119 will be described in detail.

FIG. 121 shows a ball passage unit BU formed with an out-hole back ball passage 2451, a general prize-winning back ball passage 2261, and a confluence back ball passage JR shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ball passage forming member BP in which a ball passage 2326 is formed;

A light emitting board LEB is fixed to the front surface of the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 121, and a light guide plate LGP is attached to the front side of the light emitting board LEB. The extending portion LGPr extending to the right side of the light guide plate LGP is in contact with the front surface of the ball passage forming member BP. The ball passage unit BU and the ball passage forming member BP are arranged on the rear side (rear side) of the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing each of the ball passage unit BU, the ball passage forming member BP, the light emitting substrate LEB, and the light guide plate LGP.

FIG. 122(a) on the left side shows the ball passage unit BU and the ball passage forming member BP. The light emitting board LEB is removed from the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 122(a), and the light guide plate LGP is not shown in FIG. 122(a) either. The ball passage unit BU is a combination of a front side part BUf and a rear side part (not shown). is formed. The out-port back ball passage 2451 and the general prize-winning back ball passage 2261 are ball passages formed in parallel, and both extend from the diagonally upper right on the upstream side to the diagonally lower left on the downstream side. . An upstream end opening 2451a of the out-port back ball passage 2451 is connected to an out-ball discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, the out port 245 is connected to the out ball discharge port on the back surface of the attacker unit 25', and the game ball entering the out port 245 is discharged from this out ball discharge port. It enters the back ball passage 2451 for the out port through the upstream end opening 2451a. On the other hand, the upstream end opening 2261a of the back ball passage 2261 for the general winning opening is connected to a general winning ball discharge opening (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, the general prize winning opening 226 is connected to the general winning ball discharge opening on the back side of the attacker unit 25', and the game balls entering the general winning ball opening 226 are discharged from this general winning ball discharge opening. , and enters the back ball passage 2261 for general winning opening from the upstream end opening 2261a. It should be noted that a ball detection sensor 2262 is also shown in the back ball passage 2261 for general winning opening shown in FIG. 122(a).

The downstream end of the out-port back ball passage 2451 and the downstream end of the general prize-winning back ball passage 2261 are connected to a common merged back-ball passage JR, and the out-port back ball passage 2451 and the general prize-winning back ball passage 2261 joins at the joining back ball passage JR. With this configuration, the ball passage unit BU can be made compact.

The confluent back ball passage JR is provided with an opening JRa. In the attacker unit 25' shown in FIG. 119, the second attacker's ball entrance 2353 is connected to the second attacker's winning ball discharge opening on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. The played game ball is discharged from the second attacker winning ball discharge port, and enters the confluent back ball passage JR from the opening JRa. The space behind the attacker unit 25' is efficiently utilized.

The ball passage forming member BP is arranged on the right side of the ball passage unit BU. The ball passage forming member BP is also a combination of a front side part BPf and a rear side part (not shown), and a back ball passage 2326 for an electric chew is formed inside. An upstream end opening 2326a of the electric chew back ball passage 2326 is connected to an electric chew winning ball outlet (not shown) provided on the back surface of the attacker unit 25'. In the attacker unit 25′ shown in FIG. 119, the electric chew ball entrance 2325 is connected to the electric chew winning ball discharge opening on the back side of the attacker unit 25′, and the game ball entering the electric chew ball entrance 2325 is discharged from the electric chew winning ball outlet and enters the electric chew back ball passage 2326 from the upstream end opening 2326a.

FIG. 122(b) shows the light emitting substrate LEB.

This light-emitting board LEB is obtained by mounting a plurality of light-emitting diodes LED and LED' on a printed board PB. The printed circuit board PB is provided with a vertically elongated oval opening PBa corresponding to both the upstream end opening 2451a of the back ball passage 2451 for the outlet and the upstream end opening 2261a of the back ball passage 2261 for the general prize winning opening. The light-emitting diodes LED and LED' are arranged along the outer periphery of the printed circuit board and arranged around the oval opening PBa. The light emitting board LEB shown in FIG. 122(b) is screwed to the ball passage unit BU shown in FIG. 122(a) while being in surface contact with the front surface BU1 of the ball passage unit BU. By fixing the light emitting board LEB to the ball passage unit BU in this way, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 can be made compact. Further, when the game ball passes through the out-port back ball passage 2451 and the general winning port back ball passage 2261, an air flow is generated in the ball passage, and the light emitting substrate LEB is air-cooled. Moreover, the use of two ball passages increases the cooling efficiency compared to the case of using one ball passage. In addition, since both of the two ball passages are obliquely arranged, the contact area is increased, which also enhances the cooling efficiency. In addition, since the out hole 245 and the general winning hole 226 are easy to enter, many game balls pass through these ball passages, and the light emitting board LEB is easily cooled.

FIG. 122(c) shown in the lower right of FIG. 122 shows the light guide plate LGP.

This light guide plate LGP has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive area. Light is incident on the light guide plate LGP from the side, and the incident light is reflected forward by the cut portion of the lens, so that the transmissive area appears to emit light in a predetermined pattern. The light guide plate LGP shown in FIG. 122(c) is placed on the light emitting substrate LEB shown in FIG. 122(b). The light guide plate LGP is provided with notches NC and through holes TH at respective positions of the plurality of light emitting diodes LED and LED' arranged on the light emitting substrate LEB. A plurality of light emitting diodes LED and LED' shown in FIG. 122(b) emit side light. The light guide plate LGP is provided with an opening LGPa corresponding to the upstream end opening 2451a of the out-port back ball passage 2451 and an opening LGPb corresponding to the upstream end opening 2261a of the general prize winning back ball passage 2261. ing.

Also, the light guide plate LGP shown in FIG. 122(c) has an extended right side portion. That is, the extended portion LGPr is provided further to the right than the light emitting diode LED located on the right side of the openings LGPa and LGPb. This extended portion LGPr is a portion that comes into surface contact with the front surface BP1 of the ball passage forming member BP shown in FIG. When the game ball passes through the electric chew back ball passage 2326 formed inside the ball passage forming member BP, an air flow is generated in the ball passage, and the light guide plate LGP is air-cooled. The contacting light emitting substrate LEB is also cooled as a result.

If part or all of the attacker unit 25' is transparent, the ball passage unit BU arranged on the rear side of the attacker unit 25' can be seen through the transparent portion, but the light emitting substrate LEB is arranged on the front side. You can hide the sphere passage unit BU by being there. The light-emitting substrate LEB is covered with the light guide plate LGP, and the light-emitting diodes LED are exposed from the cutouts NC and the through holes TH. It becomes part of the decoration. The attacker unit 25' is illuminated from the rear side by the light emitting diodes LED and LED' emitting light. In addition, the light-emitting diodes LED' arranged on the lower edge below the oval opening PBa provided on the light-emitting substrate LEB have a positional relationship in which they are arranged near the back side of the first variable winning opening 234. The light-emitting diode LED' emits light to illuminate the first variable winning opening 234 from the back side.

According to the above description,
"A light-emitting substrate [e.g., light-emitting board LEB] on which light-emitting elements [e.g., light-emitting diodes LED, LED'] are mounted;
A ball passage unit [for example, a ball passage unit BU] in which a ball passage through which a game ball passes [for example, a back ball passage 2451 for an out exit, a back ball passage 2261 for a general winning entrance, and a confluent back ball passage JR] is formed;
A game machine comprising
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit [for example, screwed in a state of surface contact].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the configuration of the amusement machine can be made compact, and the light-emitting substrate is air-cooled by passing game balls through the ball passage in the ball passage unit.

The ball passage unit may be provided on the back side of the game board. Further, the light emitting substrate may be fixed to the ball passage unit while being in surface contact with the ball passage unit. By doing so, the air-cooling effect of the light-emitting substrate by the game balls passing through the ball passage is enhanced. Furthermore, the ball passage unit may have a ball passage extending obliquely with respect to the fixed light emitting substrate. The contact area of the ball passage with the light emitting substrate is increased, and the cooling efficiency is enhanced.

again,
"The light emitting substrate is fixed to the front side of the ball passage unit.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The ball passage unit can be hidden by the light emitting substrate.

again,
"Equipped with a first ball entrance [for example, a general winning entrance 226] provided in the game area,
The ball passage unit is formed with a ball passage [for example, a back ball passage 2261 for a general winning opening] through which a game ball that has entered the first ball entrance passes.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The light-emitting substrate is air-cooled by the game ball entering the first ball entrance.

Incidentally, the first ball entrance may be an out entrance or may be a general winning entrance. In other words, in the starting opening and the variable winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, the ball entry frequency is low and the number of game balls passing through the ball passage is small, so the air cooling effect cannot be expected so much, but in the out opening and the general winning opening, Since the frequency of ball entry is higher than that of a starting hole or a prize-winning hole that opens at the time of a big hit, and the number of game balls passing through the ball passage is large, an air-cooling effect can be expected.

again,
``Equipped with a second ball entrance [for example, an out port 245] provided in the game area,
The ball passage unit is formed with a first ball passage [for example, back ball passage 2261 for general winning opening] through which a game ball that has entered the first ball entrance [for example, general winning opening 226] passes. and
The ball passage unit is formed with a second ball passage [for example, the back ball passage 2451 for the out port] through which a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance passes,
The ball passage unit is formed by forming the first ball passage and the second ball passage in parallel,
The light emitting substrate is fixed to the ball passage unit while being in contact with the first ball passage portion and the second ball passage portion of the ball passage unit.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The light-emitting substrate is air-cooled by two ball passages to further promote cooling of the light-emitting substrate.

The second ball entrance may be an out entrance or may be a general winning entrance.

again,
"The ball passage unit is formed with a third ball passage [for example, a confluent back ball passage JR],
Said third ball passage is for passage of game balls that have passed said first ball passage,
The third ball passage also passes through the game balls that have passed through the second ball passage,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first ball passage and the second ball passage meet at the third ball passage.

By doing so, the ball passage unit can be made compact.

again,
``Equipped with a winning opening unit [for example, an attacker unit 25'] provided with a winning opening,
The prize winning unit is arranged in front of the light emitting board,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The winning slot unit can be illuminated by the light emitting element.

again,
"Equipped with a variable winning opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235],
The third ball passage is through which the game ball that has won the variable winning opening passes,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The space on the back side of the winning slot unit can be efficiently used.

Next, an example that can be applied to the left area of the game area 124 will be described.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing part of the left area of the game area 124. As shown in FIG.

In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 88, a first region 1241 and a second region 1242 are provided in the left region of the game region 124, and a distribution front region 125 composed of game nails 238 is provided downstream thereof. , and an electric sorting unit 26 is arranged downstream thereof. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 123, a high chance region 1242H (dark gray region) is provided instead of the second region 1242, and a low chance region 1241L (light gray region) is provided instead of the first region 1241. . Although the details will be described later, the high chance area 1242H is an area where the player tends to be more advantageous than the low chance area 1241L.

When the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball advances from the high chance area 1242H or the low chance area 1241L to the left area. The high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L are adjacent areas, and the high chance area 1242H is on the downstream side in the shooting direction of the ball. That is, the high chance area 1242H is farther from the return ball preventing piece 203 than the low chance area 1241L. Therefore, when aiming at the high chance area 1242H, the player needs to operate the ball shooting handle 134 more than when aiming at the low chance area 1241L to shoot the game ball with strong shooting strength. However, if the operation amount is too large, the shooting intensity may become too strong and the game ball may advance to the right area.

Although the high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L are areas partitioned by the walls Wa1 to Wa4, the high chance area 1242H is an area partitioned by the game nail 138 on the upstream side, and is a low chance area. 1241L may be a region defined by the game nail 138 and the mounting portion 2031 of the return ball preventing piece 203 . In this case, after the game ball enters the high chance area 1242H or the low chance area 1241L, it is necessary to prevent the game ball from falling out of the area from between the game nails 138. The player can aim at the high chance area 1242H only by adjusting the operation amount of the ball shooting handle 134 without being affected by the game nail 138. - 特許庁

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the flow of game balls as a result of hitting left in the example shown in FIG. The description will be continued below with reference to FIG. 124 as well as FIG.

In this example, there is no distribution front area 125 configured with the game nail 238, and the game ball entering the high chance area 1242H is placed in the electric distribution zone 26Z provided instead of the electric distribution unit 26. %move on. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the low chance area 1241L advances 100% to the first ball route Rt1.

A zone entrance ball delay section 2650 (see FIG. 123) is provided near the entrance of the ball path (hereinafter referred to as zone ball path 26Z1) in the electric distribution zone 26Z. The configuration of the zone sphere path 26Z1 on the downstream side of the zone entrance sphere delay section 2650 is the same as the configuration of the first sphere path 2601 shown in FIG. 88 and the like. That is, the zone sphere path 26Z1 includes, from the upstream side, a zone entrance sphere delay section 2650, a first upstream sphere delay section 2651, a third sphere direction change section 263, a first downstream sphere delay section 2652, and a first sphere direction change section 2652. A portion 261 is provided.

The zone entrance ball delaying portion 2650, the first upstream ball delaying portion 2651, and the first downstream ball delaying portion 2652 are provided in the vertical ball path portion, and the moving speed of the game ball tends to increase. It is provided in place. The zone entrance ball delay section 2650 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball that has entered the electric distribution zone 26Z through the high chance area 1242H. In addition, the first upstream ball delaying section 2651 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the third ball direction changing section 263, It is intended to reduce the moving speed of the game ball heading toward. These three ball delay units (2650, 2651, 2652) are as described with reference to FIGS. It is a means that can slow down the movement speed of the ball. That is, in the zone entrance ball delaying portion 2650, the first upstream ball delaying portion 2651, and the first downstream ball delaying portion 2652, the portion through which the game ball passes is the diameter on the downstream side rather than the diameter on the upstream side. is composed of an inverted conical surface that is shorter, and the game ball passing through this inverted conical surface moves in a spiral toward the downstream side (see FIG. 106(b)). The game ball travels in a spiral rather than falling straight down, resulting in a longer moving distance and a slower moving speed.

Further, the zone ball path 26Z1 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 26r1 projecting forward. The game ball passing through the deceleration rib 26r1 swings in the front-rear direction, thereby increasing the moving distance and, as a result, reducing the moving speed. Since the deceleration ribs 26r1 are arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side of the first upstream ball delay portion 2651, the ball delay means are arranged in the order of the deceleration rib 26r1, the ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface, and the deceleration rib 26r1. It is supposed to be It should be noted that two types of ball delay means, namely, the deceleration rib 26r1 and the ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface, may be provided so as to repeat the arrangement in this order a plurality of times. Also, three deceleration ribs 26r1 are provided between the zone entrance sphere delay portion 2650 and the first upstream sphere delay portion 2651, but these three deceleration ribs 26r1 are combined into a single sphere delay with an inverted conical surface. , the deceleration rib 26r1, and the spherical delay portion having an inverted conical surface. may be provided.

Further, on the upstream side of the first downstream ball delay portion 2652 in the zone ball path 26Z1, a spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 projecting forward is also provided. A portion of the zone ball path 26Z1 where the spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 is provided forms a curved path facing leftward, and a spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 is formed along the path at the central portion in the width direction of this path. is provided. The shape of the spherical orbit changing rib 26r3 is also curved. The game ball passing through the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 also swings in the front-rear direction, thereby increasing the movement distance and, as a result, reducing the movement speed.

The third ball direction changing portion 263 has a direction changing member 2631 and a motor (not shown), and the first ball direction changing portion 261 has a direction changing member 2611 and a motor (not shown). Both the third ball direction changing portion 263 and the first ball direction changing portion 261 are as explained above, and although detailed explanation is omitted, they are means for changing the route of the game ball by changing the state. be. 123, the direction changing member 2631 is rotated by a motor (not shown) to turn the rightward posture shown in FIG. Change the state between the state of facing posture. When the direction changing member 2631 is in the state of the right facing posture shown in FIG. 123, the game ball is directed to the second ball route Rt2 toward the lower right. This second sphere route Rt2 is part of the zone sphere path 26Z1. The game ball travels through the second ball route Rt2 toward the first downstream ball delay section 2652 and continues to move along the zone ball path 26Z1.

On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2631 is in the left facing state, the game ball is directed to the third ball route Rt3 toward the lower left. This third ball route Rt3 is also part of the zone ball path 26Z1, and the third ball route Rt3 joins the first ball route Rt1 continuing from the low chance area 1241L. The game ball directed toward the third ball route Rt3 by the direction changing member 2631 in the state of the leftward posture deviates from the zone ball path 26Z1 and enters the first ball route Rt1.

The direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 shown in FIG. 123 is also in a rightward posture, and the game ball that reaches the first ball direction changing portion 261 in this state flows downward to the right. . A first guide port 2613 is opened at the lower right of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball is guided to the back side of the game board 201 through the first guide port 2613, and is guided to the first ball passage. 2681 (see also FIGS. 88 and 89, etc.). A game ball that has entered the first ball passage 2681 is guided to the rotating body unit 28 . The first ball passage 2681 and the rotator unit 28 are as described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Depending on the timing of falling to the unit 28, there are cases where it goes to the first special figure starting port 230 shown in FIG. In addition, even when heading from the rotating body unit 28 to the first special figure start port 230, the ball does not always enter the first special figure start port 230, and the first special figure start port 230 , and may eventually reach the out port 240 . Therefore, when the direction changing member 2631 in the third ball direction changing portion 263 is in the state of the right facing posture shown in FIG. It is directed to the second ball route Rt2 heading to

On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is in the state of facing leftward, the game ball flows downward to the left. An out port 241 is provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing portion 261, and the game ball entering this out port 241 passes through a path 2604 shown in FIG. 89 and is finally discharged to the game island side. be.

In this example, the first ball direction changing portion 261 was configured to distribute to the first ball passage 2681, but from the rotating body unit 28 to the first special figure start port 230 with a probability of 100% It may be configured to distribute to the second ball passage 2682 (see FIG. 89 etc.). However, even in this case, the ball does not necessarily enter the first special figure starting port 230.

In the zone sphere path 26Z1 in the electric distribution zone 26Z described above, the sphere delay section (the zone entrance sphere delay section 2650, the first upstream sphere delay section 2651, the first downstream sphere delay section 2652) having an inverted conical surface and the deceleration Three types of ball delay means are provided, namely a rib 26r1 and a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. The third ball direction changing section 263 arranged in the zone ball path 26Z1 distributes game balls to a second ball route Rt2 advantageous to the player and a third ball route Rt3 disadvantageous to the player. It corresponds to movable means that may change the player's advantage depending on the timing at which the game ball arrives. Aiming at the game ball that has reached this side of the third ball direction changing portion 263, the transparent plate member 118 shown in FIG. There is a case where an illegal act (so-called slamming) is performed to align the direction changing member 2631 when it is in the right-facing posture, which is assigned to Rt2. However, since two types of ball delay means are provided upstream of the third ball direction changing section 263 , different delays are performed by the two types of ball delay means, and the fraudulent person can see the transparent plate member 118 The timing that was adjusted by hitting is out of order, and there is no point in doing Dotsukigoto. In addition, the two types of ball delay means often have different delay times, and it is difficult to match the timing when the direction changing member 2631 is in a rightward posture. In addition, the first ball direction changing portion 261 arranged in the zone ball path 26Z1 also has a first guide port 2613 that directs the game ball to the first special figure start port 230, which is advantageous to the player, and a game ball that is disadvantageous to the player. It distributes game balls to the out port 241 and corresponds to movable means that may change the advantage of the player depending on the timing at which the game balls arrive. Therefore, there is a case where a game ball that has reached the front of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is aimed at, and a landing goto is also performed. In addition, the rotator unit 28, which the game ball passing through the zone ball path 26Z1 may reach, also rotates, so that the ball can be entered into the first special figure start port 230, and the ball is Since the state is changed between the impossible state and the state, it corresponds to a movable means that may change the player's advantage depending on the timing when the game ball arrives. Therefore, in anticipation of the arrival timing of the game ball to the rotator unit 28, there is a case where the game ball that has reached the front of the first ball direction changing portion 261 is targeted for a hit. However, since three types of ball delay means are provided upstream of the first ball direction changing unit 261, different delays are performed by the three types of ball delay means. meaningless. In addition, the three types of ball delay means often have different delay times, making it extremely difficult to match the timing when the direction changing member 2611 is in the rightward posture.

Next, the first ball route Rt1 continuing from the low chance area 1241L will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, the first ball route Rt1 is provided with two types of ball delay means. One is a rib that extends in the width direction of the first ball route Rt1 and protrudes forward like the deceleration rib SDR that is also provided in the attacker unit 25'. In the first ball route Rt1, the deceleration ribs SDR are provided at predetermined intervals in the passing direction of the game ball. A game ball passing through these ribs SDR swings in the front-rear direction, as in the case of passing through the deceleration ribs 26r1, so that the moving distance becomes longer, and as a result, the moving speed decreases. Another ball delay means is deceleration projections GT1 to GT4 projecting in the width direction of the first ball route Rt1. A game ball passing through the deceleration projections GT1 to GT4 swings in the width direction (horizontal direction), thereby increasing the movement distance and, as a result, reducing the movement speed. Ball delay means are arranged on the first ball route Rt1 in the order of the deceleration projection GT2, the deceleration rib SDR, and the deceleration projection GT3. It should be noted that two types of ball delay means may be provided so as to repeat the arrangement in this order a plurality of times. Further, since the deceleration ribs SDR are arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side of the deceleration projection GT4, the ball delay means are arranged in the order of the deceleration rib SDR, the deceleration projection GT4, and the deceleration rib SDR. are placed. It should be noted that two types of ball delay means may be provided so that the arrangement in this order is repeated a plurality of times.

Also, unlike the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 88, the first ball route Rt1 is not provided with the general prize winning port 227 and the effect switch 269, and is a route through which game balls simply pass. . A game ball that has entered the first ball route Rt1 is surely discharged from the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 to a region where a plurality of game nails 238 are provided. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the zone ball path 26Z1 is not ejected from the zone ball path 26Z1 to the area where the plurality of game nails 238 are provided.

Neither the electric distribution zone 26Z described above nor the first ball route Rt1 is provided with a game nail.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the area between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the out port 240. As shown in FIG.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the out port 240, and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided there. Also, a ball passage unit 226U for a general winning hole is arranged. The general winning opening ball passage unit 226U includes an extending ball passage 226U1 extending toward the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1, a roof portion 226U2, a winning opening opening plate 226U3, a pocket portion 226U4, It has a transparent plate 226U5. A game nail 238 is provided so that the game ball Ba ejected from the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 can flow down toward the tip portion of the extended ball passage 226U1. However, some of the game balls ejected from the downstream end Rt1e hit the game nail 238 before reaching the tip of the extended ball passage 226U1, and the trajectory deviates and falls downward like the game ball Bb. There is also a game ball that goes over the roof portion 226U2 and heads for the out port 240 like the game ball Bc. The extending ball passage 226U1 is inclined downward from the tip toward the inlet IN of the internal ball passage 226Ur described later, and the game ball Bd reaching the tip of the extending ball passage 226U1 is extended by the inclination. It rolls in the ball passage 226U1 and heads toward the entrance IN of the inner ball passage 226Ur.

FIG. 125(b) is a view of the roof portion 226U2, the winning opening opening plate 226U3, and the pocket portion 226U4 from the side of the extended ball passage 226U1. Note that the transparent plate 226U5 arranged on the front side is omitted in FIG. 125(b). In FIG. 125(b), the extended ball passage 226U1 is not shown and the left side is shown, with the right side of the drawing being the front side and the left side being the rear side.

A first general winning opening 226A and a second general winning opening 226B are arranged in the internal ball passage 226Ur of the general winning opening ball passage unit 226U. The internal ball passage 226Ur is a passage that connects with the extended ball passage 226U1 and extends directly downward, and the inlet IN, which is the upstream end, is a connection point with the extended ball passage 226U1. On the upstream side of the internal ball passage 226Ur, a winning opening opening plate 226U3 is erected in a rearwardly inclined posture. The winning opening opening plate 226U3 is provided with a first general winning opening 226A that opens toward the rear, and has a compact structure. A pocket portion 226U4 is arranged downstream of the internal ball passage 226Ur, and the pocket portion 226U4 is provided with a second general winning opening 226B that opens directly downward. Furthermore, out openings 226Uo are provided on both the left and right sides between the upstream side and the downstream side of the internal ball passage 226Ur. If the game ball that has entered the internal ball passage 226Ur wins the first general winning opening 226A that opens in the front-rear direction (see arrow Bi shown in FIG. 125(b)), the first general winning opening 226A 125(a), such as the game ball Be or game ball Bf shown in FIG. be. On the other hand, a game ball that has not jumped out of the out opening 226Uo always wins the second general winning opening 226B (see arrow Biii shown in FIG. 125(b)). Both the ball winning the first general winning opening 226A and the ball winning the second general winning opening 226B are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

As described above, the game ball that has passed through the low chance area 1241L exits the first ball route Rt1 and then enters the first general winning opening 226A, the second general winning opening 226B, or exits. It will either result in going to the mouth 240, and unlike the game ball that has passed through the high chance area 1242H, it will not reach the first special figure start mouth 230.

Both the first general prize winning port 226A and the second general prize winning port 226B are general prize winning ports, and the number of prize balls is the same, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are paid out regardless of which player wins. . Therefore, it can be expected that game balls that did not enter the first general winning hole 226A on the upstream side will enter the second general winning hole 226B on the downstream side with the same number of winning balls. Furthermore, the first general prize winning port 226A is a general prize winning port that opens in the front and back direction, while the second general prize winning port 226B is a general prize winning port that opens in the vertical direction. Due to the difference, it is inevitably easier to win the second general prize winning opening 226B than the first general winning opening 226A. Players who know this will not be disappointed even if they do not win the first general prize winning opening 226A, and can expect to win a prize in the second general winning opening 226B.

In the general winning opening ball passage unit 226U, only the game balls that have passed through the common area such as the entrance IN of the internal ball passage 226Ur are placed in either the first general winning opening 226A or the second general winning opening 226B. It is possible to win a prize at the prize mouth. That is, the ball passage can be made more compact than the one-to-two relationship between the entrance and the prize-winning opening. In addition, even if the player does not win the first general prize winning port 226A, the player can expect to win the second general prize winning port 226B. Furthermore, a plurality of game pegs 238 are provided between the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the tip portion of the extended ball passage 226U1. The player may be worried about whether the ball passage unit 226U for the general winning opening is provided with a game nail. There is no need to worry about the influence, and the player can enjoy the game ball without worrying about how the game ball will go.

The transparent plate 226U5, which is not shown in FIG. 125(b), is arranged to cover the first general winning opening 226A, the out opening 226Uo, and the second general winning opening 226B from the front, as shown in FIG. 125(a). It is a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize how the game ball wins the first general winning opening 226A and how the game ball jumps out of the out opening 226Uo. In addition, the player can visually recognize how the game ball disappears into the second general winning hole 226B. Note that the transparent plate 226U5 may be translucent as long as it can be transmitted.

As described above, the high chance area 1242H is an area where the game ball may head toward the first special figure starting port 230, and if the game ball does not pass through this high chance area 1242H, the first special figure The starting port 230 cannot be reached. Therefore, it can be said that the high chance area 1242H is an area provided upstream of the first special figure starting port 230. In addition, the second ball route Rt2 is also a route along which the game ball may head to the first special figure starting port 230, and if the game ball does not pass through this second ball route Rt2, the first special figure starting port 230 cannot be reached. On the other hand, the low chance area 1241L is an area where the possibility of the game ball going to the first special figure starting port 230 is 0%. Further, the third ball route Rt3 is also a route with a 0% possibility that the game ball goes to the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, even if the game ball successfully passes through the high chance area 1242H, the distribution of the game ball in the third ball direction changing section 263 to distribute the game ball to the second ball route Rt2 and the third ball route Rt3 is important. Interest in the game is improved depending on whether or not the ball goes to the second ball route Rt2. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the low chance area 1241L or the game ball that has passed through the third ball route Rt3 does not enter the out port 240 with a probability of 100%, and the first general winning port 226A or the third There is a possibility of winning the 2 general prize winning opening 226B.

The high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L can be separately hit, and the player can be concentrated so that the game ball goes to the high chance area 1242H. That is, the player can aim at the high chance area 1242H by adjusting the amount of operation of the ball shooting handle 134, and the player can concentrate on aiming at the high chance area 1242H. In addition, since the high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L are located in the same left side area of the game area 124, the player does not simply have to hit left, but rather hits left aiming at the high chance area 1242H. It must be done, and the interest of the game may improve. Furthermore, since the high chance area 1242H and the low chance area 1241L are adjacent areas, the player may be required to finely adjust the operation amount of the ball shooting handle 134, and enjoy the adjustment.

In addition, since no game nail is provided in the electric distribution zone 26Z, the player can shoot the third ball without considering the state of the game nail as long as the game ball can be shot into the high chance area 1242H. Depending on the state of the direction changing portion 263 and the state of the first ball direction changing portion 261, the ball can be expected to enter the first special figure starting port 230, and the player's willingness to play tends to increase. Also, when selecting a game table, it is no longer necessary to consider the state of the game nail, and the player can concentrate on estimating the set values of the game table.

The above description using FIGS. 123 to 125 and the description using FIGS. 85 to 109 can be appropriately combined.

According to the above description,
``shooting means [for example, the shooting device 110] for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the amount of operation by the player;
an out port [e.g., out port 240];
Starting port [for example, the first special figure starting port 230],
A game machine comprising
A first region [for example, a low chance region 1241L] provided on the upstream side of the out port;
A second region [e.g., high chance region 1242H] provided upstream of the starting port;
with
When the game ball that has passed through the first area reaches the out port If you do not win a prize],
A game ball that has passed through the second area reaches the starting port [for example, the game ball passes through the first ball passage 2681 and reaches the rotor unit 28],
The starting port does not reach the game ball that has passed through the first area,
A game ball can be shot into either one of the first area and the second area by the shooting means,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to concentrate the players so that the game balls go to the second area. That is, the player can aim at the second area by adjusting the amount of operation of the shooting means, and the player can concentrate on aiming at the second area.

again,
"A game board [e.g., game board 200] provided with the out port and the start port is provided, and the first area is located on one side [e.g., the left side] of the center of the game board in the left-right direction. area,
The second region is also a region located on the one side [e.g., left side],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, the player can concentrate on the position where the game ball is shot. That is, since the first area and the second area are located on the same side, it is not enough for the player to simply aim at the area located on the one side. A game ball must be aimed and shot at an area located on one side, which can concentrate the player. Also, if the first area and the second area are adjacent areas, the player may need to finely adjust the operation amount of the shooting means, and may enjoy the adjustment. .

again,
``Equipped with a ball direction changing means [for example, the third ball direction changing unit 263] that changes the route to which the game ball is directed by changing the state,
The ball direction changing means reaches the game ball that has passed through the second area,
The ball direction changing means can be changed to a second state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2631 is directed to the right] for directing the game ball to a second route [for example, the second ball route Rt2]. can be,
The ball direction changing means can be changed to a third state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2631 is directed to the left] for directing the game ball to a third route [for example, the third ball route Rt3]. can be,
The second route is a route toward the start port,
The third route is a route that does not go to the starting port,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Interest in the game is improved depending on whether or not the game ball goes to the second route.

The ball direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball.

again,
"No game nail is provided between the second area and the ball direction changing means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

As long as the game ball can be shot into the second area, the player can expect the ball to enter the starting hole according to the state of the ball direction changing means without considering the state of the game nail, etc. The player's willingness to play is likely to increase.

again,
``Setting value setting means [for example, setting change key 192 and setting change button 194] that can set any one setting value from a plurality of setting values [for example, setting 1 to setting 6] that have different advantages for the player. ] is provided. 』
also explained.

Since the game nail is not provided between the second area and the ball direction changing means, it is not necessary to consider the state of the game nail, and the player can set the game machine when selecting the game machine. You can concentrate on guessing the value.

again,
`` A first route [for example, a first ball route Rt1] passed by a game ball that has passed through the first area is provided,
Said first route is a route where gaming balls passing through said third route join,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The game balls that do not go to the second route can be removed from the player's consciousness, and the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the game balls that pass through the second route.

Note that the first route is a route toward the out port.

again,
"Equipped with a winning opening [for example, the first general winning opening 226A, the second general winning opening 226B],
A game ball that has passed through the first area [for example, a game ball that has passed through the low chance area 1241L and exited the first ball route Rt1] may reach the winning opening.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the game ball is shot to the first area in spite of aiming at the second area, the player can expect to win a prize in the winning hole, and the player is immediately disappointed. You can get rid of it.

That is, the winning hole may reach before the game ball that has passed through the first area reaches the out hole [for example, the out hole 240]. In addition, game balls that have passed through the first route may reach the winning opening.

According to the above description,
"A game machine on which a plurality of types of ball delay means are arranged,
One type of spherical delay means among the plurality of types of ball delay means is a first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay part having an inverted conical surface (zone entrance ball delay part 2650, first upstream ball delay part 2651 , first downstream sphere delay unit 2652)],
One type of ball delay means among the plurality of types of ball delay means is the second ball delay means [for example, deceleration rib 26r1 or ball trajectory change rib 26r3],
The first ball delay means is capable of slowing down the movement speed of the game ball by giving a first change to the movement of the game ball [for example, a change of spiral rotation],
The second ball delay means is capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball by giving a second change to the movement of the game ball (for example, a change of swinging in the front-rear direction),
The first change and the second change are different changes,
said first sphere delay means and said second sphere delay means are arranged in a common sphere path [e.g. zone sphere path 26Z1];
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to hit the game machine to illegally manipulate the behavior of a game ball, such as a so-called thud. That is, even if an attempt is made to delay the movement of the game ball by hitting the game table and adjust the arrival timing of the game ball, etc., to the timing desired by the cheater, two types of ball delay means are arranged in the common ball passage. In this case, two types of ball delay means are used to delay the ball respectively, and the timing that the fraudulent person has carefully adjusted becomes out of order, and there is no point in doing the pounding. In addition, the two types of ball delay means may have different delay times, making it extremely difficult to match desired timings.

In addition, the first ball delay means may, for example, give a rotating change to the movement of the game ball, and the second ball delay means may give, for example, a swing change to the movement of the game ball. may be provided.

again,
"Movable means [for example, the third ball direction changing part 263, the first ball direction changing part 261, the rotating body unit 28] that may change the player's advantage depending on the timing at which the game ball arrives,
The movable means is provided downstream of the first ball delay means,
The movable means is provided downstream of the second ball delay means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if an attempt is made to adjust the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable means by hitting the game table, two types of ball delay means delay the timing, making it difficult for the cheater to match the timing desired.

The movable means may be a ball direction changing means that changes the route of the game ball by moving the movable part, and the movement of the movable part makes it easy for the ball to enter the starting hole. It may be a character that becomes difficult or becomes difficult.

again,
"Equipped with a starting port [for example, the first special figure starting port 230],
The movable means may reach a game ball that has passed through the ball passage [for example, the rotating body unit 28],
The movable means operates a movable portion [for example, a pair of ball receiving openings 2831 and 2832 and a pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834] to move a ball into the starting opening. It changes the state between the state where it is impossible to enter the ball,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the game table is hit to match the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable means when it is easy to enter the ball, two types of ball delay means delay the timing, respectively, and the timing desired by the cheater is achieved. It becomes difficult to match.

It should be noted that the movable means may change the state between a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the starting port and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the starting port by operating the movable portion. good.

again,
"Equipped with a starting port [for example, the first special figure starting port 230],
The movable means is reached by a game ball passing through the ball passage,
The movable means is a ball direction changing means [for example, the third ball direction changing part 263] that changes the route of the game ball by moving the movable part,
The ball direction changing means may direct the game ball to a second route [for example, a second ball route Rt2],
The ball direction changing means may direct the game ball to a third route [for example, a third ball route Rt3],
The second route is a route toward the start port,
The third route is a route that does not go to the starting port,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even when the game table is hit to match the timing of the game ball reaching the ball direction changing means with the timing of the movable part directing the game ball to the second route, two types of ball delay means delay the game ball. This makes it difficult to match the timing desired by the cheater.

again,
``The ball passage comprises, from the upstream side, at least the first ball delay means [e.g. deceleration rib 26r1], and the first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay part having an inverted conical surface (first upstream ball delay part 2651)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By alternately arranging ball delay means of different types in this manner, it becomes more difficult to match the timing by hitting the game table.

In the ball passage, a plurality of ball delay means are arranged in the order of the first ball delay means, the second ball delay means, and the first ball delay means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It can be anything.

again,
``The ball passage includes, from the upstream side, at least the second ball delay means [for example, the deceleration rib 26r1], the first ball delay means [for example, a ball delay portion having an inverted conical surface (first upstream ball the delay unit 2651)], and the second ball delay means [for example, the deceleration rib 26r1] are arranged in this order.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By alternately arranging ball delay means of different types in this manner, it becomes more difficult to match the timing by hitting the game table.

In the ball passage, a plurality of ball delay means are arranged in the order of the second ball delay means, the first ball delay means, and the second ball delay means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It can be anything.

again,
"The first ball delay means provides a change of rotation [for example, a change of spiral rotation] to the movement of the game ball as the first change,
The second ball delay means provides a swinging change [for example, a swinging change in the front-rear direction] as the second change to the movement of the game ball.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the motion of the game ball is different between the first ball delay means and the second ball delay means, the delay time tends to be different, and it becomes more difficult to match the timing by hitting the game table.

again,
"The first ball delay means has a part through which the game ball passes, the width of which is narrower on the downstream side [e.g. width W3] than on the upstream side [e.g. width W1],
The width is the length in one direction [e.g., the inner diameter] in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to delay the movement speed of the game ball that has come into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means by making it easier for the game ball to come into contact with the wall surface.

Also, the first ball delay means, even if the part through which the game ball passes is composed of an inverted conical surface [for example, an inverted conical surface 2653c] that gradually decreases in diameter toward the downstream side good. By doing so, the game ball that has come into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means goes downstream while circling along the wall surface. That is, it is possible to slow down the moving speed of the game ball while moving in a spiral toward the downstream side. If the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means is delayed, the time for the game ball to go downstream while circling along the wall surface is shortened, and the moving speed of the game ball is reduced. decrease in proportion. Furthermore, when the game ball does not contact the wall surface constituting the first ball delay means, the moving speed of the game ball does not decrease. As described above, the degree of decrease in the moving speed of the game ball is not fixed, and the moving speed of the game ball becomes random. By doing so, it is also possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts such as poking.

again,
``The second ball delay means is one that protrudes into the ball passage [for example, the deceleration rib 26r1 or the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second ball delay means may project forward into the ball passage. By this second ball delay means, the game ball swings in the front-rear direction and the movement speed of the game ball is reduced.

The first ball delay means may project into the ball passage in a first direction, and the second ball delay means may project into the ball passage in a second direction. . The first direction and the second direction are different, for example, the first direction is a lateral direction, and the first ball delay means causes the game ball to swing in the left-right direction, thereby causing the game ball to swing. Decreases ball movement speed. The second direction is the forward direction, and the second ball delay means swings the game ball in the front-rear direction to reduce the moving speed of the game ball. In other words, the first ball delay means may give a change in the motion of the game ball to swing in a third direction (e.g., left-right direction), and the second ball delay means may A fourth direction (for example, forward and backward direction) may be applied to the movement of the ball.

According to the above description,
"A game machine with a first ball passage [e.g., inner ball passage 226Ur],
The first ball passage is provided with a first winning opening [for example, the first general winning opening 226A],
The first ball passage is provided with a second winning opening [for example, the second general winning opening 226B],
The first winning port can win a game ball that has passed through a common area [for example, an entrance IN that is an upstream end] in the first ball passage,
The second winning hole is a game ball that has passed through the common area can win,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, both the first winning hole and the second winning hole are provided in the common area, rather than the ball entrance and the winning hole having a one-to-one relationship. The game area (here, the first ball passage) can be made more compact if the two balls are in a paired relationship.

again,
"The first prize winning opening is arranged upstream of the second winning opening,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A player can be made to expect that a game ball will enter the second winning hole even if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole.

again,
"The first prize winning opening is opened in the wall surface [for example, the winning opening opening plate 226U3],
If the game ball that has entered the first ball passage wins the first winning hole, it passes through the first winning hole and is downstream of the position where the first winning hole is provided. configured to reach the side of the
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first winning hole also utilizes the space in the front-rear direction, and the first ball passage can be made compact. In addition, it is possible to enjoy what happens to the game ball that has passed through the first winning hole.

again,
"A second ball passage [for example, a passage connecting the downstream end Rt1e of the first ball route Rt1 and the tip of the extended ball passage 226U1] formed by a game nail [for example, the game nail 238],
The first ball passage is a passage into which game balls that have passed through the second ball passage enter,
The first ball passage is a ball passage that is not provided with a game nail,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In the second ball passage, the player may be worried about which direction the game ball will go due to the influence of the game nail, but once the game ball reaches the first ball passage, the game can be played. The player does not have to worry about the influence of the nail, and can enjoy the game ball with a sense of security.

again,
"The first ball passage is formed in a ball passage unit [for example, a ball passage unit for general winning opening 226U],
At least a part of the ball passage unit [for example, the part of the transparent plate 226U5] is transparent or translucent so that the first winning hole can be visually recognized by the player.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It becomes easy to confirm how the game ball enters the first winning hole.

again,
"The first prize winning opening is open in the front-rear direction,
The second prize winning opening is opened in the vertical direction,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is easier to check how the game ball wins in the first winning hole than in the second winning hole.

again,
"The first and second winning openings are general winning openings with the same number of winning balls [for example, 4],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It can be expected that the game balls that did not enter the winning hole on the upstream side will enter the winning hole on the downstream side, which is the general winning hole with the same number of prize balls.

again,
"Among the first winning opening and the second winning opening, the winning opening arranged on the downstream side [for example, the second general winning opening 226B] is the winning opening arranged on the upstream side [for example, The first general winning opening 226A] is configured to be easier to win [for example, the difference in the opening direction of the winning opening],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It can be expected that a game ball that has not won a prize in the winning hole arranged on the upstream side will win a prize in the winning hole arranged on the downstream side.

again,
"A game ball that did not win a winning opening arranged on the upstream side of the first winning opening and the second winning opening [for example, the first general winning opening 226A] is placed on the downstream side. It is configured so that there are times when it wins an opening [for example, the second general winning opening 226B], and there are times when it goes to the out opening [for example, the out opening 240] [for example, when it jumps out of the out opening 226Uo]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, it is configured so that a game ball that does not enter the winning hole arranged on the upstream side of the first winning hole and the second winning hole may go to the out hole, and the game ball is out. When it does not go to the opening, it is configured to win a winning opening arranged on the downstream side of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

Next, the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of an effect movable body unit.

FIG. 126(a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect movable body unit 27U, in which the diagonal left front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the diagonal right rear side of the paper surface is the rear side.

The effect movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126 is composed of, from the front side, a three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1, a double-sided tape 27U2, a light guide plate 27U3, a light emitting substrate 27U4, and an attachment base member 27U5. The external shapes of the double-sided tape 27U2, the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the external shape of the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1. These constituent members 27U1 to 27U5 including the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 are fixed by screws 27U6 as will be described later in detail, and are integrated.

The three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1 is formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm, like the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 shown in FIG. 110 and the like. It is. In other words, it is not an injection-molded product, so the mold manufacturing cost is kept low and the mold manufacturing period is short. In FIG. 126(a), the arrangement of the exploded perspective views shows the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 as seen from the front side, and above it, the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 as seen from the rear side (back side). It also shows the situation. This three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 has a three-dimensional portion 27U1S in which a star-shaped portion is three-dimensionally formed. The three-dimensional portion 27U1S has a three-dimensional shape in which the central point of the star shape protrudes most forward. The three-dimensional portion 27U1S is a portion that has transparency as a whole. Incidentally, the term "transparency" as used herein may be transparent or translucent. The peripheral portion 27U1F surrounding the three-dimensional portion 27U1S may also be three-dimensionally decorated, but in this example, both the front surface (front surface) FS1 and the rear surface (back surface) BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F are planar. . A boss portion BSP is attached to the rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F. The boss BSP is cylindrical and has a screw hole at its center. Note that the rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F in this example is not subjected to any processing other than the attachment of the boss portion, and remains the surface of the planar resin film.

Note that the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 may be formed using a material suitable for its weight and strength, and is not limited to a resin film having a thickness of about 0.01 mm. It may be formed using a sheet of 1 mm to less than 0.8 mm, a plate of 0.8 mm or more, or the like.

The double-sided tape 27U2 has a center portion 27U2C cut out in a star shape to match the shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S. A through hole 27U21 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates is also provided. Furthermore, when integrated, a relief hole 27U22 that is one size larger than the light emitting diode SLED is provided at a position where the light emitting diode SLED described later is located, according to the shape of the light emitting diode SLED. This double-faced tape 27U2 is impermeable and, for example, entirely black. Also, the double-sided tape 27U2 may be thin with a thickness of 1 mm or less, or thick with a thickness exceeding 1 mm and having cushioning properties.

The light guide plate 27U3 is a flat optical member having a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region 27U31. That is, the front surface of the light guide plate 27U3 is flat. Light is incident on the light guide plate 27U3 from the side, and the incident light is reflected forward by the cut portion of the lens, so that the inside of the transmissive region 27U31 appears to emit light. In this figure, the lens cut portion is schematically represented by a one-dot chain line. The transmissive region 27U31 is provided according to the three-dimensional portion 27U1S, and the light emitted forward from the transmissive region 27U31 illuminates the three-dimensional portion 27U1S from behind. Note that the size, position, and shape of the transmissive region 27U31 do not need to completely match the size, position, and shape of the three-dimensional portion 27U1S. Further, the light guide plate 27U3 is provided with a storage portion 27U32 in which a light emitting diode SLED described later is stored, and the light emitting diode SLED is stored inside the storage portion 27U32. Although the storage portion 27U32 is an opening in this example, it may be a notch. Further, the light guide plate 27U3 is also provided with a through hole 27U33 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

The light emitting board 27U4 is obtained by mounting a plurality of light emitting diodes SLED on the printed board 27UPB. These light-emitting diodes SLED project forward, emit light from the side, and emit light in the lateral direction. In the housing portion 27U32 of the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitted sideways from the housed light-emitting diodes SLED enters from the thickness portion of the light guide plate 27U3, which is the edge defining the housing portion 27U32, and travels to the transmission region 27U31. The light emitting substrate 27U4 is also provided with a through hole 27U41 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

The mounting base member 27U5 is a member having higher strength than the resin film forming the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1. The mounting base member 27U5 is provided with a boss receiving portion 27U51 against which the boss portion BSP abuts. The boss receiving portion 27U51 is composed of a through hole provided in the mounting base member 27U5 and an edge portion defining the through hole on the front surface of the mounting base member 27U5. be. Further, the mounting base member 27U5 is lightened by cutting out a large central portion 27U5C.

The three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate 27U3 with a double-sided tape 27U2. As described above, the rear surface BS1 of the peripheral portion 27U1F remains as a flat surface of the resin film except that the boss portion is attached, so that the double-faced tape 27U2 can be easily attached to the light guide plate 27U3. When performing this attachment, the boss portion BSP penetrates through the through hole 27U21 of the double-sided tape 27U2 and also penetrates through the through hole 27U33 of the light guide plate 27U3. When the boss portion BSP passes through these through holes 27U21 and 27U33, alignment is performed and accurate positioning is achieved. A light-emitting substrate 27U4 is prepared on the rear surface side of the light guide plate 27U3 to which the three-dimensional film ornament 27U1 is pasted on the front surface, and the boss portion BSP is aligned with the through-hole 27U41 of the light-emitting substrate 27U4 and passed through the through-hole 27U41. . By doing so, the light guide plate 27U3 and the light emitting substrate 27U4 are accurately positioned, and the light emitting diodes SLED of the light emitting substrate 27U4 are accommodated in the storage portions 27U32 of the light guide plate 27U3. The projecting direction end surface (front surface) of the light emitting diode SLED projecting forward is housed in the housing portion 27U32. Even if the protruding tip surface of the light emitting diode SLED were to protrude from the housing portion 27U32, it would be received in the escape hole 27U22. Finally, the light guide plate 27U3 and the light emitting substrate 27U4 with which the boss BSP of the three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1 communicates are attached to the attachment base member 27U5 using screws 27U6. The tip of the boss portion BSP abuts against the boss receiving portion 27U51 of the mounting base member 27U5. That is, the tip of the boss BSP abuts against the edge defining the threaded through hole. At this time, positioning is easy, and by performing accurate positioning, the threaded through hole in the boss receiving portion 27U51 and the screw hole provided in the central portion of the boss portion BSP are connected in a straight line. By inserting a screw 27U6 there and screwing it, the light guide plate 27U3 with the three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1 attached to the front surface with the double-sided tape 27U2, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are firmly integrated. , and the effect movable body unit 27U is completed.

FIG. 126(b) is a side view of the completed effect movable body unit 27U. In this side view, the left side is the front side and the right side is the rear side. In the effect movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126(b), the three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1, the double-sided tape 27U2, the light guide plate 27U3, the light emitting substrate 27U4, and the mounting base member 27U5 are arranged in this order from the front side, and the screw 27U6 is installed from the rear side. These constituent members 27U1 to 27U5 are integrated by being inserted. It should be noted that there are structural members (for example, the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1, etc.) whose thickness is exaggerated. As shown in FIG. 126(b), it can be seen that the three-dimensional portion 27U1S protrudes forward. The effect movable body unit 27U is disposed above the decorative pattern display device 208 so as to be able to move up and down, and moves up and down in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as one unit. According to the effect movable body unit 27U, the three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1 can be fixed so as not to come off even if it is moved while performing the light emission effect in which the three-dimensional part 27U1S emits light.

In the production movable body unit 27U shown in FIG. 126, the double-sided tape 27U2 is entirely black. The light from the transmissive region 27U31 reaches the three-dimensional portion 27U1S without being blocked by the double-sided tape 27U2, and the three-dimensional portion 27U1S that is entirely transmissive is illuminated from behind to perform a light emitting effect. Note that the double-sided tape 27U2 may be transparent or translucent.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect movable body unit 27U shown in FIG.

The effect movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127 is composed of, from the front side, a three-dimensional film decoration body 28U1, a double-sided tape 28U2, a mounting base member 28U5, and a light emitting substrate 28U4 in that order. In this example as well, the external shape of each of the double-sided tape 28U2, the mounting base member 28U5, and the light emitting substrate 28U4 is substantially the same as the external shape of the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1 or slightly smaller than that of the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1. These components, including the , are fixed by screws 28U6 and become integral.

This three-dimensional film decoration 28U1 is also formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) having a thickness of about 0.01 mm. In FIG. 127(a), the arrangement of the exploded perspective views shows the three-dimensional film decoration body 28U1 as seen from the front side, and above it, the three-dimensional film decoration body 28U1 as seen from the rear side (back side). It also shows the situation. Like the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 shown in FIG. 126, this three-dimensional film decoration 28U1 also has a three-dimensional portion 28U1S in which a star-shaped portion is three-dimensionally formed, but the three-dimensional shape is different. Also, the small similar star-shaped portion provided in the central portion of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S is impermeable, and is blacked out in this drawing, and the line representing the three-dimensional shape is shown in white. Note that the small star-shaped portion in the center may have a planar shape instead of a three-dimensional shape. Moreover, in the three-dimensional film decoration body 28U1, a three-dimensional decoration is also applied to the peripheral portion 28U1F surrounding the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. A zigzag line shown on the front surface (front surface) FS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is a line representing a three-dimensional shape. On the other hand, the rear surface (back surface) BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is coated with silicon resin and finished in a planar shape. In this figure, the applied silicone resin is represented by hatching. Since the rear surface (back surface) BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is coated with silicone resin, the peripheral portion 28U1F is an impermeable region. A boss portion BSP, which is the same as the three-dimensional film decoration body 27U1 shown in FIG. 126, is attached to the rear surface BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F.

The double-sided tape 28U2 is entirely transparent, and is not cut out to match the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. Also, no escape hole for the light emitting diode is provided, and only a through hole 28U21 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates is provided. The thickness of the double-sided tape 28U2 may also be 1 mm or less, or may be a thickness exceeding 1 mm with cushioning properties.

Unlike the movable effect unit 27U shown in FIG. 126, the movable effect unit 28U shown in FIG. 127 is not provided with a light guide plate. are placed. That is, the front surface of this mounting base member 28U5 is flat. A mounting base member 28U5 shown in FIG. 127 is also a member having a higher strength than the resin film forming the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1. The mounting base member 28U5 also has a lens function. The lens function referred to here is a function of refracting light from the rear side and diffusing or focusing the light toward the front side. However, the transparent mounting base member 28U5 may be a simple transparent plate with high strength. Furthermore, it may be provided with cutouts that match the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S, and in this case, it need not be transparent and may be impermeable. The mounting base member 28U5 is provided with a through hole 28U51 through which the boss portion BSP penetrates.

A light-emitting board 28U4 shown in FIG. 127 has a plurality of light-emitting diodes FLED mounted on a printed board 28UPB, like the light-emitting board 27U4 shown in FIG. However, these light-emitting diodes FLED emit light from the front surfaces protruding forward, and the direction of light emission is forward. The front emitting light emitting diode FLED is provided at a position inside the three-dimensional portion 28U1S, but may be provided at a position outside the three-dimensional portion 28U1S. Further, the light emitting substrate 28U4 is provided with a boss receiving portion 28U41 against which the boss portion BSP abuts. The boss receiving portion 28U41 is cylindrical and protrudes forward, and has a threaded groove in the central through hole. This boss receiving portion 28U41 is longer than the projecting length of the light emitting diode FLED projecting forward, and also serves to secure a space for the light emitting diode FLED.

The three-dimensional film decoration 28U1 is attached to the front surface of the installation base member 28U5, which is also transparent in its entirety, by means of a double-sided tape 28U2, which is transparent in its entirety. As described above, the rear surface BS2 of the peripheral portion 28U1F is coated with silicone resin and finished in a planar shape, so that the double-sided tape 28U2 can be easily attached, and the mounting base member 28U5 can also be easily attached. When performing this attachment, the boss portion BSP penetrates through the through hole 28U21 of the double-sided tape 28U2 and also penetrates through the through hole 28U51 of the mounting base member 28U5. When the boss portion BSP passes through these through holes 28U21 and 28U51, alignment is performed and accurate positioning is achieved. Next, the attachment base member 28U5 through which the boss portion BSP of the stereoscopic film decoration 28U1 is inserted is attached to the light emitting substrate 28U4 using screws 28U6. First, the tip of the boss portion BSP is brought into contact with the boss receiving portion 28U41 of the light emitting substrate 28U4. At this time, positioning is easy, and by performing accurate positioning, the through hole provided in the central portion of the boss receiving portion 28U41 and the screw hole provided in the central portion of the boss portion BSP are connected in a straight line. By inserting a screw 28U6 there and screwing it, the mounting base member 28U5 to which the three-dimensional film decorative body 28U1 is attached on the front surface with the double-sided tape 28U2 and the light emitting substrate 28U4 are firmly integrated to form a movable body for presentation. Unit 28U is completed.

In the effect movable body unit 28U shown in FIG. 127, a transparent double-sided tape 28U2 is used as a whole, so that the light from the front light emitting diode FLED reaches the three-dimensional part 28U1S without being blocked by the double-sided tape 28U2. A three-dimensional part 28U1S having a transmissive part is illuminated from behind, and a light emitting effect is performed. As the double-sided tape 28U2, an entirely transparent tape may be used, and a central portion cut out in accordance with the shape of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S may be used like the double-sided tape 27U2 shown in FIG. This effect movable body unit 28U is also disposed above the decorative pattern display device 208 so as to be able to move up and down, and moves up and down in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as one body. Even with this effect movable body unit 28U, the three-dimensional film decoration body 28U1 can be fixed so as not to come off even if it moves, while performing the light emission effect in which the three-dimensional part 28U1S emits light.

126 and 127 can be applied to a fixed effect unit such as the first stereoscopic film effect 271 shown in FIG. 110. is also possible.

The above description using FIGS. 126 to 127 and the description using FIGS. 110 to 118 can be appropriately combined. For example, the first stereoscopic film effect body 271, the second stereoscopic film effect body 272, the third stereoscopic film effect body 273, and the fourth stereoscopic film effect body 274 shown in FIG. 126 and 127 can be combined or applied. On the contrary, the effect movable body unit 27U and the effect movable body unit 28U may be fixed effect units, and it is possible to combine and apply what has been described using FIGS. 110 to 118. .

According to the above description,
"Light-emitting substrates [e.g., light-emitting substrate 27U4, light-emitting substrate 28U4] on which light-emitting elements [e.g., side-emission light-emitting diode SLED, front-emission light-emitting diode FLED] are mounted;
a decoration having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 and a three-dimensional film decoration 28U1];
A game machine comprising
The decorative body has a transparent portion (hereinafter referred to as a “first portion”) that transmits light from the light emitting element (for example, the entire three-dimensional portion 27U1S, part of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S). can be,
The decorative body has a second portion different from the first portion [for example, the peripheral portion 27U1F, the peripheral portion 28U1F],
The second portion is a portion surrounding the first portion,
The decorative body is affixed to a member arranged on the rear side of the first portion without blocking light from the light emitting element,
The member is arranged on the rear side of the second portion,
The member is an optical member [for example, a light guide plate 27U3, a mounting base member 28U5 that also functions as a lens].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.
again,
"Equipped with affixing means [for example, double-sided tape 27U2] arranged on the back surface of the second part,
The decorative body is affixed to the member by the affixing means,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
again,
"The first portion is a portion having a portion that protrudes forward,
a space exists between the first portion and the member;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
Also, according to the above description,
"Light-emitting substrates [e.g., light-emitting substrate 27U4, light-emitting substrate 28U4] on which light-emitting elements [e.g., side-emission light-emitting diode SLED, front-emission light-emitting diode FLED] are mounted;
a decoration having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a three-dimensional film decoration 27U1 and a three-dimensional film decoration 28U1];
A game machine comprising
The decorative body has a transparent portion (hereinafter referred to as a “first portion”) that transmits light from the light emitting element (for example, the entire three-dimensional portion 27U1S, part of the three-dimensional portion 28U1S). can be,
The decorative body is attached to a member (for example, the light guide plate 27U3, the mounting base member 28U5) arranged behind the decorative body without blocking the light from the light emitting element. A playground. 』
also explained.

The decorative body can be fixed while performing a lighting effect in which the first portion emits light.

The member arranged behind the decorative body may be a member arranged forward of the light emitting substrate. More specifically, it may be a light guide plate, a lens plate, or a base member (mounting plate) having a higher strength than the decorative body. Further, the decoration body may have the first portion having a three-dimensional shape, or may have the first portion having no three-dimensional shape. Alternatively, part of the three-dimensional portion of the decorative body may be the first portion, or all of the three-dimensional portion may be the first portion.

again,
"Equipped with sticking means [for example, double-sided tape 27U2],
The decorative body is attached to the member by the attaching means,
The pasting means is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the first part [for example, is cut out according to the shape of the three-dimensional part 27U1S].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Equipped with sticking means [for example, double-sided tape 28U2],
The decorative body is attached to the member by the attaching means,
The pasting means is transparent [for example, transparent as a whole],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The decoration body has a second part different from the first part [for example, the peripheral part 27U1F, the peripheral part 28U1F],
The sticking means is arranged on the back surface of the second part [for example, BS1, BS2],
The second part has a flat part where the sticking means is arranged [for example, the surface of a planar resin film is left as it is, or a silicon resin is applied and finished in a planar shape].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

This configuration makes it easier to attach the decorative body to the member.

The second portion may be a portion surrounding the first portion. Moreover, the decorative body may have a three-dimensional portion on the front side and a flat plate portion on the back side. For example, the decorative body may have a three-dimensional shape formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming, and may have a flat plate portion formed by applying a silicone material to the back surface.

again,
"The second part has a protrusion [for example, boss part BSP] on the back surface,
The member is provided with an alignment portion [for example, a through hole 27U33, a through hole 28U51] that is aligned with the protrusion.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The decorative body and the member are accurately positioned by the protrusion and the positioning portion.

The alignment portion may be a portion into which the projection is fitted, a portion through which the projection is inserted, or a portion against which the projection is abutted. .

again,
"The alignment portion is through which the protrusion is inserted,
The protrusion has a boss shape to which a screw is screwed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The decoration is firmly fixed by the screw.

The decorative body may have a three-dimensional shape formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming, and may have a back surface coated with a silicon material and a boss portion attached thereto.

again,
``The member is a transmissive one arranged in front of the light emitting substrate [for example, the light guide plate 27U3, and the mounting base member 28U5 that is entirely transparent].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A light emitting effect is performed in which the light from the light emitting element is transmitted through the member and the first portion emits light.

Note that the member may be an optical member.

again,
"The member is one that does not overlap with the light emitting element [for example, the light emitting diode SLED that emits light from the side] [for example, the light guide plate 27U3 provided with the storage part 27U32 for storing the light emitting diode SLED].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The member can function as a light guide plate.

The light emitting element may emit light in a lateral direction.

again,
"The member overlaps with the light-emitting element [e.g., front-emitting light-emitting diode FLED] [e.g., mounting base member 28U5 that also functions as a lens].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The member can function as a lens plate.

The light emitting element may emit light forward.

again,
"The light emitting substrate [for example, the light emitting substrate 27U4, the light emitting substrate 28U4], the decoration [for example, the three-dimensional film decoration 27U1, the three-dimensional film decoration 28U1], and the members [for example, the light guide plate 27U3, the mounting base member 28U5 ] At least a production unit [for example, production movable body unit 27U, production movable body unit 28U],
The production unit is a movable unit,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the effect unit is a movable unit in which the light emitting substrate, the decorative body, and the member are integrated.

According to this configuration, even if the decoration is moved, it becomes difficult to come off.

Next, the handle unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128(a) is an external perspective view of the handle unit, and FIG. 128(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit.

As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 128(b), the handle unit HU includes a cylindrical handle base 82 fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage plate of the pachinko machine 100, and a space inside the handle base 82. a handle detector 84 that is mounted on the handle base 82, a dial 86 that is arranged in the opening of the handle base 82 and is slidable with respect to the handle base 82, and a dial 86 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle base 82 with the dial 86 interposed therebetween. It has a steering wheel illumination part 88 and a steering wheel cover 89 used for production. 85 and the like, the combination of the handle cover 89 and the dial 86 is called the firing handle 134, but the dial of the firing handle 134 in FIG. 85 and the dial 86 shown in FIG. They are different, but the functionality is the same.

The handle base 82 is composed of a small-diameter portion 821 and a large-diameter portion 822 formed continuously from one end of the small-diameter portion 821 . A dial guide groove 822a into which the dial 86 can be fitted and slidable is formed along the entire periphery of the outer edge of the opening of the large diameter portion 822 . A first shaft portion 822b, a second shaft portion 822c, and a third shaft portion 822d for fixing and supporting the handle lighting board mounting base 881 of the handle lighting portion 88 stand in the inner space of the large diameter portion 822. is set.

By engaging with the first guide groove 861 of the dial 86, the first shaft portion 822b functions as a member that guides the dial 86 in a predetermined direction and limits the rotation range (minimum amount of rotation) of the dial 86. The second shaft portion 822c engages with the second guide groove 862 of the dial 86, thereby guiding the dial 86 in a predetermined direction and limiting the rotation range (maximum amount of rotation) of the dial 86. also works.

The handle detection unit 84 includes a launch spring 841 for biasing the dial 86 toward the initial position, a transmission gear 842 connected to the dial 86, a volume gear 843 meshing with the transmission gear 842, and a transmission gear 842. A volume bracket 844 that rotatably holds and also rotatably holds the volume gear 843, a touch switch 845 disposed on the volume bracket 844, a firing stop lever 846 rotatably supported on the volume bracket 844, It also has a firing stop switch 847 capable of detecting the state of this firing stop lever 846 .

The transmission gear 842 has a ball portion 8421 and a gear portion 8422 . The ball portion 8421 is provided with a notch portion CT cut from the front side to the rear side. The notch CT is gradually narrowed toward the rear side. A detailed description of these components will be given later, but when the dial 86 rotates, the transmission gear 842 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 86, and meshes with the volume gear 843. The amount of rotation of 86 is transmitted to volume gear 843 via transmission gear 842 . The volume gear 843 is composed of a potentiometer (variable resistor) capable of detecting the rotation angle of the dial 86, and can output information on the detected rotation angle to the outside as a firing intensity adjustment signal. This volume gear 843 is electrically connected to a firing control section (not shown) by a harness (not shown), and the firing control section can detect the rotation angle of the dial 86 based on a firing intensity adjustment signal. be. The shooting control section controls the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the rotation angle of the dial 86 detected.

The touch switch 845 is composed of a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the dial 86 is being held by the player (whether or not the player is touching the dial 86). This touch switch 845 is electrically connected to a firing control unit (not shown) by a harness (not shown). It is possible to determine whether it is gripped (whether the player is touching the dial 86). In addition, the shooting control section also determines whether or not to shoot the game ball based on the determination result. When it is determined that the player has not touched the dial 86, even if the dial 86 is rotated, the shooting operation is not performed.

The firing stop switch 847 is composed of a sensor capable of detecting whether or not the firing stop lever 846 is pressed. This firing stop switch 847 is electrically connected to a firing control section (not shown) by a harness (not shown). It is possible to determine whether or not 846 is being pressed. In addition, the shooting control section also determines whether or not to shoot the game ball based on the determination result. When it is determined that the firing stop lever 846 is pressed down, even if the dial 86 is rotated, the shooting operation is not performed.

The dial 86 has a first guide portion 861 engaged with the first shaft portion 822b of the handle base 82 and a second guide portion engaged with the second shaft portion 822c of the handle base 82 inside the operation portion 860. 862. Further, the operation portion 860 is provided with two operation convex portions 863 and 864 projecting outward. By placing a finger on these operation projections 863 and 864, the dial 86 can be easily rotated. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, a boss portion 865 is provided at the center of the dial 86 and this boss portion 865 is connected to the transmission gear 842 .

The handle lighting unit 88 has a handle lighting board mounting base 881 fixed to the handle base 82 and a handle lighting board 882 mounted on the handle lighting board mounting base 881 . The members (881 to 883) constituting these steering wheel lighting units 88 are covered with a hemispherical steering wheel cover 89. As shown in FIG.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the steering wheel illumination board 882 , and light emitted from these LEDs is delivered to the outside through the steering wheel cover 89 . The handle lighting board 882 is electrically connected to a firing control section (not shown) by a harness (not shown), and the firing control section can control the lighting of the LEDs mounted on the handle lighting board 882. This LED is used for production.

The handle cover 89 according to this embodiment is configured to rotate in conjunction with the dial 86 when the player rotates the dial 86, but only the dial 86 rotates. good too. Also, the handle cover 89 may be provided with a display function. Also, the handle cover 89 may be provided with functions of a rental operation button and a return operation button.

129A and 129B are views showing the dial 86. FIG. 129A is a view of the dial 86 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 129B is a view of the dial 86 viewed from the rear side.

FIG. 129 shows an operation portion 860 provided with two operation projections 863 and 864 projecting outward. A first guide portion 861 and a second guide portion 862 are also shown inside the operation portion 860 .

Further, FIG. 129(b) also shows a rear surface 860b of the operation portion 860, and the rear surface 860b is provided with a plurality of ribs 860r protruding rearward at intervals in the circumferential direction. In the dial 86 shown in FIG. 129(b), a total of eight ribs 860r are provided at intervals of 45 degrees. Details of these ribs 860r will be described later.

Also shown in FIG. 129 are bosses 865 . A socket portion 8651 is provided at the central portion of the boss portion 865 . The ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is rotatably fitted into the socket portion 8651 from the rear side, and the dial 86 and the transmission gear 842 are connected by a ball joint structure. A part of the peripheral wall that defines the socket portion 8651 is provided with an engaging portion 8651t protruding inward. As shown in FIG. 129(a), the engaging portion 8651t is provided in the 2 o'clock direction when viewed from the front. This engaging portion 8651t enters into the notch portion CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 .

FIG. 130(a) is a diagram schematically showing the ball joint structure of the dial 86 and transmission gear 842. FIG. FIG. 130(a) shows the transmission gear 842, while only the boss portion 865 of the dial 86 is shown. This figure shows the boss portion 865 as viewed from the 2 o'clock direction in a front view. As described above, the socket portion 8651 is provided with the engaging portion 8651t in the 2 o'clock direction when viewed from the front. The notch CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 is also provided in the two o'clock direction of the ball portion 8421 when viewed from the front.

In FIG. 130(a), the left side of the figure is the front side and the right side is the rear side. In addition, the front side of the paper surface is the 2 o'clock direction in a front view, and the back side of the paper surface is the 8 o'clock direction. As is clear from FIG. 130(a), the notch CT gradually narrows toward the rear side. On the other hand, the engaging portion 8651t housed in the notch CT has the same thickness. At the rear end CTe of the notch CT, the engaging portion 8651t is engaged with the rear end CTe. The boss portion 865 is integrated with the operation portion 860 (see FIG. 129, etc.), and rotates together with the operation portion 860 when the operation portion 860 is rotated. When the boss portion 865 rotates, the rear end CTe of the notch CT is pushed by the engagement portion 8651t, and the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 rotates. The gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842 has a rotating shaft 8422a on the rotation center axis of the ball portion 8421, and the volume bracket 844 shown in FIG. 128(b) is provided with a bearing for the rotating shaft 8422a. As a result, the gear portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 86 .

On the other hand, a clearance CTC is provided between the opening edge CTa of the notch CT and the engaging portion 8651t. become movable. Therefore, even if the operation part 860 is pushed in any direction of 360 degrees, the load applied to the operation part 860 can be relieved by this clearance CTC. Therefore, the transmission gear 842 is less likely to break.

FIG. 130(b) is a diagram schematically showing the transmission gear 842 and the volume gear 843 as seen from the front side. In FIG. 130(a), the front side of the paper surface is the front side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear side. Note that FIG. 130(b) also shows the notch portion CT provided in the ball portion 8421 of the transmission gear 842. As shown in FIG.

A gear portion 8431 is formed on a part of the outer circumference of the volume gear 843 . This gear portion 8431 meshes with the gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842, and when the transmission gear 842 rotates, the volume gear 843 also rotates. As a result, the rotation angle of the dial 86 is detected by the volume gear 843 . Therefore, it is a premise that the gear portion 8422 of the transmission gear 842 and the volume gear 843 must always be in mesh.

Further, as shown in FIG. 130(b), the volume gear 843 is provided at a position deviated to the right by about 45 degrees from directly above the transmission gear 842. As shown in FIG.

Forces are applied to the operating portion 860 of the dial 86 from various directions, but all or part of the force is absorbed by the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. is not transmitted directly. Further, when a downward force is applied to the operation portion 860 of the dial 86, the transmission gear 842 is applied with an upward load. In this case, if the volume gear 843 is positioned directly above the transmission gear 842, the force not absorbed by the ball joint structure will be 100% applied to the volume gear 843 as an upward load. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130(b), if the volume gear 843 is positioned away from directly above the transmission gear 842, the load applied to the volume gear 843 is less than 100%, reducing damage to the volume gear 843. can do.

FIG. 131 is a diagram schematically showing the connection structure between the dial 86 and the handle base 82. As shown in FIG. In this FIG. 131, the left side of the figure is the front side and the right side is the rear side.

131 shows the handle cover 89, the dial 86 and the handle base 82. FIG. In FIG. 131, the two operation projections 863 and 864 provided on the operation portion 860 are both omitted. On the other hand, the rib 860r provided on the rear surface 860b of the operation portion 860, which was described in FIG. 129(b), is shown.

As described above, the handle base 82 is formed with a dial guide groove 822a in which the dial 86 can be fitted and slid along the front end of the handle base 82 along the entire circumference. In FIG. 131, lines representing grooves are omitted, but between this dial guide groove 822a and the rear end portion 86E of the dial 86 that fits into the dial guide groove 822a, there is a circumferential A gap S1 is ensured. Further, the rib 860r provided on the dial 86 protrudes rearward as described above. Between the rib 860r and the front edge 82f of the handle base 82, a space S2 is secured in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 131(b) shows a state in which a downward load is applied to the dial 86. As shown in FIG. The front side of the dial 86 shown in FIG. 131(b) is inclined downward. The reason why the dial 86 can be tilted in this way is due to the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. It depends on what is being done. Since the front side of the dial 86 is allowed to tilt downward, the downward load can be released to the handle base 82 side, and damage to the handle unit HU can be reduced. In addition, since the circumferential gap S1 and the longitudinal gap S2 are provided, the dial 86 and the handle base 82 are less likely to come into contact with each other, thereby reducing damage caused by contact between them. Furthermore, when the downward load is relieved to the handle base 82 side, the worn portion of the dial 86 can be suppressed to the projecting tip portion of the rib 860r.

In the example described above, the socket portion 8651 is on the dial 86 side and the ball portion 8421 is on the transmission gear 842 side. It may have a configuration of a socket portion.

According to the above description,
"A game machine comprising a handle unit [e.g., handle unit HU],
The handle unit
a rotatable dial [e.g. dial 86];
A volume [for example, a volume gear 843] that can change the shooting intensity of the game ball by rotating the dial;
having
A configuration in which the load applied to the dial by the player is not easily transmitted to the volume.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

In a conventional handle unit in which the volume is directly connected to the dial, there was an accident that the volume was damaged. Investigating the cause of this, it was found that the player applied a load (for example, a load that strongly pressed downward) to the dial, and the load damaged the volume. The handle unit is reusable, and according to this game machine, damage to the volume can be reduced, so that the handle unit can be easily reused.

It should be noted that a mode having a structure for reducing the load transmitted to the volume by the operation of the dial performed by the player may be employed. This mechanism may be the ball joint structure described with reference to FIG. may

again,
"The handle unit has transmission means [such as a transmission gear 842] that rotates when the dial rotates and transmits the amount of rotation of the dial to the volume."
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By using the transmission means, the load of the dial is not directly transmitted to the volume, and damage to the volume can be reduced.

The transmission means may be a rotary gear that meshes with the volume.

Also, the amount of rotation is a concept that includes a rotation angle.

again,
``The handle unit is provided at a position where the volume is not directly above the transmission means [for example, as shown in FIG. was given,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is assumed that the volume and the transmission means must be firmly connected so as to transmit the amount of rotation of the dial. On the other hand, if 100% of the load applied to the dial by the player is transmitted to the volume, the volume may be damaged. For example, when a downward load is applied to the dial, an upward load is applied to the transmission means. In this case, if the volume is located directly above the transmission means, 100% of the upward load will be applied to the volume. Less than 100% can be used to reduce breakage of the volume.

again,
``The handle unit has a ball joint structure in which the part of the dial connected to the transmission means [e.g., the socket part 8651] and the part of the transmission means connected to the dial [e.g., the ball part 8421] For example, the ball joint structure shown in FIG. 130(a)] is connected,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Due to the ball joint structure, the load applied to the dial by the player is less likely to be transmitted to the transmission means, and as a result, the load is less likely to be transmitted to the volume, thereby reducing damage to the volume. can.

A portion of the transmission means connected to the dial is formed of a curved surface (spherical surface), and a portion of the dial connected to the transmission means is formed of a curved surface (spherical surface) corresponding to the curved surface. may be

again,
"The handle unit has a fixedly arranged handle base [e.g., handle base 82],
The dial is rotatable on the front side of the handle base, and has a gap [for example, a circumferential gap S1 and a longitudinal gap S2 shown in FIG. 131(a)] between itself and the handle base. is a
The dial can tilt with respect to the transmission means by the amount of the gap when a load is applied by the player [for example, the dial 86 shown in FIG. 131(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, when a load is applied to the dial, the dial can release the load to the handle base side through the gap. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the handle base collides with the dial and both are damaged. Thus, according to this game machine, when a load is applied in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the dial, the load of the dial is released to the handle base side, thereby reducing damage to the handle unit. can.

again,
"The dial has ribs protruding toward the handle base at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction,
The gap is secured between the projecting tip of the rib and the handle base.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

When the load of the dial is relieved to the handle base side, the worn portion of the dial can be suppressed to the projecting tip portion of the rib.

Next, the glass frame unit will be explained. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 85, the transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening of the front frame door 106, but a glass frame unit can be used instead of the transparent plate member 118. . This glass frame unit is arranged in front of the game board 200 (see FIG. 87).

FIG. 132(a) is a view (front view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 132(b) is a view (rear view) of the glass frame unit viewed from the rear side. be.

The glass frame unit GU shown in FIG. 131 has a front transparent plate member FG, a rear transparent plate member BG, and a frame member FR. The front transparent plate member FG is a plate member made of glass or resin and whose entire surface is transparent. The rear transparent plate member BG is also a plate member made of glass or resin whose entire surface is transparent. The frame member FR has a pair of leg portions FR1 provided at the lower edge, three fixing portions FR2 fixed to the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 87), and the entire circumference of the front transparent plate member FG. It has a front frame portion FRF, a projecting portion FRL projecting leftward when viewed from the front side (front view), and a rear frame portion FRB matching the entire circumference of the rear transparent plate member BG. The front transparent plate member FG is fitted inside the front frame portion FRF, and the rear transparent plate member BG is fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. The glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106 from the back side with the front frame door 106 opened. The attachment of the glass frame unit GU to the front frame door 106 will be described later.

FIG. 133(a) is a view (front view) of the front side transparent plate member FG as seen from the front side (player side), and FIG. is a view (front view) seen from the front side (player's side) like the front side transparent plate member FG.

As shown in FIG. 133, the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG have different outer peripheral shapes. Specifically, the front side transparent plate member FG and the rear side transparent plate member BG have the same right half shape when viewed from the front side (front view), but different left half shapes. That is, the rear transparent plate member BG has a curved shape (arc shape) on the entire left side, whereas the front transparent plate member FG has a substantially straight left end portion (strictly speaking, a gently curved shape). ). The shape of this cutout portion is the same as the shape of the projecting portion FRL of the frame member FR. As described above, the rear transparent plate member BG is larger than the front transparent plate member FG, and the difference in shape between them is the difference in shape at the left end.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a game board viewed through the glass frame unit GU.

The glass frame unit GU shown in FIG. 134 is attached to the front frame door 106 (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 134, the entire game area 124 of the game board 200 is visible through the glass frame unit GU. The game area 124 is located on the back side of the front transparent plate member FG and further on the back side of the rear transparent plate member BG, and is located in the area where the rear transparent plate member BG and the front transparent plate member FG overlap. Located on the far side. The game area 124 referred to here is an area that does not include the guide area 201a between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204, and a game ball that exceeds the guide area 201a can roll. In other words, it refers to a region in which a game ball shot by the shooting device 110 (see FIG. 85) can pass over the return ball prevention piece 203 and flow down. The front transparent plate member FG allows the entire game area 124 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front, and the rear transparent plate member BG allows the entire game area 124 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

The rear transparent plate member BG has an outer shape corresponding to the shape of the outer rail 202, and the area inside the outer rail 202 is visible. On the other hand, the front transparent plate member FG has a shape in which the left end portion is notched as described above, and this notched portion corresponds to a portion that overlaps a part of the guide region 201a from the front side. Therefore, the rear transparent plate member BG overlaps the entire guide area 201a from the front side, and overlaps the game ball that is shot by the shooting device 110 and rolls in the guide area 201a along the outer rail 202 from the front side. However, the front side transparent plate member FG overlaps only a part of the guide area 201a from the front side, and the game ball that is shot by the shooting device 110 and rolls in the guide area 201a along the outer rail 202 is not supported. It may not overlap from the front side. As described above, the rear transparent plate member BG overlaps the guide region 201a from the front side more than the front transparent plate member FG.

A portion of the rear transparent plate member BG that does not have the front transparent plate member FG on the front side (hereinafter, this portion will be referred to as a wrap-free left end portion BGL) is covered with a projecting portion FRL of the frame member FR. In order to make the behavior of the game ball visible in the entire area of the guide area 201a, the projecting portion FRL should be made transparent, and members such as effect means should not be arranged in front of the wrap-free left end portion BGL. should be The ledge FRL in FIG. 134 is shown as transparent. On the other hand, if priority is given to the degree of freedom in arranging members such as production means, it is not necessary to make the projecting portion FRL transparent. Since there is no front side transparent plate member FG in front of the wrap-free left end portion BGL of the rear side transparent plate member BG, it is possible to provide a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side of the wrap-free left end portion BGL, A display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device can be provided, or a movable effect means can be provided.

Next, a method for attaching the glass frame unit GU to the front frame door 106 will be described.

First, the front frame door 106 is opened, and the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106 from the back side of the front frame door 106 . At this time, the pair of leg portions FR1 are fitted to the lower edge of the front frame door 106 while the glass frame unit GU is tilted slightly forward. Next, the glass frame unit GU, which had been tilted slightly, is pushed back.

FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view showing the structure around the wrap-free left end portion BGL of the rear transparent plate member BG. This cross-sectional view is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the glass frame unit GU, and the front side of the paper faces the upper side. 135, the lower side of the drawing is the front side, the upper side is the rear side, and the up-down direction in the drawing is the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 135, the left side of the drawing is the outside and the right side is the inside. The left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100 matches the left-right direction in the figure.

In FIG. 135, the front transparent plate member FG is indicated by hatching with oblique lines slanting to the lower right, and the rear transparent plate member BG is indicated by hatching with oblique lines slanting to the lower left. Also, the frame member FR is indicated by cross hatching. Furthermore, in front of the non-wrap left end portion BGL, a light emitting means is arranged, and in FIG. ing. This U-shaped cross-sectional member LP is a member fixed to the front frame door 106 before the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106 .

FIG. 135 shows a state in which the front transparent plate member FG is fitted inside the front frame portion FRF and a state in which the rear transparent plate member BG is fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. The frame member FR includes a front support portion FRS1 that supports the front transparent plate member FG fitted inside the front frame portion FRF from the rear side, and a rear transparent plate member BG fitted inside the rear frame portion FRB. are provided, respectively, for supporting from the front side. The front transparent plate member FG is positioned by the front frame portion FRF and the front support portion FRS1, and the rear frame portion FRB is positioned by the rear frame portion FRB and the rear support portion FRS2.

When the glass frame unit GU is attached to the front frame door 106, pushing in the glass frame unit GU, which has been slightly laid down, to its original position means pushing the glass frame unit GU in the direction of the arrow in FIG. At this time, the glass frame unit GU is guided by the member LP having a U-shaped cross section and is housed in a predetermined position of the front side frame door 106 . That is, first, of the frame member FR, the side portion FR3 extending in the longitudinal direction between the front side support portion FRS1 and the rear side support FRS2 comes into contact with the outer wall LPIo of the inner portion LPI of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section. and is guided to this outer wall LPIo. Next, the rear frame portion FRB of the frame member FR comes into contact with the inner wall LPOi of the outer portion LPO of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section and is guided by this inner wall LPOi. By guiding the frame member FR in two stages in this way, the positioning of the glass frame unit GU in the left-right direction is performed. That is, the frame member FR is used for lateral positioning of the glass frame unit GU. Further, the projecting portion FRL of the frame member FR abuts the rear end LPIb of the inner portion LPI of the member LP having a U-shaped cross section, thereby positioning the glass frame unit GU in the front-rear direction. That is, the frame member FR is also used for positioning the glass frame unit GU in the front-rear direction.

After the glass frame unit GU is positioned in this manner, the glass frame unit GU is fixed to the front frame door 106 by passing bolts (not shown) through the bolt holes FR21 of the three fixing portions FR2 shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the distance GS between the front transparent plate member FG and the rear transparent plate member BG is greater than the sum of the thickness FGW of the front transparent plate member FG and the thickness BGW of the rear transparent plate member BG. is also wide. Even if an attempt is made to cheat by manipulating a game ball using a magnet, the thickness of the glass frame unit GU is increased by this configuration, and the magnetic force of the magnet can be made difficult to reach the game ball, thereby preventing cheating. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, since there is no front side transparent plate member FG in front of the wrap-free left end portion BGL of the rear side transparent plate member BG, the space in front of the wrap-free left end portion BGL is used as an installation space for the rendering means. In the case of use, the effect means can be thickened as much as the interval GS is wide. In particular, the end of the front frame door 106 on the side of the hinge part 112 (see FIG. 85) needs to avoid interference with the island equipment when the front frame door 106 is opened, and it is necessary to suppress the protrusion to the front side. However, by using the space on the front side of the non-wrapped left end portion BGL as an installation space for the presentation means, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the presentation means to the front side.

Note that the rear transparent plate member BG may be provided with an opening (hole). Since the opening is provided in the rear transparent plate member BG, the shape of the front transparent plate member FG and the shape of the rear transparent plate member BG are different. In addition, a movable effect means is arranged on the rear side (deep side) of the rear transparent plate member BG, and part or all of the movable effect means passes through the opening and is forward of the rear transparent plate member BG. It may be movable. By doing so, it is possible to produce a performance that makes extensive use of the front-back direction. Further, the position where part or all of the movable effect means has moved forward may be a position behind the front transparent plate member FG. That is, the movable rendering means may be movable between the rear transparent plate member BG and the front transparent plate member FG. Further, the front side transparent plate member FG and the rear side transparent plate member BG are in a parallel or substantially parallel positional relationship, but they may be in a non-parallel positional relationship. For example, the upper side of the front transparent plate member FG may be inclined forward or backward with respect to the vertical or substantially vertical rear transparent plate member BG. Alternatively, on the contrary, the upper side of the rear transparent plate member BG may be inclined forward or backward with respect to the front transparent plate member FG which is vertical or substantially vertical. By doing so, the front-back shape of the glass frame unit GU itself is emphasized.

According to the above description,
"A game board [for example, a game board 200] having a game area [for example, a game area 124 that does not include the guide area 201a but exceeds the guide area 201a and in which game balls can roll];
A glass frame unit [for example, glass] disposed in front of the game board and having a first transparent member [for example, front transparent plate member FG] and a second transparent member [for example, rear transparent plate member BG] frame unit GU],
A game machine comprising
The first transparent member is located forward of the second transparent member,
The first transparent member allows the game area to be visually recognized when viewed from the front,
The second transparent member is capable of visually recognizing the game area when viewed from the front,
The shape of the first transparent member and the shape of the second transparent member are at least partially different [for example, the shape of the left end part].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Since the shape of the first transparent member and the shape of the second transparent member are at least partially different, there is a portion where the first transparent member and the second transparent member do not overlap in the front-rear direction. , other game members can be arranged at this location, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine is improved.

again,
"A space [for example, a space GS shown in FIG. 135] is provided between the first transparent member and the second transparent member,
The distance is greater than the sum of the thickness of the first transparent member [e.g., the thickness FGW shown in FIG. 135] and the thickness of the second transparent member [e.g., the thickness BGW shown in FIG. 135].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if an attempt is made to cheat by manipulating a game ball using a magnet, the thickness of the glass frame unit makes it difficult for the magnetic force of the magnet to reach the game ball, thereby preventing cheating.

again,
``having a pair of firing rails [e.g., outer rail 202 and inner rail 204];
The pair of launch rails guides the launched game ball toward the game area between the rails of the pair of launch rails [for example, the guide area 201a],
The area where the second transparent member overlaps from the front side between the rails is wider than the first transparent member,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A space between the rails on the front side of the second transparent member is vacant, and the degree of freedom in designing this space is improved.

The first transparent member may not overlap between the rails from the front side, and the second transparent member may overlap between the rails from the front side.

again,
``Producing means capable of executing production [for example, light emitting means having a U-shaped cross-sectional member LP],
The rendering means does not overlap the first transparent member from the front side,
At least part of the rendering means [for example, a member LP having a U-shaped cross section] overlaps a part of the second transparent member from the front side.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the rendering means may have a wider overlapping area from the front side of the second transparent member than that of the first transparent member.

According to this game machine, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the effect means. That is, the rendering means is located in front of the second transparent member and in a location where the first transparent member does not exist. Even if it is a protruding production means, the degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased.

The effect may be a light emitting effect, a display effect, or a movable effect.

again,
``Equipped with a game door [for example, a front frame door 106] to which the glass frame unit is attached,
A part of the outer peripheral edge of the first transparent member [for example, the right half of the outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front] and a part of the outer peripheral edge of the second transparent member [for example, the outer peripheral shape The right half of the front view] has the same shape,
Another part of the outer peripheral edge of the first transparent member (hereinafter referred to as "first part") [for example, the left end part of the outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front] and the second transparent member Another part of the outer peripheral edge of the member (hereinafter referred to as "second part") [for example, the unwrapped left end part BGL] has a different shape,
In the glass frame unit, a frame portion [for example, the side portion FR3 and the rear side frame portion FRB of the frame member FR] disposed between the first portion and the second portion is the glass frame unit. It is used for positioning in the left and right direction when attaching to the game door,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game table, the glass frame unit can be easily attached to the game door.

The first portion may have a straight or substantially straight shape, and the second portion may have a curved shape.

again,
``In the glass frame unit, the frame part [for example, the overhang part FRL of the frame member FR] is also used for positioning in the front-rear direction when the glass frame unit is attached to the game door.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

This game table also makes it easier to attach the glass frame unit to the game door.

The second transparent member may have an opening. Furthermore, a rendering means is provided behind the second transparent member, and the front end of the rendering means moves from a position behind the second transparent member through the opening to the second transparent member. may also be movable to a forward position. Also, the first transparent member and the second transparent member may be non-parallel.

FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of the front frame door 106 and the ball storage tray door 108 viewed from the back side. In FIG. 136, the front side of the paper surface is the rear side, and the back side of the paper surface is the front side.

The glass frame unit GU described above is fixed to the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. Also, a part of the effect button 136 is shown on the front side of the door 108 with ball storage tray located below the front frame door 106 (on the back side of the paper surface in the figure). In addition, the game door may be formed by integrating the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with the ball storage tray.

A ball storage tray 126 is shown above the ball storage tray door 108 shown in FIG. 136. Since this ball storage tray 126 is provided on the front side, it is indicated by a dotted line. Also, although the sphere storage dish 126 is shown on the right side, this is because it is viewed from the back side, and is located on the left side when viewed from the front. This ball storage plate 126 corresponds to a so-called upper plate. Also shown in FIG. 136 is the bottom plate 128, which was not shown in FIG. Since this lower plate 128 is also provided on the front side, it is indicated by a dotted line. The bottom plate 128 is also shown on the right side, but is also viewed from the back and is located on the left side when viewed from the front.

The ball storage tray 126 is connected to a ball guide passage PAS for guiding game balls to the launching device 110 (see FIG. 85). FIG. 136 shows a portion of the ball guide passage PAS provided at the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and also shows how the game ball B flows down. However, in reality, it is covered with the members forming the ball guide passage PAS, and the inside of the ball guide passage PAS cannot be visually recognized except for a certain portion described later. The ball guide passage PAS is also provided in the main body 104 (see FIG. 85) to which the launcher 110 is attached. That is, the portion of the ball guide passage PAS on the ball storage tray 126 side is provided on the ball storage tray door 108, and the portion on the firing device 110 side is provided on the main body side 104, and the ball storage tray door is provided. When 108 is closed with respect to main body 104, the part on the side of ball storage tray 126 and the part on the side of launcher 110 are connected to form one ball guide passage PAS. As shown in FIG. 136, a folded portion PAS1 is provided in the portion of the ball guide passage PAS provided in the door 108 with the ball storage tray. A game ball flowing down from the ball storage tray 126 obliquely downward to the left changes its flowing direction to obliquely downward right at the turning part PAS1. After that, it reaches the branch port PAS2. A ball extraction passage BRC branches from the ball guide passage PAS at the branch port PAS2, and the ball extraction passage BRC is connected to the lower plate 128. - 特許庁

FIG. 137 is a side view schematically showing the ball guide passage PAS and the ball extraction passage BRC. In this FIG. 137, the right side of the figure is the front side and the left side is the rear side.

The branch port PAS2 (see FIG. 137(c)) is provided with a movable lid PAS3 (see FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b)) for opening and closing the branch port PAS2. When the ball eject button 130 shown in FIG. 85 is pressed, the movable lid PAS3 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 are discharged to the lower tray 128. FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b) show the movable lid PAS3 in a closed state, and the branch port PAS2 is closed by the movable lid PAS3. Also, the movable lid PAS3 in the closed state constitutes a part of the bottom wall of the ball guide passage PAS. Furthermore, FIG. 137(a) also shows a ball stopper BSP. This ball stop piece BSP is a member that appears in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS. In both FIG. 137 and previous FIG. 136, the ball stopper BSP is shown in gray. Also shown in gray in FIG. 136 is the actuating arm BSA leading to the ball-stopping piece BSP. The end of the operating arm BSA is provided with a protrusion BSA1 that engages with a push-in portion (not shown) provided on the body portion 104 . The actuating arm BSA shown in FIG. 136 is biased rightward by a spring (not shown). When the operating arm BSA is urged rightward, the ball stopper BSP is positioned in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS, and the game ball is blocked by the ball stopper BSP. Both FIG. 136 and FIG. 137(a) show a state in which the ball stopper BSP is positioned in the middle of the ball guide passage PAS, and the game ball B is placed on the movable lid PAS3 by the ball stopper BSP. dammed up. FIG. 137(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the door 108 with ball storage tray is opened. A game ball cannot pass through the ball guide passage PAS when the door 108 with a ball storage tray is open.

When the ball storage plate door 108 is closed, the ball stopper BSP is pushed by the pushing portion of the main body 104 to push the projecting portion BSA1 of the operating arm BSA against the rightward bias of a spring (not shown). It moves to the left (see the arrow shown in FIG. 136) and moves to a position where the ball stopper BSP is out of the ball guide passage PAS. FIGS. 137(b) and 137(c) show how the ball stop piece BSP has moved to a position out of the ball guide passage PAS. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the door 108 with ball storage tray is closed; FIG. The game ball B shown in FIG. 137(b) flows down on the closed movable lid PAS3 and heads toward the shooting device 110 along the ball guide passage PAS. In this way, the ball guide passage PAS allows game balls to pass through when the door 108 with ball storage tray is closed. On the other hand, in FIG. 137(c), when the ball ejection button 130 is pressed, the movable lid PAS3 is opened, and the game ball B passes through the branch port PAS2 from the middle of the ball guide passage PAS to eject the ball. Go through the passage BRC and head to the lower tray 128 .

Next, the maintenance door will be described. Although the maintenance door is omitted in FIG. 136, FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram of the door 108 with a ball storage tray showing the maintenance door. This FIG. 138(a) is also a view of the door 108 with ball storage tray as seen from the back side, the front side of the paper surface is the rear side, and the back side of the paper surface is the front side.

A maintenance hatch 1081 is provided on the rear surface 108a of the door 108 with a ball storage tray at a portion including the folded portion PAS1 of the ball guide passage PAS. The maintenance door MD has a window portion MD1, a rotating shaft MD2, and a locking mechanism MD3, and the window portion MD1 is rotatable about the rotating shaft MD2. The window MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 so that it can be opened and closed. When the window portion MD1 is closed (when the maintenance hatch 1081 is blocked), the window portion MD1 becomes a member that forms a portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the folded portion PAS1. The rotating shaft MD2 is arranged between upper and lower bearing portions 1082 provided on the rear surface 108a of the door 108 with ball storage tray. That is, the rotating shaft MD2 extends vertically on the right side of the maintenance hatch 1081 .

In FIG. 138(a), parts other than those that are actually visible are indicated by dotted lines, and the maintenance door MD is indicated by solid lines. The window MD1 is wholly transparent. Transparency may be transparent or translucent (same in this specification). A portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the folded portion PAS1 can be visually recognized from the window portion MD1. It should be noted that the window part MD1 may be partially transparent instead of the whole. Alternatively, the window portion MD1 may be made impermeable, and a slit or notch may be provided in the window portion MD1 so that the portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the folded portion PAS1 can be visually recognized through the slit or notch. good.

The locking mechanism MD3 is provided on the opposite side (left side) to the side on which the rotating shaft MD2 is provided, and is a mechanism for holding the window portion MD1 in a closed state. The locking mechanism MD3 is composed of a fitting portion MD31 and a spring portion MD32 provided between the fitting portion MD31 and the window portion MD1. The fitting portion MD31 shown in FIG. 138(a) is fitted to the fitted portion 1083 provided on the rear surface 108a of the door 108 with the ball storage tray, and the window portion MD1 is held closed. In this locking mechanism MD3, the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitted portion 1083 can be disengaged by one-finger operation (one-touch operation).

FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing a flow of removing the fitting portion MD31 fitted to the fitted portion 1083 by operating with one finger. This FIG. 138 is a view of the fitting portion MD31 viewed from directly above, the lower side of the drawing being the rear side (back side) and the upper side being the front side.

In the drawing shown at the left end, the fitting portion MD31 is fitted to the fitted portion 1083. FIG. In this state, the index finger HF is placed on the left end piece MD311 of the fitting portion MD31.

Next, while pushing the left end piece MD311 with the index finger HF, pull it toward you. Then, as shown in the middle figure, the spring portion MD32 bends, the left end piece MD311 tilts, and the fitting to the fitted portion 1083 begins to come off.

If the left end piece 311 is continued to be pulled forward with the forefinger HF, the window portion MD1 begins to rotate around the rotation axis MD2, and the fitting portion MD31 is completely fitted as shown in the right end drawing. It is possible to open the window part MD1.

Thus, if the window MD1 can be opened with one finger, the window MD1 can be opened even when a cleaning tool such as a rag or a cotton swab and a flashlight are held in both hands, thereby improving maintainability.

FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the window MD1 is opened by 90 degrees or more.

In FIG. 139, the rotating shaft MD2 is shown, but the window MD1 opened by 90 degrees or more and the locking mechanism MD3 are omitted. Although not shown, when the window portion MD1 is opened (when the maintenance hatch 1081 is released), the window portion MD1 does not form a portion of the ball guide passage PAS including the turn-around portion PAS1.

By opening the window portion MD1, it is possible to insert a finger through the maintenance hatch 1081 and perform maintenance on the folded portion PAS1 and its peripheral portion in the ball guide passage PAS. For example, it is possible to easily wipe off the ball guide passage PAS and remove foreign matter such as dust. Since the folded portion PAS1 is a portion where dirt tends to accumulate, it is preferable that the cleaning work can be easily performed.

Also, in FIG. 139, the game ball B blocked by the ball stopping piece BSP (not shown) stays up to the turn-back portion PAS1. The ball guide passage PAS is provided with a first rib PAS4 and a second rib PAS5 that make it difficult for the game balls B staying from the maintenance hatch 1081 to spill when the window MD1 is open. That is, the first rib PAS4 covers a part of the passage path of the game ball of the folded portion PAS1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface in the figure), extends in the vertical direction, and protrudes upward toward the passage path side. It has a protrusion. The second rib PAS5 is provided along the ball guide passage PAS to cover the lower part of the passage of the game ball going diagonally downward to the right from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface in the figure). When opening the window MD1, the ball eject button 130 shown in FIG. 85 can be pressed to eject the game balls B staying in the ball guide passage PAS to the lower tray 128. Even if a game clerk who does not have a game ball B accidentally opens the window part MD1 without noticing the staying of the game ball B, the game ball B is less likely to spill from the maintenance hatch 1081, and maintainability is improved.

Further, the maintenance hatch 1081 closed by the window MD1 is located upstream of the movable lid PAS3 that opens and closes the branch port PAS2, and blocks the game balls when the door 108 with the ball storage tray is open. It is positioned upstream of the ball stopper BSP. Even when the window part MD1 is closed, the game ball B staying in the ball guide passage PAS can be confirmed, and if necessary, the game ball B staying in the ball guide passage PAS can be removed by pressing the ball ejection button 130. By pressing , the movable lid PAS3 can be moved and ejected from the ball extraction passage BRC.

Although the window part MD1 can be freely opened and closed with respect to the maintenance hatch 1081, the window part MD1 may be freely attached and detached with respect to the maintenance hatch 1081. FIG.

Further, the window part MD1 is configured to open sideways, but it may be opened to the left or to the right. Furthermore, the window MD1 may be configured to open vertically (open upward or open downward). In particular, by providing the rotating shaft MD2 extending horizontally above the maintenance hatch 1081 and opening upward, the window MD1 closes the maintenance hatch 1081 by its own weight. If the ball storage tray door 108 is closed without closing the window MD1, the maintenance door MD may be caught between the ball storage tray door 108 and the main body 104 and damaged. By opening the window portion MD1 upward, when the door 108 with the ball storage dish is completely closed, the fitting portion MD31 is pushed by the body portion 104 and the fitting portion MD31 is fitted to the fitting portion 1083. Mate. In addition, in the case of upward opening, when the window MD1 rotates upward to a certain angle (for example, 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less), the opened window MD1 is lightly locked and the open state is maintained. It may be configured to be The term "slightly locked" as used herein refers to the extent to which locking is released when the door 108 with ball storage tray is moved to close it. This structure may be employed in a side-opening configuration.

Moreover, although the window MD1 is a simple plate member, it may be a structure integrated with the ball feeding device. The ball feeding device referred to here feeds the falling game balls one by one to the shooting standby position of the shooting device 110 by operating a ball feeding member. More specifically, a rectifying path for rectifying the falling game balls and a ball feeding member that operates once in response to one shooting operation of the shooting device 110 are provided in the case. The structure in which the case is fixed to the window MD1 is configured such that the rectifying path is connected to the ball guide passage PAS in the closed state (when the maintenance hatch 1081 is closed).

Further, the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided on the door 108 with the ball storage tray, and the window MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 so as to be able to open and close. may be Even in this mode, the window portion MD1 covers the maintenance hatch 1081 provided in the body portion 104 so as to be openable and closable, and a part of the ball guide passage PAS provided in the body portion 104 is replaced by the window portion. Visible from MD1. Further, the maintenance hatch 1081 provided in the main body 104 may be covered with a structure in which the window MD1 and the ball feeding device are integrated as described above so as to be openable and closable.

According to the above description,
"A ball tray capable of storing game balls [for example, a ball storage tray 126],
A launching means capable of shooting game balls [eg, a launching device 110];
A game machine comprising a ball passage [e.g., ball guide passage PAS] leading from the ball tray to the shooting means,
A structure [e.g., window MD1] that can change from one state to the other of a first state [e.g., closed state] and a second state [e.g., open state],
The structure constitutes a part of the ball passage [for example, a part including the folded part PAS1 (the part where the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided)] in the first state,
The structure does not constitute the certain portion in the second state,
The structure allows a part of the sphere passage to be visible in the first state [for example, the structure as a whole is transparent].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the ball passage is partially visible by the structure in the first state. For example, the structure is provided with a notch or a through hole, and the ball passage is partially visible through the notch or the through hole in the structure in the first state. can be anything.

According to this game machine, even if the structure is in the first state, it is possible to check the presence or absence of dirt accumulated in the ball passage, and maintainability is excellent.

The shooting means may shoot the game ball supplied through the ball passage toward the game area.

again,
"The structure can be changed from the first state to the second state by operating with one finger [for example, FIG. 138(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The structure can be opened even when a cleaning tool such as a rag or a cotton swab and a flashlight are held in both hands, and maintainability is further improved.

again,
"A game door that can be opened and closed provided with the ball tray [for example, a door with a ball storage tray 108],
a ball stop means [for example, a ball stop piece BSP];
with
The ball passage [for example, the ball guide passage PAS] can pass the game ball when the game door is closed [for example, FIG. 137(b)],
The ball stopping means stops the game ball at a position in the middle of the ball passage when the game door is open [for example, FIG. 137(a)],
The certain part is a part on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball from the intermediate position,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to check the game balls staying in the ball passage before cleaning the structure in the second state.

again,
"A ball extraction passage [for example, a ball removal passage BRC] branched from a branch opening [for example, a branch opening PAS2] provided in the middle of the ball passage,
movable means [e.g. movable lid PAS3];
with
The movable means is movable to open and close the branch port,
The certain part is a part on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball from the branch opening,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even when the structure is in the first state, it is possible to confirm the game balls staying in the ball passage, and if necessary, to remove the game balls staying in the ball passage. , the movable means can be moved to discharge the ball from the ball extraction passage.

Regarding the positional relationship between the intermediate position and the branch opening, the intermediate position may be upstream in the passing direction of the game ball, and the branch opening may be upstream in the passing direction of the game ball. good.

again,
``The ball passage [eg, ball guide passage PAS] is positioned at the certain site [ For example, a rib [for example, the first rib PAS4, the second rib PAS5] is formed to prevent game balls from falling out from the place where the maintenance hatch 1081 is provided].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if a game clerk unfamiliar with cleaning work erroneously changes the structure to the second state without noticing the stagnation of the game balls, the game balls are unlikely to spill out from the certain part, and maintainability is ensured. improves.

again,
"The ball passage is provided with a folded portion [for example, folded part PAS1],
the certain portion is a portion of the ball passage that includes the folded portion;
The structure [e.g., window MD1] makes the folded portion visible in the first state [e.g., closed state].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The folded portion is a location where dirt tends to accumulate, and even when the structure is in the first state, the folded portion can be visually recognized, thereby improving maintainability.

again,
"At least part of the structure [for example, the window part MD1] has transparency.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the structure is in the first state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not there is dirt behind the structure (dirt on a part of the ball passage).

The structure may be wholly permeable, or may be partially permeable. If the structure as a whole has transparency, the state of the certain portion can be easily confirmed. Moreover, having said transparency may be transparent or translucent.

Next, an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described.

FIG. 140 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 140, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means 101h to the game area 102h can be ejected from the game area 102h and supplied to the ejection means 101h again. In addition, a display means 103h for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 102h on the front surface of the game table. There is no ball storage tray 126 that the player can touch, as shown at 85 . The ball guide passage PAS described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139 can be applied to a passage for sending circulating game balls to the launcher.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. may be carried out on credit.

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modifications, and various examples described above, the constituent element may be used in other embodiments, examples, and modifications. or various examples. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it is established as a unified technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Main body 106 Front frame door 108 Door with ball storage tray 110 Launcher 118 Transparent plate member 124 Game area 126 Ball storage tray 126 Ball storage tray 130 Ball ejection button 134 Ball launch handle 136 Production button 140 Rental operation button 152 payout device 190 operation key unit 191 upper button 192 lower button 200 game board 201 game board 206 effect lamp 207 sub liquid crystal display device 208 decorative design display device 210 normal design display device 212 first special design display device 214 second special design Display device 226, 227 General winning opening 226U General winning opening ball passage unit 226Ur Internal ball passage IN Entrance 226A First general winning opening 226B Second general winning opening 228 Normal figure starting opening 23 Attacker unit 230 First special figure starting opening 232 2nd special figure starting opening 234 1st variable winning opening, variable winning opening 2341 Door member 235 2nd variable winning opening 2351 Door member RR Rolling passage FR Falling passage JJ Ball bouncing restraining ridge portion UJ2 Lower extension portion 238, 239 Game nail 240, 241, 242, 243, 244 Out port 23 Starting chucker BU Ball passage unit 2451 Back ball passage for out port 2261 Back ball passage JR for general winning entrance Merging back ball passage LED, LED', SLED, FLED Light-emitting diode 25′ Attacker unit 26Z Electric distribution zone 26Z1 Zone ball path 26r1 Deceleration rib 26r3 Ball trajectory changing rib 261 First ball direction changing part 263 Third ball direction changing part 2650 Zone entrance ball delaying part 2651 First upstream ball delaying part 2652 1 downstream ball delay part 2681 first ball passage 28 rotating body units 27U, 28U effect movable body units 27U4, 28U4 light emitting substrates 27U1, 28U1 three-dimensional film decoration bodies 27U1S, 28U1S three-dimensional parts 27U1F, 28U1F peripheral parts 27U2, 28U2 double-sided tape 27U3 conductor Light plate 28U5 Mounting base member HU Handle unit 82 Handle base 842 Transmission gear 8421 Ball portion 843 Volume gear 86 Dial 8651 Socket portion GU Glass frame unit FG Front side transparent plate member FGW Thickness BG Rear side transparent plate member BGW Thickness BGL Left end portion GS without wrap Spacing FR Frame member FRL Protruding portion LP Member PAS having U-shaped cross section Ball guide passage PAS1 Folded portion PAS2 Branch port PAS3 Movable lid BSP Ball stopper BRC Ball extraction passage MD Maintenance door MD1 Window MD2 Rotating shaft MD3 Locking mechanism 1081 Maintenance hatch 300 Main controller 304 CPU
306 ROMs
308 RAM
400 first sub-controller 404 CPU
406 ROMs
408 RAM
500 Second sub-controller 504 CPU
506 ROMs
508 memory 7 first effect movable body 71 light emitting portion 8 second effect movable body 81 upper arm portion 82 forearm portion 821 first finger (thumb)
822 second finger (index finger)
823 third finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 fifth finger (little finger)
h11, h12 hold icon h0 variable icon LT1-LT5 reach title ZT zone title MC music selection display MD music selection determination display LH1 left-handed first display LH2 left-handed second display RH1 right-handed first display RH2 right-handed second display

Claims (3)

a light-emitting substrate on which light-emitting elements are mounted;
a decoration having a three-dimensional shape;
A game machine comprising
The decorative body has a transparent part (hereinafter referred to as "first part") that transmits light from the light emitting element,
The decorative body has a second portion different from the first portion,
The second portion is a portion surrounding the first portion,
The decorative body is affixed to a member arranged on the rear side of the first portion without blocking light from the light emitting element ,
The member is arranged on the rear side of the second portion,
The member is an optical member,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
A sticking means arranged on the back surface of the second part ,
The decorative body is affixed to the member by the affixing means ,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 2 ,
The first portion is a portion having a portion protruding forward,
a space exists between the first portion and the member;
A playground characterized by:

Images